Pmp ptp solutions_userguideissue1

Motorola Point-to-Multipoint
(PMP) Solutions
User Guide
supporting Release 9.4.2
PMP 100, PMP 400
PTP 100, PTP 200

Issue 1
May 2010

includes
Planning Guide
Installation and Configuration Guide
Operations Guide
Reference

Notices
See the following information:

◦ important regulatory and legal notices in Section 36 on Page 499.
◦ personal safety guidelines in Section 15 on Page 173.

Trademarks, Product Names, and Service Names
MOTOROLA, the stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are
trademarks of Motorola, Inc.® Reg. U.S. Pat & Tm. Office. Canopy is a registered
trademark and MOTOwi4 is a trademark of Motorola, Inc. All other product or service
names are the property of their respective owners.

Adobe Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, and Windows
XP is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

© 2010 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved.

http://www.motorola.com/Business/US-
EN/Business+Solutions/Industry+Solutions/Wireless+Operators/Wireless+Broadband+So
lutions/wi4+Fixed_US-EN

TABLE OF SECTIONS

Guide To This User Guide 31

Overview of PMP Solutions 43

Planning Guide 127
d
Installation and Configuration Guide 171

Operations Guide 371

Reference Information 495

Glossary 515

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GUIDE TO THIS USER GUIDE......................................................................................31
31
1 New in This Issue.................................................................................................... 33
1.1 New Products and Features Described in This Guide ................................... 33
1.2 Portfolio of Wireless Broadband Solutions ..................................................... 33
1.3 Products Covered by This User Guide........................................................... 33
1.4 Products Not Covered by This User Guide .................................................... 34
1.5 Software Compatibility Described in This User Guide.................................... 34

2 Using This User Guide ........................................................................................... 35
2.1 Finding the Information You Need.................................................................. 35
2.1.1 Becoming Familiar with This User Guide ...................................................... 35
2.1.2 Searching This User Guide ........................................................................... 37
2.1.3 Finding Parameter and Field Definitions for Module Web Pages ................. 37
2.2 Interpreting Typeface and Other Conventions ............................................... 40
2.3 Getting Additional Help................................................................................... 41
2.4 Sending Feedback ......................................................................................... 41

OVERVIEW OF PMP SOLUTIONS ..........................................................................43
OVERVIEW OF PMP SOLUTIONS 43
3 Advancing from Research to Implementation ..................................................... 45

4 Realizing a Wireless Ethernet Bridge Network .................................................... 47

5 Exploring the Scope of Solutions ......................................................................... 49
5.1 Product Names............................................................................................... 49
5.2 Network Components..................................................................................... 50
5.2.1 Access Point Module Other Than 900-Mhz .................................................. 50
5.2.2 Access Point Cluster ..................................................................................... 50
5.2.3 Subscriber Module Other Than 900-MHz ..................................................... 51
5.2.4 900-MHz AP and SM..................................................................................... 52
5.2.5 PTP Series 100 Bridges ................................................................................ 53
5.2.6 PTP 200 Series Bridges ................................................................................ 53

5.2.11 Radio Adjustable Power Capabilities ............................................................ 56
5.2.12 Cluster Management Module-2 (Part 1008CK-2).......................................... 56
5.2.13 Cluster Management Module micro (Part 1070CK) ...................................... 56
5.2.14 CMM4 (Part 1090CK).................................................................................... 58
5.2.15 Optional Ethernet Switch in CMM4 ............................................................... 59
5.2.16 GPS Antenna (Part GPSANTPNM03D)........................................................ 60
5.2.17 Surge Suppressor (Part 600SS).................................................................... 60
5.2.18 Accessory Components ................................................................................ 60
5.3 Frequency Band Ranges................................................................................ 66
5.4 Product Comparisons..................................................................................... 67
5.4.1 Product Applications...................................................................................... 67
5.4.2 Link Performance and Encryption Comparisons........................................... 67
5.4.3 Cluster Management Product Comparison ................................................... 70
5.5 Antennas for 900-MHz Connectorized Modules............................................. 71
5.6 Adjunctive Software Products ........................................................................ 73
5.7 Prizm .............................................................................................................. 74
5.7.1 Network Definition and Element Discovery ................................................... 74
5.7.2 Monitoring and Fault Management ............................................................... 75
5.7.3 Element Management ................................................................................... 75
5.7.4 BAM Subsystem in Prizm.............................................................................. 76
5.7.5 Northbound Interface..................................................................................... 76
5.8 License Management ..................................................................................... 77
5.9 Specifications and Limitations ........................................................................ 78
5.9.1 Radios ........................................................................................................... 78
5.9.2 Cluster Management Products...................................................................... 78
5.9.3 600SS Surge Suppressor.............................................................................. 78

6 Differentiating Among Components ..................................................................... 79
6.1 Interpreting Model Number............................................................................. 79
6.2 Sorted Model Numbers .................................................................................. 81
6.3 Interpreting Electronic Serial Number (ESN).................................................. 82
6.4 Finding the Model (Part) Number and ESN.................................................... 83

7 Link Characteristics................................................................................................ 85
7.1 Understanding Bandwidth Management ........................................................ 85
7.1.1 Downlink Frame............................................................................................. 85
7.1.2 Uplink Frame ................................................................................................. 85
7.1.3 Slot Calculation.............................................................................................. 86
7.1.4 Startup Sequence.......................................................................................... 86
7.1.5 Data Transfer Capacity ................................................................................. 86
7.1.6 Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters ............................................. 87
7.1.7 Committed Information Rate ......................................................................... 88
7.1.8 Bandwidth from the SM Perspective ............................................................. 89
7.1.9 Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings ................ 89
7.1.10 High-priority Bandwidth ................................................................................. 89
7.1.11 Traffic Scheduling.......................................................................................... 91
7.1.12 2X Operation ................................................................................................. 92
7.1.13 3X Operation ................................................................................................. 95
7.1.14 Engineering for 2X and 3X Operation ........................................................... 96
7.2 Understanding Synchronization ..................................................................... 96
7.2.1 GPS Synchronization .................................................................................... 97
7.2.2 Passing Sync in a Single Hop ....................................................................... 98
7.2.3 Passing Sync in an Additional Hop ............................................................... 99

8 Meeting Link Requirements ................................................................................. 101
8.1 AP-SM Links ................................................................................................ 101
8.2 BH-BH Links................................................................................................. 103

9 Previewing Network Configurations ................................................................... 105
9.1 Viewing Typical Layouts............................................................................... 105
9.2 Viewing Case Studies .................................................................................. 107

10 Accessing Features .............................................................................................. 109
10.1 Activating Features....................................................................................... 117
10.1.1 Fixed License Keys ..................................................................................... 117
10.2 Enabling Features ........................................................................................ 117

11 Acquiring Proficiencies........................................................................................ 119
11.1 Understanding RF Fundamentals ................................................................ 119
11.2 Understanding IP Fundamentals.................................................................. 119
11.3 Acquiring a Demonstration Kit...................................................................... 119

11.3.1 900-MHz with Integrated Antenna and Band-pass Filter Demonstration Kit119
11.3.2 900-MHz with Connectorized Antenna Demonstration Kit.......................... 120
11.3.3 2.4-GHz with Adjustable Power Set to High Demonstration Kit.................. 120
11.3.4 5.2-GHz Demonstration Kit ......................................................................... 120
11.3.5 5.4-GHz Demonstration Kit ......................................................................... 121
11.3.6 5.7-GHz with Connectorized Antenna and Adjustable Power Set to Low
Demonstration Kit ........................................................................................ 121
11.3.7 Demonstration Kit Part Numbers................................................................. 122
11.4 Acquiring a Starter Kit .................................................................................. 122
11.4.1 900-MHz with Integrated Antenna and Band-pass Filter Starter Kit ........... 122
11.4.2 900-MHz with Connectorized Antenna Starter Kit....................................... 123
11.4.3 2.4-GHz with Adjustable Power Set to High Starter Kit .............................. 123
11.4.4 5.2-GHz Starter Kit ...................................................................................... 123
11.4.5 5.4-GHz FSK Starter Kit .............................................................................. 123
11.4.6 5.4-GHz OFDM Starter Kits......................................................................... 124
11.4.7 5.7-GHz with Integrated Antenna Starter Kit............................................... 124
11.4.8 Starter Kit Part Numbers ............................................................................. 125
11.5 Evaluating Training Options ......................................................................... 125
11.6 Attending On-line Knowledge Sessions ....................................................... 125

PLANNING GUIDE ......................................................................................................................127
PLANNING GUIDE 127
12 Engineering Your RF Communications .............................................................. 129
12.1 Anticipating RF Signal Loss ......................................................................... 129
12.1.1 Understanding Attenuation.......................................................................... 129
12.1.2 Calculating Free Space Path Loss .............................................................. 129
12.1.3 Calculating Rx Signal Level......................................................................... 129
12.1.4 Calculating Fade Margin ............................................................................. 130
12.2 Analyzing the RF Environment..................................................................... 131
12.2.1 Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies ............................................................ 131
12.2.2 Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves ...................................................... 132
12.2.3 Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone ...................................... 132
12.2.4 Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown.................................................. 133
12.3 Using Jitter to Check Received Signal Quality (FSK Only) .......................... 136
12.4 Using Link Efficiency to Check FSK Received Signal Quality...................... 136
12.4.1 Comparing Efficiency in 1X Operation to Efficiency in 2X Operation.......... 136

12.4.2 When to Switch from 2X to 1X Operation Based on 60% Link Efficiency... 137
12.5 Considering Frequency Band Alternatives ................................................... 138
12.5.1 900-MHz Channels...................................................................................... 138
12.5.2 2.4-GHz Channels....................................................................................... 138
12.5.3 4.9-GHz OFDM Channels ........................................................................... 139
12.5.4 5.2-GHz Channels....................................................................................... 139
12.5.5 5.4-GHz FSK Channels............................................................................... 140
12.5.6 5.4-GHz OFDM Channels ........................................................................... 140
12.5.7 5.7-GHz Channels....................................................................................... 141
12.5.8 Channels Available for PTP 400 and PTP 600 Radios ............................... 142
12.5.9 Example Channel Plans for FSK AP Clusters............................................. 142
12.5.10 Multiple FSK Access Point Clusters ............................................................ 144
12.5.11 Example Channel Plan for OFDM AP Cluster............................................. 145
12.5.12 Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters ........................................................ 145
12.6 Selecting Sites for Network Elements .......................................................... 146
12.6.1 Resources for Maps and Topographic Images ........................................... 147
12.6.2 Surveying Sites............................................................................................ 147
12.6.3 Assuring the Essentials ............................................................................... 148
12.6.4 Finding the Expected Coverage Area ......................................................... 149
12.6.5 Clearing the Radio Horizon ......................................................................... 149
12.6.6 Calculating the Aim Angles ......................................................................... 149
12.7 Collocating Modules ..................................................................................... 150
12.8 Deploying a Remote AP ............................................................................... 151
12.8.1 Remote AP Performance ............................................................................ 152
12.8.2 Example Use Case for RF Obstructions ..................................................... 152
12.8.3 Example Use Case for Passing Sync ......................................................... 153
12.8.4 Physical Connections Involving the Remote AP ......................................... 154
12.9 Diagramming Network Layouts .................................................................... 155
12.9.1 Accounting for Link Ranges and Data Handling Requirements.................. 155
12.9.2 Avoiding Self Interference ........................................................................... 155
12.9.3 Avoiding Other Interference ........................................................................ 157

13 Engineering Your IP Communications ............................................................... 159
13.1 Understanding Addresses ............................................................................ 159
13.1.1 IP Address ................................................................................................... 159
13.2 Dynamic or Static Addressing ...................................................................... 159
13.2.1 When a DHCP Server is Not Found............................................................ 159

13.3 Network Address Translation (NAT)............................................................. 160
13.3.1 NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client, and DMZ in SM.................................... 160
13.3.2 NAT and VPNs ............................................................................................ 165
13.4 Developing an IP Addressing Scheme......................................................... 166
13.4.1 Address Resolution Protocol ....................................................................... 166
13.4.2 Allocating Subnets....................................................................................... 166
13.4.3 Selecting Non-routable IP Addresses ......................................................... 167
13.5 Translation Bridging ..................................................................................... 167

14 Engineering VLANs .............................................................................................. 169
14.1 Special Case VLAN Numbers ...................................................................... 169
14.2 SM Membership in VLANs ........................................................................... 169
14.3 Priority on VLANs (802.1p)........................................................................... 170

INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION GUIDE ........................171
INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION GUIDE 171
15 Avoiding Hazards ................................................................................................. 173
15.1 Exposure Separation Distances ................................................................... 173
15.1.1 Details of Exposure Separation Distances Calculations and Power
Compliance Margins.................................................................................... 173
15.2 Grounding the Equipment ............................................................................ 176
15.2.1 Grounding Infrastructure Equipment ........................................................... 176
15.2.2 Grounding SMs............................................................................................ 176
15.3 Conforming to Regulations........................................................................... 179
15.4 Protecting Cables and Connections ............................................................. 179

16 Testing the Components...................................................................................... 181
16.1 Unpacking Components ............................................................................... 181
16.2 Configuring for Test...................................................................................... 181
16.2.1 Configuring the Computing Device for Test ................................................ 181
16.2.2 Default Module Configuration...................................................................... 181
16.2.3 Component Layout ...................................................................................... 182
16.2.4 Diagnostic LEDs .......................................................................................... 183
16.2.5 Standards for Wiring.................................................................................... 184
16.2.6 Best Practices for Cabling ........................................................................... 184
16.2.7 Recommended Tools for Wiring Connectors .............................................. 185
16.2.8 Wiring Connectors....................................................................................... 185

16.2.9 Alignment Tone—Technical Details ............................................................ 186
16.3 Configuring a Point-to-Multipoint Link for Test ............................................. 186
16.3.1 Quick Start Page of the AP ......................................................................... 187
16.3.2 Time Tab of the AP ..................................................................................... 194
16.3.3 Session Status Tab of the AP ..................................................................... 196
16.3.4 Beginning the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links........................................... 200
16.3.5 Remote Subscribers Tab of the AP............................................................. 201
16.3.6 General Status Tab of the SM..................................................................... 202
16.3.7 Continuing the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links.......................................... 205
16.3.8 General Status Tab of the AP ..................................................................... 206
16.3.9 Concluding the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links......................................... 210
16.4 Configuring a Point-to-Point Link for Test .................................................... 211
16.4.1 Quick Start Page of the BHM ...................................................................... 211
16.4.2 Time Tab of the BHM .................................................................................. 214
16.4.3 Beginning the Test of Point-to-Point Links .................................................. 216
16.4.4 Continuing the Test of Point-to-Point Links................................................. 220
16.4.5 General Status Tab of the BHM .................................................................. 221
16.4.6 Concluding the Test of Point-to-Point Links ................................................ 224

17 Preparing Components for Deployment............................................................. 225
17.1 Correlating Component-specific Information ................................................ 225
17.2 Ensuring Continuing Access to the Modules................................................ 225

18 Configuring for the Destination........................................................................... 227
18.1 Configuring an AP for the Destination .......................................................... 227
18.1.1 General Tab of the AP................................................................................. 227
18.1.2 IP Tab of the AP .......................................................................................... 231
18.1.3 Radio Tab of the AP .................................................................................... 233
18.1.4 SNMP Tab of the AP ................................................................................... 241
18.1.5 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the AP ...................................................... 244
18.1.6 Security Tab of the AP ................................................................................ 246
18.1.7 VLAN Tab of the AP .................................................................................... 249
18.1.8 VLAN Membership Tab of the AP ............................................................... 252
18.1.9 DiffServe Tab of the AP............................................................................... 253
18.1.10 Unit Settings Tab of the AP ......................................................................... 255
18.2 Configuring an SM for the Destination ......................................................... 256
18.2.1 General Tab of the SM ................................................................................ 256

18.2.2 NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT Disabled.......................................... 260
18.2.3 NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT Enabled .......................................... 265
18.2.4 Radio Tab of the SM ................................................................................... 271
18.2.5 SNMP Tab of the SM .................................................................................. 274
18.2.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the SM...................................................... 277
18.2.7 Security Tab of the SM................................................................................ 279
18.2.8 VLAN Tab of the SM ................................................................................... 282
18.2.9 VLAN Membership Tab of the SM............................................................... 285
18.2.10 DiffServe Tab of the SM .............................................................................. 286
18.2.11 Protocol Filtering Tab of the SM.................................................................. 288
18.2.12 PPPoE Tab of the SM ................................................................................. 289
18.2.13 NAT Port Mapping Tab of the SM ............................................................... 290
18.2.14 Unit Settings Tab of the SM ........................................................................ 291
18.3 Setting the Configuration Source ................................................................. 292
18.4 Configuring a BH Timing Master for the Destination .................................... 294
18.4.1 General Tab of the BHM ............................................................................. 295
18.4.2 IP Tab of the BHM....................................................................................... 298
18.4.3 Radio Tab of the BHM................................................................................. 299
18.4.4 SNMP Tab of the BHM................................................................................ 303
18.4.5 Security Tab of the BHM ............................................................................. 306
18.4.6 VLAN tab of the BHM .................................................................................. 308
18.4.7 DiffServe Tab of the BHM ........................................................................... 310
18.4.8 Unit Settings Tab of the BHM...................................................................... 311
18.5 Configuring a BH Timing Slave for the Destination ...................................... 312
18.5.1 General Tab of the BHS .............................................................................. 312
18.5.2 IP Tab of the BHS ....................................................................................... 316
18.5.3 Radio Tab of the BHS ................................................................................. 318
18.5.4 SNMP Tab of the BHS ................................................................................ 321
18.5.5 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the BHS.................................................... 323
18.5.6 Security Tab of the BHS.............................................................................. 324
18.5.7 VLAN Tab of the BHS ................................................................................. 326
18.5.8 DiffServe Tab of the BHS ............................................................................ 328
18.5.9 Unit Settings Tab of the BHS ...................................................................... 329
18.6 Adjusting Transmitter Output Power ............................................................ 330

19 Installing Components ......................................................................................... 335
19.1 PDA Access to Modules............................................................................... 335
19.2 Installing an AP ............................................................................................ 338
19.2.1 Installing a PMP 100 Series AP .................................................................. 338
19.2.2 Installing a PMP 400 Series AP .................................................................. 339
19.3 Installing a Connectorized Flat Panel Antenna ............................................ 344
19.4 Installing a GPS Antenna ............................................................................. 345
19.5 Installing a Cluster Management Module ..................................................... 345
19.6 Installing an SM............................................................................................ 345
19.6.1 Configuring the Laptop for Connection to SMs ........................................... 345
19.6.2 Installing a PMP 100 Series SM.................................................................. 347
19.6.3 Installing a PMP 400 Series SM.................................................................. 353
19.7 Configuring an AP-SM Link .......................................................................... 355
19.8 Monitoring an AP-SM Link............................................................................ 357
19.9 Installing a Reflector Dish............................................................................. 359
19.9.1 Both Modules Mounted at Same Elevation ................................................. 359
19.9.2 Modules Mounted at Different Elevations ................................................... 360
19.9.3 Mounting Assembly ..................................................................................... 360
19.10 Installing a BH Timing Master ...................................................................... 361
19.10.1 Installing a PTP 100 Series BHM ................................................................ 361
19.10.2 Installing a PTP 200 Series BHM ................................................................ 363
19.11 Installing a BH Timing Slave ........................................................................ 363
19.11.1 Installing a PTP 100 Series BHS................................................................. 363
19.11.2 Installing a PTP 200 Series BHS................................................................. 365
19.12 Upgrading a BH Link to BH20 ...................................................................... 365
19.13 Verifying a BH Link....................................................................................... 365

20 Verifying System Functionality ........................................................................... 369

OPERATIONS GUIDE ..............................................................................................................371
OPERATIONS GUIDE 371
21 Growing Your Network ......................................................................................... 373
21.1 Monitoring the RF Environment.................................................................... 373
21.1.1 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................... 373
21.1.2 Graphical Spectrum Analyzer Display......................................................... 374
21.1.3 Using the AP as a Spectrum Analyzer ........................................................ 375

21.2 Considering Software Release Compatibility ............................................... 377
21.2.1 Designations for Hardware in Radios.......................................................... 377
21.2.2 MIB File Set Compatibility ........................................................................... 378
21.3 Redeploying Modules................................................................................... 378
21.3.1 Wiring to Extend Network Sync................................................................... 378

22 Securing Your Network ........................................................................................ 379
22.1 Isolating APs from the Internet ..................................................................... 379
22.2 Encrypting Radio Transmissions.................................................................. 379
22.2.1 DES Encryption ........................................................................................... 379
22.2.2 AES Encryption ........................................................................................... 379
22.2.3 AES-DES Operability Comparisons ............................................................ 380
22.3 Managing Module Access by Passwords..................................................... 381
22.3.1 Adding a User for Access to a Module........................................................ 381
22.3.2 Deleting a User from Access to a Module................................................... 383
22.3.3 Overriding Forgotten IP Addresses or Passwords on AP, SM, or BH ........ 383
22.4 Requiring SM Authentication........................................................................ 385
22.5 Filtering Protocols and Ports ........................................................................ 385
22.5.1 Port Filtering with NAT Enabled .................................................................. 385
22.5.2 Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled ............................................ 385
22.6 Encrypting Downlink Broadcasts.................................................................. 387
22.7 Isolating SMs................................................................................................ 387
22.8 Filtering Management through Ethernet....................................................... 388
22.9 Allowing Management from Only Specified IP Addresses ........................... 388
22.10 Configuring Management IP by DHCP......................................................... 388

23 Managing Bandwidth and Authentication .......................................................... 389
23.1 Managing Bandwidth without BAM............................................................... 389
23.2 Bandwidth and Authentication Manager (BAM) Services and Features ...... 389
23.2.1 Bandwidth Manager Capability.................................................................... 389
23.2.2 Authentication Manager Capability.............................................................. 391

24 Managing the Network From a Management Station (NMS) ............................. 393
24.1 Roles of Hardware and Software Elements ................................................. 393
24.1.1 Role of the Agent......................................................................................... 393
24.1.2 Role of the Managed Device ....................................................................... 393
24.1.3 Role of the NMS .......................................................................................... 393

24.1.4 Dual Roles for the NMS............................................................................... 393
24.1.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Commands ..................... 393
24.1.6 Traps from the Agent................................................................................... 394
24.1.7 AP SNMP Proxy to SMs.............................................................................. 394
24.2 Management Information Base (MIB) .......................................................... 394
24.2.1 Cascading Path to the MIB.......................................................................... 394
24.2.2 Object Instances.......................................................................................... 395
24.2.3 Management Information Base Systems and Interface (MIB-II) ................. 395
24.2.4 Canopy Enterprise MIB ............................................................................... 396
24.3 Configuring Modules for SNMP Access ....................................................... 397
24.4 Objects Defined in the Canopy Enterprise MIB............................................ 398
24.4.1 AP, SM, and BH Objects ............................................................................. 398
24.4.2 AP and BH Timing Master Objects.............................................................. 402
24.4.3 SM and BH Timing Slave Objects ............................................................... 406
24.5 Interface Designations in SNMP .................................................................. 409
24.6 Traps Provided in the Canopy Enterprise MIB ............................................. 410
24.7 MIB Viewers ................................................................................................. 410

25 Using the Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT).............................................. 413
25.1 CNUT Functions........................................................................................... 413
25.2 Network Element Groups ............................................................................. 413
25.3 Network Layers ............................................................................................ 414
25.4 Script Engine ................................................................................................ 414
25.5 Software Dependencies for CNUT ............................................................... 414
25.6 CNUT Download .......................................................................................... 415

26 Using Informational Tabs in the GUI................................................................... 417
26.1 Viewing General Status (All) ........................................................................ 417
26.2 Viewing Session Status (AP, BHM).............................................................. 417
26.3 Viewing Remote Subscribers (AP, BHM) ..................................................... 418
26.4 Interpreting Messages in the Event Log (All) ............................................... 418
26.4.1 Time and Date Stamp ................................................................................. 418
26.4.2 Event Log Data Collection........................................................................... 418
26.4.3 Messages that Flag Abnormal Events ........................................................ 420
26.4.4 Messages that Flag Normal Events ............................................................ 420
26.5 Viewing the Network Interface Tab (All) ....................................................... 421
26.6 Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors Tab (All)...................................................... 422

26.7 Interpreting Radio Statistics in the Scheduler Tab (All)................................ 423
26.8 Viewing the List of Registration Failures (AP, BHM) .................................... 424
26.9 Interpreting Data in the Bridging Table (All) ................................................. 425
26.10 Translation Table (SM)................................................................................. 425
26.11 Interpreting Data in the Ethernet Tab (All).................................................... 426
26.12 Interpreting RF Control Block Statistics in the Radio Tab (All)..................... 428
26.13 Interpreting Data in the VLAN Tab (ALL) ..................................................... 430
26.14 Data VC (All) ................................................................................................ 431
26.15 Viewing Summary Information in the Overload Tab (All) ............................. 432
26.16 Filter (SM, BHS) ........................................................................................... 433
26.17 ARP (SM, BHS)............................................................................................ 433
26.18 NAT Stats (SM) ............................................................................................ 433
26.18.1 NAT DHCP Statistics (SM).......................................................................... 434
26.18.2 Interpreting Data in the GPS Status Page (AP, BHM) ................................ 434
26.19 Accessing PPPoE Statistics About Customer Activities (SM) ...................... 435

27 Using Tools in the GUI ......................................................................................... 437
27.1 Using the Spectrum Analyzer Tool (SM, BHS)............................................. 437
27.2 Using the Alignment Tool (SM, BHS) ........................................................... 437
27.3 Using the Link Capacity Test Tool (All) ........................................................ 438
27.4 Using the AP Evaluation or BHM Evaluation Tool (SM, BHS) ..................... 441
27.5 Using the Frame Calculator Tool (All) for Collocation .................................. 446
27.6 Viewing the DFS Status Tab (All)................................................................. 451
27.7 Using the SM Configuration Tool (AP, BHM) ............................................... 452
27.8 Reviewing the Link Status Tool Results (AP)............................................... 453
27.9 Using the Remote Spectrum Analyzer Tool (AP) ......................................... 454
27.10 Using the BER Results Tool (SM, BHS)....................................................... 456

28 Maintaining Your Software................................................................................... 459
28.1 History of System Software Upgrades ......................................................... 459
28.1.1 Release 8 Features ..................................................................................... 459
28.1.2 Release 8 Fixes........................................................................................... 460
28.1.3 Release 9 Features ..................................................................................... 460
28.1.4 Release 9 Fixes........................................................................................... 460
28.2 History of CMMmicro Software Upgrades .................................................... 461
28.3 Typical Contents of Release Notes .............................................................. 461

28.4 Typical Upgrade Process ............................................................................. 461
28.4.1 Downloading Software and Release Notes................................................. 462

29 Rebranding Module Interface Screens ............................................................... 463

30 Toggling Remote Access Capability................................................................... 467
30.1 Denying All Remote Access ......................................................................... 467
30.2 Reinstating Remote Access Capability ........................................................ 467

31 Setting Up a Protocol Analyzer on Your Network.............................................. 469
31.1 Analyzing Traffic at an SM ........................................................................... 469
31.2 Analyzing Traffic at an AP or BH with No CMM ........................................... 470
31.3 Analyzing Traffic at an AP or BH with a CMM.............................................. 470
31.4 Example of a Protocol Analyzer Setup for an SM ........................................ 471

32 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 479
32.1 General Planning for Troubleshooting.......................................................... 479
32.2 General Fault Isolation Process ................................................................... 479
32.3 Questions to Help Isolate the Problem......................................................... 480
32.4 Secondary Steps .......................................................................................... 480
32.5 Procedures for Troubleshooting ................................................................... 481
32.5.1 Module Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity................................. 481
32.5.2 NAT/DHCP-configured SM Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity . 482
32.5.3 SM Does Not Register to an AP.................................................................. 484
32.5.4 BHS Does Not Register to the BHM ........................................................... 485
32.5.5 Module Has Lost or Does Not Gain Sync ................................................... 486
32.5.6 Module Does Not Establish Ethernet Connectivity...................................... 487
32.5.7 Module Does Not Power Up........................................................................ 487
32.5.8 Power Supply Does Not Produce Power .................................................... 488
32.5.9 CMM Does Not Pass Proper GPS Sync to Connected Modules ................ 489
32.5.10 Module Software Cannot be Upgraded....................................................... 489
32.5.11 Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible.. 489

33 Obtaining Technical Support............................................................................... 491

34 Getting Warranty Assistance............................................................................... 493

REFERENCE INFORMATION ........................................................................................495
REFERENCE INFORMATION 495
35 Administering Modules through telnet Interface ............................................... 497

36 Regulatory and Legal Notices ............................................................................. 499
36.1 Important Note on Modifications................................................................... 499
36.2 National and Regional Regulatory Notices................................................... 499
36.2.1 U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Notification ................... 499
36.2.2 Industry Canada (IC) Notification ................................................................ 501
36.2.3 Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States (www.cept.org)......... 502
36.2.4 European Union Notification for 5.7 GHz Product....................................... 503
36.2.5 Equipment Disposal .................................................................................... 504
36.2.6 EU Declaration of Conformity for RoHS Compliance.................................. 504
36.2.7 UK Notification............................................................................................. 504
36.2.8 Belgium Notification..................................................................................... 504
36.2.9 Luxembourg Notification.............................................................................. 505
36.2.10 Czech Republic Notification ........................................................................ 505
36.2.11 Norway Notification ..................................................................................... 505
36.2.12 Greece Notification...................................................................................... 505
36.2.13 Brazil Notification......................................................................................... 505
36.2.14 Australia Notification.................................................................................... 506
36.2.15 Labeling and Disclosure Table for China .................................................... 506
36.3 RF Exposure ................................................................................................ 507
36.4 Legal Notices ............................................................................................... 507
36.4.1 Software License Terms and Conditions .................................................... 507
36.4.2 Hardware Warranty in U.S. ......................................................................... 509
36.4.3 Limit of Liability ............................................................................................ 509

37 Additional Resources ........................................................................................... 511

38 History of Documentation .................................................................................... 513

GLOSSARY ................................................................................................................................................515
GLOSSARY 515

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1: Pole-mounted AP cluster ................................................................................... 50
Figure 2: OFDM AP - Antenna and Radio......................................................................... 50
Figure 3: Structure-mounted SM....................................................................................... 51
Figure 4: OFDM SM, front and side views ........................................................................ 51
Figure 5: Examples of antennas for 900-MHz modules .................................................... 52
Figure 6: Dish-mounted 7.5- or 14-Mbps bridge ............................................................... 53
Figure 7: 21-Mbps bridge .................................................................................................. 53
Figure 8: PTP 300/400/500/600 Series Bridge common form .......................................... 54
Figure 9: CMM2 enclosure................................................................................................ 56
Figure 10: CMM2 pole-mounted ....................................................................................... 56
Figure 11: CMMmicro........................................................................................................ 57
Figure 12: Pole-mounted CMMmicro ................................................................................ 57
Figure 13: CMM4 enclosure.............................................................................................. 59
Figure 14: CMM4 .............................................................................................................. 59
Figure 15: Motorola GPS antenna .................................................................................... 60
Figure 16: 600SS surge suppressor ................................................................................. 60
Figure 17: 27RD with mounted module............................................................................. 62
Figure 18: LENS mounted on a radio................................................................................ 62
Figure 19: SMMB1 SM support bracket ............................................................................ 63
Figure 20: ACATHS-01 alignment headset....................................................................... 65
Figure 21: HSG-01 Housing.............................................................................................. 65
Figure 22: TDD dividing frames ........................................................................................ 86
Figure 23: Uplink and downlink rate caps adjusted to apply aggregate cap ..................... 88
Figure 24: Uplink and downlink rate cap adjustment example.......................................... 88
Figure 25: One unsynchronized AP in cluster................................................................... 97
Figure 26: GPS timing throughout the network (FSK shown) ........................................... 98
Figure 27: Additional link to extend network sync, Design 3............................................. 99
Figure 28: Additional link to extend network sync, Design 4........................................... 100
Figure 29: Additional link to extend network sync, Design 5........................................... 100
Figure 30: Typical network layout with no BH ................................................................. 105
Figure 31: Typical network layout with BH ...................................................................... 106
Figure 32: Typical multiple-BH network layout................................................................ 106

Figure 33: Determinants in Rx signal level...................................................................... 130
Figure 34: Example layout of 7 FSK Access Point clusters ............................................ 144
Figure 35: Example layout of 16 OFDM Access Point sectors ....................................... 146
Figure 36: Fresnel zone in line of sight link..................................................................... 148
Figure 37: Fresnel zone in near line of sight link............................................................. 148
Figure 38: Fresnel zone in non-line of sight link.............................................................. 148
Figure 39: Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression)........................ 149
Figure 40: Double-hop backhaul links............................................................................. 150
Figure 41: Remote AP deployment ................................................................................. 151
Figure 42: Example 900-MHz remote AP behind 2.4-GHz SM....................................... 153
Figure 43: Remote AP wired to SM that also serves a customer.................................... 154
Figure 44: Remote AP wired to SM that serves as a relay ............................................. 155
Figure 45: NAT Disabled implementation ....................................................................... 161
Figure 46: NAT with DHCP Client and DHCP Server implementation............................ 162
Figure 47: NAT with DHCP Client implementation.......................................................... 163
Figure 48: NAT with DHCP Server implementation ........................................................ 164
Figure 49: NAT without DHCP implementation............................................................... 165
Figure 50: Example of IP address in Class B subnet...................................................... 166
Figure 51: Base cover, detached and attached, FSK module......................................... 182
Figure 52: Base cover, detached and attached, OFDM module ..................................... 182
Figure 53: RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable ........................................... 185
Figure 54: RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable..................................................... 186
Figure 55: RJ-11 pinout for straight-through sync cable ................................................. 186
Figure 56: Quick Start tab of AP, example...................................................................... 188
Figure 57: Region Settings tab of AP, example .............................................................. 189
Figure 58: Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP, example ................................................ 190
Figure 59: Synchronization tab of AP, example .............................................................. 191
Figure 60: LAN IP Address tab of AP, example .............................................................. 192
Figure 61: Review and Save Configuration tab of AP, example ..................................... 193
Figure 62: Time tab of AP, example................................................................................ 194
Figure 63: Session Status tab data from AP, example ................................................... 196
Figure 64: Remote Subscribers tab of AP, example ....................................................... 201
Figure 65: General Status tab of SM, example ............................................................... 202
Figure 66: General Status tab of AP (5.7 GHz), example ............................................... 206

Figure 67: General Status tab of AP (900 MHz), example.............................................. 207
Figure 68: Quick Start tab of BHM, example................................................................... 212
Figure 69: Time tab of BHM, example ............................................................................ 214
Figure 70: Remote Subscribers tab of BHM, example.................................................... 216
Figure 71: General Status tab of BHS, example ............................................................. 216
Figure 72: General Status tab of BHM, example ............................................................ 221
Figure 73: General tab of AP, example........................................................................... 227
Figure 74: IP tab of AP, example .................................................................................... 231
Figure 75: Radio tab of AP (900 MHz), example ............................................................ 233
Figure 76: Radio tab of AP (5.4 GHz), example.............................................................. 234
Figure 77: SNMP tab of AP, example ............................................................................. 241
Figure 78: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of AP, example................................................. 244
Figure 79: Security tab of AP, example........................................................................... 246
Figure 80: VLAN tab of AP, example .............................................................................. 249
Figure 81: VLAN Membership tab of AP, example ......................................................... 252
Figure 82: DiffServe tab of AP, example......................................................................... 253
Figure 83: Unit Settings tab of AP, example ................................................................... 255
Figure 84: General tab of SM, example .......................................................................... 256
Figure 85: NAT tab of SM with NAT disabled, example.................................................. 260
Figure 86: IP tab of SM with NAT disabled, example...................................................... 263
Figure 87: NAT tab of SM with NAT enabled, example .................................................. 265
Figure 88: IP tab of SM with NAT enabled, example ...................................................... 270
Figure 89: Radio tab of SM, example.............................................................................. 271
Figure 90: SNMP tab of SM, example............................................................................. 274
Figure 91: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of SM, example ................................................ 277
Figure 92: Security tab of SM, example .......................................................................... 279
Figure 93: VLAN tab of SM, example.............................................................................. 282
Figure 94: VLAN Membership tab of SM, example......................................................... 285
Figure 95: DiffServe tab of SM, example ........................................................................ 286
Figure 96: Protocol Filtering tab of SM, example ............................................................ 288
Figure 97: PPPoE tab of SM, example ........................................................................... 289
Figure 98: NAT Port Mapping tab of SM, example ......................................................... 290
Figure 99: Unit Settings tab of SM, example................................................................... 291
Figure 100: General tab of BHM, example...................................................................... 295

Figure 101: IP tab of BHM, example ............................................................................... 298
Figure 102: Radio tab of BHM, example ......................................................................... 299
Figure 103: SNMP tab of BHM, example ........................................................................ 303
Figure 104: Security tab of BHM, example ..................................................................... 306
Figure 105: VLAN tab of BHM, example ......................................................................... 308
Figure 106: DiffServe tab of BHM, example.................................................................... 310
Figure 107: Unit Settings tab of BHM, example .............................................................. 311
Figure 108: General tab of BHS, example ...................................................................... 313
Figure 109: IP tab of BHS, example................................................................................ 316
Figure 110: Radio tab of BHS, example.......................................................................... 318
Figure 111: SNMP tab of BHS, example......................................................................... 321
Figure 112: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of BHS, example ............................................ 323
Figure 113: Security tab of BHS, example ...................................................................... 324
Figure 114: VLAN tab of BHS, example.......................................................................... 326
Figure 115: DiffServe tab of BHS, example .................................................................... 328
Figure 116: Unit Settings tab of BHS, example............................................................... 329
Figure 117: PDA Quick Status tab, example................................................................... 335
Figure 118: PDA Spectrum Analyzer tab of BHS, example ............................................ 336
Figure 119: PDA Spectrum Results tab of SM, example ................................................ 336
Figure 120: PDA Information tab of SM, example........................................................... 337
Figure 121: PDA AP Evaluation tab of BHM, example ................................................... 337
Figure 122: PDA Aim tab of SM, example ...................................................................... 338
Figure 123: Parts inventory for OFDM AP installation .................................................... 339
Figure 124: Assembled upper bracket for OFDM AP...................................................... 340
Figure 125: OFDM AP connected to its antenna ............................................................ 340
Figure 126: OFDM AP mounted to its antenna ............................................................... 340
Figure 127: OFDM AP ready for tower mount................................................................. 341
Figure 128: Hanging OFDM AP assembly onto upper bracket of pole mount ................ 342
Figure 129: OFDM AP attached to pole or tower ............................................................ 342
Figure 130: OFDM antenna lower bracket with quick-connect ....................................... 342
Figure 131: Ground lug and coax cable of OFDM AP..................................................... 343
Figure 132: Down tilt adjustment bracket of OFDM AP .................................................. 344
Figure 133: Example Local Area Connection Properties window ................................... 346
Figure 134: Example Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window .............................. 346

Figure 135: SM attachment to reflector arm.................................................................... 348
Figure 136: SM grounding per NEC specifications ......................................................... 349
Figure 137: Internal view of Canopy 600SS Surge Suppressor...................................... 350
Figure 138: Override plug ............................................................................................... 351
Figure 139: Audible Alignment Tone kit, including headset and connecting cable ......... 352
Figure 140: Example data from AP Evaluation tab ......................................................... 355
Figure 141: AP/SM link status indications in the AP Session Status tab ........................ 358
Figure 142: Correct mount with reflector dish ................................................................. 359
Figure 143: Incorrect mount with reflector dish ............................................................... 360
Figure 144: Mounting assembly, exploded view ............................................................. 361
Figure 145: BH attachment to reflector arm .................................................................... 362
Figure 146: Session Status tab of BHM .......................................................................... 367
Figure 147: Spectrum Analyzer tab of SM, example....................................................... 374
Figure 148: General Status tab view for GUEST-level account ...................................... 382
Figure 149: Add User tab of SM, example ...................................................................... 382
Figure 150: Delete User tab of SM, example .................................................................. 383
Figure 151: RJ-11 pinout for the override plug................................................................ 384
Figure 152: Categorical protocol filtering ........................................................................ 386
Figure 153: Session Status tab data, example ............................................................... 417
Figure 154: Event Log tab data, example ....................................................................... 419
Figure 155: Network Interface tab of AP, example ......................................................... 421
Figure 156: Network Interface tab of SM, example......................................................... 421
Figure 157: Layer 2 Neighbors tab, example .................................................................. 422
Figure 158: Scheduler tab of BHM, example .................................................................. 423
Figure 159: SM Registration Failures tab of AP, example .............................................. 424
Figure 160: Bridging Table tab of AP, example .............................................................. 425
Figure 161: Translation Table tab of SM, example ......................................................... 426
Figure 162: Ethernet tab of BHM, example..................................................................... 426
Figure 163: Radio tab of Statistics page in SM, example ............................................... 428
Figure 164: VLAN tab of AP, example ............................................................................ 430
Figure 165: Data VC tab of BHM, example..................................................................... 431
Figure 166: Overload tab of BHM, example.................................................................... 432
Figure 167: Filter tab of SM, example ............................................................................. 433
Figure 168: ARP tab of BHS, example............................................................................ 433

Figure 169: Nat Stats tab of SM, example ...................................................................... 434
Figure 170: NAT DHCP Statistics tab of SM, example ................................................... 434
Figure 171: PPPoE tab of SM, example ......................................................................... 435
Figure 172: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for a good link ..................................... 437
Figure 173: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for an acceptable link .......................... 437
Figure 174: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for an unacceptable link ...................... 437
Figure 175: Link Capacity Test tab of BHM, example..................................................... 438
Figure 176: Link Capacity Test tab with 1522-byte packet length, example ................... 439
Figure 177: Link Capacity Test tab with 64-byte packet length, example ....................... 440
Figure 178: AP Evaluation tab of SM, example .............................................................. 442
Figure 179: Frame Calculator tab, example.................................................................... 447
Figure 180: Calculated Frame Results section of Frame Calculator tab, example ......... 450
Figure 181: DFS Status tab of AP, example ................................................................... 451
Figure 182: DFS Status tab of SM, example................................................................... 451
Figure 183: SM Configuration tab of AP, example.......................................................... 452
Figure 184: Link Status tab of AP, example.................................................................... 453
Figure 185: Remote Spectrum Analyzer tab of AP, example.......................................... 455
Figure 186: BER Results tab of FSK SM, example......................................................... 456
Figure 187: BER Results tab of OFDM SM, example ..................................................... 457
Figure 188: Example ftp session to transfer custom logo file.......................................... 464
Figure 189: Example telnet session to activate custom logo file..................................... 465
Figure 190: Example telnet session to clear custom files ............................................... 466
Figure 191: Protocol analysis at SM ............................................................................... 469
Figure 192: Protocol analysis at AP or BH not connected to a CMM.............................. 470
Figure 193: Protocol analysis at AP or BH connected to a CMM.................................... 471
Figure 194: IP tab of SM with NAT disabled and local accessibility................................ 472
Figure 195: Local Area Connection Properties window .................................................. 473
Figure 196: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window ............................................. 474
Figure 197: Ethereal Capture Options window ............................................................... 475
Figure 198: Ethereal Capture window............................................................................. 476
Figure 199: <capture> - Ethereal window, Packet 1 selected......................................... 477
Figure 200: <capture> - Ethereal window, Packet 14 selected....................................... 478
Figure 201: NAT Table tab of SM, example.................................................................... 483

Figure 202: NAT DHCP Statistics tab of SM, example ................................................... 484
Figure 203: Event Log tab of SM, example..................................................................... 486

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1: User guide organization scheme......................................................................... 35
Table 2: Examples of where to find information in this user guide.................................... 36
Table 3: Locations of screen captures and associated documentation ............................ 37
Table 4: Font types ........................................................................................................... 40
Table 5: Admonition types................................................................................................. 40
Table 6: Essential user guide elements for new wireless Ethernet bridge network
implementation ........................................................................................................... 47
Table 7: Fixed wireless broadband IP network product names ........................................ 49
Table 8: Power supply descriptions .................................................................................. 60
Table 9: Line Cords for Power Supplies............................................................................ 61
Table 10: Recommended outdoor UTP Category 5E cables ............................................ 63
Table 11: Recommended indoor UTP Category 5E cables .............................................. 64
Table 12: Recommended antenna cables ........................................................................ 64
Table 13: Product applications per frequency band range................................................ 67
Table 14: Products with encryption options available per frequency band, PMP links ..... 68
Table 15: Typical range and throughput per frequency band, PMP links ......................... 68
Table 16: Typical range and throughput per frequency band, PTP links .......................... 69
Table 17: Cluster management product similarities and differences ................................ 70
Table 18: Applications and tools ....................................................................................... 73
Table 19: Correct placement of license keys .................................................................... 77
Table 20: Model numbers ................................................................................................. 81
Table 21: Labels and locations of model (part) numbers and ESNs................................. 83
Table 22: Characteristics of traffic scheduling .................................................................. 91
Table 23: Effect of 2X operation on throughput for the SM............................................... 93
Table 24: OFDM module performance at 1X, 2X, and 3X operation ................................ 95
Table 25: Effects of network conditions on PTMP throughput ........................................ 102
Table 26: Comparison of SM products with CAP 130..................................................... 102
Table 27: List of features................................................................................................. 109
Table 28: Demonstration Kit part numbers ..................................................................... 122
Table 29: Starter Kit part numbers .................................................................................. 125
Table 30: Effect of DFS feature....................................................................................... 134
Table 31: Signal quality levels indicated by jitter............................................................. 136

Table 32: Recommended courses of action based on Efficiency in 2X operation .......... 137
Table 33: Available center channels for single OFDM AP .............................................. 141
Table 34: Example 900-MHz channel assignment by sector .......................................... 142
Table 35: Example 2.4-GHz channel assignment by sector ........................................... 143
Table 38: Example 5.7-GHz FSK channel assignment by sector ................................... 144
Table 39: Example 4.9-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector................................ 145
Table 40: Example 5.4-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector................................ 145
Table 41: VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules ..................................................... 170
Table 42: Exposure separation distances ....................................................................... 173
Table 43: Calculated exposure distances and power compliance margins .................... 174
Table 44: Statistical incidence of current from lightning strikes ...................................... 176
Table 45: LEDs in AP and BHM...................................................................................... 183
Table 46: Legacy Mode LEDs in SM and BHS ............................................................... 183
Table 47: Revised Mode LEDs in SM ............................................................................. 184
Table 48: Recommended External Gain values for AP................................................... 237
Table 49: Control slot settings for all FSK APs in cluster................................................ 238
Table 50: Control slot settings for all OFDM APs in cluster ............................................ 238
Table 51: Broadcast Downlink CIR achievable per Broadcast Repeat Count ................ 245
Table 52: Recommended combined settings for typical operations................................ 293
Table 53: Where feature values are obtained for an SM with authentication required ... 293
Table 54: Where feature values are obtained for an SM with authentication disabled ... 294
Table 55: Recommended External Antenna Gain values for BHM ................................. 301
Table 56: Recommended External Antenna Gain values for BHS.................................. 319
Table 57: Total gain per antenna .................................................................................... 331
Table 58: Patch antenna and reflector gain .................................................................... 331
Table 59: Transmitter output power settings, example cases......................................... 333
Table 60: Hardware series by MAC address .................................................................. 377
Table 61: Hardware series differences ........................................................................... 377
Table 62: Ports filtered per protocol selections ............................................................... 387
Table 63: Example times to download for typical tiers of service with CAP 120............. 390
Table 64: Example times to download for typical tiers of service with CAP 130............. 391
Table 65: Categories of MIB-II objects............................................................................ 395

Table 66: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for APs, SMs, and BHs................................. 398
Table 67: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for APs and BH timing masters .................... 402
Table 68: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for SMs and BH timing slaves ...................... 406
Table 69: Event Log messages for abnormal events...................................................... 420
Table 70: Event Log messages for normal events.......................................................... 420
Table 71: Supported telnet commands for module administration.................................. 497
Table 72: US FCC IDs and Industry Canada certification numbers and covered
configurations ........................................................................................................... 500
Table 73: Disclosure Table for China.............................................................................. 507

LIST OF PROCEDURES

Procedure 1: Modifying a fixed license key for a module IP address.............................. 117
Procedure 2: Analyzing the spectrum ............................................................................. 131
Procedure 3: Reducing transmitter output power............................................................ 156
Procedure 4: Wrapping the cable.................................................................................... 180
Procedure 5: Setting up the AP for Quick Start............................................................... 186
Procedure 6: Bypassing proxy settings to access module web pages ........................... 187
Procedure 7: Using Quick Start to configure a standalone AP for test ........................... 189
Procedure 8: Setting up the SM for test .......................................................................... 195
Procedure 9: Retrying to establish a point-to-multipoint link ........................................... 196
Procedure 10: Verifying and recording information from SMs ........................................ 205
Procedure 11: Verifying and recording information from the AP..................................... 210
Procedure 12: Setting up the BH for Quick Start ............................................................ 211
Procedure 13: Using Quick Start to configure the BHs for test ....................................... 213
Procedure 14: Setting up the BHS for test ...................................................................... 215
Procedure 15: Verifying and recording information from the BHS .................................. 220
Procedure 16: Verifying and recording information from the BHM.................................. 224
Procedure 17: Installing the FSK AP............................................................................... 338
Procedure 18: Installing the OFDM AP ........................................................................... 339
Procedure 19: Configuring a Windows laptop................................................................. 345
Procedure 20: Configuring a Linux laptop....................................................................... 347
Procedure 21: Installing the FSK SM .............................................................................. 348
Procedure 22: Installing the OFDM SM .......................................................................... 353
Procedure 23: Configuring the AP-SM link ..................................................................... 355
Procedure 24: Monitoring the AP-SM link for performance............................................. 357
Procedure 25: Installing the FSK BHM ........................................................................... 361
Procedure 26: Setting the Cyclic Prefix in a PTP 200 Series wireless Ethernet bridge .. 363
Procedure 27: Installing the FSK BHS ............................................................................ 363
Procedure 28: Verifying performance for a BH link......................................................... 365
Procedure 29: Verifying system functionality .................................................................. 369
Procedure 30: Using the Spectrum Analyzer in AP feature, VLAN disabled .................. 375
Procedure 31: Using the Spectrum Analyzer in AP feature, VLAN enabled ................... 376
Procedure 32: Extending network sync........................................................................... 378

Procedure 33: Fabricating an override plug .................................................................... 384
Procedure 34: Regaining access to a module ................................................................ 384
Procedure 35: Installing the Canopy Enterprise MIB files............................................... 396
Procedure 36: Performing a Link Capacity Test ............................................................. 440
Procedure 37: Using the Frame Calculator..................................................................... 449
Procedure 38: Replacing the Canopy logo on the GUI with another logo....................... 463
Procedure 39: Changing the URL of the logo hyperlink.................................................. 465
Procedure 40: Returning a module to its original logo and hyperlink.............................. 466
Procedure 41: Denying all remote access ...................................................................... 467
Procedure 42: Reinstating remote access capability ...................................................... 467
Procedure 43: Setting up a protocol analyzer ................................................................. 472
Procedure 44: Troubleshooting loss of connectivity........................................................ 481
Procedure 45: Troubleshooting loss of connectivity for NAT/DHCP-configured SM....... 482
Procedure 46: Troubleshooting SM failing to register to an AP ...................................... 484
Procedure 47: Troubleshooting BHS failing to register to a BHM ................................... 485
Procedure 48: Troubleshooting loss of sync ................................................................... 486
Procedure 49: Troubleshooting loss of Ethernet connectivity ......................................... 487
Procedure 50: Troubleshooting failure to power up ........................................................ 487
Procedure 51: Troubleshooting failure of power supply to produce power ..................... 488
Procedure 52: Troubleshooting CMM not passing sync ................................................. 489
Procedure 53: Troubleshooting an unsuccessful software upgrade ............................... 489
Procedure 54: Restoring the web interface to a module ................................................. 489

PMP Solutions User Guide Guide To This User Guide

1 NEW IN THIS ISSUE

1.1 NEW PRODUCTS AND FEATURES DESCRIBED IN THIS GUIDE
This guide supersedes the Canopy System User Guide to support the following newer
products and features:

◦ Release 8.2 and 8.4 features, including US and Canada DFS (Dynamic
Frequency Selection) support for 5.4-GHz and 5.2-GHz modules
◦ Release 9.0, 9.2, and 9.4.2 features
◦ PMP 400 Series (OFDM AP and SM) in the 5.4-GHz band

1.2 PORTFOLIO OF WIRELESS BROADBAND SOLUTIONS
The Motorola portfolio of wireless broadband solutions provides a range of flexible, mix-
and-match options including

◦ Fixed
− unlicensed point-to-multipoint solutions
− Expedience licensed point-to-multipoint solutions
− point-to-point solutions, including
◦ PTP 100 and PTP 200 Series bridges
◦ PTP 400, PTP 500, and PTP 600 Series bridges
◦ Indoor, Enterprise Wireless LAN (WLAN) solutions
◦ Mesh, including the MOTOMESH series of products
◦ WiMAX, including infrastructure, CPE and devices, services, and IP core

1.3 PRODUCTS COVERED BY THIS USER GUIDE
Products covered by this user guide include

◦ PMP 100 Series FSK Access Points (CAPs) and Subscriber Modules (CSMs) in
the following frequency bands:
− 900 MHz − 5.2 GHz − 5.7 GHz
− 2.4 GHz − 5.4 GHz
◦ PMP 400 Series OFDM Access Points (CAPs) and Subscriber Modules (CSMs)
in the following frequency bands:
− 4.9 GHz − 5.4 GHz
◦ PTP 100 Series FSK bridges in the following frequency bands:
− 2.4 GHz − 5.2 GHz − 5.8 GHz
− 5.1 GHz − 5.4 GHz
◦ PTP 200 Series OFDM bridges in the following frequency bands:
− 4.9 GHz − 5.4 GHz
◦ 600SS Surge Suppressor

Issue 1, May 2010 33

Guide To This User Guide PMP Solutions User Guide

1.4 PRODUCTS NOT COVERED BY THIS USER GUIDE
Products with their own user guides include

◦ PTP 300, 400, 500, and 600 Series Bridges
◦ Cluster Management Module 2 (CMM2)
◦ Cluster Management Module micro (CMMmicro or CMM3)
◦ Cluster Management Module 4 (CMM4)
◦ LENS
◦ Prizm element management system
◦ Wireless Manager network management system
All of these products and solutions are covered by their own user guides and/or other
documentation.

1.5 SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS USER GUIDE
The following sections of this document provide details and caveats about the
compatibility of products:

◦ Designations for Hardware on Page 377
◦ MIB File Set Compatibility on Page 378

34 Issue 1, May 2010


2 USING THIS USER GUIDE
This document should be used with features in Software Release 9.4.2. The audience for
this document includes system operators, network administrators, and equipment
installers.

2.1 FINDING THE INFORMATION YOU NEED

2.1.1 Becoming Familiar with This User Guide
This is a guide to the guide. A high-level overview of the guide and some examples of
where to look provide insight into how information is arranged and labeled.

The Table of Contents provides not only a sequential index of topics but also a visual
glance at the organization of topics in this guide. A few minutes spent with the Table of
Contents in either the paper or the electronic version of this guide can save much more
time in finding information now and in the future. The List of Procedures may be
especially useful in the paper version of this guide, particularly where you mark those
procedures that you wish to frequently see.

In contrast, the List of Figures and List of Tables are most useful for automated searches
on key words in the electronic version of this guide. If a match is present, the match is the
first instance that the search finds.

Quick Reference
This user guide comprises six sections, as described in Table 1.

Table 1: User guide organization scheme

Section Purpose
Guide to This User Guide Identifies
(this section) ◦ products covered by this user guide.
◦ products covered by their own separate user guides.
◦ how this user guide is organized.
◦ where to find module web pages and parameter
descriptions.
◦ what the various typefaces and admonitions indicate.
◦ how to contact Motorola.
Overview of Fixed Wireless Provides
Broadband IP Networks ◦ references to RF and networking theory.
◦ a list of sections to see if you are building only a
backhaul network.
◦ overviews and comparisons of products and how they
communicate.
◦ descriptions of data handling and synchronization.
◦ a review of optional features.
◦ resources for developing familiarity and proficiencies
with networks.



Section Purpose
Planning Guide Provides essential information for
◦ evaluating an area for a network.
◦ specifying the IP addresses and frequency band
ranges to use for each type of link.
Installation and Configuration Provides systematic approaches for
Guide ◦ avoiding hazards from RF and natural causes.
◦ testing, storing, and deploying equipment.
Operations Guide Provides guidance for
◦ expanding network coverage.
◦ improving the security of wireless links.
◦ distributing bandwidth resources.
◦ monitoring and changing variables through SNMP.
Reference Information Provides supplemental information such as
◦ authorizations, approvals, and notices.
◦ a bibliography of adjunctive information sources.
◦ a history of changes in documentation.
Glossary Defines terms and concepts that are used in this user guide.

Examples
A list of common tasks and references to information that supports each task is provided
in Table 2.

Table 2: Examples of where to find information in this user guide

If you want to know… then see… because…
what the Spectrum Analyzer in Avoiding Self Interference this topic is important to RF
SM and BHS feature does on Page 155 planning.

Monitoring the RF this topic is also important to
Environment on Page 373 managing the network.
what types of slots compose the Understanding Bandwidth this information is helpful for
frame Management on Page 85 understanding networks.
how to calculate whether an Noting Possible this topic is important to RF
object will interfere with a signal Obstructions in the Fresnel planning.
Zone on Page 132
how long a cable you can use Cables on Page 35 cables are accessory
from the GPS antenna to the components.
CMM
the dedicated user guide the advisory applies to mounting
that supports the CMM that GPS antennas and CMMs.
you are deploying.
how to react to a WatchDog Messages that Flag together, these two sections
Event Log message Abnormal Events on Page document all significant Event
420 and Messages that Log messages.
Flag Normal Events on
Page 420



If you want to know… then see… because…
what beam angle the passive Specifications and the beam angle is a specification.
reflector dish produces Limitations on Page 77,
then downward to a table
for a part number that
includes “RF.”
how to aim the passive reflector Installing a Reflector Dish aiming is associated with
dish on Page 359 installation of wireless bridges.
how to set Differentiated High-priority Bandwidth on DSCP fields specify the level of
Services values so that traffic Page 89 priority that the device is
with original ToS byte formatting requesting for the packet.
continues to be prioritized as it
was before DSCP fields.

2.1.2 Searching This User Guide
To search this document and the software release notes of supported releases, look in
the Table of Contents for the topic and in the Adobe Reader® search capability for
keywords that apply.1 These searches are most effective when you begin the search from
the cover page because the first matches may be in titles of sections, figures, tables, or
procedures.

2.1.3 Finding Parameter and Field Definitions for Module Web Pages
Because this user guide is sequentially arranged to support tasks, and various tasks
require different settings and readings, parameter and field definitions are scattered
according to the tasks that they support. The locations of these are provided in Table 3.

Table 3: Locations of screen captures and associated documentation

Tab or Web Page Displayed Page
Add User tab of SM, example 382

Alignment Tool tab of SM, example 437

AP Evaluation tab of SM, example 442

BER Results tab of FSK SM, example 456

Bridging Table tab of AP, example 425
Calculated Frame Results section of Frame Calculator tab, example 450
DiffServe tab of AP, example 253
DiffServe tab of BHM, example 310
DiffServe tab of BHS, example 328
DiffServe tab of SM, example 286
Ethernet tab of BHM, example 426
Event Log tab data, example 419

1
Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.



Event Log tab of SM, example 486

General Status tab of AP (5.7 GHz), example 206

General Status tab of BHM, example 221
General Status tab of BHS, example 216
General Status tab of SM, example 202
General Status tab view for GUEST-level account 382
General tab of AP, example 227
General tab of BHM, example 295
General tab of BHS, example 313
General tab of SM, example 256
IP tab of AP, example 231
IP tab of BHM, example 298
IP tab of BHS, example 316
IP tab of SM with NAT disabled and local accessibility 472
IP tab of SM with NAT disabled, example 263
IP tab of SM with NAT enabled, example 270
LAN IP Address tab of AP, example 192
Link Capacity Test tab with 1522-byte packet length, example 439
Link Capacity Test tab with 64-byte packet length, example 440
NAT DHCP Statistics tab of SM, example 484
NAT Port Mapping tab of SM, example 290
NAT tab of SM with NAT disabled, example 260
NAT tab of SM with NAT enabled, example 265
NAT Table tab of SM, example 483
PDA Aim tab of SM, example 338
PDA AP Evaluation tab of BHM, example 337
PDA Information tab of SM, example 337
PDA Quick Status tab, example 335
PDA Spectrum Analyzer tab of BHS, example 336
PDA Spectrum Results tab of SM, example 336
Protocol Filtering tab of SM, example 288
Quality of Service (QoS) tab of AP, example 244
Quality of Service (QoS) tab of BHS, example 323
Quality of Service (QoS) tab of SM, example 277



Quick Start tab of AP, example 188
Quick Start tab of BHM, example 212
Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP, example 190
Radio tab of AP (900 MHz), example 233
Radio tab of BHM, example 299
Radio tab of BHS, example 318
Radio tab of SM, example 271
Remote Subscribers tab of AP, example 201
Remote Subscribers tab of BHM, example 216
Review and Save Configuration tab of AP, example 193
Scheduler tab of BHM, example 423
Security tab of AP, example 246
Security tab of BHM, example 306
Security tab of BHS, example 324
Security tab of SM, example 279
Session Status tab data from AP, example 196
Session Status tab data, example 417
SM Configuration tab of AP, example 452
SM Registration Failures tab of AP, example 424
SNMP tab of AP, example 241
SNMP tab of BHM, example 303
SNMP tab of BHS, example 321
SNMP tab of SM, example 274
Spectrum Analyzer tab of SM, example 374
Synchronization tab of AP, example 191
Time tab of AP, example 194
Time tab of BHM, example 214
Unit Settings tab of AP, example 255
Unit Settings tab of BHM, example 311
Unit Settings tab of BHS, example 329
Unit Settings tab of SM, example 291
VLAN Membership tab of AP, example 252
VLAN Membership tab of SM, example 285



VLAN tab of AP, example 249

VLAN tab of SM, example 282

2.2 INTERPRETING TYPEFACE AND OTHER CONVENTIONS
This document employs distinctive fonts to indicate the type of information, as described
in Table 4.

Table 4: Font types

Font Type of Information
Selectable option in a graphical user interface or settable
variable width bold
parameter in the web-based interface to a component.
constant width regular Literal system response in a command-line interface.
constant width italic Variable system response in a command-line interface.
constant width bold Literal user input in a command-line interface.
constant width bold italic Variable user input in a command-line interface.

This document employs specific imperative terminology as follows:

◦ Type means press the following characters.
◦ Enter means type the following characters and then press Enter.

This document also employs a set of consistently used admonitions. Each of these types
of admonitions has a general purpose that underlies the specific information in the box.
These purposes are indicated in Table 5.

Table 5: Admonition types

Admonition
General Message
Label
NOTE:
informative content that may
◦ defy common or cursory logic.
◦ describe a peculiarity of the implementation.
◦ add a conditional caveat.
◦ provide a reference.
◦ explain the reason for a preceding statement or provide prerequisite
background for what immediately follows.



Admonition
General Message
Label

RECOMMENDATION:
suggestion for an easier, quicker, or safer action or practice.

IMPORTANT!
informative content that may
◦ identify an indication that you should watch for.
◦ advise that your action can disturb something that you may not want
disturbed.
◦ reiterate something that you presumably know but should always
remember.

CAUTION!
a notice that the risk of harm to equipment or service exists.

WARNING!
a notice that the risk of harm to person exists.

2.3 GETTING ADDITIONAL HELP
Help is available for problems with supported products and features. Obtaining Technical
Support on Page 491 provides the sequence of actions that you should take if these
problems arise.

2.4 SENDING FEEDBACK
Is this document accurate, complete, and clear? How can it be improved? Send your
feedback on documentation to technical-documentation@canopywireless.com.


PMP Solutions User Guide Overview of PMP Solutions

3 ADVANCING FROM RESEARCH TO
IMPLEMENTATION
Before you begin to research a possible implementation, you should have both

◦ basic knowledge of RF theory. See
− Understanding RF Fundamentals on Page 119.
− Engineering Your RF Communications on Page 129.
◦ network experience. See
− Link Characteristics on Page 85.
− Understanding IP Fundamentals on Page 119.
− Engineering Your IP Communications on Page 159.



4 REALIZING A WIRELESS ETHERNET BRIDGE
NETWORK
PTP 100 Series Bridges serving as backhaul modules (BHs) can connect access point
clusters to the point of presence or be the backbone of a Metro WiFi mesh network. In
other applications, the backhaul modules can be used to provide connectivity for

◦ cell sites, in lieu of leased T1/E1 telecommunications lines.
◦ buildings in corporate or institutional campuses.
◦ remote sites, including temporary sites set up for relief efforts.

These BHs are available in 10- or 20-Mbps modulation rates from the factory. The rate is
distinguished as BH10 or BH20 in the Software Version field of the General Status tab
(in the Home page) of the module GUI.

For these and any other backhaul networks, Table 6 provides a quick reference to
information that you would need to establish and maintain the wireless bridge network.

Table 6: Essential user guide elements for new wireless Ethernet bridge network implementation

Element Title Page
Section 1.4 Products Not Covered by This User Guide 34
Section 5.2.5 PTP Series 100 Bridges 53
Section 5.2.6 PTP 200 Series Bridges 53
Section 5.2.12 Cluster Management Module-2 (Part 1008CK-2) 56
Section 5.2.13 Cluster Management Module micro (Part 1070CK) 56
Section 5.2.14 CMM4 (Part 1090CK) 58
Typical range and throughput per frequency band, PTP
Table 16 69
links

Section 8.2 BH-BH Links 101

Figure 32 Typical multiple-BH network layout 106
Section 12.2 Analyzing the RF Environment 131
Section 12.5 Considering Frequency Band 138
Section 15 Avoiding Hazards 173
Section 16.4 Configuring a Point-to-Point Link for Test 211
Section 17 Preparing Components for Deployment 225
Section 18.4 Configuring a BH Timing Master for the Destination 294
Section 18.5 Configuring a BH Timing Slave for the Destination 312
Section 19.4 Installing a GPS Antenna 345


Overview of PMP Solutions PMP Solutions User Guide

Section 19.5 Installing a 345
Section 19.9 Installing a Reflector Dish 359
Section 19.10 Installing a BH Timing Master 361
Section 19.11 Installing a BH Timing Slave 363
Section 19.13 Verifying a BH Link 365
Section 22.2 Encrypting Radio Transmissions 379
Section 22.3 Managing Module Access 381
Section 24.4 Objects Defined in the Canopy Enterprise MIB 398
Section 24.5 Interface Designations in SNMP 409
Section 24.6 Traps Provided in the Canopy Enterprise MIB 410
Section 25 Using the Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) 413
Section 28.3 Typical Contents of Release Notes 461
Section 28.4 Typical Upgrade Process 461
Section 31.2 Analyzing Traffic at an AP or BH with No CMM 470
Section 31.3 Analyzing Traffic at an AP or BH with a CMM 470
Section 32 Troubleshooting 479
Section 33 Obtaining Technical Support 491
Section 34 Getting Warranty 493



5 EXPLORING THE SCOPE OF SOLUTIONS
Fixed wireless broadband IP network applications include:

◦ local area network (LAN) extensions
◦ Internet subscriber service
◦ high-bandwidth point-to-point connections
◦ multicast video (for instruction or training, for example)
◦ private branch exchange (PBX) extensions
◦ point-to-multipoint data backhaul
◦ redundant network backup
◦ video surveillance
◦ voice over IP (VoIP)
◦ TDM over Ethernet (for legacy voice and data)

5.1 PRODUCT NAMES
Table 7: Fixed wireless broadband IP network product names

Protocol Product Product Example
Previous Names
Type Series Name Model

CAP 120 CAP 100, Classic AP 5700AP
CSM 120 CSM 100, SM 5700SM
PMP 100 CSM 110 Lite SM 5760SM
CAP 130 CAP 200, Advantage AP 5750AP
Point-to-
Multipoint CSM 130 CSM 200, Advantage SM 5750SM
CAP 49400 4.9-GHz OFDM AP 4940AP
CSM 49400 4.9-GHz OFDM SM 4940SM
PMP 400
CAP 54400 5.4-GHz OFDM AP 5440AP
CSM 54400 5.4-GHz OFDM SM 5440SM
PTP 110 2- or 4-Mbps BH
PTP 100 PTP 120 PTP 100 Lite, BH10 (7-Mbps) 5700BH
Point-to-
Point PTP 130 PTP 100 Full, BH20 (14-Mbps) 5700BH20
PTP 49200 4.9-GHz OFDM BH 4940BH
PTP 200
PTP 54200 5.4-GHz OFDM BH 5440BH

NOTE:
Each product is available in multiple model numbers, which distinguish the model by such
attributes as frequency band range, encryption type, or power adjustable for extended range.
See Interpreting Model Number on Page 79 and Sorted Model Numbers on Page 81.



5.2 NETWORK COMPONENTS
Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP networks use some or all of the following
components. For the components that provide a graphical user interface (GUI), access to
the GUI is through a web browser. In Release 8 and later, cascading style sheets (CSS)
configure the GUI. Thus an operator is able to customize the GUI by editing these style
sheets.

5.2.1 Access Point Module Other Than 900-Mhz
The FSK Access Point (AP) module provides up to 14 Mbps aggregate throughput in a
60° sector. The CAP 120 FSK AP can communicate with only a CSM 120 SM, not also a
CSM 130 or a Lite (CSM 110) SM. The CAP 130 or CAP 09130 AP distributes services
as broadly as the CAP 120. However, the CAP 130 provides greater throughput and less
latency. The CAP 130 communicates with all SMs in its frequency band range: CSM
110s, CSM 120s, and CSM 130s.

The OFDM AP provides up to 21 Mbps aggregate throughput in a 90° sector. An OFDM
AP can communicate with only an OFDM SM.

An FSK or OFDM AP supports up to 200 subscribers and 4,096 MAC addresses, which
may be directly-connected PCs, IP appliances, gateways, Subscriber Modules (SMs),
and the AP, except that no limit applies behind subscriber network address translation
(NAT) gateways. The AP is configurable through a web interface.

5.2.2 Access Point Cluster
An AP cluster covers as much as 360°.
The FSK (PMP 100 or PMP 400) AP
cluster consists of two to six APs that
together provide broadband connectivity to
1,200 or fewer subscribers. Each of these
APs transmits and receives in a 60° sector.
The PMP 400 Series (OFDM) AP cluster
consists of two to four APs that provide
broadband connectivity to 800 or fewer
subscribers. Each of these APs transmits
and receives in a 90° sector.
An AP cluster is pictured in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Pole-mounted AP cluster

The variety of available FSK and OFDM
APs in frequency band range, power
adjustability, and antenna configuration is
shown under Acquiring a Demonstration
Kit, beginning on Page 119.
An OFDM AP, showing the antenna in front
and the radio attached to it, is pictured in
Figure 2.

Figure 2: OFDM AP - Antenna and Radio



5.2.3 Subscriber Module Other Than 900-MHz
The Subscriber Module (SM) is a
customer premises equipment (CPE)
device that provides broadband
services through communication with
an AP. The SM is configurable through
a web interface.
The variety of available FSK and
OFDM SMs in frequency band range,
power adjustability, and antenna
configuration is shown under Acquiring
a Demonstration Kit, beginning on
Page 119.
Figure 3: Structure-mounted SM

The CSM 130 or CSM 09130 provides the same configurability and services as the
CSM 110 or CSM 120. However, in a link with a CAP 130 or CAP 09130, the CSM 130 or
CSM 09130 provides uncapped sustained 2X throughput. See 2X Operation on Page 92.
A CSM 130 or CSM 09130 can communicate with only a CAP 130 or CAP 09130,
respectively.

A PMP 100 Series (FSK SM) can communicate with either a CAP 120 or CAP 130. An
FSK SM mounted directly to a structure is pictured in Figure 3.

A PMP Series 400 (OFDM) SM can
communicate with only an OFDM AP. An
OFDM SM is shown in Figure 4 in both
front and side views.

Lite SMs (CSM 110 modules) cost less
and provide less throughput than the
CSM 120s or CSM 130s. They support
the same radio frequencies, interference
tolerance, and product reliability. They
give operators the additional option to
serve cost-sensitive customers who want
standard services (web browsing, email,
VoIP, and downloads), but do not require
the higher throughput that is available
with a regular SM. Lite SMs support an Figure 4: OFDM SM, front and side views
aggregate (uplink plus downlink)
throughput of 512 kbps.
Through purchased floating licenses that Prizm manages, they are upgradeable to 1, 2,
4, or 7 Mbps aggregate throughput. A Lite SM can communicate with only a CAP 130.
A comparison of the CSM 110 to the CSM 120 and CSM 130 is provided in Table 26 on
Page 102.



5.2.4 900-MHz AP and SM
The 900 MHz AP (CAP 09130) and SM (CSM 09130) modules operate at a 3.3 Mbps
carrier rate (compared to 10 Mbps for other FSK frequency bands).

Figure 5: Examples of antennas for 900-MHz modules
These 900-MHz modules run the same software and provide the same parameters,
network features, and connections as all other APs and SMs. The physics of longer-
wavelength 900 MHz, the power allowed by regulatory authorities, and the low required
level of Carrier-to-Interference (C/I) ratio combine to support

◦ line of sight (LOS) range of up to 40 miles (over 64 km)
◦ increased non-line of sight (NLOS) range, depending on RF considerations such
as foliage, topography, and obstructions.
When collocated with an SM of another frequency band range, the 900-MHz AP may
serve, without a tower or BH, as a remote AP (see Deploying a Remote AP on
Page 151). 900-MHz AP/SM links are logical choices for extending radio networks where
you wish to

◦ add subscriber-handling capacity to a tower that is either
− fully used in the other frequency band ranges.
− not available to any other frequency band range.
◦ reach sparsely populated areas.
◦ penetrate foliage.
◦ add a remote AP behind an SM that operates in another frequency band range.

With Only the Integrated Antenna
The enclosure of the 900-MHz integrated AP and SM houses both the hardware
and antenna. These modules can be purchased with a band pass filter to improve
performance in environments in which equipment (for example, a pager) is operating
in the spectrum adjacent to the 900-MHz band.



Unlike the antennas in other FSK Motorola radios, the integrated antenna in the 900-MHz
radio is horizontally polarized to reduce exposure to noise from vertically polarized
signals, which predominate in this band.

Connectorized for External Antenna
The enclosure of the 900-MHz connectorized AP and SM includes a cable and N-type
connector to which an external antenna can attach. In this case, network operators can
select horizontal or vertical polarization and select the type of antenna to use. However,
these connectorized modules can be used in the same architecture with the integrated
modules only if the connectorized modules are horizontally polarized.

5.2.5 PTP Series 100 Bridges
A pair of PTP 100 Series wireless Ethernet
bridges provides point-to-point connectivity as
either a standalone link or a link through a
cluster management module to an AP cluster.

You must configure a BH as either a timing
master (BHM) or timing slave (BHS). The BHM
provides synchronization signal (sync) to the
BHS.

A BH mounted to a passive reflector dish is
pictured in Figure 6. Carrier applications for
these modules include reaching remote AP
clusters, interconnecting campus buildings or
remote branch offices, extending private
branch exchange (PBX) circuits, backhauling
cell sites, and extending central office T1s/E1s.

These BHs are supported by this user guide. Figure 6: Dish-mounted
See Realizing a Wireless Ethernet Bridge 7.5- or 14-Mbps bridge
Network on Page 47.

5.2.6 PTP 200 Series Bridges
The PTP 200 Series bridges securely transport data, voice,
and video in both near-line-of-sight (nLOS) and line-of-sight
(LOS) deployments at Ethernet data rates up to 21 Mbps. In
the 4.9-GHz range, the public safety area of the spectrum,
these bridges are a point-to-point solution for emergency
services. In 5.4 GHz, they are a solution for enterprises.
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM)
technology resists multi-path interference and fading that is
otherwise caused by buildings and other obstructions.

Interference avoidance capability is ensured. The Dynamic
Frequency Selection (DFS) feature switches channels to
avoid interfering with priority signals. Moreover, these bridges
can be collocated within the physical scope of an existing
network, or used as part of a 5.4-GHz frequency band overlay Figure 7: 21-Mbps bridge
network.



These bridges are supported by this user guide. See Realizing a Wireless Ethernet
Bridge Network on Page 47.

PTP 300 Series wireless Ethernet bridges offer reliable and cost-effective backhaul at
rates up to 25 Mbps for distances up to 155 miles (250 km) or, when enabled by a special
license key, up to 50 Mbps in LOS deployments for distances up to 10 miles (16 km).

These bridges operate in the 5.4- or 5.8-GHz frequency band range. The form for these
bridges is shown in Figure 8. These bridges are supported by their own dedicated user
guide.

PTP 400 Series wireless Ethernet bridges offer reliable
non-line-of-sight (NLoS) or long-distance line of sight
(LoS) connection to the other bridge in the pair. Their
features include adaptive modulation, intelligent Dynamic
Frequency Selection, and a preset that denies connection
to any unit other than the one in its pair. These are
available as full (43-Mbps) or lite (21-Mbps) bridges.

Either variety is a solution for any of the following field
applications:

◦ backhaul pair for PMP networks
◦ campus connection between buildings
◦ last-mile access and backbone
◦ voice over IP (VoIP) and
video surveillance Figure 8: PTP 300/400/500/600
Series Bridge common form

These bridges transmit and receive in the 4.9-GHz
frequency band range, at 4.940 to 4.990. The form for
these bridges is shown in Figure 8. These bridges are
supported by their own dedicated user guide.

Motorola PTP 500 Series Bridges offer reliable non-line-of-sight (NLoS) and long-
distance line of sight (LoS) connection to the other bridge in the pair. Their features
include Multiple-input Multiple-output (MIMO), intelligent Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (i-OFDM), Advanced Spectrum Management, and Adaptive Modulation.
These are available as 105-Mbps bridges. These bridges transmit and receive in 5.4- and
5.8-GHz frequency band ranges. The form for these bridges is shown in Figure 8 on
Page 54.

They are a solution for any of the following field applications:

◦ high-speed backhaul ◦ disaster recovery
◦ campus connection between ◦ emergency services
buildings ◦ voice over IP (VoIP) and
◦ telemedicine video surveillance



The PTP 500 Series Bridges offer many more SNMP-accessible element management
parameters than do their PTP 400 and 600 Series counterparts; specifically, a
significantly larger number of read-only fields, manageable objects, and notifications
addressable to the NMS. Further, a new PTP LINKPlanner tool currently supports only
PTP 500 Bridge networks. This tool allows operators to simultaneously see path
calculations for configuring single and multiple links, using a Google Earth overview.
In this way, the PTP LINKPlanner can be more useful than the Link Estimator tool, which
continues to support the PTP 400 and 600 Series wireless bridges that Motorola offers.

These bridges are supported by their own dedicated user guide.

Motorola PTP 600 Series Bridges offer reliable non-line-of-sight (NLoS) and long-
distance line of sight (LoS) connection to the other bridge in the pair. Their features
include adaptive modulation, intelligent Dynamic Frequency Selection, and a preset that
denies connection to any unit other than the one in its pair. These are available as full
(300-Mbps) or lite (150-Mbps) bridges.

Each pair of these bridges transmits and receives in one of the following frequency band
ranges. The bridges manufactured for

◦ the 2.5-GHz range, which is the Educational Broadcast Service area of the
spectrum, constitute a PTP solution for low-power high-speed distance learning
with Internet access and email in any of the following field applications:
− backhaul pair for PMP − last-mile access and
networks backbone
− campus connection − voice over IP (VoIP)
between buildings and video surveillance
◦ the 4.5- and 4.8-GHz ranges, which together are the U.S. government and
military and the NATO areas of the spectrum, constitute PTP solutions for
− battlefield − training and simulation
communications networks
− campus connection − video surveillance and
between buildings border security
◦ the 4.9-GHz range, which is the public safety area of the spectrum, constitute
PTP solutions for
− missing-person, DMV, − primary, secondary,
and medical records and infill, ASTRO links
− building blueprints and − part of a pre-mounted
vehicle locations emergency site
◦ the 5.4-, 5.8-, and 5.9-GHz ranges constitute PTP solutions for unlicensed
backhaul of bundled circuit-switched VoIP, video, and data communications.

The form for these bridges is shown in Figure 8 on Page 54. These bridges are
supported by their own dedicated user guide.



5.2.11 Radio Adjustable Power Capabilities
Motorola offers adjustable power radios in all frequency bands. See Adjusting Transmitter
Output Power on Page 330 to ensure that your radios do not exceed the maximum
permitted EIRP.

5.2.12 Cluster Management Module-2 (Part 1008CK-2)
The Cluster Management Module-2 (CMM2) provides power, GPS timing from an
antenna that is included, and networking connections for an AP cluster. The CMM2 can
also connect to a BH, in which case the CMM2 is the central point of connectivity for the
entire site. The CMM2 can connect as many as eight collocated modules—APs, BHMs,
BHSs—and an Ethernet feed.

The CMM2 requires two cables for each connected module:

◦ One provides Ethernet communications and power. This cable terminates in an
RJ-45 connector.
◦ The other provides synchronization (sync), GPS status, and time and date in a
serial interface. This cable terminates in an RJ-11 connector.

A CMM2 is pictured in Figure 9. A CMM2 as part of a mounted system is pictured in
Figure 10. CMM2 is no longer available for purchase, but it still a supported product.
For documentation, it is supported by its own dedicated user guide.

Figure 9: CMM2 enclosure Figure 10: CMM2 pole-mounted

5.2.13 Cluster Management Module micro (Part 1070CK)
The Cluster Management Module micro (CMMmicro) provides power, GPS timing, and
networking connections for an AP cluster. The CMMmicro is configurable through a web
interface.

The CMMmicro contains an 8-port managed switch that supports Power over Ethernet
(PoE) on each port and connects any combination of APs, BHMs, BHSs, or Ethernet
feed. The Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP networks PoE differs from IEEE Standard
803.3af PoE, and the two should not be intermixed. The CMMmicro can auto-negotiate
speed to match inputs that are either 100Base-TX or 10Base-T, and either full duplex or



half duplex, where the connected device is set to auto-negotiate. Alternatively, these
parameters are settable.

A CMMmicro requires only one cable, terminating in an RJ-45 connector, for each
connected module to distribute

◦ Ethernet signaling.
◦ power to as many as 8 collocated modules—APs, BHMs, or BHSs. Through a
browser interface to the managed switch, ports can be powered or not.
◦ sync to APs and BHMs. The CMMmicro receives 1-pulse per second timing
information from Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites through an antenna
(included) and passes the timing pulse embedded in the 24-V power to the
connected modules.

GPS status information is available at the CMMmicro, however

◦ CMMmicro provides time and date information to BHMs and APs if both the
CMMmicro is operating on CMMmicro Release 2.1 or later and the AP/BHM is
operating on System Release 4.2 or later. See Time Tab of the AP on Page 194.
◦ CMMmicro does not provide time and date information to BHMs and APs if either
the CMMmicro is operating on a release earlier than CMMmicro Release 2.1 or
the AP/BHM is operating on a release earlier than System Release 4.2.

A CMMmicro is pictured in Figure 11 and Figure 12.

Figure 11: CMMmicro Figure 12: Pole-mounted CMMmicro

This product is supported by its own dedicated user guide.



5.2.14 CMM4 (Part 1090CK)
The Cluster Management Module 4 (CMM4) provides power, GPS timing from an
antenna that is included, and networking connections for an AP cluster, Backhauls, and
Ethernet terrestrial feeds in a variety of configurations. The CMM4 provides reliable GPS
network synchronization with an integrated solution that includes

◦ 9 access ports: eight 10/100Base-T ports and one copper 10/100/1000Base-T
port
◦ a full featured Ethernet switch
◦ a Gigabit Ethernet port
◦ integrated lightning surge suppression on every data line, the GPS interface, the
29 V DC power inputs, and the coax line. These points include all RJ11 and
RJ45 connectors.

The CMM4 has four major hardware components:

◦ the Cluster Controller. The controller injects power and synchronization on a per-
port basis and is configured using a web interface.
◦ a separate hardened Ethernet switch housed within the same weatherized
enclosure. This switch integrates switching technology with its own separate
web-based management functions and provides a full array of networking
features. (See Optional Ethernet Switch in CMM4 on Page 59.)
◦ the GPS system. This includes an integrated GPS board, an antenna, and
brackets for pole mounting the antenna.
◦ the power supply unit. This is a 20-volt, 40-watt supply that outputs on two
connectors.

The CMM4 supports:

◦ Power over Ethernet (PoE) using a proprietary 30- or 56-VDC scheme that
differs from IEEE Standard 803.af.
◦ synchronization and date and time on each port. Where the connected device is
set to auto-negotiate, the CMM4 can auto-negotiate speed to match inputs that
are either 100Base-TX or 10Base-T, and either full duplex or half duplex.
Alternatively, these parameters are settable.
◦ management by a web browser, telnet, the console port, Prizm element
management system, or a network manager that uses SNMP.
◦ dual power supply input redundancy. (Power supply is sold separately).
The enclosure provides a 1-hole insert for a DC power cable gland.

This user guide introduces CMM4, but the dedicated Cluster Management Module 4
(CMM4) User Guide provides full documentation on this product, including installation
instructions.



A CMM4 is pictured in Figure 13 and Figure 14.

Figure 13: CMM4 enclosure
Figure 14: CMM4

5.2.15 Optional Ethernet Switch in CMM4
The Ethernet switch is a separate device enclosed within the CMM4 enclosure and
connected to the CMM4 cluster controller via either the Gigabit port or one of the
standard Ethernet ports. The switch may be accessed in any of three ways:

◦ through the administration console via RS-232 serial port. This access
− requires either proximity to the switch or a dial-up connection.
− is text-based, using Windows Hyperterminal.
− does not require an IP address.
◦ through the web-based interface. This access requires that the IP address of the
switch is accessible from the device on which the browser resides.
◦ through an external SNMP-based network management application. This access
− communicates with switch functions at the MIB level.
− requires SNMP element management software.

This is a hardened managed switch that provides

◦ 12 10/100Base-T ports, 8 of them powered
◦ 2 copper 10/100/1000Base-T (Gigabit) Ethernet port, copper connecting

The Ethernet Switch has many features not addressed in this document. For further
information, either visit http://www.EtherWAN.com/manuals/es/EX96000_e1_Manual.pdf
or see the EtherWAN switch manual provided with the CMM4.



5.2.16 GPS Antenna (Part GPSANTPNM03D)
The Motorola GPS antenna provides either
◦ timing pulses to the CMMmicro or CMM4
◦ timing pulses and positioning information to
the CMM2.

The GPS antenna is pictured in Figure 15.

Figure 15: Motorola GPS antenna

5.2.17 Surge Suppressor (Part 600SS)
The 600SS Surge Suppressor provides a path to ground
(Protective Earth ) that reduces the risk to persons,
buildings, and inside equipment from over-currents and
over-voltages associated with lightning strikes. This
accessory is RoHS compliant. A 600SS is pictured in
Figure 16.

The 600SS is available as Part Numbers 600SSC or
600SSD. Either of these models works properly and
identically when deployed to protect either an FSK or
an OFDM radio.

Figure 16: 600SS surge suppressor

5.2.18 Accessory Components
In addition to the above modules, the following accessories are available.

Power Supplies
The various power supplies are listed in Table 8.

Table 8: Power supply descriptions

To Power
For Use Part VAC VDC Line Cord
PMP PMP With Number In Out Included
CMM
FSK OFDM
PMP 49400 100 to
CMM4 SGPN4076 52.6 None.
PMP 500 240
CMM4 PMP 100 100 to
ACPS112WA 29 USA.
CMMmicro PMP 54400 240
PMP 100
CMM4 PMP 54400 100 to
ACPS112W-02A 29 None.
CMMmicro and no 240
power lead



To Power
For Use Part VAC VDC Line Cord
PMP PMP With Number In Out Included
CMM
FSK OFDM
PoE and
49400 100 to
RJ-45 pass- SGPN4063A 56 None.
500 240
through
network in 90 to USA, EU,
100 54400 ACPSSSW-09B 29.5
USA or EU 240 UK.
network in 90 to
100 54400 ACPSSW-10B 29.5 Argentina
Argentina 240
network in 90 to
100 54400 ACPSSW-11 29.5 Australia
Australia 240
network in 90 to
100 54400 ACPSSW-12C 29.5 China
China 240
network in
USA,
USA, 90 to
100 ACPSSW-13A 24 Canada,
Canada, or 240
Mexico.
Mexico
network in
USA,
USA, 90 to
all ACPSSW-13B 29.5 Canada,
Canada, or 240
Mexico.
Mexico

Region-compliant 56-V DC line cords for the power supplies are listed in Table 9.

Table 9: Line Cords for Power Supplies

Part
Region
Number
Argentina SGKN4419A
Australia SGKN4425A
Canada SGKN4427A
China-Mainland SGKN4424A
Europe SGKN4426A
India SGKN4420A
Japan SGKN4423A
Korea SGKN4422A
Mexico SGKN4427A
Pakistan SGKN4420A
Singapore-United Kingdom SGKN4421A
South Africa SGKN4420A
USA SGKN4427A



Passive Reflector Dish Assembly
A 27RD Passive Reflector Dish on both ends of
a BH link extends the distance range of the link
and provides a narrower beam width, which
can reduce both received and transmitted
interference. A 27RD on an SM extends the
distance range in some bands (notably 5.7-
GHz and 2.4-GHz) and can reduce both
received and transmitted interference in all
bands. The module support tube provides the
proper offset focus angle. See Figure 17.

For 5.x-GHz radios, the reflector gain is 18dB
and the 3 dB beam width is 6° in both azimuth
and elevation. For 2.4-GHz radios, the reflector
gain is 11dB and the 3 dB beam width is 17° in Figure 17: 27RD with mounted module
both azimuth and elevation.

LENS
The LENS product retrofits to a radio to

◦ improve range and resistance to
interference, compared to those of
the module with no reflector.
◦ provide less wind loading, easier
mounting, and an appearance
more consistent with the module
form than has the reflector dish.
LENS focuses its beam in 60° azimuth and
elevation and boosts signal gain by 9 to
10 dB. LENS is an option for 5.2-, 5.4-, and
5.7-GHz radios, but not an option for P7-
through P9-series radios in the U.S.A. or
Canada or for 2.4-GHz radios anywhere.

Viable use cases include all radio types
(SM, BH, and AP), and installation in each
case requires no tools. A dedicated user
guide supports this product.

Currently, the radio types that support LEN Figure 18: LENS mounted on a radio
retrofit are PTP 100, and PMP 100 and
PMP 430 SM.



Module Support Brackets
The SMMB1 support bracket facilitates
mounting the SM to various surfaces of a
structure and has slots through which chimney
straps can be inserted. An SMMB1 is pictured
in Figure 19. The SMMB1 is for use with an SM
or an SM with a LENS. It is not for use with
PMP 400 Series (OFDM) SMs or 900-MHz
integrated or connectorized SMs, due to their
greater weight and wind loading.

The SMMB2 is a heavy duty mounting bracket
that comes with the 900-MHz integrated SM or
AP, and with the 27D passive reflector. It is
also available separately for use with 900-MHz
connectorized SMs and APs, other
connectorized modules, and 400 Series
(OFDM) SMs.

The BH1209 is a pole-mount bracket kit for
wireless Ethernet bridges. Figure 19: SMMB1 SM support bracket

Cables
Modules that are currently or recently sold can auto-sense whether the Ethernet cable is
wired as straight-through or crossover. Some modules that were sold earlier cannot. The
MAC address, visible on the module, distinguishes whether the module can. All
CMMmicros and CMM4s can auto-sense the cable scheme.

Where a non auto-sensing module is deployed

◦ a straight-through cable must be used for connection to a network interface card
(NIC).
◦ a crossover cable must be used for connection to a hub, switch, or router.

Motorola-recommended Ethernet and sync cables can be ordered in lengths up to 328 ft
(100 m) from Best-Tronics Manufacturing, Inc. at
http://www.best-tronics.com/motorola.htm. These cables are listed in Table 10 and
Table 11.

Table 10: Recommended outdoor UTP Category 5E cables

Best-Tronics
Part # Description
BT-0562 RJ-45 TO RJ-45; straight-through Ethernet cable
BT-0562S RJ-45 TO RJ-45; shielded straight-through Ethernet cable
BT-0565 RJ-45 TO RJ-45; crossover Ethernet cable
BT-0565S RJ-45 TO RJ-45; shielded crossover Ethernet cable
BT-0563 RJ-11 TO RJ-11; sync cable



Best-Tronics
Part # Description
BT-0563S RJ-11 TO RJ-11; shielded sync cable
RJ-45 to RJ-45; straight shielded Ethernet cable using
BT-0781S outdoor STP Cat 5e cable, lower cost than plenum-rated,
available only in black. Recommended for CMM4 to AP.

NOTE:
Shielded cable is strongly recommended for all AP cluster and BH installations.

Table 11: Recommended indoor UTP Category 5E cables

Best-Tronics
Part # Description
BT-0596 RJ-45 TO RJ-45; straight-through Ethernet cable
BT-0595 RJ-45 TO RJ-45; crossover Ethernet cable

Approved Ethernet cables can also be ordered as bulk cable:

◦ CA-0287
◦ CA-0287S (shielded)
◦ CA-0367 (lower cost, non-plenum-rated),
◦ CA-0367S (shielded, lower cost, non-plenum-rated)

Motorola-approved antenna cables can be ordered in lengths up to 100 ft (30.4 m),
as listed in Table 12.

Table 12: Recommended antenna cables

Best-Tronics
Part # Description
BT-0564 N TO N GPS antenna cable for CMM2
BNC TO N GPS antenna cable for CMMmicro
BT-0716
and CMM4

Category 5 Cable Tester
For purchase within the U.S.A., the CTCAT5-01 Cable Tester is available.



Override Plug
An override plug (sometimes called a default plug) is available to provide access to a
module whose password and/or IP address have been forgotten. This plug allows the AP,
SM, or BH to be accessed using IP address 169.254.1.1 and no password. During the
override session, you can assign any new IP address and set either or both user
passwords (display-only and/or full access) as well as make other parameter changes.

This plug is available from Best-Tronics Manufacturing, Inc. at
http://www.best-tronics.com/motorola.htm as Part BT-0583 (RJ-11 Default Plug).
Alternatively if you wish, you can fabricate an override plug. For instructions, see
Procedure 33 on Page 384 and the pinout in Figure 151 on Page 384.

Alignment Headset
The ACATHS-01 Alignment Headset facilitates
the operation of precisely aiming an SM toward
an AP (or a BHS toward a BHM). This device
produces infinitely variable

◦ pitch, higher when the received signal is
stronger.
◦ volume, louder when jitter is less.

An ACATHS-01 is pictured in Figure 20.
Figure 20: ACATHS-01 alignment
Pinouts for an alternative listening device are headset
provided under Alignment Tone—Technical
Details on Page 186.

Module Housing
The HSG-01 Plastic Housing is available for replacement
of a damaged housing on a module that is otherwise
functional. The HSG-01 is pictured in
Figure 21.

The HSG-01 and all module housings of this design
provide clearances for cable ties on the Ethernet and sync
cables.

RECOMMENDATION:
Use 0.14” (40-lb tensile strength) cable ties
to secure the Ethernet and sync cables to
the cable guides on the module housing.

For the Ethernet cable tie, the Ethernet cable groove is
molded lower at the top edge. For the sync cable tie,
removal of a breakaway plug provides clearance for the
sync cable, and removal of two breakaway side plates
provides clearance for the sync cable tie. Figure 21: HSG-01 Housing



NOTE:
No replacement housing is available for an OFDM radio.

5.3 FREQUENCY BAND RANGES
In the 2.4-, 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz frequency band ranges, APs, SMs, and wireless
Ethernet bridges are available. APs and SMs are also available in the 900-MHz
frequency band range. National restrictions may apply. See Regulatory and Legal
Notices on Page 499.

To avoid self-interference, a network typically uses two or more of these ranges. For
example, where properly arranged, all AP clusters and their respective SMs can use the
2.4-GHz range where the BH links use the 5.7-GHz range. In this scenario, subscriber
links can span as far as 5 miles (8 km) with no reflector dishes, and the BH links can
span as far as 35 miles (56 km) with reflector dishes on both ends or 16 miles (25 km) in
1X operation with LENS on both ends.

Within this example network, wherever the 2.4-GHz module is susceptible to interference
from other sources, AP clusters and their linked SMs may use the 5.2-GHz range to span
as far as 2 miles (3.2 km) with no reflector dishes. The network in this example takes
advantage of frequency band range-specific characteristics of modules as follows:

◦ The 900-MHz modules cover a larger area, albeit with lower throughput, than
modules of the other frequency bands. The 900-MHz modules can be used to
− penetrate foliage
− establish links that span greater distances
− add subscribers
− add overall throughput where modules of other frequency bands cannot be
used (such as where interference would result or space on a tower is
limited).
◦ The 2.4-GHz frequency band range supports AP/SM links of greater than 2-mile
spans (with no reflectors).
◦ The 5.7-GHz frequency band range supports BH links that span as far as 35
miles.



5.4 PRODUCT COMPARISONS

5.4.1 Product Applications
The product applications per frequency band range are is summarized in Table 13.

Table 13: Product applications per frequency band range

Frequency Band Range

Product 900- 2.4- 4.9- 5.2- 5.4- 5.4- 5.7-
MHz GHz GHz GHz GHz GHz GHz
FSK FSK OFDM FSK FSK OFDM FSK
Access Point Module ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Subscriber Module ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Subscriber Module with
1 ● ● ● ●
Reflector
Backhaul Module ● ● ● ●
Backhaul Module with
● ● ● ●
Reflector1
CMMmicro ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
CMM2 ● ● ● ● ●
CMM4 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Power supply ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Surge suppressor ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

NOTES:
1. National or regional regulations may limit EIRP to the same as without a reflector, and
therefore require Transmit Output Power to be reduced. In these cases
◦ the reflector used with an SM reduces beamwidth to reduce interference, but does not
increase the range of the link.
◦ the reflector on both ends of a BH link reduces beamwidth to reduce interference and
also increases the range of the link.

5.4.2 Link Performance and Encryption Comparisons
Encryption options are summarized in Table 14. Typical Line-of-Site (LOS) range and
aggregate useful throughput for PMP links are summarized in Table 15. Typical Line-of-
Site (LOS) range and aggregate useful throughput for PTP links are summarized in
Table 16.



Table 14: Products with encryption options available per frequency band, PMP links

Products available with the
Frequency Band following encryption options

DES or none AES or none

900 MHz ● ●
2.4 GHz @100 mW (ETSI) ● ●
2.4 GHz @ 1W ● ●
4.9 GHz OFDM ●

5.2 GHz ● ●
5.4 GHz FSK ● ●
5.4 GHz OFDM ●
5.7 GHz ● ●

Table 15: Typical range and throughput per frequency band, PMP links

CAP 130 CAP 120, 49400, 54400
Range Range
Round- Round-
Frequency no SM with SM Aggregate trip no SM with SM Aggregate trip
Band Reflector Reflector Throughput Latency Reflector Reflector Throughput Latency
mi (km) mi (km) Mbps msec mi (km) mi (km) Mbps msec

900 MHz4 40 (64) na 4 15

2.4 GHz 0.3 (0.5) 0.3 (0.5) 1 14 6
0.6 (1) 0.6 (1) 1 7 20
ETSI 1
0.6 (1) 0.6 (1) 7 6
2.5 (4) 7.5 (12) 14 6
2.4 GHz 5 (8) 15 (24) 7 20
5 (8) 15 (24) 7 6
1X 5 (8) 7 TBD
4.9
GHz 2X 2.5 (4) 14 TBD
OFDM
3X 1.25 (2) 21 TBD

1 (1.6) na2 14 6
5.2 GHz 2 (3.2) na2 7 20
2
2 (3.2) na 7 6
1 (1.6) 1 (1.6) 3 14 6
5.4 GHz 2 (3.2) 2 (3.2) 3 7 20
3
2 (3.2) 2 (3.2) 7 6

1X 5 (8) 7 TBD
5.4
GHz 2X 2.5 (4) 14 TBD
OFDM
3X 1.25 (2) 21 TBD



CAP 130 CAP 120, 49400, 54400
Range Range
Round- Round-
Frequency no SM with SM Aggregate trip no SM with SM Aggregate trip
Band Reflector Reflector Throughput Latency Reflector Reflector Throughput Latency
mi (km) mi (km) Mbps msec mi (km) mi (km) Mbps msec

1 (1.6) 5 (8) 14 6
5.7 GHz 2 (3.2) 10 (16) 7 20
2 (3.2) 10 (16) 7 6

REFERENCED NOTES:
1. In Europe, 2.4-GHz ETSI and 5.4-GHz SMs can have a reflector added to focus the antenna pattern and
reduce interference, but transmit output power must be reduced to maintain the same EIRP as without a
reflector, so the throughput and range specs for PTMP links remain the same.
2. In the US and Canada, the use of a reflector with a full power radio in the 5.2-GHz frequency band is not
allowed.
3. In US, Europe, and Australia, 5.4-GHz SMs can have a reflector added to focus the antenna pattern, reduce
interference, and improve downlnk gain, but transmit output power must be reduced to maintain the same EIRP
as without a reflector, so the throughput and range specs for PTMP links remain the same. Reflectors are not
allowed on 5.4-GHz SMs in Canada at this time.
4. All 900-MHz APs are CAP 09130s.
GENERAL NOTES:
Range is affected by RF conditions, terrain, obstacles, buildings, and vegetation.
A CAP 130 has an aggregate (sum of uplink plus downlink) throughput or capacity of 14 Mbps, if RF conditions,
range, and SM hardware version permit.
An CSM 130 has an aggregate sustained throughput of 14 Mbps if RF conditions and range permit.
A regular SM can burst to 14 Mbps if RF conditions and range permit, then run at 7 Mbps sustained throughput.
An OFDM SM has an aggregate throughput or capacity of 21 Mbps, if RF conditions and range permit.

Table 16: Typical range and throughput per frequency band, PTP links

Modulation Throughput
Frequency Band
Rate (Mbps)
No Reflectors Both Reflectors

2.4 GHz @100 mW 10 7.5 Mbps to 2 km 7.5 Mbps to 16 km
(ETSI) 20 14 Mbps to 1 km 14 Mbps to 8 km
10 7.5 Mbps to 5 mi (8 km) 7.5 Mbps to 35 mi (56 km)
2.4 GHz @ 1W
20 14 Mbps to 3 mi (5 km) 14 Mbps to 35 mi (56 km)
1X 7 Mbps to 5 mi (8 km)
4.9 GHz
OFDM 2X 14 Mbps to 2.5 mi (4 km)
3X 21 Mbps to 1.25 mi (2 km)
10 7.5 Mbps to 2 mi (3.2 km)
5.2 GHz
20
10 7.5 Mbps to 10 mi (16 km)
5.2 GHz ER
20 14 Mbps to 5 mi (8 km)



Modulation Throughput
Frequency Band
Rate (Mbps)
No Reflectors Both Reflectors

10 7.5 Mbps to 2 mi (3.2 km) 7.5 Mbps to 10 mi (16 km)1
5.4 GHz
20 14 Mbps to 1 mi (1.6 km) 14 Mbps to 5 mi (8 km)1
1X 7 Mbps to 5 mi (8 km)
5.4 GHz
OFDM 2X 14 Mbps to 2.5 mi (4 km)
3X 21 Mbps to 1.25 mi (2 km)
10 7.5 Mbps to 2 mi (3.2 km) 7.5 Mbps to 35 mi (56 km)
5.7 GHz
20 14 Mbps to 1 mi (1.6 km) 14 Mbps to 35 mi (56 km)

NOTES:
1. These ranges are with power reduced to within 1 W (30 dBm) EIRP.
2. Use the Link Estimator tool to estimate throughput for a given link.

5.4.3 Cluster Management Product Comparison
Motorola offers a choice among products for cluster management: CMM2, CMMmicro,
or CMM4. Your choice should be based on the installation environment and your
requirements. The similarities and differences between these two products are
summarized in Table 17.

Table 17: Cluster management product similarities and differences

Characteristic CMM2 CMMmicro CMM4
20.75" H x "14.75" x W x
17” H x 13” W x 6.5” D 12” H x 10” W x 3” D
Approximate "7.75" D
(43 cm H x 33 cm W x (30 cm H x 25 cm W x
size (52.7 cm H x 37.5 cm W x
7 cm D) 8 cm D)
19.7 cm D)
Approximate
25 lb ( 11.3 kg) 8 lb (3.5 kg) 14 lb (6.4 kg)
weight
one Ethernet/power cable
per radio. one Ethernet/power/sync one Ethernet/power/sync
Cabling
cable per radio. cable per radio.
one sync cable per radio.
Network
8 Ethernet ports 8 Ethernet ports 8 Ethernet ports
interconnection
auto-negotiates to full or auto-negotiates to full or auto-negotiates to full or
Data throughput
half duplex half duplex half duplex
Ethernet
auto-negotiates to auto-negotiates to auto-negotiates to
operating
10Base-T or 100Base-TX 10Base-T or 100Base-TX 10Base-T or 100Base-TX
speed standard
one for data feed
Additional one copper
one for local access none
Ethernet ports 10/100/1000Base-T
(notebook computer)



Characteristic CMM2 CMMmicro CMM4
12 10/100Base-T ports
Optional
none none 1 copper Gigabit port
Ethernet switch
1 fiber optic Gigabit port
integrated 24-V DC to external 24-V DC to power
Power supply power APs, BHs, and APs, BHs, and GPS 20-v DC power output
GPS receiver receiver
SNMP
management none provided provided
capability
Sync (to prevent carried by the additional
embedded in power-over- embedded in power-over-
self- serial cable to each AP
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable
interference) and BHM
provided by NTP (Network
carried by the additional provided by NTP (Network
Time Protocol).
Time & Date serial cable to each AP Time Protocol). CMM4
CMMmicro can be an NTP
and BHM can be an NTP server.
server.
enclosure and power only the enclosure (not the only the enclosure (not the
Weatherized
supply power supply) power supply)
web pages for status, web pages for status,
Web interface none configuration, GPS status, configuration, GPS status,
and other purposes and other purposes

NOTE:
Auto-negotiation of data throughput and Ethernet operating speed depend on the connected device
being set to auto-negotiate as well.

Each of these cluster management products is supported by its own dedicated user guide
that which provides instructions for mounting and cabling the unit and verifying its
connectivity to the network.

5.5 ANTENNAS FOR 900-MHz CONNECTORIZED MODULES
Like the 2.4-, 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz module, the 900-MHz connectorized module has

◦ the same housing.
◦ a covered Ethernet port.
◦ a utility port for an alignment headset, sync cable to CMM2, or override plug.

The 900-MHz AP or SM is available either

◦ as a connectorized unit with a 16-inch (approximately 40-cm) cable with a male
N-type connector for connection to the antenna.
◦ with an integrated horizontally-polarized antenna in a different form factor.



Motorola has certified three connectorized flat panel antenna options. Motorola resells
one of these. The three flat panel options are as follows:

◦ 10 dBi Maxrad Model # Z1681 (MP9027XFPT or Motorola AN900A),
26 dBm (390 mW). See http://www.maxrad.com/.
◦ 10 dBi Mars Model # MA-IS91-T2, 26 dBm (390 mW).
See http://www.mars-antennas.com/.
◦ 10 dBi MTI Model # MT-2630003/N (MT-263003/N), 26 dBm (390 mW).
See http://www.mtiwe.com/.

The attributes of each of these options are identical:

◦ gain—10 dBi
◦ polarization—vertical or horizontal
◦ cable—12-inch (30.5 cm)
◦ connector—female N-type
◦ beamwidth—approximately 60° vertical and 60° horizontal at 3 dBm

Motorola has certified other antennas, which are available through product resellers. The
attributes of one of these other certified antennas include

◦ gain—10 dBi
◦ dimensions—12 x12 x 1 inches (30.5 x 30.5 x 2.5 cm)
◦ weight—3.3 lbs (1.5 kg)
◦ polarization—vertical or horizontal
◦ connector—female N-type
◦ beamwidth—approximately 60° vertical and 60° horizontal at 3 dBm

An additional certified antenna is as follows: 17 dBi Last Mile Gear Cyclone
Model # 900-17H Yagi, 18 dBm (63 mW). See http://www.lastmilegear.com/.

Examples of these antennas are pictured in Figure 5 on Page 52.



5.6 ADJUNCTIVE SOFTWARE PRODUCTS
The capabilities of available applications and tools are summarized for comparison in
Table 18. In this table, Prizm represents the element management system capabilities
of Prizm, CNUT represents Canopy Network Updater Tool, and BAM represents the
Bandwidth and Authentication Manager capabilities in Prizm.

Table 18: Applications and tools

Application or Tool

Prizm
Capability

Server

Server
Prizm
CNUT

BAM
authenticates SMs ● ●
controls authentication in APs ● ●
manages Committed Information Rate (CIR) ● ●
has dependency on another application3 ●
automatically discovers elements ● ●
exports network information with hierarchy ● ●
supports user-defined folder-based operations ● ●
senses FPGA version on an element ● ●
upgrades FPGA version on an element ●
manages the high-priority channel ● ●
imports network information with hierarchy ● ●
interface to a higher-level network management
system (NMS)
●

interface to an operations support system (OSS) ●
manages Maximum Information Rate (MIR) ● ●
automatically works from root (highest) level ●
element selection can be individual or multiple ● ● ●
element selection can be criteria based ●
element selection can be user-defined branch ● ●
senses software release on an element ● ●
upgrades software release on an element ●
manages VLAN parameters ● ●
provides access to element web interface ●



5.7 Prizm
Prizm Release 3.2 supports discovery and management of elements that run System
Release 9.4.2.

5.7.1 Network Definition and Element Discovery
Prizm allows the operator to partition the entire network into criteria-based subsets that
can be independently managed. To assist in this task of defining networks, Prizm auto
discovers network elements that are in

◦ user-defined IP address ranges
◦ SM-to-AP relationships with APs in the user-defined range
◦ BHS-to-BHM relationships with BHMs in the user-defined range.

For an AP, SM, wireless Ethernet bridge, CMMmicro, or CMM4, Prizm

◦ auto discovers the element to the extent possible.
◦ includes the element in the network tree.
◦ shows general information.
◦ shows software-driven information.
◦ supports software-specific operations.

For a generic element, Prizm

◦ auto discovers the element as only a generic network element.
◦ includes the element in the network tree.
◦ shows general information.
◦ shows events and alerts.
◦ charts port activity.

For passive elements (such as CMM2 or a non-manageable switch or hub), Prizm allows
you to enter into the network tree a folder/group with name, asset/owner information, and
descriptive information.



In Prizm Release 3.2, supported element types include

Canopy Access Point Module
Canopy Prizm EMS
Canopy Subscriber Module
Cluster Management Module micro
Cluster Management Module-4
Cluster Management Module-4 Switch
Cluster Management Module-4 Switch 14 Port
Generic Group
Generic SNMP Device
Generic SNMP Device (08 Port)
PMP 400 AP (Canopy 4.9 OFDM Access Point)
PMP 400 SM (Canopy 4.9 OFDM Subscriber Module)
PTP 100 Master (Canopy Backhaul Master Module)
PTP 100 Slave (Canopy Backhaul Slave Module)
PTP 200 Master (Canopy 4.9 OFDM Backhaul Master Module)
PTP 200 Master (Canopy 5.4 OFDM Backhaul Master Module)
PTP 200 Slave (Canopy 4.9 OFDM Backhaul Slave Module)
PTP 200 Slave (Canopy 5.4 OFDM Backhaul Slave Module)
PTP 300 Master (High-Speed Backhaul Master Module)
PTP 300 Slave (High-Speed Backhaul Slave Module)
PTP 400 Master (High-Speed Backhaul Master Module 30/60 Mbps)
PTP 400 Slave (High-Speed Backhaul Slave Module 30/60 Mbps)
PTP 500 Master (High-Speed Backhaul Master Module)
PTP 500 Slave (High-Speed Backhaul Slave Module)
PTP 600 Master (High-Speed Backhaul Master Module 150/300 Mbps)
PTP 600 Slave (High-Speed Backhaul Slave Module 150/300 Mbps)
Powerline MU/Gateway
Powerline Modem

5.7.2 Monitoring and Fault Management
Prizm receives the traps that elements send and generates an alert for each of these.
Prizm also allows the user to establish sets of criteria that would generate other alerts
and trigger email notifications. Optionally, the user can specify a trap template. In this
case, Prizm receives traps for generic elements in the network.

For any individual element that the user selects, Prizm offers text and graphed displays of
element configuration parameters and performance statistics from an interval that the
user specifies.

5.7.3 Element Management
Prizm allows the user to perform any of the following operations on any specified element
or group of elements:

◦ Manage
− large amounts of SNMP MIB data.
− module passwords.
− IP addresses.



− other communications setup parameters.
− site information: Site Name, Site Location, and Site Contact parameters.
◦ Reset the element.

5.7.4 BAM Subsystem in Prizm
Prizm integrates Bandwidth and Authentication Manager (BAM) functionality and
supports the maintenance of authentication and bandwidth data on a RADIUS server.

Either of the following modes is available for the Prizm server, subject to licensing:

◦ BAM-only functionality, which manages only authentication, bandwidth service
plans, and VLAN profiles of SMs.
◦ Full Prizm functionality, which manages attributes for all elements and
authentication of SMs.

One difference between a service plan (or VLAN profile) and a configuration template
that has the identical set of attributes is that the former is a long-term association
whereas the latter is a one-time push to the element. When a service plan or VLAN
profile is modified, the change is automatically applied to all elements that have the
association. Another difference is that a configuration template cannot overwrite any
values that a service plan or VLAN profile has set in an element.

5.7.5 Northbound Interface
Prizm provides three interfaces to higher-level systems:

◦ a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent for integration with a
network management system (NMS).
◦ a Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) XML-based application programming
interface (API) for web services that supports integration with an operations
support systems (OSS) such as a customer relationship management (CRM),
billing, or provisioning system.
◦ console automation that allows such higher-level systems to launch and
appropriately display the Prizm management console in GUI that is custom
developed, using the PrizmEMS™ Software Development Kit (SDK), which
Motorola provides for this purpose.

Together these interfaces constitute the Northbound Interface feature. Prizm server
administrator tasks and GUI developer information are provided in the PrizmEMS™
Software Development Kit (SDK). This SDK also describes the how to define new
element types and customize the Details views.

All other features of the Prizm product are supported by the dedicated document
Motorola Canopy Prizm Release 3.2 User Guide and associated release notes.



5.8 LICENSE MANAGEMENT
Under the original licensing regime, licenses were permanently tied to the Media Access
Control (MAC) address of the equipment that was licensed or that used the licensed
feature. Thus, they were not transferable. Under server-based license management, for
some functionalities, Motorola offers licenses that

◦ float upon demand within the network.
◦ are tied to only the MAC address of the license management server for which
they were ordered.

Server-based license management adds flexibility and makes available licenses that
previously would have been held by de-commissioned equipment. License management
technology from Macrovision, based on a FLEXnet™ Publisher license management
model, provides the platform for server-based licensing. Capabilities that are authorized
by licenses on this platform are FLEXenabled products. In this platform, the license
management server checks and then either assigns or declines to assign a license in real
time.

The total number of floating license keys that you need for any feature is the highest
number that you will ever want to have simultaneously in use. The proper placement of
these keys and the number and placement of fixed licenses are listed in
Table 19.

Table 19: Correct placement of license keys

On This
License If This
In This Release Must Be in Directory Server
Key Platform
Device
PrizmEMS C:CanopyPrizmFLEXnetlicense_files Windows
Server,
Element
Pack
BAM
Prizm for full Server,
LM server1
mgmt AP Auth Enterprise
/usr/local/Canopy/Prizm/FLEXnet/license_files
Server Linux
(APAS),
Cap 2
Canopy
Lite
BAM C:CanopyPrizmFLEXnetlicense_files Windows
Server,
AP Auth
Prizm for BAM- Server 2
only or redundant (APAS), Enterprise LM server
BAM /usr/local/Canopy/Prizm/FLEXnet/license_files
Cap 2 Linux
Canopy
Lite

NOTES:
1. One BAMServer key and one PrizmEMSServer key required per each full management Prizm server.
2. One key required per each deployed BAM server.



5.9 SPECIFICATIONS AND LIMITATIONS

5.9.1 Radios
Radio specifications are provided at

http://www.motorola.com/business/v/index.jsp?vgnextoid=7cc777c8cd658110VgnVCM10
00008406b00aRCRD&vgnextchannel=926577c8cd658110VgnVCM1000008406b00aRC
RD&appInstanceName=default for all radios, and specifically at

◦ http://www.motorola.com/business/v/index.jsp?vgnextoid=7cc777c8cd658110Vg
nVCM1000008406b00aRCRD&vgnextchannel=926577c8cd658110VgnVCM100
0008406b00aRCRD&appInstanceName=default for PTP bridges.
◦ http://www.motorola.com/business/v/index.jsp?vgnextoid=7cc777c8cd658110Vg
nVCM1000008406b00aRCRD&vgnextchannel=926577c8cd658110VgnVCM100
0008406b00aRCRD&appInstanceName=default for PMP modules.

5.9.2 Cluster Management Products
CMM specifications are provided in the documents that support the various models of
CMM.

5.9.3 600SS Surge Suppressor
600SS Surge Suppressor specifications are as follows:

Dimensions H 5.2" x W 5.0" x D 1.7" (132 mm x 127 mm x 43.2 mm)

Space between mounting holes 4.24" (108 mm)

Size of Knockouts 0.75" (19 mm)

Weight 0.4 lbs

Operating Temperature −40°C to +55°C (−40°F to 131°F)
Internal Connectors RJ-45
1500J peak energy dissipation with 10/10000 micro sec
Capacity
waveform
Digital Noise Isolation Option
Yes
(to eliminate ground loops)



6 DIFFERENTIATING AMONG COMPONENTS

6.1 INTERPRETING MODEL NUMBER
The model number of a module typically represents

◦ the model number, which may indicate
− radio frequency band range.
− link distance range.
− whether the module is a CAP/CSM 130 or not.
− the factory-set encryption standard.
◦ the module type.
◦ whether the reflector dish is included.
◦ the antenna scheme of the module.
◦ whether adjustable power in the module is preset to low.
◦ the modulation capability.

Radio Frequency Band Range
The leading two digits usually indicate the frequency band range in which the module can
operate. For example, if the model number is 5700BH, then the frequency band range of
the module is 5.7 GHz.
↓
5 7 0 0 B H

You cannot change the frequency band range of the module.

Link Distance Range or Series 130/09130
The third digit in the model number may indicate whether the module is an extended
range, or a 130/09130 instead of a 120 in the PMP 100 Series. 1 indicates extended
range, with power adjustable up to 23 dBm. 5 in the third position (5250AP, for example)
indicates that the module is a CAP 130 or CSM 130. However, model numbering for 900-
MHz APs and SMs differs from this general rule. All APs and SMs in this frequency band
range are 09130, but none of their model numbers use 5 in the third position.

↓
5 7 0 0 B H

0 in the third position (5200AP, for example) indicates that the module is standard (not
extended range, but rather capped to the maximum of 5 dBm, and not a CAP 130 or
CSM 130).

You cannot change the link distance range of the module. However, you can license an
SM to uncap its aggregate throughput (for capability of the CSM 130).



Encryption Standard or Frequency Band Range
The fourth digit in the model number usually indicates the encryption standard that was
preset at the factory. 1 indicates the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). 0 indicates
the Data Encryption Standard (DES) standard. For example, if the model number is
5701BH, then transmissions from the module are encrypted according to AES. If the
model number is 5700BH, then transmissions from the module are encrypted according
to DES.

↓
5 7 0 0 B H

You cannot change the encryption basis (from DES to AES, for example), but you can
enable or disable the encryption.

Module Type
The next two alpha characters indicate the module type. For example, CK indicates that
the module is a Cluster Management Module.

↓
1 0 9 0 C K

The module type cannot be changed.

Reflector Added
In specifications tables and price lists, the trailing characters RF or RF20 indicate that the
associated information applies to the module being

◦ mounted to the 27RD Passive Reflector Dish, in the case of specifications.
◦ ordered with the 27RD Passive Reflector Dish, in the case of price lists.

↓
2 4 0 0 B H R F 2 0

However, this designation is not shown on either label of the module, and a module
ordered with the dish can be deployed without the dish.

Antenna Scheme, Low Power Option, or Indoor Module
In specifications tables and price lists, the trailing character C indicates that the module is
connectorized for an external antenna. CLP indicates that the module is low power and
connectorized (for example, 2400SMCLP).

↓
9 0 0 0 S M C



An F in this position indicates that the module has an integrated (internal) antenna with a
band-pass, also known as interference migration, filter (for example, 9000APF). F2 in this
position indicates that the module has a 2-channel band-pass filter (9000APF2). HZ
indicates that the module has a horizontally polarized internal antenna (5200SMHZ).

A Q in this position indicates that the module has an integrated antenna and is designed
for indoor deployment (for example, 9000SMQ).

You cannot transform a module from connectorized to internal antenna or from internal
antenna to connectorized, but you may have flexibility in what external antenna you
deploy with it.

Modulation Capability
A trailing 20 indicates that the module is capable of being set to either

◦ 20-Mbps modulation (aggregate throughput of 14 Mbps) for Full operation
◦ 10-Mbps modulation (aggregate throughput of 7 Mbps) for Lite operation.

↓
2 4 0 0 B H R F 2 0

The absence of a trailing 20 indicates that the module is capable of only 10-Mbps
modulation (Lite).

6.2 SORTED MODEL NUMBERS
Model numbers of PMP 100, PMP 400, PTP 100, and PTP 200 series modules are listed
in Table 20. Not all products are available in all regions or in all markets. Check with your
distributor or reseller for availability.

Table 20: Model numbers

Integrated Antenna Connectorized for Antenna
Range

Except 130 Series 130 PMP 100 Except 130 Series 130 PMP 100
DES AES DES AES DES AES DES AES
9000AP 9001AP 9000APC 9001APC
9000APF 9001APF 9000SMC 9001SMC
9000APF2 9001APF2
900
MHz 9000SM 9001SM
9000SMF 9001SMF
9000SMF2 9001SMF2
9000SMQ
2400AP 2401AP 2450AP 2451AP 2400SMCLP 2401SMCLP
2400SM 2401SM 2450SM 2451SM
2.4 2400BH 2401BH
GHz 2400BH20 2401BH20
2400BHRF 2401BHRF
2400BHRF20 2401BHRF20



Integrated Antenna Connectorized for Antenna
Range Except 130 Series 130 PMP 100 Except 130 Series 130 PMP 100
DES AES DES AES DES AES DES AES
4940AP 4941AP 4940APC 4941APC
4.9
4940SM 4941SM 4940SMC 4941SMC
GHz
4940BH 4941BH 4940BHC 4941BHC
5200AP 5201AP 5250AP 5251AP
5200APHZ 5201SM 5250APHZ 5251SM
5200SM 5201BH 5250SM
5.2
5200SMHZ 5211BH20 5250SMHZ
GHz
5200BH 5211BHRF
5210BHRF 5211BHRF20
5210BHRF20
5400AP 5401AP 5450AP 5451AP
5400APHZ 5401SM 5450APHZ 5451SM
5400SM 5401BH 5450SM
5.4
5400SMHZ 5401BH20 5450SMHZ
GHz
FSK 5400BH 5401BHRF
5400BH20 5401BHRF20
5400BHRF
5400BHRF20

5.4 5440AP 5441AP 5440APC 5441APC
GHz 5440SM 5441SM 5440SMC 5441SMC
OFDM 5440BH 5441BH 5440BHC 5441BHC
5700AP 5701AP 5750AP 5751AP 5700APC 5701APC 5750APC 5751APC
5700APHZ 5701SM 5750APHZ 5751SM 5700BHC 5701BHC
5700SM 5701BH 5750SM 5700BHC20
5.7 5700SMHZ 5701BH20 5750SMHZ
GHz 5700BH 5701BHRF
5700BH20 5701BHRF20
5700BHRF
5700BHRF20

6.3 INTERPRETING ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER (ESN)
Module labels contain a product serial number that could be significant in your dealings
with Motorola or your supply chain. This is the electronic serial number (ESN), also
known as the Media Access Control (MAC) address, of the module. This hexadecimal
number identifies the module in

◦ communications between modules.
◦ the data that modules store about each other (for example, in the Registered To
field).
◦ the data that the BAM software applies to manage authentication and bandwidth.
◦ Prizm auto discovery of SMs through the AP (or BHS through the BHM).
◦ software upgrades performed by CNUT.
◦ information that CNUT passes to external tools.



6.4 FINDING THE MODEL (PART) NUMBER AND ESN
The labels and locations of module model (part) numbers and ESNs are shown in Table
21.

Table 21: Labels and locations of model (part) numbers and ESNs

Numeric Label and Location
String Older Modules Newer Modules
Model number PN outside Model # outside
ESN/MAC address S/N inside ESN outside



7 LINK CHARACTERISTICS

7.1 UNDERSTANDING BANDWIDTH MANAGEMENT

7.1.1 Downlink Frame
A full frame consists of a downlink frame and an uplink frame. The downlink frame
transmitted from the AP consists of

◦ a beacon
◦ an uplink map that tells each SM which slots it can use in the next uplink frame
◦ broadcast and per-SM data.

Each SM retrieves broadcast data and data addressed to that SM and passes that data
through its Ethernet port to connected devices.

The beacon communicates

◦ timing
◦ ratio of uplink to downlink allocation
◦ ESN of the AP
◦ color code
◦ protocol (point-to-point or point-to-multipoint)
◦ number of registered SMs
◦ frame number
◦ number of reserved control slots
◦ air delay, subject to the value of the Max Range parameter in the AP.

7.1.2 Uplink Frame
The uplink frame transmitted from the SMs consists of

◦ per-SM data in slots assigned by the uplink map in the previous downlink frame
◦ bandwidth requests for data slots in future uplink frames.

Bandwidth requests are sent as control slots, which are half the size of a data slot. The
operator configures a number of reserved control slots. In addition to the reserved control
slots, space in any data slots in a given uplink frame not assigned by the uplink map is
also available for bandwidth requests.

An SM makes a bandwidth request when it has data to transmit. Bandwidth requests are
contention requests and are the only part of the Media Access Layer that uses
contention. If two or more SMs make bandwidth requests using the same control slot (or
half-unused-data slot), it is likely the AP will not be able to understand the requests. The
SMs retransmit any bandwidth requests that do not result in assignments in the uplink
map.



7.1.3 Slot Calculation
The frame consists of slots which hold 64-byte fragments of packet data. The number of
uplink and downlink data slots is determined by

◦ the Downlink Data % configured by the operator, which determines the ratio of
downlink to uplink data slots.
◦ the Max Range setting configured by the operator, which determines how much
time in the frame must be reserved for air delay and not used for data.
◦ the number of reserved Control Slots configured by the operator. Control slots
are half the size of data slots and every other reserved control slot (starting with
either the first or second, depending on how the Max Range setting has
influenced frame structure) reduces the number of data slots by one.

7.1.4 Startup Sequence
When an SM boots, the following sequence occurs:

1. The SM detects the beacon slot from an AP.
2. The SM synchronizes with the AP.
3. If BAM is configured on the AP, and the AP is licensed for authentication, then
a. the AP sends a Registration Request message to Prizm for authentication.
b. following a successful challenge, Prizm returns an Authentication Grant
message to the AP.
c. the AP sends a Registration Grant to the SM.

If BAM is not configured on the AP, or if the AP is not licensed for authentication, then the
AP simply returns the Registration Grant to the SM.

This Registration Grant includes the air delay (distance) between the AP and SM. The
SMs are at various distances from the AP, and each of them uses its air delay value to
determine when to begin its uplink transmission. This results in uplink transmissions from
multiple SMs at various distances all being in sync when the AP receives them.

7.1.5 Data Transfer Capacity
Modules use Time Division Duplex (TDD) on a common frequency to divide frames for
uplink (orange) and downlink (green) usage, as shown in Figure 22.

Figure 22: TDD dividing frames



7.1.6 Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters
Point-to-multipoint links use the following four MIR parameters for bandwidth
management:

◦ Sustained Uplink Data Rate (kbps)
◦ Uplink Burst Allocation (kb)
◦ Sustained Downlink Data Rate (kbps)
◦ Downlink Burst Allocation (kb)

You can independently set each of these parameters per AP or per SM.

Token Bucket Algorithm
The software uses a token bucket algorithm that

◦ stores credits (tokens) for the SM to spend on bandwidth for reception or
transmission.
◦ drains tokens during reception or transmission.
◦ refills with tokens at the sustained rate set by the network operator.

For each token, the SM can send toward the network in the uplink (or the AP can send
toward the SM in the downlink) an equivalent number of kilobits. Two buckets determine
the permitted throughput: one in the SM for uplink and one in the AP for downlink.

The applicable set of Uplink Burst Allocation and Downlink Burst Allocation
parameters determine the number of tokens that can fill each bucket. When the SM
transmits (or the AP transmits) a packet, the equivalent number of tokens is removed
from the uplink (or downlink) bucket.

Except when full, the bucket is continuously being refilled with tokens at rates that the
applicable set of Sustained Uplink Data Rate and Sustained Downlink Data Rate
parameters specify. The bucket often drains at a rate that is much faster than the
sustained data rate but can refill at only the sustained data rate. Thus, the effects of the
allocation and rate parameters on packet delay are as follows:

◦ the burst allocation affects how many kilobits are processed before packet delay
is imposed.
◦ the sustained data rate affects the packet delay that is imposed.

Which set of these MIR parameters are applicable depends on the interactions of other
parameter values. These interactions are described under Setting the Configuration
Source on Page 292. Also, where the Configuration Source parameter setting in the AP
specifies that BAM values should be used, they are used only if Prizm is configured to
send the values that it stores for the MIR parameters.



MIR Data Entry Checking
Uplink and downlink MIR is enforced as shown in Figure 23.

NOTE:
In these figures, entry refers to the setting in the data rate parameter, not the
burst allocation parameter.

uplink entry x aggregate cap for the SM
uplink cap enforced =
uplink entry + downlink entry

downlink entry x aggregate cap for the SM
downlink cap enforced =
uplink entry + downlink entry

Figure 23: Uplink and downlink rate caps adjusted to apply aggregate cap

For example, in the SM, if you set the Sustained Uplink Data Rate parameter to 2,000
kbps and the Sustained Downlink Data Rate parameter to 10,000 kbps, then the uplink
and downlink MIR that will be enforced for the SM can be calculated as shown in Figure
24.

2,000 kbps x 7,000 kbps
uplink cap enforced = = 1,167 kbps
2,000 kbps + 10,000 kbps

10,000 kbps x 7,000 kbps
downlink cap enforced = = 5,833 kbps
2,000 kbps + 10,000 kbps

Figure 24: Uplink and downlink rate cap adjustment example

In this example case, the derived 1,167-kbps uplink and 5,833-kbps downlink MIR sum to
the fixed 7,000-kbps aggregate cap of the SM.

7.1.7 Committed Information Rate
The Committed Information Rate (CIR) capability feature enables the service provider to
guarantee to any subscriber that bandwidth will never decrease to below a specified
minimum, unless CIR is oversubscribed. Bandwidth can be, and typically will be, higher
than the minimum, but this guarantee helps the WISP to attract and retain subscribers.



In BAM Release 2.1 and in Prizm Release 2.0, CIR configuration is supported as follows:

◦ The GUI allows you to view and change CIR configuration parameters per SM.
◦ When an SM successfully registers and authenticates, if BAM or Prizm has CIR
configuration data for the SM, then messages make the CIR configuration
available to the SM, depending on the Configuration Source setting. (See Setting
the Configuration Source on Page 292.)
◦ The operator can disable the CIR feature in the SM without deleting the CIR
configuration data.

7.1.8 Bandwidth from the SM Perspective
In the SM, normal web browsing, e-mail, small file transfers, and short streaming video
are rarely rate limited with practical bandwidth management (QoS) settings. When the
SM processes large downloads such as software upgrades and long streaming video or a
series of medium-size downloads, the bucket rapidly drains, the burst limit is reached,
and some packets are delayed. The subscriber experience is more affected in cases
where the traffic is more latency sensitive.

Example download times for various arbitrary tiers of service are shown in Table 63 on
Page 390 and Table 64 on Page 391.

7.1.9 Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings
If the Burst Allocation is set to 1200 kb and the Sustained Data Rate is set to 128 kbps, a
data burst of 1000 kb is transmitted at full speed because the Burst Allocation is set high
enough. After the burst, the bucket experiences a significant refill at the Sustained Data
Rate. This configuration uses the advantage of the settable Burst Allocation.

If both the Burst Allocation and the Sustained Data Rate are set to 128 kb, a burst is
limited to the Burst Allocation value. This configuration does not take advantage of the
settable Burst Allocation.

If the Burst Allocation is set to 128 kb and the Sustained Data Rate is set to 256 kbps, the
actual rate will be the burst allocation (but in kbps). As above, this configuration does not
take advantage of the settable Burst Allocation.

7.1.10 High-priority Bandwidth
To support low-latency traffic such as VoIP (Voice over IP) or video, the system
implements a high-priority channel. This channel does not affect the inherent latencies in
the system but allows high-priority traffic to be immediately served. The high-priority pipe
separates low-latency traffic from traffic that is latency tolerant, such as standard web
traffic and file downloads.

IMPORTANT!
The number of channels available to the AP is reduced by the number of SMs
configured for the high-priority channel. With this feature enabled on all SMs, an
AP can support 100 SMs (instead of 200).



A module prioritizes traffic by

◦ reading the Low Latency bit (Bit 3) in the IPv4 Type of Service (ToS) byte in a
received packet.
◦ reading the 802.1p field of the 802.1Q header in a received packet, where VLAN
is enabled on the module.
◦ comparing the 6-bit Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) field in the ToS
byte of a received packet to a corresponding value in the DiffServe tab of the
Configuration page of the module.

Low Latency Bit
Bit 3 is set by a device outside the system. In the uplink frame, the SM monitors Bit 3.
If this bit is set, then

◦ the SM prioritizes this traffic in its high-priority queue according to AP
configuration settings for the high-priority channel.
◦ the system sends the packet on the high-priority channel and services this
channel before any normal traffic.

802.1P Field
See Priority on VLANs (802.1p) on Page 170.

DSCP Field
Like Bit 3 of the original IPv4 ToS byte, the DSCP field (Bits 0 through 5) in the redefined
ToS byte is set by a device outside the system. A packets contains no flag that indicates
whether the encoding is for the Low Latency bit or the DSCP field. For this reason, you
must ensure that all elements in your trusted domain, including routers and endpoints, set
and read the ToS byte with the same scheme.

Modules monitor ToS bytes with DSCP fields, but with the following differences:

◦ The 6-bit length of the field allows it to specify one of 64 service differentiations.
◦ These correlate to 64 individual (CodePoint) parameters in the DiffServe tab of
the Configuration page.
◦ Per RFC 2474, 3 of these 64 are preset and cannot be changed. (See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1902.html.)
◦ For any or all of the remaining 61 CodePoint parameters, you can specify a value
of
− 0 through 3 for low-priority handling.
− 4 through 7 for high-priority handling.

RECOMMENDATION:
Ensure that your Differentiated Services domain boundary nodes mark any
entering packet, as needed, so that it specifies the appropriate Code Point for
that traffic and domain. This prevents theft of service level.



An example of the DiffServe tab in the Configuration page and parameter descriptions
are provided under DiffServe Tab of the AP on Page 253. This tab and its rules are
identical from module type to module type. However, any of the 61 configurable Code
Points can be set to a different value from module to module, thus defining unique per-
hop behavior for some traffic.

This tab in the AP and BHM sets the priorities for the various packets in the downstream
(sent from the public network). This tab in the SM and BHS sets the priorities for the
various packets in the upstream (sent to the public network).

Typically, some SMs attach to older devices that use the ToS byte as originally formatted,
and others to newer devices that use the DSCP field. The default values in the DiffServe
tab allow your modules to prioritize traffic from the older devices roughly the same as
they traditionally have. However, these default values may result in more high-priority
traffic as DSCP fields from the newer devices are read and handled. So, after making any
changes in the DiffServe tab, carefully monitor the high-priority channel for high packet
rates

◦ in SMs that you have identified as those to initially set and watch.
◦ across your network when you have broadly implemented Code Point values,
such as via SNMP.

7.1.11 Traffic Scheduling
This release requires APs, BHs, and AES SMs to be Series P9 or later hardware.2
The characteristics of traffic scheduling in a sector are summarized in
Table 22.

Table 22: Characteristics of traffic scheduling

Category Factor Treatment
Aggregate throughput, less
Throughput 14 Mbps
additional overhead
Number of frames required
1
for the scheduling process
Latency Round-trip latency1 ≈ 6 ms
AP broadcast the download
No
schedule

2
See Designations for Hardware in Radios on Page 377.



Category Factor Treatment
Dynamic, based
Allocation for uplink high-
on amount of
priority traffic on amount of
high-priority
high-priority traffic
traffic
Dynamic, based
Allocation for downlink high-
High-priority on amount of
priority traffic on amount of
Channel high-priority
high-priority traffic
traffic
1. CIR high-priority
2. CIR low-priority
Order of transmission
3. Other high-priority
4. Other low-priority
Transmit
Support for Transmit Frame In Release 7.0 and
Frame
Spreading feature later
Spreading
CIR Capability In all releases

NOTES:
1. For 2.4- and 5.n-GHz modules.

CAUTION!
Power requirements affect the recommended maximums for power cord length
feeding the CMMmicro or CMM4. See the dedicated user guide that supports
the CMM that you are deploying. However, the requirements do not affect the
maximums for the CMM2.

Packets that have a priority of 4 to 7 in either the DSCP or a VLAN 802.1p tag are
automatically sent on the high-priority channel, but only where the high-priority channel is
enabled.

7.1.12 2X Operation
A General tab option in both CSM 130s and hardware series P9 and greater CSM 120s
provides double the aggregate throughput for SMs that are nearer than half of the
maximum typical range from the AP. The requirements of this feature are as follows:

◦ The AP must be a CAP 130 (Advantage AP).
◦ The SM must be near the AP, roughly half the range of 1X.
◦ The SM must be of the P9 hardware series or later and enabled for hardware
scheduling. See Designations for Hardware on Page 377.
◦ The 2X Rate parameter in the SM must be set to enabled. This is the default
setting.
◦ The amount of noise and multipath must be low enough to allow the receiver in
the 6 dB less sensitive (2X) state to maintain a high carrier-to-interference (C/I)
ratio.



The flexibility of this feature is as follows:

◦ At the time of registration, signaling is at the 1X rate. However, if the above
requirements are all met, then the SM switches to 2X.
◦ Thereafter, whenever RF conditions are unfavorable for 2X operation, the SM
switches to 1X. When favorable RF conditions allow, the SM switches back to
2X, if user data is present at that time.
◦ Similarly, whenever no user data is present, the SM switches to 1X. When user
data flow resumes, the SM switches back to 2X, if RF conditions allow.
◦ Both links for the SM (uplink and downlink) are independent for this feature.
(One can be operating at 2X operation while the other is operating at 1X.)
◦ Other SMs in the sector can be communicating with the AP at the other
modulation rate.
◦ Although subscribers with CSM 120s realize higher bursts, and subscribers with
CSM 130s and CSM 09130s realize both higher burst and higher sustained
throughput, the network operator realizes higher sector throughput capacity in
the AP.

The effect of 2X operation on aggregate throughput for the SM is indicated in Table 23.

Table 23: Effect of 2X operation on throughput for the SM

Typical Aggregate Rates1
Type of SM
Sustained2 Burst2
CSM 09130 4 Mbps 4 Mbps
CSM 120 with at least
7 Mbps 14 Mbps
P9 Hardware Series
CSM 54400 14 Mbps 14 Mbps

NOTES:
1. Subject to competition among all SMs in the sector.
2. Can be less if limited by the value of Downlink Data set
in the Radio tab of the Configuration page in the AP.

Competition for Bandwidth
When multiple SMs vie for bandwidth, the AP divides its bandwidth among them,
considering their effective CIR and MIR values. However, 2X operation uses bandwidth
twice as efficiently as 1X, even where MIR values apply. This is because, in 2X
operation, the modules transmit their data in 4-level frequency shift keying (FSK), not
2-level as they would in 1X operation. This moves twice the data per slot. Thus, for the
sum of all bandwidth that 2X-eligible customers use, the bandwidth available to the
remaining customers increases by half of that sum when these eligible customers are
transmitting and receiving in 2X operation.



Checking Link Efficiencies in 2X Operation
Unlike in 1X operation, efficiencies below 90% on the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools
web page of the SM may be acceptable for stable operation. An efficiency of 60% in 2X
operation is equivalent to an efficiency of 120% in 1X. If you read efficiency between 60%
and 90%, check the status of 2X operation (as described below) to confirm that the link is
operating at 2X.

Since received signal strength typically varies over time, you should perform link tests at
various times of day and on various days of the week. Efficiencies should consistently be
60% or greater for 2X operation. You may be able to achieve better efficiencies by re-
aiming the SM, mounting it elsewhere, or adding a reflector dish.

Checking the Status of 2X Operation
The Session Status tab in the Home page of the AP provides operation status information
about each SM-to-AP link. Under the MAC address of each SM, the data in this tab
includes a line such as the following:

RATE : VC 19 Rate 2X/2X VC 255 Rate 2X/1X

Interpret this information is as follows:

◦ VC means virtual channel. If one VC is displayed, the high-priority channel is
disabled. If two are displayed, the high-priority channel is enabled and is using
the higher number VC (255 in the above example).
◦ 2X/2X indicates that the SM-to-AP link is in 2X operation.
◦ 2X/1X indicates that the SM is capable of 2X operation but the SM-to-AP link is in
1X operation. This can be for either of the following reasons:
− The SM has not sent data on the channel yet.
− The received signal does not support 2X operation.
◦ 1X/1X indicates that the SM is capable of only 1X operation. This can be for
either of the following reasons:
− The SM does not support 2X operation (SM is of the hardware series P7
or P8).
− The 2X Rate parameter is disabled in the General tab of the Configuration
page in the SM or the AP.

CAUTION!
2X operation requires approximately 3 to 5% more power than 1X operation.
This additional power affects the recommended maximum for power cord length
feeding the CMMmicro or CMM4. See the dedicated user guide that supports the
CMM model that you are deploying. However, 2X operation does not affect the
maximums for the CMM2.

Disabling 2X Operation
Disabling 2X operation for an SM can be helpful for alignment, troubleshooting, or
preventing frequent automatic switches between 2X and 1X, where RF conditions are
only marginally favorable to 2X. The ability to disable 2X for an SM is inherent since the
2X Operation feature was introduced.



Disabling 2X operation for a sector can be helpful for identifying a baseline for 1X-to-2X
comparison, broader troubleshooting activities, or forcing all SMs to 1X rather than
disabling 2X in each SM. The General tab of the Configuration page in the AP provides
a 2X Rate parameter:

◦ If you click Disable, then Save Changes and Reboot, 2X operation is disabled
for the sector, regardless of the 2X Rate setting in each SM.
◦ If you later click Enable, then Save Changes and Reboot, 2X operation is
enabled in the sector for SMs with 2X Rate enabled on their
Configuration>General page. SMs with 2X Rate disabled on their
Configuration>General page (or P7 or P8 SMs that don’t support 2X Rate) will
only operate at 1X.
If you want to cap the bandwidth usage of certain SMs, it is generally wiser to use the
Maximum Information Rate (MIR) parameters of those SMs to do so, instead of locking
down the operation rate for the entire sector. See Maximum Information Rate (MIR)
Parameters on Page 87.

7.1.13 3X Operation
OFDM modules offer an additional modulation scheme that provides 3X operation as an
alternative to 1X or 2X operation. In clear space, 3X operation is possible over half the
range of 2X (which means it is possible over one-fourth the range of 1X). However, in
NLOS installations, multipathing may be the predominant RF issue, not free-space
attenuation, so the relationship between 1X, 2X, and 3X range may differ from clear
space situations.

The effect of operation rate on the performance of OFDM modules in 10-MHz channel
width deployment is generalized in Table 24. Aggregate throughput refers to the sum of
the uplink throughput plus the downlink throughput.

Table 24: OFDM module performance at 1X, 2X, and 3X operation

Performance Performance Details
Product
Specification 1X 2X 3X
Modulation QPSK 16 QAM 64 QAM
Typical Maximum Range 15 mi (24 km) 4 mi (6.5 km) 2 mi (3.2 km)

PMP 49400 Typical Maximum
7 Mbps 14 Mbps 20 Mbps
PTP 49200 Aggregate Throughput
Nominal Receive Sensitivity
−89 dBm −80 dBm −71 dBm
including FEC
Latency 5−7 ms 5−7 ms 5−7 ms
Typical Maximum Range 5 mi (8 km) 2.5 mi (4 km) 1.25 mi (2 km)

PMP 54400 Typical Maximum 20 Mbps PMP
7 Mbps 14 Mbps
PTP 54200 Aggregate Throughput 21 Mbps PTP
−89 dBm −78 dBm −70 dBm
including FEC



Performance Performance Details
Product
Specification 1X 2X 3X
Typical Maximum Range 7 mi (11.2 km) 3 mi (4.8 km) 2 mi (3.2 km)
Typical Maximum
PMP 58430 7.5 Mbps 15 Mbps 22.5 Mbps
Aggregate Throughput
−89 dBm −78 dBm −70 dBm
including FEC

3X operation is configured on an OFDM module’s Configuration => General page using
the Dynamic Rate Adapt drop-down list under MAC Control Parameters.

For information such as how to check link efficiencies or the status of 3X operation or
how to disable 3X operation, see the PMP 400-430 and PTP 200 User Guide. These are
available for download at http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/software/:

7.1.14 Engineering for 2X and 3X Operation
The following priorities should guide your implementation of 2X and 3X operation:

◦ In the near quarter of the distance range of the AP
− identify the customers who use the most bandwidth on OFDM SMs.
− enable their SMs first for 3X operation.
◦ In the near half of the distance range of the AP
− identify the customers who use the most bandwidth.
− enable their SMs first for 2X operation.
◦ When you have deployable P7 and P8 SMs, do not deploy CSM 130s,
CSM 09130s, or CSM 120 P9s beyond half the distance range of the AP. At this
distance, steady and reliable 2X operation typically is not achievable. Deploy the
P7 and P8 SMs here.
◦ Wherever practical, implement
− 10 MHz of channel separation for 3X operation.
− 25 MHz of channel separation for 2X operation.

7.2 UNDERSTANDING SYNCHRONIZATION
The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) - one channel alternately transmits and
receives - rather than using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for
receiving. To accomplish TDD, the AP must provide sync to its SMs – it must keep them
in sync. Furthermore, collocated APs must be synced together - an unsynchronized AP
that transmits during the receive cycle of a collocated AP can prevent that second AP
from being able to decode the signals from its SMs. In addition, across a geographical
area, APs that can “hear” each other benefit from using a common sync to further reduce
self-interference within the network.



7.2.1 GPS Synchronization
The Navigation Satellite Timing and Ranging (NAVSTAR) Global Positioning System
(GPS) uses 24 satellites to relay information for precise derivation of position and time.

The cluster management module (CMM) contains a Motorola Oncore GPS Receiver. The
CMM is a critical element in the operation of the system. At one AP cluster site or
throughout an entire wireless system, the CMM provides a GPS timing pulse to each
module, synchronizing the network transmission cycles.

The Oncore GPS Receiver tracks eight or more satellites. The CMM uses the signal from
at least four of these satellites to generate a one-second interval clock that has a rise
time of 100 nsec. This clock directly synchronizes APs and BHMs which, in turn,
synchronize the SMs and BHSs in the network.

The Oncore GPS Receiver also provides

◦ the latitude and longitude of the GPS antenna (collocated with the CMM)
◦ the number of satellites that are being tracked
◦ the number of satellites that are available
◦ the date
◦ the time in Universal Coordinated Time (UCT)
◦ the altitude of the GPS antenna
◦ other information that can be used to diagnose network problems.

Alternative to GPS Sync
A link can operate without GPS sync, but cannot operate without sync. The alternative to
GPS sync is to configure the AP or BHM in the link to generate a sync pulse to pass to
the SM or BHS, respectively. Depending on the RF environment in which the link
operates, this latter alternative may or may not be plausible.

For example, in Figure 25, AP4

◦ is not synchronized with any of the other APs.
◦ is transmitting nearby the other APs while they are expecting to receive SM
transmissions from a maximum distance.

Figure 25: One unsynchronized AP in cluster



The result is self-interference. In this scenario, the self-interference can be avoided only
by synchronizing the TDD transmit cycles of all APs that operate in the same frequency
band.

An AP that is isolated by at least 5 miles (8 km) from any other equipment, or a BHM in
an isolated standalone BH link can generate and pass sync pulse without GPS timing
and not risk that interference will result from the generated sync. In any other type of link,
sync should be derived from GPS timing.

NOTE:
The OFDM Series BHMs generate their own sync. For more information about
these modules, see the user guides that support them. Titles are listed under
Products Not Covered by This User Guide on Page 34.

Advantage of GPS Sync
Although the embedded timing generation capability of the AP and BHM keeps a precise
clock, no trigger exists to start the clock at the same moment in each AP of a cluster. So,
the individual AP can synchronize communications between itself and registered SMs,
but cannot synchronize itself with other modules, except by GPS timing (shown in Figure
26).

Figure 26: GPS timing throughout the network (FSK shown)

7.2.2 Passing Sync in a Single Hop
Network sync can be passed in a single hop in the following network designs:

◦ Design 1
1. A CMM provides sync to a collocated AP.
2. This AP sends the sync over the air to SMs.
◦ Design 2
1. A CMM provides sync to a collocated BH timing master.
2. This BH timing master sends the sync over the air to a BH timing slave.



7.2.3 Passing Sync in an Additional Hop
Network sync can be extended by one additional link in any of the following network
designs:

NOTE:
In each of these following designs, Link 2 is not on the same frequency band as
Link 4. (For example, Link 2 may be a 5.2-GHz link while Link 4 is a 5.7- or 2.4-
GHz link.)

◦ Design 3
2. This AP sends the sync over the air to an SM.
3. This SM delivers the sync to a collocated AP.
4. This AP passes the sync in the additional link over the air to SMs.

This design is illustrated in Figure 27.

AP 2 4
SM AP SM

4
3
1
SM

CMM

Figure 27: Additional link to extend network sync, Design 3

◦ Design 4
2. This AP sends the sync over the air to an SM.
3. This SM delivers the sync to a collocated BHM.
4. This BHM passes the sync in the additional link over the air to a BHS.




2 BH 4 BH
AP SM -M- -S-

3
1

CMM


◦ Design 5
1. A CMM provides sync to a collocated BHM or the BHM generates timing.
2. This BHM sends the sync over the air to a BHS.
3. This BHS delivers the sync to a collocated AP.
4. This AP passes the sync in the additional link over the air to SMs.


BH 2 BH 4
-M- -S-
AP SM

4
3
1
SM

CMM


Wiring and configuration information for this sync extension is described under Wiring to
Extend Network Sync on Page 378.

All radios support the remote AP functionality. The BHS and the SM can reliably pass the
sync pulse, and the BHM and AP can reliably receive it. The sync is passed in a cable
that connects Pins 1 and 6 of the RJ-11 timing ports of the two modules. (The sync cable
is described under Cables on Page 63.) When you connect modules in this way, you
must also adjust configuration parameters to ensure that

◦ the AP is set to properly receive sync.
◦ the SM will not propagate sync to the AP if the SM itself ceases to receive sync.

100 Issue 1, May 2010


8 MEETING LINK REQUIREMENTS

8.1 AP-SM LINKS
APs communicate with SMs using a point-to-multipoint protocol. An AP-SM link has lower
throughput and higher latency than a backhaul link for two reasons:

◦ Many endpoints are involved.
◦ The bandwidth request and reservation process consumes bandwidth.

In the 900-MHz frequency band range, round-trip latency is typically 15 msec. In all other
frequency band ranges, round-trip latency is typically 6 msec.

At range settings of greater than 40 miles (64 km) in the 900-MHz AP, more time elapses
between transmit and receive cycles to compensate for greater air delay. In each frame,
this reduces the number of data slots, which slightly reduces the aggregate throughput of
the link. However, the throughput is as predictable as in other point-to-multipoint links.

Throughput is a factor of the Max Range parameter in the AP and is effective for all SMs,
regardless of their distance from the AP. Throughput includes all downlink data to all SMs
and all uplink data from all SMs that link to the AP. For throughput, see Table 15 on
Page 68.

End user perspective of throughput is based on both bandwidth in the sending direction
and the return of TCP acknowledgement packets in the other. Where sufficient downlink
bandwidth exists to support downlink traffic and overhead, transient traffic congestion in
the uplink can cause some TCP acknowledgement packets to be dropped, and the end
user to perceive a reduction in throughput. This can also occur with sufficient uplink
bandwidth and dropping acknowledgment packets in the downlink.

However, a network operator can optionally enable the Prioritize TCP ACK parameter in
the AP and BHM, giving these packets priority over other packet types. This results in
fewer of them being dropped.

The effects of changing network conditions on PTMP throughput are indicated in
Table 25.

Issue 1, May 2010 101


Table 25: Effects of network conditions on PTMP throughput

Changing Network Condition Effect on AP Aggregate Throughput
Increasing the Max Range 2
somewhat decreased
parameter setting1 in the AP
Increasing the number of SMs that
register in the AP
no effect
Increase in downlink traffic
Increase in uplink traffic
Increasing the average bandwidth
no effect, even when the additional
allotted to the SMs that register in
bandwidth is used.
the AP

NOTES:
1. For non 900-MHz APs, the AP accepts a Max Range value of up to
30 miles (48 km). See Max Range on Page 235.
2. To avoid a decrease of unnecessary proportion, set to not much further
than the distance between the AP and the furthest SM that registers in
the AP.

A comparison of SM products in link with a CAP 130 is shown in Table 26.

Table 26: Comparison of SM products with CAP 130

Maximum Sustained Cap on
VoIP
Aggregate Committed
Product Burst Upgradability Channels
Throughput Information
Supported
to a Single SM Rate
CSM 130 14 Mbps 14 Mb none none multiple
PMP 400 Series SM 21 Mbps 21 Mb none none multiple
to CSM 130
CSM 120 7 Mbps 14 Mb none multiple
capabilities
CSM 110 Lite SM as to 1, 2, 4, or
512 kbps 768 kb 100 kbps 1
purchased 7 Mbps
CSM 110 Lite SM
1 Mbps 1.5 Mb 100 kbps none 1
upgraded to 1 Mbps
CSM 110 Lite SM
2 Mbps 3 Mb 100 kbps none 1
upgraded to 2 Mbps
CSM 110 Lite SM
upgraded to 4 Mbps
CSM 110 Lite SM
upgraded to 7 Mbps

102 Issue 1, May 2010


8.2 BH-BH LINKS
Motorola PTP Bridges communicate with each other using a point-to-point protocol. This
point-to-point protocol uses a 2.5-msec frame. A BH link has higher throughput and lower
latency (typically 5 msec, 2.5 msec in each direction) for two reasons:

◦ Only two endpoints are involved.
◦ No bandwidth request and reservation process is involved.

For 10-Mbps BHs, the aggregate throughput on the channel is 7.5 Mbps. For 20-Mbps
BHs, the aggregate throughput on the channel is 14 Mbps. If a BH is set to a downlink
ratio of 50%, then the bandwidth in each direction is half of the total BH link bandwidth.

Issue 1, May 2010 103


9 PREVIEWING NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS
The following are examples of network layouts. Customer experience case studies are
also available.

9.1 VIEWING TYPICAL LAYOUTS
The following layouts are typical of system implementations:

◦ Figure 30: Typical network layout with no BH
◦ Figure 31: Typical network layout with BH
◦ Figure 32: Typical multiple-BH network layout

AP AP
Cl uster 2 Cluster 3

AP GPS
Cl uster 1

CMM

WA N (I nternet)
Prizm RTR

SM RTR PC

Figure 30: Typical network layout with no BH

Issue 1, May 2010 105


BHM BHS
AP AP
Cl uster 2 Cluster 3
AP
AP
Cl uster 1
GPS
GPS CM M

CM M RTR

Prizm
WAN (I nternet)

SM RTR PC PC RTR SM

Figure 31: Typical network layout with BH

GPS

BHS BHM BHM BHS

CMM

RTR

WAN (Internet)

Figure 32: Typical multiple-BH network layout

106 Issue 1, May 2010


9.2 VIEWING CASE STUDIES
Case studies of implementations are available as “Feature Articles” for download from
http://www.connectwithcanopy.com/index.cfm?canopy=menu.case.

Issue 1, May 2010 107


10 ACCESSING FEATURES
PMP 100 and 400 and PTP 100 and 200 Series radios support the features that are
indicated in Table 27.

Table 27: List of features

Module SNMP
Regulatory Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
RoHS compliant (EU “green” mandate) All modules no no
WEEE compliant All modules no no
Complies with Human RF exposure limits
All radios no no
(ETSI)
Module SNMP
Radio Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Time Division Duplex All radios no no
Scalable up to 6 sectors per cell. AP SM no no
200 registered subscribers supported per AP AP SM no no
Fixed/nomadic operation All radios no no
7 ms or less round trip latency (OTA under
All radios no no
normal conditions)
Transmit frame spreading for geographical
AP BHM Configuration/Radio yes
area co-existence
Radio statistics (scheduler) All radios Statistics/Scheduler yes
2X rate, enabled per link (requires CAP 130,
SM BHS Configuration/General yes
CAP 09130, or 20 Mbps BH)
2X rate, enabled per sector (requires
AP BHM Configuration/General yes
CAP 130, CAP 09130, or 20 Mbps BH)
Manual transmit power control - normal and
All radios Configuration/Radio yes
low (-18 dB)
Manual transmit power control, 1 dB
increments over 25 dB at the AP
6,200 packets per second on P10 or P11
firmware (6,300 in PMP 400 Series modules
without VLAN enabled; 5,300 with VLAN
enabled; 6,200 in PTP 100 Series wireless All radios no no
Ethernet bridges at 2- and 4-Mbps
throughput; 4,600 in CAP 09130 and
CSM 09130)

Settable downlink broadcast repeat count AP Configuration/Radio yes

Issue 1, May 2010 109


Module SNMP
RF Configuration Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable center-channel carrier
frequency
255 configurable "color codes" to manage
All radios Configuration/Radio yes
SM to AP (or (BHS to BHM) registration
16 configurable "sector IDs" for
administrative convenience

Configurable range settings (determines air
AP Configuration/Radio yes
turn-around time)

Configurable downlink data % (determines
transmit/receive ratio)
Configurable number of reserved control
slots (manages contention for uplink AP Configuration/Radio yes
requests)
Configurable frequency scan list at SM SM BHS Configuration/Radio yes
Packet stats - RF interface All radios Statistics/Radio yes
Module SNMP
Timing Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable AP/BHM sync source - Sync
over Power over Ethernet, self-sync, or sync AP BHM Configuration/General yes
cable
"Remote AP" support, including timing pulse
propagation through SM/BHS
Module SNMP
Ethernet Interface Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Selectable link speeds - 10/100 Base T, half,
All modules Configuration/General yes
full-duplex
Ethernet link auto-negotiation All modules Configuration/General no
Accepts straight-through or crossover
All modules no no
Ethernet cable wiring (Auto-MDX)
Wire line Interface: Ethernet cable with
All modules no no
proprietary PoE
Disable SM Ethernet link SM Configuration/General yes
Packet stats - Ethernet interface All radios Statistics/Ethernet yes

110 Issue 1, May 2010


Module SNMP
IP Interface Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable LAN settings (IP address,
All radios Configuration/IP yes
mask, gateway)
Module's management IP address
assignable via DHCP
Private LAN to support AP to SM (or BHM to
BHS) communications
Configurable SM mgmt accessibility
(Local/Ethernet only, or Public/RF and SM Configuration/IP yes
Local/Ethernet)
Security Features (Authentication, Module SNMP
Encryption, and Access Control) Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable SM authentication using
AP SM Configuration/Security yes
BAM/PrizmEMS
Configurable BH authentication, standalone BHM BHS Configuration/Security no
DES encryption on standard product All radios no yes
AES encryption on AES product All radios no yes
Configurable whether SM/BHS displays
AP BHM Configuration/Security yes
AP/BHM beacon information
Configurable web, telnet, and ftp session
All radios Configuration/Security yes
timeout
Configurable access to radio management -
All radios Configuration/Security yes
up to 3 source IP addresses
User/account names (up to 4) and
All radios Account yes
passwords on modules
Permission levels control ability to add/delete
All radios Account yes
users/passwords
Override plug to override lost IP address or
All radios no no
user/password
Override plug configurable as a default plug - AP SM
Configuration/Unit Settings yes
reset to factory defaults BHM BHS

Override switch to override lost IP address or CMMmicro
no no
user/password on CMM CMM4

Capability to disable refresh of the
BHM Configuration/Security yes
encryption key every 24 hours

Read only community string configurable AP Configuration/SNMP yes

Issue 1, May 2010 111


Module SNMP
Monitoring Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
List of registered SMs/BHSs with full data, multiple
AP BHM Configuration/General
with hot links to SMs/BHSs objects
Abbreviated list of SMs/BHSs, with hot links multiple
AP BHM Configuration/General
to SMs/BHSs objects
Received power level indication All radios Home/Session Status (in master) yes
LEDs on modules to display states and
All modules no no
activity
Received interference level indication (jitter) All radios Configuration/General yes
Configurable web-page auto-refresh All modules Configuration/General yes
SM registration failures AP BHM Statistics/Reg Failures yes
Event log All modules Home/Event Log no
Operator can use own logo on GUI pages All modules no yes
Operator can use own style sheets for GUI All modules no yes
Jitter consistent regardless of operation
All radios no no
(1X or 2X)
Link status table with bidirectional data for all
AP Tools/Link Status no
links
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
SM Configuration/PPPoE yes
(PPPoE) client
Maximum number of SMs registered since
AP Home/General Status no
last reboot displayed

Per-SM query (instead of Link Status
AP Tools/Link Status no
table)
Module SNMP
Bridge Management Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable bridge entry timeout All radios Configuration/General yes
Bridging table statistics (up to 4096 entries) All radios Statistics/Bridging Table yes
Disable bridging on BHs BHM BHS Configuration/General yes
SM Isolation Features (preventing Module SNMP
communication between SMs) Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
SM isolation at AP AP Configuration/General yes
CMMmicro
SM isolation at CMM Configuration/General yes
CMM4
Module SNMP
SM Isolation Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Translation bridging (replace customer MAC
AP Configuration/General yes
with SM MAC address)
With Translation bridging, choice of sending
untranslated ARP
Translation table statistics All radios Statistics/Translation Table yes

112 Issue 1, May 2010


Module SNMP
Quick Start Feature Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
AP configuration quick-start wizard AP BHM Quick Start
Module SNMP
Bandwidth Management Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
AP Maximum Information Rate (MIR) default
AP Configuration/QoS yes
settings
Per SM Maximum Information Rate (MIR) SM Configuration/QoS yes
Per SM Committed Information Rate (CIR)
SM Configuration/QoS yes
for high and low channels
"Configuration Source" for
MIR/CIR/HP/VLAN can be either SM or AP Configuration/General yes
BAM/Prizm
CIR for low priority channel on BH BHS Configuration/QoS yes
Configurable priority for TCP Acks, to
optimize bandwidth use

Settable broadcast downlink CIR AP Configuration/QoS yes

Module SNMP
Bandwidth Management Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Configurable High Priority channel with
configurable DiffServ mappings on AP, SM AP SM Configuration/DiffServe yes
(2 classes of service)
Permanent BH High Priority Channel with
configurable DiffServ mappings on BH BHM BHS Configuration/DiffServe yes
(2 classes of service)
Virtual channel (high/low priority) statistics All radios Statistics/Data VC yes
Network Address Translation (NAT) Module SNMP
Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
NAT SM Configuration/NAT yes
NAT DMZ SM Configuration/NAT yes
NAT DHCP server on LAN with up to 254 IP
SM Configuration/NAT yes
addresses in pool
NAT DHCP client on WAN (obtains NAT
SM Configuration/NAT yes
address from a DHCP server)
NAT port mapping SM Configuration/NAT yes
VPN "pass through" for L2TP over IPSec
SM no no
(but not PPTP)
NAT statistics SM Statistics/NAT Stats yes
NAT DHCP statistics SM Statistics/NAT DHCP Statistics yes
NAT table SM Logs/NAT Table no

Issue 1, May 2010 113


Module SNMP
Filtering Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Protocol filtering based on protocol SM Configuration/Protocol Filtering yes
Operator-defined port filtering (3 ports) SM Configuration/Protocol Filtering yes
Packet filter statistics All radios Statistics/Filter yes
Module SNMP
VLAN Management Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
AP SM
Configurable VLAN CMMmicro Configuration/VLAN yes
CMM4
Highly configurable VLAN (802.1Q) AP SM Configuration/VLAN yes
Use of VLAN priorities (802.1p) with high
AP SM no yes
priority channel
CMMmicro
Port-based VLAN switching on CMM Configuration yes
CMM4
VLAN statistics AP SM Statistics/VLAN yes
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) Module SNMP
Feature Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
DFS v1.2.3 All radios no yes
Module SNMP
Time Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Time and Date from CMM via Network Time
AP BHM Configuration/Time yes
Protocol (NTP) server
Time and Date manually settable AP BHM Configuration/Time yes
CMMmicro
CMM provides NTP server no no
CMM4
Module SNMP
Spectrum Analyzer Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Spectrum analyzer SM BHS Tools/Spectrum Analyzer no
Ability to switch an AP to an SM (or BHS to
BHM)
Remote Spectrum Analysis AP Tools/Remote Spectrum Analyzer no

114 Issue 1, May 2010


Module SNMP
Aim/Link Quality Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Alignment tone for using during
SM BHS no no
aiming/alignment
Aiming support page when not using multiple
SM BHS Tools/Alignment
alignment tone objects
LED for alignment SM BHS no no
Configure SM power-up state - aiming or
operational
Link capacity test, with configurable packet
All radios Tools/Link Capacity Test yes
length
Display of SM configuration information at
AP BHM Home/Session Status yes
AP
Display/evaluation of AP beacon data from
SM BHS Tools/AP Evaluation yes
all receivable APs
Over-the-air radio Bit Error Rate (BER)
All radios Tools/BER Results yes
indicator
Graphical alignment tool with near-real time
SM Tools/Alignment Tool no
jitter and received power level
Optional selection of Revised or Legacy LED
SM Configuration/Unit Settings no
indicator scheme
Module SNMP
Frame Tool Feature Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Frame calculator for supporting collocation All radios Tools/Frame Calculator no
Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) Module SNMP
Interface Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
GUI automatically sized/styled for PDA when
All radios all no
displayed on a PDA
Spectrum analyzer display for PDA All radios PDA/Spectrum Results (PDA) no
Specific pages for PDA display All radios PDA no
Module SNMP
SNMP Interface Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Support of SNMP v2 All modules no no
Canopy Enterprise MIB All modules no no
Configurable SNMP community string All radios Configuration/SNMP yes
Configurable SNMP accessing subnet All radios Configuration/SNMP yes
10 configurable SNMP trap addresses All radios Configuration/SNMP yes
Configurable traps (sync and session) All radios Configuration/SNMP yes
Configurable SNMP permissions (read,
All radios Configuration/SNMP yes
read/write)
Configurable site information, including site
All modules Configuration/SNMP yes
name

Issue 1, May 2010 115


Module SNMP
Upgrade Process Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
Upgrading using CNUT and SM Auto-update
All modules no no
for SMs

Configurable update address to support
distributed software upgrades

Module SNMP
AP Cluster Management Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
CMMmicro
CMM port power control Configuration yes
CMM4
CMMmicro
CMM port reset Configuration yes
CMM4
CMM: Sufficient ports for at least 4 AP, 2 CMMmicro
no no
BH, plus management CMM4
CMM: Sufficient power for at least 4 AP plus CMMmicro
no no
2 BH CMM4

Powered from 90-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 55 V
AP BH no no
DC power output

Module SNMP
Physical Features Type(s) Controlled in GUI Page/Tab Control
MTBF > 45 years (~400 000 hours) All modules no no
neg 40 C to + 55 C (Ambient) operation All modules no no
Temperature indication All radios Home/General no
Non-condensing (Indoor/outdoor), weather
All modules no no
protected form factor/packaging
Element Management System (Prizm)
Features
Current Prizm to manage all elements of the
system (including Mot Backhaul)

Up to 1000 APs, plus 100 devices/AP);
minimal storage / minimal polling
Redundant configuration for additional
storage/reporting capability
Commercial Off the Shelf (COTS) Platform
and OS support (e.g. Intel, Linux, Windows)
COTS Database support (e.g. MySQL,
PostgreSQL, MS SQL Server, etc..); Oracle
optional

116 Issue 1, May 2010


10.1 ACTIVATING FEATURES
A feature is active if the software that allows the feature to be turned on or off (enabled or
disabled) is present.

10.1.1 Fixed License Keys
Some features are activated by loading a fixed license key into the radio. Such a key
arrives from Motorola as a filename.url file. When you double-click on this file, your
browser opens and the location bar is populated by a lengthy string. This URL string
begins with http://<ModuleIPAddress>/. If you need to load a key into a module
whose IP address has changed since Motorola issued the key, perform the following
steps.

Procedure 1: Modifying a fixed license key for a module IP address
4. Right-click on the license key filename.
5. Select Properties.
6. Select the Web Document tab.
7. At URL, substitute the current IP address for the original IP address in the URL.
8. Click OK.
9. Double-click on the license key filename.
RESULT: The key loads into the module.
10. Open the Configuration web page of the module.
11. Review parameter settings and enable the feature if you wish to do so at this
time (see next section).
end of procedure

10.2 ENABLING FEATURES
A feature is enabled (functioning) if the feature is both active and enabled. For example,
Transmit Frame Spreading is active (can be enabled) in any AP or BHM, except 900-
MHz radios. However, Transmit Frame Spreading functions only if the Enable selection
for the Transmit Frame Spreading parameter is checked in the Radio tab of the
Configuration web page in the module.

Issue 1, May 2010 117


11 ACQUIRING PROFICIENCIES
Designing and operating a network requires fundamental knowledge of radio frequency
transmission and reception, Internet Protocol addressing schemes, experimentation with
equipment, and for most operators participation in some forms of product training.

11.1 UNDERSTANDING RF FUNDAMENTALS
Product training and user interfaces presume an understanding of RF fundamentals.
Excellent written sources for these fundamentals are available. One such source is
Deploying License-Free Wireless Wide-Area Networks by Jack Unger
(ISBN 1-58705-069-2), published by Cisco Press.

11.2 UNDERSTANDING IP FUNDAMENTALS
Product training and user interfaces also presume an understanding of Internet Protocol
(IP) fundamentals. Excellent written sources for these fundamentals are available. One
such source is Sams Teach Yourself TCP/IP in 24 Hours by Joe Casad
(ISBN 0-672-32085-1), published by Sams Publishing.

NOTE:
The default IP address of each component is 169.254.1.1.

11.3 ACQUIRING A DEMONSTRATION KIT
Demonstration Kits are available through your Motorola representative.

11.3.1 900-MHz with Integrated Antenna and Band-pass Filter Demonstration Kit
Each 900-MHz with integrated antenna and band-pass filter Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 2 9000SM SMs
◦ 1 9000APF AP
◦ 1 600SS Surge Suppressor
◦ 3 CBL-0562 Straight-through Category 5 Cables
◦ 1 UGTK-0002 Trial Kit Quick Start Guide
◦ 1 CPT001-CD02EN Sales Overview on CD
◦ 1 CPT002-CD03EN Technical Overview on CD
◦ 1 User Guide on CD
Part numbers for Demonstration Kits are provided in Table 28.

Issue 1, May 2010 119


11.3.2 900-MHz with Connectorized Antenna Demonstration Kit
Each 900-MHz with connectorized (external) antenna Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 2 9000SMC CSM 09130s
◦ 1 9000APC CAP 09130
◦ 3 AN900 60° 9-dBi Antennas
◦ 1 SMMB2 Universal Heavy Duty Mounting Bracket

11.3.3 2.4-GHz with Adjustable Power Set to High Demonstration Kit
Each 2.4-GHz with adjustable power set to high Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 1 2400SM SM
◦ 1 2450SM CSM 130
◦ 1 2450AP CAP 130
◦ 1 SMMB1 Universal Mounting Bracket
◦ 3 ACPSSW-02 90- to 230-V AC 50- to 60-Hz Power Supplies

11.3.4 5.2-GHz Demonstration Kit
Each 5.2-GHz Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 1 5200SM SM
◦ 1 5250SM CSM 130
◦ 1 5250AP CAP 130

120 Issue 1, May 2010



11.3.5 5.4-GHz Demonstration Kit
Each 5.4-GHz Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 1 5400SM SM
◦ 1 5450SM CSM 130
◦ 1 5450AP CAP 130
◦ 1 Cross-over Category 5 Cable

11.3.6 5.7-GHz with Connectorized Antenna and Adjustable Power Set to Low
Demonstration Kit
Each 5.7-GHz with connectorized antenna and adjustable power set to low
Demonstration Kit contains

◦ 1 5700SMC SM
◦ 1 5750SMC CSM 130
◦ 1 5750APC CAP 130
◦ 1 SMMB2 Universal Heavy Duty Mounting Bracket
◦ 1 Cross-over Category 5 Cable

Issue 1, May 2010 121


11.3.7 Demonstration Kit Part Numbers
The part numbers for ordering demonstration kits are provided in Table 28.

Table 28: Demonstration Kit part numbers

Current Previous
Part Part
and Feature
Number Number
900 MHz integrated antenna
HK1267B TK10290
with band-pass filter
900 MHz connectorized
HK1244B TK10290C
antenna
2.4 GHz adjustable power
TK10250
set to low
HK1135B TK10251
set to high
5.2 GHz HK1133B TK10252
5.4 GHz HK1282A TK10254
5.7 GHz TK10257
5.7 GHz connectorized
HK1132B TK10257C
adjustable power set to low

11.4 ACQUIRING A STARTER KIT
Starter Kits are also available through your Motorola representative.

11.4.1 900-MHz with Integrated Antenna and Band-pass Filter Starter Kit
Each 900-MHz with integrated antenna and band-pass filters Starter Kit contains

◦ 20 9000SM CSM 09130s
◦ 3 9000APF CAP 09130s
◦ 1 1070CK CMMmicro
◦ 21 600SS Surge Suppressors
Power supplies and SM mounting brackets are not included in this kit. Part numbers for
Starter Kits are provided in Table 29.

122 Issue 1, May 2010


11.4.2 900-MHz with Connectorized Antenna Starter Kit
Each 900-MHz with connectorized (external) antenna Starter Kit contains

◦ 20 9000SMC CSM 09130s
◦ 3 9000APC CAP 09130s
◦ 20 SMMB2 Universal Heavy Duty Mounting Brackets
Power supplies are not included in this kit. Part numbers for Starter Kits are provided in
Table 29.

11.4.3 2.4-GHz with Adjustable Power Set to High Starter Kit
Each 2.4-GHz adjustable power set to high Starter Kit contains

◦ 30 2400SM CSM 120s
◦ 6 2450AP CAP 130s
◦ 30 SMMB1 Universal Mounting Brackets
Table 29.

11.4.4 5.2-GHz Starter Kit
Each 5.2-GHz Starter Kit contains

◦ 30 5200SM CSM 120s
◦ 6 5250AP CAP 130s
Table 29.

11.4.5 5.4-GHz FSK Starter Kit
Each 5.4-GHz Starter Kit contains

◦ 30 5400SM CSM 120s
◦ 6 5450AP CAP 130s

Issue 1, May 2010 123


Table 29.

11.4.6 5.4-GHz OFDM Starter Kits
Starter kits for PMP 54400 series network equipment are available in three sizes. Each
HK1820A Starter Kit contains

◦ 2 5440 SMs
◦ 1 5440 AP
◦ 3 ACPSSW-13B Power Supplies
◦ 2 SMMB2A Mounting Brackets

Each HK1819A Starter Kit contains

◦ 5 5440 SMs
◦ 2 5440 APs

Each HK1818A Starter Kit contains

◦ 20 5440 SMs
◦ 2 5440 APs

Part numbers for Starter Kits are provided in Table 29.

11.4.7 5.7-GHz with Integrated Antenna Starter Kit
Each 5.7-GHz with integrated antenna Starter Kit contains

◦ 30 5700SM CSM 120s
◦ 6 5750AP CAP 130s
Table 29.

124 Issue 1, May 2010


11.4.8 Starter Kit Part Numbers
The part numbers for ordering Starter kits are provided in Table 29.

Table 29: Starter Kit part numbers

Current Previous
Frequency
Part Part
Band Range
Number Number
900 MHz integrated antenna
HK1266B TK10190
with band-pass filter
900 MHz connectorized HK1243B TK10190C
TK10150
set to low
HK1139B TK10151
set to high
5.2 GHz HK1140B TK10152
5.4 GHz FSK HK1283A TK10154
HK1118A
5.4 GHz OFDM HK1119A
HK1120A
5.7 GHz HK1141B TK10157
5.7 GHz connectorized
TK10157C
adjustable power set to low

11.5 EVALUATING TRAINING OPTIONS
Motorola and its distributors make technical training available to customers. For
information on this training, either

◦ send email inquiries to training@canopywireless.com.
◦ visit http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support. Click the
Canopy Training link.

11.6 ATTENDING ON-LINE KNOWLEDGE SESSIONS
Irregularly but often, Motorola presents a knowledge session over the Internet about a
new product offering. Some of these knowledge sessions provide the opportunity for
participants to interact in real time with the leader of the session.

The knowledge session

◦ provides a high-level understanding of the technology that the new product
introduces.
◦ announces any subtleties and caveats.
◦ typically includes a demonstration of the product.
◦ is usually recorded for later viewing by those who could not attend in real time.

Issue 1, May 2010 125


To participate in upcoming knowledge sessions, ask your Motorola representative to
ensure that you receive email notifications.

126 Issue 1, May 2010

PMP Solutions User Guide Planning Guide

12 ENGINEERING YOUR RF COMMUNICATIONS
Before diagramming network layouts, the wise course is to

◦ anticipate the correct amount of signal loss for your fade margin calculation
(as defined below).
◦ recognize all permanent and transient RF signals in the environment.
◦ identify obstructions to line of sight reception.

12.1 ANTICIPATING RF SIGNAL LOSS
The C/I (Carrier-to-Interference) ratio defines the strength of the intended signal relative
to the collective strength of all other signals. Standard modules typically do not require a
C/I ratio greater than
◦ 3 dB or less at 10-Mbps modulation and −65 dBm for 1X operation. The C/I ratio
that you achieve must be even greater as the received power approaches the
nominal sensitivity (−85 dBm for 1X operation).
◦ 10 dB or less at 10-Mbps modulation and −65 dBm for 2X operation. The C/I ratio
that you achieve must be even greater as the received power approaches the
nominal sensitivity (−79 dBm for 2X operation).
◦ 10 dB or less at 20-Mbps modulation.

Nominal receive sensitivity in PMP 400 Series modules is as follows:

◦ −89 dBm for 1X operation

12.1.1 Understanding Attenuation
An RF signal in space is attenuated by atmospheric and other effects as a function of the
distance from the initial transmission point. The further a reception point is placed from
the transmission point, the weaker is the received RF signal.

12.1.2 Calculating Free Space Path Loss
The attenuation that distance imposes on a signal is the free space path loss.
PathLossCalcPage.xls calculates free space path loss.

12.1.3 Calculating Rx Signal Level
The Rx sensitivity of each module is provided at
http://motorola.canopywireless.com/prod_specs.php. The determinants in Rx signal level
are illustrated in Figure 33.

Issue 1, May 2010 129

Planning Guide PMP Solutions User Guide

Tx antenna Rx antenna
gain gain
free space signal

Tx Rx
cable cable
loss loss

distance
Rx
Tx signal
power level

Transmitter
transmitter receiver
or amplifier
Amplifier or amplifier

Figure 33: Determinants in Rx signal level

Rx signal level is calculated as follows:
Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain
− free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss

NOTE:
This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established
between the transmitter and receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel
zone.

12.1.4 Calculating Fade Margin
Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level,
in turn, is a major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated
as follows:
system operating margin (fade margin) dB =Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB

Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the
strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is
characteristic of a more reliable link.

130 Issue 1, May 2010


12.2 ANALYZING THE RF ENVIRONMENT
An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the
strength of the signals that occupy the spectrum you are planning to use. Regardless of
how you measure and log or chart the results you find (through the Spectrum Analyzer in
SM and BHS feature or by using a spectrum analyzer), you should do so

◦ at various times of day.
◦ on various days of the week.
◦ periodically into the future.

As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices in your spectrum proliferate, this will
keep you aware of the dynamic possibilities for interference with your network.

12.2.1 Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies
These modules allow you to

◦ use an SM or BHS (or a BHM reset to a BHS), or an AP that is temporarily
transformed into an SM, as a spectrum analyzer.
◦ view a graphical display that shows power level in RSSI and dBm at 5-MHz
increments throughout the frequency band range, regardless of limited selections
in the Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter of the SM.
◦ select an AP channel that minimizes interference from other RF equipment.

The SM measures only the spectrum of its manufacture. So if, for example, you wish to
analyze an area for both 2.4- and 5.7-GHz activity, take both a 2.4- and 5.7-GHz SM to
the area. To enable this functionality, perform the following steps:

CAUTION!
The following procedure causes the SM to drop any active RF link. If a link is
dropped when the spectrum analysis begins, the link can be re-established when
either a 15-minute interval has elapsed or the spectrum analyzer feature is
disabled.

Procedure 2: Analyzing the spectrum
1. Predetermine a power source and interface that will work for the SM or BHS in
the area you want to analyze.
2. Take the SM or BHS, power source, and interface device to the area.
3. Access the Tools web page of the SM or BHS.
RESULT: The Tools page opens to its Spectrum Analyzer tab. An example of this
tab is shown in Figure 147.
4. Click Enable.
RESULT: The feature is enabled.
5. Click Enable again.
RESULT: The system measures RSSI and dBm for each frequency in the
spectrum.

Issue 1, May 2010 131


6. Travel to another location in the area.
7. Click Enable again.
RESULT: The system provides a new measurement of RSSI and dBm for each
frequency in the spectrum.
NOTE: Spectrum analysis mode times out 15 minutes after the mode was
invoked.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 until the area has been adequately scanned and logged.
end of procedure

As with any other data that pertains to your business, a decision today to put the data into
a retrievable database may grow in value to you over time.

RECOMMENDATION:
Wherever you find the measured noise level is greater than the sensitivity of the
radio that you plan to deploy, use the noise level (rather than the link budget) for
your link feasibility calculations.

12.2.2 Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves
In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect
the signal. Such an object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay, or lake.
The wavelength of the signal is approximately

◦ 2 inches for 5.2- and 5.7-GHz signals.
◦ 5 inches for 2.4-GHz signals.
◦ 12 inches for 900-MHz signals.

A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected
signal arrives. These two or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. When
multipath occurs, the reflected signal cancels part of the effect of the non-reflected signal
so, overall, attenuation beyond that caused by link distance occurs. This is problematic at
the margin of the link budget, where the standard operating margin (fade margin) may be
compromised.

12.2.3 Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone
The Fresnel (pronounced fre·NEL) Zone is a theoretical three-dimensional area around
the line of sight of an antenna transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause
the received strength of the transmitted signal to fade. Out-of-phase reflections and
absorption of the signal result in signal cancellation.
The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal
density, moisture content of the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the
amount of loss. Plan to perform frequent and regular link tests if you must transmit
though foliage.

132 Issue 1, May 2010


12.2.4 Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown
With Release 8.1, Motorola met ETSI EN 301 893 v1.2.3 for Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) in slave as well as master radios. DFS is a requirement in certain
countries and regions for systems to detect interference from other systems, notably
radar systems, and to avoid co-channel operation with these systems. With Release 8.1,
all 5.7-GHz connectorized modules and all 5.4-GHz modules were ETSI DFS capable.
These two products were sold only outside the U.S.A. and Canada. No other products
had a DFS option.

The Configuration => Radio web page in Release 8.1 allowed the operator to enable or
disable DFS. Operators in countries with regulatory requirements for DFS must not
disable the feature and must ensure that it is enabled after a module is reset to factory
defaults. Operators in countries without regulatory requirements for DFS should disable
DFS to avoid the additional minute of connection time for APs, BHMs, and SMs, and
avoid the additional two minutes for BHSs.

With Release 8.2 and later, all of the 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz master and slave radios
satisfy the requirements that the FCC Report and Order 03-287, Industry Canada, and
ETSI EN 301 893 v1.3.1 impose for DFS. These regulations differ on

◦ which radio frequency band(s) have DFS required.
◦ whether older radios must have DFS enabled.
◦ whether SMs and BHSs, in addition to APs and BHMs, must have DFS enabled.

Moreover in Release 8.2 and later, 5.4-GHz radios that are set for Canada or Australia
omit center channel frequencies from 5580 to 5670 MHz, inclusive, from their GUIs and
cannot operate in that range. This satisfies Canadian and Australian requirements that
protect weather radio from interference by co-channel operation. This leaves 6 instead
of 9 channels at 25-MHz center spacing3 (or 7 instead of 11 at 20-MHz center spacing).
Operators in the U.S.A. should avoid the weather channels as well, but may be able to
temporarily use them after spectrum analysis reveals that no competition exists.

The master radios properly implement the regionally-imposed DFS conditions after
reading the value of the Region Code parameter, which Release 8.2 introduced. The
effect of the DFS feature, based on the Region Code value (if this parameter is present),
is shown in Table 30.

3
25-MHz center channel spacing is recommended for CAP 130 (Advantage AP) and 20-Mbps BH.

Issue 1, May 2010 133


Table 30: Effect of DFS feature

Effect of DFS Feature

Region 900 2.4 5.2 5.4 5.7
Code1 MHz GHz GHz GHz GHz
Value AP
AP AP SM AP SM AP SM
SM
SM BHM BHS BHM BHS BHM BHS
BH
No No FCC/IC DFS No No
Australia 2 No effect
effect effect with notch effect effect
ETSI No
Brazil ETSI DFS No effect
DFS effect
No No FCC/IC FCC/IC DFS No No
Canada No effect No effect
effect effect DFS3 with notch
2
effect effect
No ETSI ETSI
Europe ETSI DFS ETSI DFS
effect DFS DFS
No
Russia No effect No effect No effect
effect
United No No FCC/IC No No
3 No effect FCC/IC DFS No effect
States effect effect DFS effect effect
Other No effect on radio operation
None AP or BHM will not transmit

NOTES:
1. In all cases, set the Region Code parameter to the appropriate region. Then the software will
determine the correct use of DFS.
2. Center channel frequencies from 5580 to 5670 MHz, inclusive, are omitted (notched out of the
otherwise continuous band) from the GUIs and these radios cannot operate in that range.
3. Newly manufactured P10 5.2-GHz radios use DFS. Radios that were purchased without DFS
are not required to use DFS.

When an AP or BHM boots, it performs a channel availability check (CAC) for one minute
on its main carrier frequency, without transmitting, as it monitors the channel for radar.
If it detects no radar signature during this minute, the radio then proceeds to normal
beacon transmit mode. If it does detect a radar signature, it locks that frequency carrier
out for 30 minutes, and switches to the Alternate Frequency Carrier 1, which is set in
the Configuration => Radio web page.

For the next minute, the radio monitors this new frequency for radar and, if it detects no
radar, it proceeds to beacon transmit mode. If it does detect radar, it locks that frequency
carrier out for 30 minutes, and switches to Alternate Frequency Carrier 2. For the
minute that follows, the radio monitors this second alternate frequency and responds as
described above to the presence or absence of radar on its current channel, switching if
necessary to the next channel in line.

The ETSI EN 301 893 v1.3.1 specification requires DFS on a slave radio (SM or BHS)
also. A slave radio transmits only if it receives a beacon from the master radio (AP or
BHM). When the slave radio with DFS boots, it scans to distinguish whether a master
radio beacon is present. If it finds a master, the slave receives on that frequency for

134 Issue 1, May 2010


one minute without transmitting, as it monitors for a radar signature. Then the slave
proceeds as follows:

◦ If an SM detects no radar during this minute, it attempts to register in the AP. If it
does detect radar, it locks out that frequency for 30 minutes and continues
scanning other frequencies in its scan list.
◦ If a BHS detects no radar during this minute, it registers in the BHM. While
registering and ranging, it continues for another full minute to scan for radar. If it
detects radar, it locks out that frequency for 30 minutes and continues scanning
other frequencies in its scan list.

The possibility exists for a slave to attempt to register in a different master at this point
and to even succeed. This would depend on both of the following conditions:

◦ matching color code values in the slave and master
◦ matching transmission frequency of the master to one that the slave is set in the
scan list of the slave.

The slave automatically inherits the DFS type of the master. This behavior ignores the
value of the Region Code parameter in the slave, even when the value is None.
Nevertheless, since future system software releases may read the value in order to
configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), the operator should always set the
value that corresponds to the local region.

The Home => General Status web page in any module with DFS displays one of the
following status statements in its read-only field DFS field under Device Information:

◦ Normal Transmit
◦ Radar Detected Stop Transmitting for n minutes, where n counts
down from 30 to 1.
◦ Checking Channel Availability Remaining time n seconds, where
n counts down from 60 to 1.
◦ Idle, which indicates that the slave radio is scanning but has failed to detect a
beacon from a master radio. When it has detected a beacon, the slave initiates a
channel availability check (CAC) on that frequency.

RECOMMENDATION:
Where regulations require that radar sensing and radio shutdown is enabled, you
can most effectively share the spectrum with satellite services if you perform
spectrum analysis and select channels that are distributed evenly across the
frequency band range.

A connectorized 5.7-GHz module provides an Antenna Gain parameter. When you
indicate the gain of your antenna in this field, the algorithm calculates the appropriate
sensitivity to radar signals, and this reduces the occurrence of false positives (wherever
the antenna gain is less than the maximum).
Release 9 introduces support for Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) ETSI v1.4.1.

Issue 1, May 2010 135


12.3 USING JITTER TO CHECK RECEIVED SIGNAL QUALITY
(FSK ONLY)
The General Status tab in the Home page of the SM and BHS displays current values for
Jitter, which is essentially a measure of interference. Interpret the jitter value as indicated
in Table 31.

Table 31: Signal quality levels indicated by jitter

Correlation of Highest Seen
Jitter to Signal Quality
Signal High Questionable Poor
Modulation Quality Quality Quality
1X operation
0 to 4 5 to 14 15
(2-level FSK)
2X operation
0 to 9 10 to 14 15
(4-level FSK)

In your lab, an SM whose jitter value is constant at 14 may have an incoming packet
efficiency of 100%. However, a deployed SM whose jitter value is 14 is likely to have
even higher jitter values as interfering signals fluctuate in strength over time. So, do not
consider 14 to be acceptable. Avoiding a jitter value of 15 should be the highest priority in
establishing a link. At 15, jitter causes fragments to be dropped and link efficiency to
suffer.

Modules calculate jitter based on both interference and the modulation scheme. For this
reason, values on the low end of the jitter range that are significantly higher in 2X
operation can still be indications of a high quality signal. For example, where the amount
of interference remains constant, an SM with a jitter value of 3 in 1X operation can
display a jitter value of 7 when enabled for 2X operation.

However, on the high end of the jitter range, do not consider the higher values in 2X
operation to be acceptable. This is because 2X operation is much more susceptible to
problems from interference than is 1X. For example, where the amount of interference
remains constant, an SM with a jitter value of 6 in 1X operation can display a jitter value
of 14 when enabled for 2X operation. As indicated in Table 31, these values are
unacceptable.

OFDM uses a different modulation scheme and does not display a jitter value.

12.4 USING LINK EFFICIENCY TO CHECK FSK RECEIVED SIGNAL
QUALITY
A link test, available in the Link Capacity Test tab of the Tools web page in an AP or BH,
provides a more reliable indication of received signal quality, particularly if you launch
tests of varying duration. However, a link test interrupts traffic and consumes system
capacity, so do not routinely launch link tests across your networks.

12.4.1 Comparing Efficiency in 1X Operation to Efficiency in 2X Operation
Efficiency of at least 98 to 100% indicates a high quality signal. Check the signal quality
numerous times, at various times of day and on various days of the week (as you
checked the RF environment a variety of times by spectrum analysis before placing

136 Issue 1, May 2010


radios in the area). Efficiency less than 90% in 1X operation or less than 60% in 2X
operation indicates a link with problems that require action.

12.4.2 When to Switch from 2X to 1X Operation Based on 60% Link Efficiency
In the above latter case (60% in 2X operation), the link experiences worse latency (from
packet resends) than it would in 1X operation, but still greater capacity, if the link remains
stable at 60% Efficiency. Downlink Efficiency and Uplink Efficiency are measurements
produced by running a link test from either the SM or the AP. Examples of what action
should be taken based on Efficiency in 2X operation are provided in Table 32.

Table 32: Recommended courses of action based on Efficiency in 2X operation

Module Types Further Investigation Result Recommended Action
Check the General Status tab
1 Uplink and
of the CSM 130. See Checking
downlink are both Rerun link tests.
the Status of 2X Operation on 2
CAP 130 ≥60% Efficiency.
Page 94.
with
CSM 130 Optionally, re-aim SM, add a
Uplink and
reflector, or otherwise mitigate
Rerun link tests. downlink are both
interference. In any case, continue
≥60% Efficiency.
2X operation up and down.
Check the General Status tab
Uplink and
of the CSM 120.1 See Checking
downlink are both Rerun link tests.
the Status of 2X Operation on 2
≥60% Efficiency.
Page 94.
Optionally, re-aim SM, add a
Uplink and
reflector, or otherwise mitigate
downlink are both
interference. In any case, continue
≥60% Efficiency.
2X operation up and down.
Rerun link tests.
Results are
inconsistent and Monitor the Session Status tab in
CAP 130 range from 20% to the CAP 130.
with 80% Efficiency.
CSM 120
Link fluctuates Optionally, re-aim SM, add a
Monitor the Session Status tab
between 2X and reflector, or otherwise mitigate
in the CAP 130.
1X operation.3 interference. Then rerun link tests.
No substantial
On the General tab of the SM,
improvement with
Rerun link tests. disable 2X operation. Then rerun
consistency is
link tests.
seen.
Uplink and
Continue 1X operation up and
Rerun link tests. downlink are both
down.
≥90% Efficiency.

NOTES:
1. Or check Session Status page of the CAP 130, where a sum of greater than 7,000,000 bps for the up- and
downlink indicates 2X operation up and down (for 2.4- or 5.x-GHz modules.
2. For throughput to the SM, this is equivalent to 120% Efficiency in 1X operation, with less capacity used at
the AP.
3. This link is problematic.

Issue 1, May 2010 137


12.5 CONSIDERING FREQUENCY BAND ALTERNATIVES
For 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz modules, 20-MHz wide channels are centered every 5 MHz.
For 2.4-GHz modules, 20-MHz wide channels are centered every 2.5 MHz. For OFDM,
the operator can configure center channel frequencies of the 10 MHz channels with a
granularity of 0.5 MHz. This allows the operator to customize the channel layout for
interoperability where other equipment is collocated.

Cross-band deployment of APs and BH is the recommended alternative (for example,
a 5.2-GHz AP collocated with 5.7-GHz BH).

IMPORTANT!
In all cases, channel center separation between collocated FSK modules should
be at least 20 MHz for 1X operation and 25 MHz for 2X. For OFDM, channel
center separation between collocated modules should be at least 10 MHz.

12.5.1 900-MHz Channels

900-MHz AP Available Channels
A 900-MHz AP can operate with its 8-MHz wide channel centered on any of the following
frequencies:
(All Frequencies in MHz)
906 909 912 915 918 922
907 910 913 916 919 923
908 911 914 917 920 924

900-MHz AP Cluster Recommended Channels
Three non-overlapping channels are recommended for use in a 900-MHz AP cluster:
(All Frequencies in MHz)
906 915 924

This recommendation allows 9 MHz of separation between channel centers. You can use
the Spectrum Analysis feature in an SM, or use a standalone spectrum analyzer, to
evaluate the RF environment. In any case, ensure that the 8-MHz wide channels you
select do not overlap.

12.5.2 2.4-GHz Channels

2.4-GHz BHM and AP Available Channels
A 2.4-GHz BHM or AP can operate with its 20-MHz wide channel centered on any of the
following channels, which are separated by only 2.5-MHz increments.
(All Frequencies in GHz)
2.4150 2.4275 2.4400 2.4525
2.4175 2.4300 2.4425 2.4550
2.4200 2.4325 2.4450 2.4575
2.4225 2.4350 2.4475
2.4250 2.4375 2.4500

138 Issue 1, May 2010


The center channels of adjacent 2.4-GHz APs should be separated by at least 20 MHz.

2.4-GHz AP Cluster Recommended Channels
Three non-overlapping channels are recommended for use in a 2.4-GHz AP cluster:
2.4150 2.4350 2.4575

This recommendation allows 20 MHz of separation between one pair of channels and
22.5 MHz between the other pair. You can use the Spectrum Analysis feature in an SM
or BHS, or use a standalone spectrum analyzer, to evaluate the RF environment. Where
spectrum analysis identifies risk of interference for any of these channels, you can
compromise this recommendation as follows:

◦ Select 2.4375 GHz for the middle channel
◦ Select 2.455 GHz for the top channel
◦ Select 2.4175 GHz for the bottom channel

In any case, ensure that your plan allows at least 20 MHz of separation between
channels.

12.5.3 4.9-GHz OFDM Channels
Channel selections for the OFDM AP in the 4.9-GHz frequency band range are 4.945
through 4.985 GHz on 5-MHz centers, with not more than five non-overlapping channels.

Channel selections for the AP in the 5.2-GHz frequency band range depend on whether
the AP is deployed in cluster.

5.2-GHz BH and Single AP Available Channels
A BH or a single 5.2-GHz AP can operate in the following channels, which are separated
by 5-MHz increments.
5.275 5.290 5.305 5.320
5.280 5.295 5.310 5.325
5.285 5.300 5.315

The center channels of adjacent APs should be separated by at least 20 MHz. However,
25 MHz of separation is advised, especially for CAP 130s to take advantage of 2X
operation.

Three non-overlapping channels are recommended for use in a 5.2-GHz AP cluster:
5.275 5.300 5.325

Issue 1, May 2010 139


12.5.5 5.4-GHz FSK Channels
Channel selections for the AP in the 5.4-GHz FSK frequency band range depend on
whether the AP is deployed in cluster.

5.4-GHz BH and Single AP Available
A BH or single 5.4-GHz FSK AP can operate in the following channels, which are
separated by 5-MHz.

5495 5515 5535 5555 5575 5595 5615 5635 5655 5675 5695
5500 5520 5540 5560 5580 5600 5620 5640 5660 5680 5700
5505 5525 5545 5565 5585 5605 5625 5645 5665 5685 5705
5510 5530 5550 5570 5590 5610 5630 5650 5670 5690

The channels of adjacent APs should be separated by at least 20 MHz, especially for
CAP 130s to take advantage of 2X operation.

The fully populated cluster requires only three channels, each reused by the module that
is mounted 180° opposed. In this frequency band range, the possible sets of three non-
overlapping channels are numerous. As many as 11 non-overlapping 20-MHz wide
channels are available for 1X operation. Fewer 25-MHz wide channels are available for
2X operation, where this greater separation is recommended for interference avoidance.

5.4-GHz AP Cluster Limit Case
In the limit, the 11 channels could support all of the following, vertically stacked on the
same mast:

◦ 3 full clusters, each cluster using 3 channels
◦ a set of 4 APs, the set using the 2 channels that no AP in any of the 3 full
clusters is using

IMPORTANT!
Where regulations require you to have Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)
enabled, analyze the spectrum, then spread your channel selections as evenly
as possible throughout this frequency band range, appropriately sharing it with
satellite services.

12.5.6 5.4-GHz OFDM Channels
Channel selections for the PMP 400 Series AP in the 5.4-GHz frequency band range
depend on whether the AP is deployed.

5.4-GHz Single OFDM AP Available Channels
Operators configure the channels of OFDM modules on their
Configuration => Custom Frequencies web pages. The available center channels for an
individual OFDM AP (not in cluster) depends on the region where the AP is deployed and
are in the ranges quoted in Table 33.

140 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 33: Available center channels for single OFDM AP

Range(s) For
Region 1
Center Channels
U.S.A. 5480 to 5710
5480 to 5595
Canada
5655 to 5710
5475 to 5595
Europe
5655 to 5715

NOTES:
1. Selectable in 5-MHz increments.

5.4-GHz OFDM AP Cluster Recommended Channels
No guard band is required between 10-MHz channels. However, to use the 3X operation
feature of these OFDM modules, you should separate the channels of clustered APs by
at least 10 MHz. The fully populated cluster may be configured for two channels—each
reused by the module that is mounted 180° opposed—or four channels.

Channels are preconfigured to help in your decision on the two or four to use in a four-AP
cluster. These modules do not include a spectrum analyzer for you to read the strength of
neighboring frequencies. The ranges of available center channels for clustered APs are
those shown in Table 33 above.

However, where 5.4-GHz OFDM APs are collocated with 5.4-GHz FSK APs, you should
allow 25 MHz channel center spacing to prevent either of the sectors from experiencing
interference from the other.

Channel selections for the AP in the 5.7-GHz frequency band range depend on whether
the AP is deployed in cluster.

5.7-GHz BH and Single AP Available Channels
A BH or a single 5.7-GHz AP enabled for frequencies can operate in the following
channels, which are separated by 5-MHz increments.
5.735 5.765 5.795 5.825
5.740 5.770 5.800 5.830
5.745 5.775 5.805 5.835
5.750 5.780 5.810 5.840
5.755 5.785 5.815
5.760 5.790 5.820

The channels of adjacent APs should be separated by at least 20 MHz. However,
25 MHz of separation is advised, especially for CAP 130s to take advantage of 2X
operation.

Issue 1, May 2010 141


Six non-overlapping channels are recommended for use in 5.7-GHz AP clusters:
5.735 5.775 5.815
5.755 5.795 5.835

The fully populated cluster requires only three channels, each reused by the module that
is mounted 180° offset. The six channels above are also used for backhaul point-to-point
links.
As noted above, a 5.7-GHz AP can operate on a frequency as high as 5.840 GHz. Where
engineering plans allow, this frequency can be used to provide an additional 5-MHz
separation between AP and BH channels.

12.5.8 Channels Available for PTP 400 and PTP 600 Radios
Channel selections for radios in the PTP400 and PTP 600 series are quoted in the user
guides that are dedicated to those products. However, these units dynamically change
channels when the signal substantially degrades. Since the available channels are in the
5.4- and 5.7-GHz frequency band ranges, carefully consider the potential effects of
deploying these products into an environment where traffic in this range pre-exists.

12.5.9 Example Channel Plans for FSK AP Clusters
Examples for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs are provided in the
following tables. Each frequency is reused on the sector that is at a 180° offset. The entry
in the Symbol column of each table refers to the layout in Figure 34 on Page 144.

NOTE:
The operator specifies the sector ID for the module as described under Sector ID
on Page 445.

Table 34: Example 900-MHz channel assignment by sector

Direction of Access
Point Sector Frequency Sector ID Symbol
North (0°) 906 MHz 0 A
Northeast (60°) 915 MHz 1 B
Southeast (120°) 924 MHz 2 C
South (180°) 906 MHz 3 A
Southwest (240°) 915 MHz 4 B
Northwest (300°) 924 MHz 5 C

142 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 35: Example 2.4-GHz channel assignment by sector

Direction of Access
North (0°) 2.4150 GHz 0 A
Northeast (60°) 2.4350 GHz 1 B
Southeast (120°) 2.4575 GHz 2 C
South (180°) 2.4150 GHz 3 A
Southwest (240°) 2.4350 GHz 4 B
Northwest (300°) 2.4575 GHz 5 C


Direction of Access
North (0°) 5.275 GHz 0 A
South (180°) 5.275 GHz 3 A


Direction of Access
North (0°) 5.580 GHz 0 A
South (180°) 5.580 GHz 3 A

Issue 1, May 2010 143


Table 38: Example 5.7-GHz FSK channel assignment by sector

Direction of Access
North (0°) 5.735 GHz 0 A
South (180°) 5.735 GHz 3 A

12.5.10 Multiple FSK Access Point Clusters
When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as
shown in Figure 34. However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate
a different pattern of channel assignments.

A

C B

A B C A

C B A C B

B C A B C

A C B A

A B C A

C B A C B

B C A B C

A C B A

B C

A

Figure 34: Example layout of 7 FSK Access Point clusters

144 Issue 1, May 2010


12.5.11 Example Channel Plan for OFDM AP Cluster
An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the
following table. Each frequency is reused on the sector that is at a 180° offset. The entry
in the Symbol column of each table refers to the layout in Figure 35 on Page 146.

NOTE:
The operator specifies the sector ID for the module as described under Sector ID
on Page 445.

Table 39: Example 4.9-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector

Direction of Access
North (0°) 4.955 GHz 0 A
East (90°) 4.973 GHz 1 B
South (180°) 4.955 GHz 2 A
West (270°) 4.973 GHz 3 B

Table 40: Example 5.4-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector

Direction of Access
North (0°) 5.475 GHz 0 A
East (90°) 5.715 GHz 1 B
South (180°) 5.475 GHz 2 A
West (270°) 5.715 GHz 3 B

NOTE:
The guard band for access by weather information transmissions
spans 5.480 to 5.710 GHz. The example frequencies listed above
avoid this guard band.

12.5.12 Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters
When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as
shown in Figure 35. However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate
a different pattern of channel assignments.

Issue 1, May 2010 145


Figure 35: Example layout of 16 OFDM Access Point sectors

12.6 SELECTING SITES FOR NETWORK ELEMENTS
The APs must be positioned

◦ with hardware that the wind and ambient vibrations cannot flex or move.
◦ where a tower or rooftop is available or can be erected.
◦ where a grounding system is available.
◦ with lightning arrestors to transport lightning strikes away from equipment.
◦ at a proper height:
− higher than the tallest points of objects immediately around them (such as
trees, buildings, and tower legs).
− at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) below the tallest point on the tower, pole, or roof
(for lightning protection).
◦ away from high-RF energy sites (such as AM or FM stations, high-powered
antennas, and live AM radio towers).
◦ in line-of-sight paths
− to the SMs and BH.
− that will not be obstructed by trees as they grow or structures that are later
built.

NOTE:
Visual line of sight does not guarantee radio line of sight.

146 Issue 1, May 2010


12.6.1 Resources for Maps and Topographic Images
Mapping software is available from sources such as the following:

◦ http://www.microsoft.com/streets/default.asp
− Microsoft Streets & Trips (with Pocket Streets)
◦ http://www.delorme.com/software.htm
− DeLorme Street Atlas USA
− DeLorme Street Atlas USA Plus
− DeLorme Street Atlas Handheld
Topographic maps are available from sources such as the following:

◦ http://www.delorme.com/software.htm
− DeLorme Topo USA
− DeLorme 3-D TopoQuads
◦ http://www.usgstopomaps.com
− Timely Discount Topos, Inc. authorized maps
Topographic maps with waypoints are available from sources such as the following:

◦ http://www.topografix.com
− TopoGrafix EasyGPS
− TopoGrafix Panterra
− TopoGrafix ExpertGPS
Topographic images are available from sources such as the following:

◦ http://www.keyhole.com/body.php?h=products&t=keyholePro
− keyhole PRO
◦ http://www.digitalglobe.com
− various imagery

12.6.2 Surveying Sites
Factors to survey at potential sites include

◦ what pre-existing wireless equipment exists at the site. (Perform spectrum
analysis.)
◦ whether available mounting positions exist near the lowest elevation that satisfies
line of site, coverage, and other link criteria.
◦ whether you will always have the right to decide who climbs the tower to install
and maintain your equipment, and whether that person or company can climb at
any hour of any day.
◦ whether you will have collaborative rights and veto power to prevent interference
to your equipment from wireless equipment that is installed at the site in the
future.
◦ whether a pre-existing grounding system (path to Protective Earth ) exists, and
what is required to establish a path to it.
◦ who is permitted to run any indoor lengths of cable.

Issue 1, May 2010 147


12.6.3 Assuring the Essentials
In the 2.4-, 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz frequency band ranges, an unobstructed line of sight
(LOS) must exist and be maintainable between the radios that are involved in each link.

Line of Sight (LOS) Link
In these ranges, a line of sight link is both

◦ an unobstructed straight line from radio to radio.
◦ an unobstructed zone surrounding that straight line.

Fresnel Zone Clearance
An unobstructed line of sight is important, but is not the only determinant of adequate
placement. Even where the path has a clear line of sight, obstructions such as terrain,
vegetation, metal roofs, or cars may penetrate the Fresnel zone and cause signal loss.
Figure 36 illustrates an ideal Fresnel zone.

Figure 36: Fresnel zone in line of sight link

FresnelZoneCalcPage.xls calculates the Fresnel zone clearance that is required between
the visual line of sight and the top of an obstruction that would protrude into the link path.

Near Line of Sight (nLOS) Link
The 900-MHz and OFDM modules have a greater near line of sight (nLOS) range than
modules of other frequency bands. NLOS range depends on RF considerations such as
foliage, topography, obstructions. A depiction of an nLOS link is shown in Figure 37.

Figure 37: Fresnel zone in near line of sight link

Non-Line of Sight (NLOS) Link
The 900-MHz and OFDM modules have a greater non-line of sight (NLOS) range than
modules of other frequency bands. NLOS range depends on RF considerations such as
foliage, topography, obstructions. A depiction of an NLOS link is shown in Figure 38.

Figure 38: Fresnel zone in non-line of sight link

148 Issue 1, May 2010


12.6.4 Finding the Expected Coverage Area
The transmitted beam in the vertical dimension covers more area beyond than in front of
the beam center. BeamwidthRadiiCalcPage.xls calculates the radii of the beam coverage
area for PMP 100 Series APs.

12.6.5 Clearing the Radio Horizon
Because the surface of the earth is curved, higher module elevations are required for
greater link distances. This effect can be critical to link connectivity in link spans that are
greater than 8 miles (12 km). AntennaElevationCalcPage.xls calculates the minimum
antenna elevation for these cases, presuming no landscape elevation difference from one
end of the link to the other.

12.6.6 Calculating the Aim Angles
The appropriate angle of AP downward tilt is derived from both the distance between
transmitter and receiver and the difference in their elevations. DowntiltCalcPage.xls
calculates this angle.

The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a factor of both the difference in elevation
and the distance that the link spans. Even in this case, a plumb line and a protractor can
be helpful to ensure the proper tilt. This tilt is typically minimal.

The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support
tube is equal to the angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module (<B in
the example provided in Figure 39).

LEGEND
b Angle of elevation.
BVertical difference in elevation.
AHorizontal distance between modules.

Figure 39: Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression)

Calculating the Angle of Elevation
To use metric units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
B
tan b =
1000A
where
B is expressed in meters
A is expressed in kilometers.

Issue 1, May 2010 149


To use English standard units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
B
tan b =
5280A
where
B is expressed in feet
A is expressed in miles.

The angle of depression from the higher module is identical to the angle of elevation from
the lower module.

12.7 COLLOCATING MODULES
A BH and an AP or AP cluster on the same tower require a CMM. The CMM properly
synchronizes the transmit start times of all modules to prevent interference and
desensing of the modules. At closer distances without sync from a CMM, the frame
structures cause self interference.

Furthermore, a BH and an AP on the same tower require that the effects of their differing
receive start times be mitigated by either

◦ 100 vertical feet (30 meters) or more and as much spectral separation as
possible within the same frequency band range.
◦ the use of the frame calculator to tune the Downlink Data parameter in each,
so that the receive start time in each is the same. See Using the Frame
Calculator Tool (All) on Page 446.

APs and a BHS can be collocated at the same site only if they operate in different
frequency band ranges.

Where a single BH air link is insufficient to cover the distance from an AP cluster to your
point of presence (POP), you can deploy two BHSs, connected to one another by
Ethernet, on a tower that is between a BHM collocated with the AP cluster and another
BHM collocated with the POP. This deployment is illustrated in Figure 40.

BH BH BH BH
AP
-M- -S- -S- -M-

POP

CMM CMM

Figure 40: Double-hop backhaul links

150 Issue 1, May 2010


However, the BHSs can be collocated at the same site only if one is on a different
frequency band range from that of the other or one of the following conditions applies:

◦ They are vertically separated on a structure by at least 100 feet (30 m).
◦ They are vertically separated on a structure by less distance, but either
− an RF shield isolates them from each other.
− the uplink and downlink data parameters and control channels match (the
Downlink Data parameter is set to 50%).

The constraints for collocated modules in the same frequency band range are to avoid
self-interference that would occur between them. Specifically, unless the uplink and
downlink data percentages match, intervals exist when one is transmitting while the other
is receiving, such that the receiving module cannot receive the signal from the far end.

The interference is less a problem during low throughput periods and intolerable during
high. Typically, during low throughput periods, sufficient time exists for the far end to
retransmit packets lost because of interference from the collocated module.

12.8 DEPLOYING A REMOTE AP
In cases where the subscriber population is widely distributed, or conditions such as
geography restrict network deployment, you can add a Remote AP to

◦ provide high-throughput service to near LoS business subscribers.
◦ reach around obstructions or penetrate foliage with non-LoS throughput.
◦ reach new, especially widely distributed, residential subscribers with broadband
service.
◦ pass sync to an additional RF hop.

In the remote AP configuration, a remote AP is collocated with an SM. The remote AP
distributes the signal over the last mile to SMs that are logically behind the collocated
SM. A remote AP deployment is illustrated in Figure 41.

Canopy
AP SM
CANOP Y

CANOP Y CA NO P Y CA NO P Y
Canopy
SM with
Remote AP

CANOPY

CANOP Y C A N OP Y

Canopy
Canopy SM
SM CA N OP Y

CA N O P Y

Figure 41: Remote AP deployment

Issue 1, May 2010 151


The collocated SM receives data in one frequency band, and the remote AP must
redistribute the data in a different frequency band. Base your selection of frequency band
ranges on regulatory restrictions, environmental conditions, and throughput requirements.

IMPORTANT!
Each relay hop (additional daisy-chained remote AP) adds approximately 6 msec
latency.

12.8.1 Remote AP Performance
The performance of a remote AP is identical to the AP performance in cluster.
Throughputs, ranges, and patch antenna coverage are identical. CAP 130s and
CSM 130s (or CAP 09130s and CSM 09130s) can be deployed in tandem in the same
sector to meet customer bandwidth demands.

As with all equipment operating in the unlicensed spectrum, Motorola strongly
recommends that you perform site surveys before you add network elements. These will
indicate that spectrum is available in the area where you want to grow. Keep in mind that

◦ non-LoS ranges heavily depend on environmental conditions.
◦ in most regions, not all frequencies are available.
◦ your deployments must be consistent with local regulatory restrictions.

12.8.2 Example Use Case for RF Obstructions
A remote AP can be used to provide last-mile access to a community where RF
obstructions prevent SMs from communicating with the higher-level AP in cluster. For
example, you may be able to use 900 MHz for the last mile between a remote AP and the
outlying SMs where these subscribers cannot form good links to a higher-level 2.4-GHz
AP. In this case, the short range of the 900-MHz remote AP is sufficient, and the ability of
the 900-MHz wavelength to be effective around foliage at short range solves the foliage
penetration problem.

An example of this use case is shown in Figure 42.

152 Issue 1, May 2010


2.4 GHz SM
2.4 GHz AP CANOPY

CANOPY

2.4 GHz SM
CANOPY CANOPY CANOPY

with
Remote 900 MHz AP

900 MHz SM

CANOPY
CANOPY CANOPY

CANOPY
900 MHz SM

CANOPY

900 MHz SM

CANOPY

14 Mbps Maximum Aggregate Throughput
LoS Range 2.5 miles
7 Mbps Maximum Aggregate Throughput
900 MHz SM CANOPY

LoS Range 5 miles

4 Mbps Maximum Throughput
NLoS Range ~2 miles
2 Mbps Maximum ThroughputNLoS
Range ~4 miles
LoS Range 20 miles
LoS Range 40 miles

Figure 42: Example 900-MHz remote AP behind 2.4-GHz SM

The 2.4 GHz modules provide a sustained aggregate throughput of up to 14 Mbps to the
sector. One of the SMs in the sector is wired to a 900-MHz remote AP, which provides
NLoS sustained aggregate throughput4 of

◦ 4 Mbps to 900-MHz SMs up to 2 miles away in the sector.
◦ 2 Mbps to 900-MHz SMs between 2 and 4 miles away in the sector.

12.8.3 Example Use Case for Passing Sync
All radios support the remote AP functionality. The BHS and the SM can reliably pass the
sync pulse, and the BHM and AP can reliably receive it. Examples of passing sync over
cable are shown under Passing Sync in an Additional Hop on Page 99. The sync cable is
described under Cables on Page 63.

4
NLoS ranges depend on environmental conditions. Your results may vary from these.

Issue 1, May 2010 153


The sync is passed in a cable that connects Pins 1 and 6 of the RJ-11 timing ports of the
two modules. When you connect modules in this way, you must also adjust configuration
parameters to ensure that

◦ the AP is set to properly receive sync.
◦ the SM will not propagate sync to the AP if the SM itself ceases to receive sync.

Perform Procedure 32: Extending network sync on Page 378.

12.8.4 Physical Connections Involving the Remote AP
The SM to which you wire a remote AP can be either an SM that serves a customer or an
SM that simply serves as a relay. Where the SM serves a customer, wire the remote AP
to the SM as shown in Figure 43.

Figure 43: Remote AP wired to SM that also serves a customer

Where the SM simply serves as a relay, you must use a straight-through RJ-45
female-to-female coupler, and wire the SM to the remote AP as shown in Figure 44.

154 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 44: Remote AP wired to SM that serves as a relay

12.9 DIAGRAMMING NETWORK LAYOUTS

12.9.1 Accounting for Link Ranges and Data Handling Requirements
For aggregate throughput correlation to link distance in both point-to-multipoint and
point-to-point links, see

◦ Link Performance and Encryption Comparisons on Page 67.
◦ all regulations that apply in your region and nation(s).

12.9.2 Avoiding Self Interference
For 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz modules, 20-MHz wide channels are centered every 5 MHz.
For 2.4-GHz modules, 20-MHz wide channels are centered every 2.5 MHz. For 5.4-GHz
OFDM modules, 10-MHz wide channels can be centered every 0.5 MHz. This allows you
to customize the channel layout for interoperability where other equipment is collocated,
as well as select channels with the least background interference level.

CAUTION!
Regardless of whether 2.4-, 5.2-, 5.4-, or 5.7-GHz modules are deployed,
channel separation between modules should be at least 20 MHz for 1X
operation or 25 MHz for 2X.

Physical Proximity
A BH and an AP on the same tower require a CMM. The CMM properly synchronizes the
transmit start times of all modules to prevent interference and desensing of the modules.
At closer distances without sync from a CMM, the frame structures cause self
interference.

Issue 1, May 2010 155


Furthermore, a BH and an AP on the same tower require that the effects of their differing
receive start times be mitigated by either

◦ 100 vertical feet (30 meters) or more and as much spectral separation as
possible within the same frequency band range.
◦ the use of the frame calculator to tune the Downlink Data % parameter in each,
so that the receive start time in each is the same. See Using the Frame
Calculator Tool (All) on Page 446.

Spectrum Analysis
You can use an SM or BHS as a spectrum analyzer. See Mapping RF Neighbor
Frequencies on Page 131. Through a toggle of the Device Type parameter, you can
temporarily transform an AP into an SM to use it as a spectrum analyzer.

Power Reduction to Mitigate Interference
Where any module (SM, AP, BH timing master, or BH timing slave) is close enough to
another module that self-interference is possible, you can set the SM to operate at less
than full power. To do so, perform the following steps.

CAUTION!
Too low a setting of the Transmitter Output Power parameter can cause a link
to a distant module to drop. A link that drops for this reason requires Ethernet
access to the GUI to re-establish the link.

Procedure 3: Reducing transmitter output power
1. Access the Radio tab of the module.
2. In the Transmitter Output Power parameter, reduce the setting.
3. Click Save Changes.
4. Click Reboot.
5. Access the Session Status tab in the Home web page of the SM.
6. Assess whether the link achieves good Power Level and Jitter values.
NOTE: The received Power Level is shown in dBm and should be maximized.
Jitter, where a value is present, should be minimized. However, better/lower jitter
should be favored over better/higher dBm. For historical reasons, RSSI is also
shown and is the unitless measure of power. The best practice is to use Power
Level and ignore RSSI, which implies more accuracy and precision than is
inherent in its measurement.
7. Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools web page of the module.
8. Assess whether the desired links for this module achieve
◦ uplink efficiency greater than 90%.
◦ downlink efficiency greater than 90%.
9. If the desired links fail to achieve any of the above measurement thresholds, then
a. access the module by direct Ethernet connection.
b. access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of the module.
10. In the Transmitter Output Power parameter, increase the setting.

156 Issue 1, May 2010


11. Click Save Changes.
12. Click Reboot.
end of procedure

12.9.3 Avoiding Other Interference
Where signal strength cannot dominate noise levels, the network experiences

◦ bit error corrections.
◦ packet errors and retransmissions.
◦ lower throughput (because bandwidth is consumed by retransmissions) and high
latency (due to resends).

Be especially cognitive of these symptoms for 900-MHz links. Where you see these
symptoms, attempt the following remedies:

◦ Adjust the position of the SM.
◦ Deploy a band-pass filter at the AP.
◦ Consider adding a remote AP closer to the affected SMs. (See Deploying a
Remote AP on Page 151.)

Certain other actions, which may seem to be potential remedies, do not resolve high
noise level problems:

◦ Do not deploy an omnidirectional antenna.
◦ Do not set the antenna gain above the regulated level.
◦ Do not deploy a band-pass filter in the expectation that this can mitigate co-
channel interference.

Issue 1, May 2010 157


13 ENGINEERING YOUR IP COMMUNICATIONS

13.1 UNDERSTANDING ADDRESSES
A basic understanding of Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask concepts is
required for engineering your IP network.

13.1.1 IP Address
The IP address is a 32-bit binary number that has four parts (octets). This set of four
octets has two segments, depending on the class of IP address. The first segment
identifies the network. The second identifies the hosts or devices on the network. The
subnet mask marks a boundary between these two sub-addresses.

13.2 DYNAMIC OR STATIC ADDRESSING
For any computer to communicate with a module, the computer must be configured to
either

◦ use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). In this case, when not
connected to the network, the computer derives an IP address on the 169.254
network within two minutes.
◦ have an assigned static IP address (for example, 169.254.1.5) on the 169.254
network.

IMPORTANT!
If an IP address that is set in the module is not the 169.254.x.x network address,
then the network operator must assign the computer a static IP address in the
same subnet.

13.2.1 When a DHCP Server is Not Found
To operate on a network, a computer requires an IP address, a subnet mask, and
possibly a gateway address. Either a DHCP server automatically assigns this
configuration information to a computer on a network or an operator must input these
items.

When a computer is brought on line and a DHCP server is not accessible (such as when
the server is down or the computer is not plugged into the network), Microsoft and Apple
operating systems default to an IP address of 169.254.x.x and a subnet mask of
255.255.0.0 (169.254/16, where /16 indicates that the first 16 bits of the address range
are identical among all members of the subnet).

Issue 1, May 2010 159


13.3 NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT)

13.3.1 NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client, and DMZ in SM
The system provides NAT (network address translation) for SMs in the following
combinations of NAT and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):

◦ NAT Disabled (as in earlier releases)
◦ NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN
interface) and DHCP Server
◦ NAT with DHCP Client(DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN
interface)
◦ NAT with DHCP Server
◦ NAT without DHCP

NAT
NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of an SM from being seen
directly from the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP address
for transport traffic (separate from its address for management), terminates transport
traffic, and allows you to assign a range of IP addresses to devices that are connected
to the Ethernet/wired side of the SM.

In the Motorola system, NAT supports many protocols, including HTTP, ICMP (Internet
Control Message Protocols), and FTP (File Transfer Protocol). For virtual private network
(VPN) implementation, L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security)
and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) are supported. See NAT and VPNs on
Page 165.

DHCP
DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters,
including a default gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces
configuration time, conserves IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a
different network within the Motorola system.

In conjunction with the NAT features, each SM provides

◦ a DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by
Ethernet protocol.
◦ a DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP
server.

DMZ
In conjunction with the NAT features, a DMZ (demilitarized zone) allows the assignment
of one IP address behind the SM for a device to logically exist outside the firewall and
receive network traffic. The first three octets of this IP address must be identical to the
first three octets of the NAT private IP address.

160 Issue 1, May 2010


NAT Disabled
The NAT Disabled implementation is illustrated in Figure 45.

Figure 45: NAT Disabled implementation

Issue 1, May 2010 161


NAT with DHCP Client and DHCP Server
The NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN
interface) and DHCP Server implementation is illustrated in Figure 46.

Figure 46: NAT with DHCP Client and DHCP Server implementation

162 Issue 1, May 2010


NAT with DHCP Client
The NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN
interface) implementation is illustrated in Figure 47.

Figure 47: NAT with DHCP Client implementation

Issue 1, May 2010 163


NAT with DHCP Server
The NAT with DHCP Server implementation is illustrated in Figure 48.

Figure 48: NAT with DHCP Server implementation

164 Issue 1, May 2010


NAT without DHCP
The NAT without DHCP implementation is illustrated in Figure 49.

Figure 49: NAT without DHCP implementation

13.3.2 NAT and VPNs
VPN technology provides the benefits of a private network during communication over a
public network. One typical use of a VPN is to connect remote employees, who are at
home or in a different city, to their corporate network over the public Internet. Any of
several VPN implementation schemes is possible. By design, NAT translates or changes
addresses, and thus interferes with a VPN that is not specifically supported by a given
NAT implementation.

With NAT enabled, SMs support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP
Security) VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs. With NAT disabled,
SMs support all types of VPNs.

Issue 1, May 2010 165


13.4 DEVELOPING AN IP ADDRESSING SCHEME
Network elements are accessed through IP Version 4 (IPv4) addressing.
A proper IP addressing method is critical to the operation and security of a network.

Each module requires an IP address on the network. This IP address is for only
management purposes. For security, you should either
◦ assign an unroutable IP address.
◦ assign a routable IP address only if a firewall is present to protect the module.

You will assign IP addresses to computers and network components by either static or
dynamic IP addressing. You will also assign the appropriate subnet mask and network
gateway to each module.

13.4.1 Address Resolution Protocol
As previously stated, the MAC address identifies a module in

◦ communications between modules.
◦ the data that modules store about each other.
◦ the data that BAM or Prizm applies to manage authentication and bandwidth.

The IP address is essential for data delivery through a router interface. Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) correlates MAC addresses to IP addresses.

For communications to outside the network segment, ARP reads the network gateway
address of the router and translates it into the MAC address of the router. Then the
communication is sent to MAC address (physical network interface card) of the router.

For each router between the sending module and the destination, this sequence applies.
The ARP correlation is stored until the ARP cache times out.

13.4.2 Allocating Subnets
The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that filters the IP address. Where a subnet
mask contains a bit set to 1, the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network
address.

Example IP Address and Subnet Mask
In Figure 50, the first 16 bits of the 32-bit IP address identify the network:

Octet 1 Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4
IP address 169.254.1.1 10101001 11111110 00000001 00000001
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000

Figure 50: Example of IP address in Class B subnet

In this example, the network address is 169.254, and 216 (65,536) hosts are addressable.

166 Issue 1, May 2010


13.4.3 Selecting Non-routable IP Addresses
The factory default assignments for network elements are

◦ unique MAC address
◦ IP address of 169.254.1.1, except for an OFDM series BHM, whose IP address
is 169.254.1.2 by default
◦ subnet mask of 255.255.0.0
◦ network gateway address of 169.254.0.0

For each radio and CMMmicro and CMM4, assign an IP address that is both consistent
with the IP addressing plan for your network and cannot be accessed from the Internet.
IP addresses within the following ranges are not routable from the Internet, regardless of
whether a firewall is configured:

◦ 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
◦ 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
◦ 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255

You can also assign a subnet mask and network gateway for each CMMmicro and
CMM4.

13.5 TRANSLATION BRIDGING
Optionally, you can configure the AP to change the source MAC address in every packet
it receives from its SMs to the MAC address of the SM that bridged the packet, before
forwarding the packet toward the public network. If you do, then

◦ not more than 10 IP devices at any time are valid to send data to the AP from
behind the SM.
◦ the AP populates the Translation Table tab of its Statistics web page, displaying
the MAC address and IP address of all the valid connected devices.
◦ each entry in the Translation Table is associated with the number of minutes that
have elapsed since the last packet transfer between the connected device and
the SM.
◦ if 10 are connected, and another attempts to connect
− and no Translation Table entry is older than 255 minutes, the attempt is
ignored.
− and an entry is older than 255 minutes, the oldest entry is removed and the
attempt is successful.
◦ the Send Untranslated ARP parameter in the General tab of the Configuration
page can be
− disabled, so that the AP will overwrite the MAC address in Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) packets before forwarding them.
− enabled, so that the AP will forward ARP packets regardless of whether it
has overwritten the MAC address.

This is the Translation Bridging feature, which you can enable in the General tab of the
Configuration web page in the AP. When this feature is disabled, the setting of the
Send Untranslated ARP parameter has no effect, because all packets are forwarded
untranslated (with the source MAC address intact).

Issue 1, May 2010 167


See Address Resolution Protocol on Page 166.

168 Issue 1, May 2010


14 ENGINEERING VLANS
The radios support VLAN functionality as defined in the 802.1Q (Virtual LANs)
specification, except for the following aspects of that specification:

◦ the following protocols:
− Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) GARV
− Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
− Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
− GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
◦ priority encoding (802.1P) before Release 7.0
◦ embedded source routing (ERIF) in the 802.1Q header
◦ multicast pruning
◦ flooding unknown unicast frames in the downlink

As an additional exception, the AP does not flood downward the unknown unicast frames
to the SM.

A VLAN configuration in Layer 2 establishes a logical group within the network. Each
computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to
the same data. For the network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation,
simpler management, and enhanced security.

14.1 SPECIAL CASE VLAN NUMBERS
This system handles special case VLAN numbers according to IEEE specifications:

VLAN
Purpose Usage Constraint
Number

These packets have 802.1p priority, but are Should not be used as
0
otherwise handled as untagged. a management VLAN.
Although not noted as special case by IEEE
specifications, these packets identify traffic
Should not be used for
1 that was untagged upon ingress into the SM
system VLAN traffic.
and should remain untagged upon egress.
This policy is hard-coded in the AP.
Should not be used
4095 This VLAN is reserved for internal use.
at all.

14.2 SM MEMBERSHIP IN VLANS
With the supported VLAN functionality, the radios determine bridge forwarding on the
basis of not only the destination MAC address, but also the VLAN ID of the destination.
This provides flexibility in how SMs are used:

◦ Each SM can be a member in its own VLAN.
◦ Each SM can be in its own broadcast domain, such that only the radios that are
members of the VLAN can see broadcast and multicast traffic to and from the
SM.

Issue 1, May 2010 169


◦ The network operator can define a work group of SMs, regardless of the AP(s)
to which they register.

PMP modules provide the VLAN frame filters that are described in Table 41.

Table 41: VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules

then a frame is discarded if…
Where VLAN is active,
entering the bridge/ because of this VLAN
if this parameter value
NAT switch through… filter in the software:
is selected …
Ethernet… TCP/IP…
any combination of VLAN with a VID not in the
Ingress
parameter settings membership table
Local Ingress
Allow Frame Types:
with no 802.1Q tag Only Tagged
Tagged Frames Only
Allow Frame Types: with an 802.1Q tag,
Only Untagged
Untagged Frames Only regardless of VID
Local SM Management:
with an 802.1Q tag
Disable in the SM, or
and a VID in the Local SM Management
All Local SM Management:
membership table
Disable in the AP

leaving the bridge/
NAT switch through…
Ethernet… TCP/IP…
Egress
Local Egress

14.3 PRIORITY ON VLANS (802.1p)
The radios can prioritize traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p
specification. When the high-priority channel is enabled on an SM, regardless of whether
VLAN is enabled on the AP for the sector, packets received with a priority of 4 through 7
in the 802.1p field are forwarded onto the high-priority channel.

VLAN settings can also cause the module to convert received non-VLAN packets into
VLAN packets. In this case, the 802.1p priority in packets leaving the module is set to the
priority established by the DiffServ configuration.

If you enable VLAN, immediately monitor traffic to ensure that the results are as desired.
For example, high-priority traffic may block low-priority.

For more information on the high priority channel, see High-priority Bandwidth on
Page 89.

170 Issue 1, May 2010

INSTALLATION AND
CONFIGURATION
GUIDE

PMP Solutions User Guide Installation and Configuration Guide

15 AVOIDING HAZARDS
Use simple precautions to protect staff and equipment. Hazards include exposure to RF
waves, lightning strikes, and power surges. This section specifically recommends actions
to abate these hazards.

15.1 EXPOSURE SEPARATION DISTANCES
To protect from overexposure to RF energy, install the radios so as to provide and
maintain the minimum separation distances shown in Table 42 away from all persons.

Table 42: Exposure separation distances

Minimum Separation
Module Type
Distance from Persons
FSK or OFDM module 20 cm (approx 8 in)
Module with Reflector Dish 1.5 m (approx 60 in or 5 ft)
Module with LENS 0.5 m (approx 20 in)
Antenna of connectorized 5.7-GHz AP 30 cm (approx 12 in)
Antenna of connectorized or integrated
60 cm (24 in)
900-MHz module
Indoor 900-MHz SM 10 cm (4 in)

At these and greater separation distances, the power density from the RF field is below
generally accepted limits for the general population.

NOTE:
These are conservative distances that include compliance margins. In the case
of the reflector, the distance is even more conservative because the equation
models the reflector as a point source and ignores its physical dimensions.

Section 15.1.1 and Table 43 give details and discussion of the associated calculations.

15.1.1 Details of Exposure Separation Distances Calculations and Power Compliance
Margins
Limits and guidelines for RF exposure come from:

◦ US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at
http://www.fcc.gov, and the policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47
of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well as the guidelines and suggestions for
evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.
◦ Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at
http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb and Safety Code 6.

Issue 1, May 2010 173

Installation and Configuration Guide PMP Solutions User Guide

◦ ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines
for the general public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and
Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and
Electromagnetic Fields.

The applicable power density exposure limits from the documents referenced above are

◦ 6 W/m2 for RF energy in the 900-MHz frequency band in the US and Canada.
◦ 10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 2.4-, 5.2-, 5.4-, and 5.7-GHz frequency bands.

Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as
follows:

where
P ⋅G S = power density in W/m2
S= P = RMS transmit power capability of the radio, in W
4 π d2 G = total Tx gain as a factor, converted from dB
d = distance from point source, in m

P⋅G
d=
Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields
4π S
Table 43 shows calculated minimum separation distances d, recommended distances
and resulting power compliance margins for each frequency band and antenna
combination.

Table 43: Calculated exposure distances and power compliance margins

Variable d Recom- Power
Band mended
Antenna (calcu- Compliance
Range S Separation
P G lated) Margin
Distance
0.4 W 10.0 60 cm
external 6 W/m2 23 cm 7
(26 dBm) (10 dB) (24 in)
900 MHz 0.25 W 15.8 60 cm 7
integrated 6 W/m2 23 cm
(24 dBm) (12 dB) (24 in)

indoor, Simulation model used to estimate Specific 10 cm
2
integrated Absorption Rate (SAR) levels (4 in)
0.34 W 6.3 10 20 cm
integrated 13 cm 2.3
(25 dBm) (8 dB) W/m2 (8 in)
2.4 GHz integrated
0.34 W 79.4 10 1.5 m
plus 46 cm 10
(25 dBm) (19 dB) W/m2 (5 ft)
reflector

174 Issue 1, May 2010


Variable d Recom- Power
Band mended
Antenna (calcu- Compliance
Range S Separation
P G lated) Margin
Distance
0.2 W 5.0 10 20 cm
integrated 9 cm 5
(23 dBm) (7 dB) W/m2 (8 in)
integrated
5.2 GHz 0.0032 W 316 10 1.5 m
plus 9 cm 279
(5 dBm) (25 dB) W/m2 (5 ft)
reflector
integrated 0.025 W 40 10 50 cm
9 cm 31
plus LENS (14 dBm) (16 dB) W/m2 (12 in)
0.2 W 5.0 10 20 cm
integrated 9 cm 5
(23 dBm) (7 dB) W/m2 (8 in)
integrated
5.4 GHz 0.0032 W 316 10 1.5 m
plus 9 cm 279
(5 dBm) (25 dB) W/m2 (5 ft)
reflector
9 cm 31
5.4 GHz 0.01 W 50 10 20 cm
integrated 6 cm 10
OFDM (10 dBm) (17 dB) W/m2 (8 in)
0.2 W 5.0 10 20 cm
integrated 9 cm 5
(23 dBm) (7 dB) W/m2 (8 in)
integrated
5.7 GHz 0.2 W 316 10 1.5 m
plus 71 cm 4.5
(23 dBm) (25 dB) W/m2 (5 ft)
reflector
28 cm 3.13

The Recommended Separation Distance provides significant compliance margin in all
cases. To simplify exposure distances in this column, a module has the expressed
separation distance regardless of whether it is retrofitted with a reflector or a LENS.

These are conservative distances:

◦ They are along the beam direction (the direction of greatest energy). Exposure to the
sides and back of the module is significantly less.
◦ They satisfy sustained exposure limits for the general population (not just short term
occupational exposure limits), with considerable margin.
◦ In the reflector cases, the calculated compliance distance d is greatly overestimated
because the far-field equation models the reflector as a point source and neglects the
physical dimension of the reflector.

Issue 1, May 2010 175


15.2 GROUNDING THE EQUIPMENT
Effective lightning protection diverts lightning current safely to ground, Protective Earth
(PE) . It neither attracts nor prevents lightning strikes.

WARNING!
Lightning damage is not covered under the warranty. The
recommendations in this guide give the installer the knowledge to protect
the installation from the harmful effects of ESD and lightning.
These recommendations must be thoroughly and correctly performed.
However, complete protection is neither implied or possible.

15.2.1 Grounding Infrastructure Equipment
To protect both your staff and your infrastructure equipment, implement lightning
protection as follows:

◦ Observe all local and national codes that apply to grounding for lightning
protection.
◦ Before you install your modules, perform the following steps:
− Engage a grounding professional if you need to do so.
− Install lightning arrestors to transport lightning strikes away from equipment.
For example, install a lightning rod on a tower leg other than the leg to which
you mount your module.
− Connect your lightning rod to ground.
− Use a 600SS Surge Suppressor on the Ethernet cable where the cable
enters any structure. (Instructions for installing this surge suppressor are
provided in Procedure 21 on Page 348.)
◦ Install your modules at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) below the tallest point on the
tower, pole, or roof.

15.2.2 Grounding SMs
This section provides lightning protection guidelines for SMs to satisfy the National
Electrical Code (NEC) of the United States. The requirements of the NEC focus on the
safety aspects of electrical shock to personnel and on minimizing the risk of fire at a
dwelling. The NEC does not address the survivability of electronic products that are
exposed to lightning surges.

The statistical incidence of current levels from lightning strikes is summarized in
Table 44.

Table 44: Statistical incidence of current from lightning strikes

Percentage Peak Current
of all strikes (amps)
<2 >140,000
25 >35,000
>50 >20,000
>80 >8,500

176 Issue 1, May 2010


At peak, more than one-half of all surges due to direct lightning strikes exceed 20,000
amps. However, only one-quarter exceed 35,000 amps, and less than two percent
exceed 140,000 amps. Thus, the recommended Surge Suppressor provides a degree of
lightning protection to electronic devices inside a dwelling.

Summary of Grounding Recommendations
Motorola recommends that you ground each SM as follows:

◦ Extend the SM mounting bracket extend to the top of the SM or higher.
◦ Ground the SM mounting bracket via a 10-AWG (6 mm2) copper wire connected
by the most direct path either to an eight foot-deep ground rod or to the ground
bonding point of the AC power service utility entry. This provides the best
assurance that
− lightning takes the ground wire route
− the ground wire does not fuse open
− your grounding system complies with NEC 810-15.
◦ Ground the surge suppressor ground lug to the same ground bonding point as
above, using at least a 10-AWG (6 mm2) copper wire. This provides the best
assurance that your grounding system complies with NEC 810-21.

Grounding Scheme
The proper overall antenna grounding scheme per the NEC is illustrated in Figure 136 on
Page 349. In most television antenna or dish installations, a coaxial cable connects the
outdoor electronics with the indoor electronics. To meet NEC 810-20, one typically uses
a coaxial cable feed-through block that connects the outdoor coax to the indoor coax and
also has a screw for attaching a ground wire. This effectively grounds the outer shield of
the coax. The block should be mounted on the outside of the building near the AC main
panel such that the ground wire of the block can be bonded to the primary grounding
electrode system of the structure.

For residential installs, in most cases an outdoor rated unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
cable is sufficient. To comply with the NEC, Motorola provides the antenna discharge
unit, 600SS, for each conductor of the cable. The surge suppressor must be

◦ positioned
− outside the building.
− as near as practicable to the power service entry panel of the building and
attached to the AC main power ground electrode, or attached to a grounded
water pipe.5
− far from combustible material.
◦ grounded in accordance with NEC 810-21, with the grounding wire attached to
the screw terminal.

The metal structural elements of the antenna mast also require a separate grounding
conductor. Section 810-15 of the NEC states:

Masts and metal structures supporting antennas shall be grounded in
accordance with Section 810-21.

5
It is insufficient to merely use the green wire ground in a duplex electrical outlet box for grounding
of the antenna discharge unit.

Issue 1, May 2010 177


As shown in Figure 136 on Page 349, the Motorola recommendation for grounding the
metal structural element of the mounting bracket (SMMB1) is to route the grounding wire
from the SMMB1 down to the same ground attachment point as is used for the 600SS
discharge unit.

Use 10-AWG (6 mm2) Copper Grounding Wire
According to NEC 810-21 3(h), either a 16-AWG copper clad steel wire or a 10-AWG
copper wire may be used. This specification appears to be based on mechanical strength
considerations and not on lightning current handling capabilities.

For example, analysis shows that the two wire types are not equivalent when carrying
a lightning surge that has a 1-microsecond rise by 65-microsecond fall:

◦ The 16-AWG copper clad steel wire has a peak fusing current of 35,000 amps
and can carry 21,000 amps peak, at a temperature just below the ignition point
for paper (454° F or 234° C).
◦ The 10-AWG copper wire has a peak fusing current of 220,000 amps and can
carry 133,000 amps peak, at the same temperature.
Based on the electrical/thermal analysis of these wires, Motorola recommends 10-AWG
copper wire for all grounding conductors. Although roughly double the cost of 16-AWG
copper clad steel wire, 10-AWG copper wire handles six times the surge current from
lightning.

Shielding is not Grounding
In part, NEC 810-21 states:

A lightning arrester is not required if the lead-in conductors are enclosed in a
continuous metal shield, such as rigid or intermediate metal conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, or any metal raceway or metal-shielded cable that is effectively
grounded. A lightning discharge will take the path of lower impedance and jump
from the lead-in conductors to the metal raceway or shield rather than take the
path through the antenna coil of the receiver.

However, Motorola does not recommend relying on shielded twisted pair cable for
lightning protection for the following reasons:

◦ Braid-shielded 10Base-T cable is uncommon, if existent, and may be unsuitable
anyway.
◦ At a cost of about two-thirds more than 10-AWG copper UTP, CAT 5
100Base-TX foil-shielded twisted pair (FTP) cable provides a 24-AWG drain wire.
If this wire melts open during a lightning surge, then the current may follow the
twisted pair into the building.
More than 80 percent of all direct lightning strikes have current that exceeds
8,500 amps (see Table 44 on Page 176). A 24-AWG copper wire melts open at
8,500 amps from a surge that has a 1-microsecond by 70-microsecond
waveform. Hence, reliance on 24-AWG drain wire to comply with the intent of
NEC 810-21 is questionable.

Shielded twisted pair cable may be useful for mitigation of interference in some
circumstances, but installing surge suppressors and implementing the ground
recommendations constitute the most effective mitigation against lightning damage.

178 Issue 1, May 2010


Grounding PMP 400 SMs
PMP 54400 APs and SMs and PTP 54200 BHs use a nominal 30-V DC power system
with power on Pins 7 and 8 and return on Pins 4 and 5. PMP 54400 APs and PTP 54200
BHs can be powered from either a CMMmicro with a 30-V DC power supply or a CMM4
with a 30-V DC power supply. A 29.5-V DC power supply is available for PMP 54400
SMs.

In contrast, PMP 49400 APs and SMs and PTP 49200 BHs use a nominal 56-V DC
power system with power on Pins 5 and 8 and return on Pins 4 and 7. PMP 49400 APs
and PTP 49200 BHs must use a CMM4 with a 56-V DC power supply. A CMMmicro
will not power these units, because it provides the wrong voltage on the wrong pins.
A 56-V DC power supply is available for PMP 49400 SMs.

IMPORTANT!
When working on sites with both power systems, use care to not wrongly mix
power supplies and radios, because the two power systems use different pinout
schemes and require different voltages.

On a site where you are deploying a mix of 30-V DC and 56-V DC radios (to the limit of 8
radios supported by one CMM), you can use a CMM4 that is connected to both a
30-V DC power supply and a 56-V DC power supply.

Due to the full metallic connection to the tower or support structure through the AP
antenna or a connectorized BH antenna, grounding the AP or BH and installing a 600SS
surge suppressor within 3 ft (1 m) of the AP or BH is strongly recommended. This
suppresses overvoltages and overcurrents, such as those caused by near-miss lightning.
APs and BHs provide a grounding lug for grounding to the tower or support structure. A
pole mount kit is available for the 600SS. The pole mount kit provides a grounding point
on one of its U-bolts that can be used for terminating ground straps from both the 600SS
and the AP.

NEC Reference
NEC Article 810, Radio and Television Equipment, and associated documents and
discussions are available from http://www.neccode.com/index.php?id=homegeneral,
http://www.constructionbook.com/xq/ASP/national-electrical-code-2005/id.370/subID.746/qx/default2.htm,
and other sources.

15.3 CONFORMING TO REGULATIONS
For all electrical purposes, ensure that your network conforms to applicable country and
local codes, such as the NEC (National Electrical Code) in the US. If you are uncertain of
code requirements, engage the services of a licensed electrician.

15.4 PROTECTING CABLES AND CONNECTIONS
Cables that move in the wind can be damaged, impart vibrations to the connected device,
or both. At installation time, prevent these problems by securing all cables with cable ties,
cleats, or PVC tape.

Issue 1, May 2010 179


Over time, moisture can cause a cable connector to fail. You can prevent this problem by

◦ using cables that are filled with a dielectric gel or grease.
◦ including a drip loop where the cable approach to the module (typically a CMM)
is from above.
◦ wrapping the cable with weather-resistant tape.

On a module with an external antenna, use accepted industry practices to wrap the
connector to prevent water ingress. Although the male and female N-type connectors
form a gas-tight seal with each other, the point where the cable enters each connector
can allow water ingress and eventual corrosion. Wrapping and sealing is critical to long-
term reliability of the connection.

Possible sources of material to seal that point include

◦ the antenna manufacturer (material may have been provided in the package with
the antenna).
◦ Universal Electronics (whose web site is http://www.coaxseal.com), who markets
a weather-tight wrap named Coax-Seal.

Perform the following steps to wrap the cable.

Procedure 4: Wrapping the cable
1. Start the wrap on the cable 0.5 to 2 inches (about 1.5 to 5 cm) from the
connection.
2. Wrap the cable to a point 0.5 to 2 inches (about 1.5 to 5 cm) above the
connection.
3. Squeeze the wrap to compress and remove any trapped air.
4. Wrap premium vinyl electrical tape over the first wrap where desired for abrasion
resistance or appearance.
5. Tie the cable to minimize sway from wind.
end of procedure

180 Issue 1, May 2010


16 TESTING THE COMPONENTS
The best practice is to connect all components—BHs, APs, GPS antenna, and CMM—in
a test setting and initially configure and verify them before deploying them to an
installation. In this way, any configuration issues are worked out before going on-site, on
a tower, in the weather, where the discovery of configuration issues or marginal hardware
is more problematic and work-flow affecting.

16.1 UNPACKING COMPONENTS
When you receive these products, carefully inspect all shipping boxes for signs of
damage. If you find damage, immediately notify the transportation company.

As you unpack the equipment, verify that all the components that you ordered have
arrived. Save all the packing materials to use later, as you transport the equipment to and
from installation sites.

16.2 CONFIGURING FOR TEST
You can use either of two methods to configure an AP or BHM:

◦ Use the Quick Start feature of the product. For more information on Quick Start,
see Quick Start Page of the AP on Page 187.
◦ Manually set each parameter.

After you change configuration parameters on a GUI web page:

1. Before you leave a web page, click the Save button to save the change(s).
2. After making change(s) on multiple web pages, click the Reboot button to reboot
the module and implement the change(s).

16.2.1 Configuring the Computing Device for Test
If your computer is configured for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP),
disconnect the computer from the network. If your computer is instead configured for
static IP addressing

◦ set the static address in the 169.254 network
◦ set the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0.

16.2.2 Default Module Configuration
From the factory, the AP, SM, and BH are all configured to not transmit on any frequency.
This configuration ensures that you do not accidentally turn on an unsynchronized
module. Site synchronization of modules is required because

◦ modules
− cannot transmit and receive signals at the same time.
− use TDD (Time Division Duplexing) to distribute signal access of the
downlink and uplink frames.
◦ when one module transmits while an unintended module nearby receives signal,
the transmitting module may interfere with or desense the receiving module. In
this context, interference is self-interference (within the same network).

Issue 1, May 2010 181


16.2.3 Component Layout
As shown in Figure 51, the base cover of the module snaps off when you depress a lever
on the back of the base cover. This exposes the Ethernet and GPS sync connectors and
diagnostic LEDs.

RJ11
Connector
RJ45
Connector
Connection
LEDs

Base Cover
Base Cover Base Cover
Release Ethernet
Ethernet
Cable
Lever Cable

Figure 51: Base cover, detached and attached, FSK module

Figure 52: Base cover, detached and attached, OFDM module

182 Issue 1, May 2010


16.2.4 Diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module.
Table 45 and Table 46 identify the LEDs in order of their left-to-right position as the cable
connections face downward.

NOTE:
The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does
not indicate any status.

Table 45: LEDs in AP and BHM

Color
when Status Information
Label Active Provided Notes
LNK/5 green Ethernet link Continuously lit when link is present.
Presence of data activity Flashes during data transfer. Frequency of flash is not a
ACT/4 yellow
on the Ethernet link diagnostic indication.
GPS/3 red Pulse of sync Continuously lit as pulse as AP receives pulse.
SES/2 green Unused on the AP SES is the session indicator on the CMM.
SYN/1 yellow Presence of sync Always lit on the AP.
PWR red DC power Always lit when power is correctly supplied.

Table 46: Legacy Mode LEDs in SM and BHS

Color Notes
when Status if
Label Active Registered Operating Mode Aiming Mode

Continuously lit when link is
LNK/5 green Ethernet link
present.
Presence of data Flashes during data transfer. These five LEDs act as a bar
ACT/4 yellow activity on the Frequency of flash is not a graph to indicate the relative
Ethernet link diagnostic indication. quality of alignment. As power
level and jitter (if present)
GPS/3 red Unused If this module is not registered improve during alignment,
to another, then these three more of these LEDs are lit.
SES/2 green Unused LEDs cycle on and off from left
SYN/1 yellow Presence of sync to right.

Always lit when power is Always lit when power is
PWR red DC power
correctly supplied. correctly supplied.

An optional light scheme configurable in all FSK SMs supports end customers who install
the SM (for example, the 9000SMQ indoor SM) on their own premises. The scheme uses
the LEDs and labels listed in Table 46 above, but is based on the traffic signal light

Issue 1, May 2010 183


analogy: green is good, yellow is okay, and red is bad. This scheme can also be useful in
some settings and workflows for outdoor SMs. As with Legacy mode, while the SM is
scanning, the green, yellow, and red LEDs blink in sequence.

Table 47: Revised Mode LEDs in SM

Color Revised Mode Indication
Label
LNK/5 green Link.
ACT/4 yellow Activity.
Interference (Jitter)
On - high interference.
GPS/3 red
Blinking - medium interference.
Off - low interference.
Strong Receive Signal Power
SES/2 green
Blinking from slow to full-on to indicate strong power, getting stronger.
Medium Receive Signal Power
SYN/1 yellow
Blinking from slow to full-on to indicate medium power, getting stronger.
Not Registered
PWR red Off when registered to AP.
On when not registered to AP.

To configure an SM into the Revised Mode, see LED Panel Mode on Page 291.

16.2.5 Standards for Wiring
Modules automatically sense whether the Ethernet cable in a connection is wired as
straight-through or crossover. You may use either straight-through or crossover cable to
connect a network interface card (NIC), hub, router, or switch to these modules. For a
straight-through cable, use the EIA/TIA-568B wire color-code standard on both ends. For
a crossover cable, use the EIA/TIA-568B wire color-code standard on one end, and the
EIA/TIA-568A wire color-code standard on the other end.

Where you use the AC wall adapter

◦ the power supply output is +24 VDC.
◦ the power input to the SM is +11.5 VDC to +30 VDC.
◦ the maximum Ethernet cable run is 328 feet (100 meters).

16.2.6 Best Practices for Cabling
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:

◦ Use only shielded cables to resist interference.
◦ For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief.
◦ Include a 2-ft (0.6-m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal
expansion and contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when
needed.
◦ Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the
connector at the device.
◦ Properly crimp all connectors.

184 Issue 1, May 2010


◦ Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion.
◦ Use only shielded connectors to resist interference and corrosion.

16.2.7 Recommended Tools for Wiring Connectors
The following tools may be needed for cabling the AP:

◦ RJ-11 crimping tool
◦ RJ-45 crimping tool
◦ electrician scissors
◦ wire cutters
◦ cable testing device.

16.2.8 Wiring Connectors
The following diagrams correlate pins to wire colors and illustrate crossovers where
applicable.

Location of Pin 1
Pin 1, relative to the lock tab on the connector of a straight-through cable is located as
shown below.

← Pin 1

Lock tab ↑ underneath
RJ-45 Pinout for Straight-through Ethernet Cable
Pin 1 → white / orange ← Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin RJ-45 Straight-thru Pin
→ orange ← Pin 2 TX+ 1 1 RX+
Pin 3 → white / green ← Pin 3 TX- 2 2 RX-
Pin 4 → blue ← Pin 4 RX+ 3 3 TX-
Pin 5 → white / blue ← Pin 5
4 4
Pin 6 → green ← Pin 6 +V return +V return
5 5
Pin 7 → white / brown ← Pin 7
RX- 6 6 TX-
Pin 8 → brown ← Pin 8
Pins 7 and 8 carry power to the 7 7
+V +V
modules. 8 8

Figure 53: RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable

Issue 1, May 2010 185


RJ-45 Pinout for Crossover Ethernet Cable
Pin RJ-45 Crossover Pin
Pin 1 → white / orange ← Pin 3 TX+ 1 3 RX+
Pin 2 → orange ← Pin 6 TX- 2 6 RX-
Pin 3 → white / green ← Pin 1 RX+ 3 1 TX+
Pin 4 → blue ← Pin 4 4 4
Pin 5 → white / blue ← Pin 5 +V return +V return
5 5
Pin 6 → green ← Pin 2
RX- 6 2 TX-
Pin 7 → white / brown ← Pin 7
7 7
Pin 8 → brown ← Pin 8 +V +V
Pins 7 and 8 carry power to the modules. 8 8

Figure 54: RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable

RJ-11 Pinout for Straight-through Sync Cable
The system uses a utility cable with RJ-11 connectors between the AP or BH and
synchronization pulse. Presuming CAT 5 cable and 6-pin RJ-11 connectors, the following
diagram shows the wiring of the cable for sync.
Pin RJ-11 Straight-Thru Pin
sync pulse 1 1 sync pulse
Pin 1→ white / orange ← Pin 1 serial transmit 2 2 serial receive
Pin 2→ white / green ← Pin 2 serial receive 3 3 serial transmit
Pin 3→ white / blue ← Pin 3 override plug 4 4 override plug
Pin 4→ green ← Pin 4 alignment tone 5 5 alignment tone
Pin 5→ blue ← Pin 5 Protective Earth (PE)
6 6 Protective Earth (PE)
(ground) (ground)
Pin 6→ orange ← Pin 6
not not
NOTE: The fourth pair is not used used
used.

Figure 55: RJ-11 pinout for straight-through sync cable

16.2.9 Alignment Tone—Technical Details
The alignment tone output from a module is available on Pin 5 of the RJ-11 connector,
and ground is available on Pin 6. Thus the load at the listening device should be between
Pins 5 and 6. The listening device may be a headset, earpiece, or battery-powered
speaker.

16.3 CONFIGURING A POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT LINK FOR TEST
Perform the following steps to begin the test setup.

Procedure 5: Setting up the AP for Quick Start
1. In one hand, securely hold the top (larger shell) of the AP. With the other hand,
depress the lever in the back of the base cover (smaller shell). Remove the base
cover.
2. Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the AP.

186 Issue 1, May 2010


3. Plug the Ethernet cable connector labeled To Radio into the jack in the pig tail
that hangs from the power supply.

WARNING!
From this point until you remove power from the AP, stay at least as far from the
AP as the minimum separation distance specified in Table 42 on Page 173.

4. Plug the other connector of the pig tail (this connector labeled To Computer) into
the Ethernet jack of the computing device.
5. Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet.
6. Power up the computing device.
7. Start the browser in the computing device.
end of procedure

The AP interface provides a series of web pages to configure and monitor the unit. You
can access the web-based interface through a computing device that is either directly
connected or connected through a network to the AP. If the computing device is not
connected to a network when you are configuring the module in your test environment,
and if the computer has used a proxy server address and port to configure a module,
then you may need to first disable the proxy setting in the computer.

Perform the following procedure to toggle the computer to not use the proxy setting.

Procedure 6: Bypassing proxy settings to access module web pages
1. Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer.
2. Select Tools Internet Options Connections LAN Settings.
3. Uncheck the Use a proxy server… box.
NOTE: If you use an alternate web browser, the menu selections differ from the
above.
end of procedure

In the address bar of your browser, enter the IP address of the AP. (For example, enter
http://169.254.1.1 to access the AP through its default IP address). The AP
responds by opening the General Status tab of its Home page.

16.3.1 Quick Start Page of the AP
To proceed with the test setup, click the Quick Start button on the left side of the
General Status tab. The AP responds by opening the Quick Start page. The Quick Start
tab of that page is displayed in Figure 56.

Issue 1, May 2010 187


NOTE:
If you cannot find the IP address of the AP, see Override Plug on Page 65.

Figure 56: Quick Start tab of AP, example

Quick Start is a wizard that helps you to perform a basic configuration that places an AP
into service. Only the following parameters must be configured:

◦ Region Code
◦ RF Carrier Frequency
◦ Synchronization
◦ LAN (Network) IP Address

In each Quick Start tab, you can

◦ specify the settings to satisfy the requirements of the network.
◦ review the configuration selected.
◦ save the configuration to non-volatile memory.

188 Issue 1, May 2010


Proceed with the test setup as follows.

Procedure 7: Using Quick Start to configure a standalone AP for test
1. At the bottom of the Quick Start tab, click the Go To Next Page => button.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the Region Settings tab. An example of
this tab is shown in Figure 57.

Figure 57: Region Settings tab of AP, example

2. From the pull-down menu, select the region in which the AP will operate.

Issue 1, May 2010 189


3. Click the Go To Next Page => button.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the Radio Carrier Frequency tab.
An example of this tab is shown in Figure 58.

Figure 58: Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP, example

4. From the pull-down menu, select a frequency for the test.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the Synchronization tab. An example of

190 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 59: Synchronization tab of AP, example

6. At the bottom of this tab, select Generate Sync Signal.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the LAN IP Address tab. An example of

Issue 1, May 2010 191


Figure 60: LAN IP Address tab of AP, example

8. At the bottom of this tab, either
◦ specify an IP Address, a Subnet Mask, and a Gateway IP Address for
management of the AP and leave the DHCP state set to Disabled.
◦ set the DHCP state to Enabled to have the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway IP address automatically configured by a domain name server
(DNS).

NOTE:
Motorola encourages you to experiment with the interface. Unless you save a
configuration and reboot the AP after you save the configuration, none of the
changes are effected.

RESULT: The AP responds by opening the Review and Save Configuration tab.
An example of this tab is shown in Figure 61.

192 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 61: Review and Save Configuration tab of AP, example

10. Ensure that the initial parameters for the AP are set as you intended.
11. Click the Save Changes button.
12. Click the Reboot button.
RESULT: The AP responds with the message Reboot Has Been Initiated…
13. Wait until the indicator LEDs are not red.
14. Trigger your browser to refresh the page until the AP redisplays the General
Status tab.
15. Wait until the red indicator LEDs are not lit.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 193


16.3.2 Time Tab of the AP
To proceed with the test setup, click the Configuration link on the left side of the General
Status tab. When the AP responds by opening the Configuration page to the General tab,
click the Time tab. An example of this tab is displayed in Figure 62.

Figure 62: Time tab of AP, example

To have each log in the AP correlated to a meaningful time and date, either a reliable
network element must pass time and date to the AP or you must set the time and date
whenever a power cycle of the AP has occurred. A network element passes time and
date in any of the following scenarios:

◦ A connected CMM2 passes time and date (GPS time and date, if received).
◦ A connected CMMmicro passes the time and date (GPS time and date, if
received), but only if both the CMMmicro is operating on CMMmicro Release 2.1
or later release. (These releases include an NTP server functionality.)
◦ A separate NTP server is addressable from the AP.

If the AP should obtain time and date from a CMMmicro, CMM4, or a separate NTP
server, enter the IP address of the CMM or NTP server on this tab. To force the AP to
obtain time and date before the first (or next) 15-minute interval query of the NTP server,
click Get Time through NTP.

194 Issue 1, May 2010


If you enter a time and date, the format for entry is

Time : hh / mm / ss

Date : MM / dd / yyyy

where
hh represents the two-digit hour in the range 00 to 24
mm represents the two-digit minute
ss represents the two-digit second
MM represents the two-digit month
dd represents the two-digit day
yyyy represents the four-digit year


◦ Enter the appropriate information in the format shown above.
◦ Then click the Set Time and Date button.
NOTE: The time displayed at the top of this page is static unless your browser is
set to automatically refresh.
Procedure 8: Setting up the SM for test
1. In one hand, securely hold the top (larger shell) of the SM. With the other hand,
depress the lever in the back of the base cover (smaller shell). Remove the base
cover.
2. Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the SM RJ-45 jack.
3. Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the jack in the pig tail that hangs
from the power supply.
4. Roughly aim the SM toward the AP.

WARNING!
From this point until you remove power from the SM, stay at least as far from the
SM as the minimum separation distance specified in Table 42 on Page 173.

6. Repeat the foregoing steps for each SM that you wish to include in the test.
7. Back at the computing device, on the left side of the Time & Date tab, click
Home.
8. Click the Session Status tab.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 195


16.3.3 Session Status Tab of the AP
An example of the AP Session Status tab is displayed in Figure 63.

Figure 63: Session Status tab data from AP, example

If no SMs are registered to this AP, then the Session Status tab displays the simple
message No sessions. In this case, try the following steps.

Procedure 9: Retrying to establish a point-to-multipoint link
1. More finely aim the SM or SMs toward the AP.
2. Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.
3. If still no LUIDs are reported on the Session Status tab, click the Configuration
button on the left side of the Home page.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the AP Configuration page.
4. Click the Radio tab.
5. Find the Color Code parameter and note the setting.
6. In the same sequence as you did for the AP directly under Configuring a Point-to-
Multipoint Link for Test on Page 186, connect the SM to a computing device and
to power.
7. On the left side of the SM Home page, click the Configuration button.
RESULT: The Configuration page of the SM opens.
9. If the transmit frequency of the AP is not selected in the Custom Radio
Frequency Scan Selection List parameter, select the frequency that matches.
10. If the Color Code parameter on this page is not identical to the Color Code
parameter you noted from the AP, change one of them so that they match.

196 Issue 1, May 2010


11. At the bottom of the Radio tab for the SM, click the Save Changes button.
13. Allow several minutes for the SM to reboot and register to the AP.
14. Return to the computing device that is connected to the AP.
15. Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.
end of procedure

The Session Status tab provides information about each SM that has registered to
the AP. This information is useful for managing and troubleshooting a system.
All information that you have entered in the Site Name field of the SM displays in the
Session Status tab of the linked AP.

The Session Status tab also includes the current active values on each SM (LUID) for
MIR, CIR, and VLAN, as well as the source of these values (representing the SM itself,
BAM, or the AP and cap, if any—for example, APCAP as shown in Figure 63 above).
L indicates a Lite SM (CSM 110), and D indicates from the device. As an SM registers to
the AP, the configuration source that this page displays for the associated LUID may
change. After registration, however, the displayed source is stable and can be trusted.

The Session Status tab of the AP provides the following parameters.

LUID
This field displays the LUID (logical unit ID) of the SM. As each SM registers to the AP,
the system assigns an LUID of 2 or a higher unique number to the SM. If an SM loses
registration with the AP and then regains registration, the SM will retain the same LUID.

NOTE:
The LUID association is lost when a power cycle of the AP occurs.

Both the LUID and the MAC are hot links to open the interface to the SM. In some
instances, depending on network activity and network design, this route to the interface
yields a blank web page. If this occurs, refresh your browser view.

MAC
This field displays the MAC address (or electronic serial number) of the SM. Both the
LUID and the MAC are hot links to open the interface to the SM. In some instances,
depending on network activity and network design, this route to the interface yields a
blank web page. If this occurs, refresh your browser view.

State
This field displays the current status of the SM as either

◦ IN SESSION to indicate that the SM is currently registered to the AP.
◦ IDLE to indicate that the SM was registered to the AP at one time, but now is not.

This field also indicates whether the encryption scheme in the module is enabled.

Issue 1, May 2010 197


Site Name
This field indicates the name of the SM. You can assign or change this name on the
Configuration web page of the SM. This information is also set into the sysName SNMP
MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Software Version
This field displays the software release that operates on the SM, the release date and
time of the software.

Software Boot Version
This field indicates the CANOPYBOOT version number.

FPGA Version
This field displays the version of FPGA that runs on the SM.

Session Timeout
This field displays the timeout in seconds for management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or
ftp access to the SM. 0 indicates that no limit is imposed.

AirDelay
This field displays the distance of the SM from the AP. To derive the distance in meters,
multiply the displayed number by 0.3048. At close distances, the value in this field is
unreliable.

Session Count
This field displays how many sessions the SM has had with the AP. Typically, this is the
sum of Reg Count and Re-Reg Count. However, the result of internal calculation may
display here as a value that slightly differs from the sum.

If the number of sessions is significantly greater than the number for other SMs, then this
may indicate a link problem or an interference problem.

Reg Count
When an SM makes a registration request, the AP checks its local data to see whether it
considers the SM to be already registered. If the AP concludes that the SM is not, then
the request increments the value of this field.

Re-Reg Count
When an SM makes a registration request, the AP checks its local data to see whether it
considers the SM to be already registered. If the AP concludes that the SM is not, then
the request increments the value of this field. Typically, a Re-Reg is the case where both

◦ an SM attempts to reregister for having lost communication with the AP.
◦ the AP has not yet observed the link to the SM as being down.

A high number in this field is often an indication of link instability or interference problems.

RSSI, Jitter, and Power Level (Avg/Last)
The Session Status tab shows the received Power Level in dBm and Jitter. Proper
alignment maximizes Power Level and minimizes Jitter. As you refine alignment, you
should favor lower jitter over higher dBm.

198 Issue 1, May 2010


For example, if coarse alignment gives an SM a power level of −75 dBm and a jitter
measurement of 5, and further refining the alignment drops the power level to −78 dBm
and the jitter to 2 or 3, use the refined alignment, with the following caveats:

◦ When the receiving link is operating at 1X, the Jitter scale is 0 to 15 with desired
jitter between 0 and 4.

However, Jitter is not calculated and reported in the PMP 400 Series OFDM AP.
The Session Status tab also shows a historical RSSI, a unitless measure of power.
Use Power Level and ignore RSSI. RSSI implies more accuracy and precision than is

In both an FSK and an OFDM module, the spectrum analyzer measures and displays the
detected peak power level. This is consistent with the received Power Level that various
tabs in the FSK modules report. However, it is inconsistent with received Power Level
indications in OFDM modules, which use this parameter to report the detected average
power level. For this reason, you will observe a difference in how the spectrum analyzer
and the Power Level field separately report on the same OFDM signal at the same time.

Sustained Uplink Data Rate
This field displays the value that is currently in effect for the SM, with the source of that
value in parentheses. This is the specified rate at which each SM registered to this AP is
replenished with credits for transmission. The configuration source of the value is
indicated in parentheses. See

◦ Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters on Page 87
◦ Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings on Page 89
◦ Setting the Configuration Source on Page 292.

Uplink Burst Allocation
value in parentheses. This is the specified maximum amount of data that each SM is
allowed to transmit before being recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with
credits to transmit more. The configuration source of the value is indicated in
parentheses. See


Sustained Downlink Data Rate
value in parentheses. This is the specified the rate at which the AP should be replenished
with credits (tokens) for transmission to each of the SMs in its sector. The configuration
source of the value is indicated in parentheses. See


Issue 1, May 2010 199


Downlink Burst Allocation
value in parentheses. This is the maximum amount of data to allow the AP to transmit to
any registered SM before the AP is replenished with transmission credits at the
Sustained Downlink Data Rate. The configuration source of the value is indicated in
parentheses. See


Low Priority Uplink CIR
value in parentheses. The configuration source of the value is indicated in parentheses.
See

◦ Committed Information Rate on Page 88

Low Priority Downlink CIR
value in parentheses. The configuration source of the value is indicated in parentheses.
See


Rate
This field displays whether the high-priority channel is enabled in the SM and the status
of 1X or 2X operation in the SM. See Checking the Status of 2X Operation on Page 94.

16.3.4 Beginning the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links
To begin the test of links, perform the following steps:

1. In the Session Status tab of the AP, note the LUID associated with the MAC
address of any SM you wish to involve in the test.
2. Click the Remote Subscribers tab.

200 Issue 1, May 2010


16.3.5 Remote Subscribers Tab of the AP
An example of a Remote Subscribers tab is displayed in Figure 64.

Figure 64: Remote Subscribers tab of AP, example

This tab allows you to view the web pages of registered SMs over the RF link. To view
the pages for a selected SM, click its link. The General Status tab of the SM opens.

Issue 1, May 2010 201


16.3.6 General Status Tab of the SM
An example of the General Status tab of an SM is displayed in Figure 65.

Figure 65: General Status tab of SM, example

The General Status tab provides information on the operation of this SM. This is the tab
that opens by default when you access the GUI of the SM. The General Status tab
provides the following read-only fields.

Device Type
This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the SM,
its module type, and its MAC address.

Software Version
This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release, and whether
communications involving the module are secured by DES or AES encryption (see
Encrypting Radio Transmissions on Page 379). If you request technical support, provide
the information from this field.

202 Issue 1, May 2010


Software BOOT Version
This field indicates the version of the CANOPYBOOT file. If you request technical
support, provide the information from this field.

Board Type
This field indicates the series of hardware. See Designations for Hardware in Radios on
Page 377.

FPGA Version
This field indicates the version of the field-programmable gate array (FPGA) on the
module. When you request technical support, provide the information from this field.

Uptime
This field indicates how long the module has operated since power was applied.

System Time
This field provides the current time. Any SM that registers to an AP inherits the system
time, which is displayed in this field as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

Ethernet Interface
This field indicates the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet interface to the SM.

Antenna
The presence of this field depends on whether antenna options are available for the
module. This field indicates the polarity of the antenna in the modules as one of the
following:

◦ Horizontal
◦ Vertical
◦ External (Connectorized)

Session Status
This field displays the following information about the current session:

◦ Scanning indicates that this SM currently cycles through the radio frequencies
that are selected in the Radio tab of the Configuration page.
◦ Syncing indicates that this SM currently attempts to receive sync.
◦ Registering indicates that this SM has sent a registration request message to
the AP and has not yet received a response.
◦ Registered indicates that this SM is both
− registered to an AP.
− ready to transmit and receive data packets.
◦ Alignment indicates that this SM is in an aiming mode. See Table 46 on
Page 183.

Session Uptime
This field displays the duration of the current link. The syntax of the displayed time is
hh:mm:ss.

Issue 1, May 2010 203


Registered AP
This field displays the MAC address of the AP to which this SM is registered.

Power Level and Jitter
The General Status tab shows the received Power Level in dBm and Jitter. Proper
should favor lower jitter over higher dBm. For example, if coarse alignment gives an SM
a power level of −75 dBm and a jitter measurement of 5, and further refining
the alignment drops the power level to −78 dBm and the jitter to 2 or 3, use the refined
alignment, with the following caveats:


PMP 400 Series OFDM SMs do not have this parameter. For historical relevance,
the General Status tab also shows the RSSI, the unitless measure of power.
Use Power Level and ignore RSSI. RSSI implies more accuracy and precision than
is inherent in its measurement.

NOTE:
Unless the page is set to auto-refresh, the values displayed are from the instant
the General Status tab was selected. To keep a current view of the values,
refresh the browser screen or set to auto-refresh.

Air Delay
This field displays the distance in feet between this SM and the AP. To derive the
distance in meters, multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048. Distances reported as
less than 200 feet (61 meters) are unreliable.

Region Code
From the drop-down list, select the region in which the radio is operating. Selectable
regions are

◦ Australia ◦ Europe ◦ Other
◦ Brazil ◦ Russia ◦ None
◦ Canada ◦ United States

When the appropriate region is selected in this parameter, the radio automatically
implements the applicable required Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) standard.
For further information on DFS, see Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on
Page 133.

The slave radio automatically inherits the DFS type of the master. This behavior ignores
the value of the Region Code parameter in the slave, even when the value is None.
configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), you should always set the value that
corresponds to the local region.

204 Issue 1, May 2010


Unlike selections in other parameters, your Region Code selection requires a
Save Changes and a Reboot cycle before it will force the context-sensitive GUI to
display related options (for example, Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and 2 in the
Configuration => Radio tab). Thus, a proper configuration exercise in environments that
are subject to DFS requirements has two imperative Save Changes and Reboot cycles:
one after the Region Code is set, and a second after related options are set.

Site Name
This field indicates the name of the physical module. You can assign or change this
name in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page. This information is also set into the
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Site Contact
This field indicates contact information for the physical module. You can provide or
change this information in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page. This information
is also set into the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP
management server.

Site Location
This field indicates site information for the physical module. You can provide or change
this information in the SNMP tab of the SM Configuration page.

Maximum Throughput
This field indicates the limit of aggregate throughput for the SM and is based on the
default (factory) limit of the SM and any floating license that is currently assigned to it.

Advantage Radio Status
This field reflects whether the SM is currently licensed for enhanced caps (Advantage,
also known as Cap 2) on uplink and downlink traffic.

16.3.7 Continuing the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links
To resume the test of links, perform the following steps.

Procedure 10: Verifying and recording information from SMs
1. Verify that the Session Status field of the General Status tab in the SM
indicates REGISTERED.
2. While you view the General Status tab in the SM, note (or print) the values of the
following fields:
◦ Device type
◦ Software Version
◦ Software BOOT Version
◦ Board Type
◦ FPGA Version
3. Systematically ensure that you can retrieve this data (from a database, for
example) when you later prepare to deploy the SM to subscriber premises.
4. Return to the Remote Subscribers tab of the AP.

Issue 1, May 2010 205


5. Click the link of the next SM that you wish to test.
6. Repeat the test procedure from that point. When you have tested all of the SMs
that you intend to test, return your browser to the General Status tab of the AP.
end of procedure

16.3.8 General Status Tab of the AP
Examples of AP General Status tabs are displayed in Figure 66 and Figure 67.

Figure 66: General Status tab of AP (5.7 GHz), example

206 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 67: General Status tab of AP (900 MHz), example

The General Status tab provides information on the operation of this AP. This is the tab
that opens by default when you access the GUI of the AP. The General Status tab

Device Type
This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the AP,
its module type, and its MAC address.

Software Version
This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release, and whether
communications involving the module are secured by DES or AES encryption (see
Encrypting Radio Transmissions on Page 379). If you request technical support, provide
the information from this field.

Issue 1, May 2010 207



Board Type
Page 377.

FPGA Version
module. If you request technical support, provide the value of this field.

FPGA Type
Where the type of logic as a subset of the logic version in the module as manufactured
distinguishes its circuit board, this field is present to indicate that type. If you request
technical support, provide the value of this field.

PLD Version
This field indicates the version of the programmable logic device (PLD) on the module.
If you request technical support, provide the value of this field.

Uptime

System Time
This field provides the current time. If the AP is connected to a CMM, then this field
provides GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). Any SM that registers to the AP inherits the
system time.

Last NTP Time Update
This field displays when the AP last used time sent from an NTP server. If the AP has not
been configured in the Time tab of the Configuration page to request time from an NTP
server, then this field is populated by 00:00:00 00/00/00.

Ethernet Interface
This field indicates the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet interface to the AP.

Regulatory
This field indicates whether the configured Region Code and radio frequency are
compliant with respect to their compatibility. For example, you may configure a 5.4-GHz
AP with a Region Code set to United States and configure a frequency that lies within
the weather notch. This is a compliant combination, the radio properly operates, and its
Regulatory field displays Passed. If later you change its Region Code to Canada, then
the combination becomes non-compliant (since frequencies within the weather notch are
disallowed in Canada. In this case, the radio ceases to transmit, and its Regulatory field
displays an error message.

For further information on Region Codes and DFS, see Radar Signature Detection and
Shutdown on Page 133.

208 Issue 1, May 2010


Antenna
following:

◦ Horizontal
◦ Vertical

Registered SM Count
This field indicates how many SMs are registered to the AP.

GPS Sync Pulse Status
This field indicates the status of synchronization as follows:

◦ Generating sync indicates that the module is set to generate the sync pulse.
◦ Receiving Sync indicates that the module is set to receive a sync pulse from an
outside source and is receiving the pulse.
◦ ERROR: No Sync Pulse indicates that the module is set to receive a sync pulse
from an outside source and is not receiving the pulse.

NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the AP transmitter is turned
off to avoid self-interference within the system.

Max Registered SM Count
This field displays the largest number of SMs that have been simultaneously registered in
the AP since it was last rebooted. This count can provide some insight into sector history
and provide comparison between current and maximum SM counts at a glance.

Data Slots Down
This field indicates the number of frame slots that are designated for use by data traffic in
the downlink (sent from the AP to the SM). The AP calculates the number of data slots
based on the Max Range, Downlink Data, and (reserved) Control Slots configured by
the operator. See Max Range on Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

A + in this field (for example, 28+) indicates that there are additional bit times that the
scheduler can take advantage of for internal system communication, but not enough for a
full data slot.

Data Slots Up
the uplink (sent from the SM to the AP). The AP calculates the number of data slots
based on the Max Range, Downlink Data, and (reserved) Control Slots configured by the
operator. See Max Range on Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

A + in this field (for example, 9+) indicates that there are additional bit times that the
scheduler can take advantage of for control slots (which are half the size of data slots),
but not enough for a full data slot.

Issue 1, May 2010 209


Control Slots
This field indicates the number of (reserved) control slots configured by the operator.
Control slots are half the size of data slots. The SM uses reserved control slots and
unused data slots for bandwidth requests. See Control Slots on Page 237.

Site Name
name in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page. This information is also set into the
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Site Contact
change this information in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page. This information
management server.

Site Location
this information in the SNMP tab of the AP Configuration page.

Scheduling Type
This field indicates the type of frame scheduler that is active in the AP.

MP Double Rate
This field indicates whether 2X modulation rate is enabled for the sector.

Advantage Radio Status
This field indicates whether the radio is operating as an Advantage or a standard radio.

16.3.9 Concluding the Test of Point-to-Multipoint Links
To conclude the test, perform the following steps.

Procedure 11: Verifying and recording information from the AP
1. Confirm that the GPS Sync Pulse Status field indicates Generating Sync.
NOTE: This indication confirms that the AP is properly functional.
2. While your browser is directed to this General Status tab, note (or print) the
values of the following fields:
◦ Device type
◦ Board Type
◦ FPGA Version
3. Systematically ensure that you can retrieve this data when you prepare to deploy
the AP.
end of procedure

210 Issue 1, May 2010


16.4 CONFIGURING A POINT-TO-POINT LINK FOR TEST

Perform the following steps to begin the test setup.

Procedure 12: Setting up the BH for Quick Start
1. In one hand, securely hold the top (larger shell) of the BH that you intend to
deploy as a timing master. With the other hand, depress the lever in the back of
the base cover (smaller shell). Remove the base cover.
2. Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the timing master.
4. Plug the other connector of the pig tail into the Ethernet jack of the computing
device.

WARNING!
From this point until you remove power from the BH, stay at least as far from the
BH as the minimum separation distance specified in Table 42 on Page 173.

6. Power up the computing device.
7. Start the browser in the computing device.
end of procedure

The PTP 100 Series BH interface provides a series of web pages to configure and
monitor the unit. These screens are subject to change by subsequent software releases.

You can access the web-based interface through only a computing device that is either
directly connected or connected through a network to the BH. If the computing device is
not connected to a network when you are configuring the module in your test
environment, and if the computer has used a proxy server address and port to configure
the module, then you may need to first disable the proxy setting in the computer.

To toggle the computer to not use the proxy setting, perform Procedure 6 on Page 187.

In the address bar of your browser, enter the IP address of the BHM (default is
169.254.1.1). The BHM responds by opening the General Status tab of its Home page.

16.4.1 Quick Start Page of the BHM
To proceed with the test setup, click the Quick Start button on the left side of the
General Status tab. The BHM responds by opening the Quick Start tab of the Quick Start
page. An example of this tab is displayed in Figure 68.

Issue 1, May 2010 211


Figure 68: Quick Start tab of BHM, example

Quick Start is a wizard that helps you to perform a basic configuration that places a BHM
into service. Only the following variables must be configured:

◦ Region Code
◦ RF Carrier Frequency
◦ Synchronization
◦ LAN (Network) IP Address

In each page under Quick Start, you can

◦ specify the settings to satisfy the requirements of the network.
◦ review the configuration selected.
◦ save the configuration to non-volatile memory.

212 Issue 1, May 2010



Procedure 13: Using Quick Start to configure the BHs for test
1. At the bottom of the Quick Start tab, click the Go To Next Page => button.
RESULT: The BHM responds by opening the Region Settings tab.
2. From the pull-down menu, select the region in which the BHM will operate.
RESULT: The BHM responds by opening the RF Carrier Frequency tab.
4. From the pull-down menu, select a frequency for the test.
RESULT: The BHM responds by opening the Synchronization tab.
6. At the bottom of this page, select Generate Sync Signal.
RESULT: The BHM responds by opening the LAN IP Address tab.
8. At the bottom of this tab, either
◦ specify an IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address for
management of the BHM and leave the DHCP State set to Disabled.
◦ set the DHCP State to Enabled to have the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway IP address automatically configured by a domain name server
(DNS).
RESULT: The BHM responds by opening the Review and Save Configuration
tab.
10. Ensure that the initial parameters for the BHM are set as you intended.

NOTE:
Motorola encourages you to experiment with the interface. Unless you save a
configuration and reboot the BHM after you save the configuration, none of the
changes are effected.

12. On the left side of the tab, click the Configuration button.
RESULT: The BH responds by opening the General tab of its Configuration page.
13. In the Timing Mode parameter, select Timing Master.
RESULT: The BHM responds with the message Reboot Has Been Initiated….
This BH is now forced to provide sync for the link and has a distinct set of web
interface pages, tabs, and parameters for the role of BHM.
16. Wait until the indicator LEDs are not red.

Issue 1, May 2010 213


17. Trigger your browser to refresh the page until the BHM redisplays the General
Status tab of its Home page.
18. Repeat these steps to configure the other BH in the pair to be a BHS, selecting
Timing Slave in Step 13.
end of procedure

16.4.2 Time Tab of the BHM
To proceed with the test setup, in the BHM, click the Configuration button on the left
side of the General Status tab. The BHM responds by opening its Configuration page to
the General tab. Click the Time tab. An example of this tab is displayed in Figure 69.

Figure 69: Time tab of BHM, example

To have each log in the BHM correlated to a meaningful time and date, either a reliable
network element must pass time and date to the BHM or you must set the time and date
whenever a power cycle of the BHM has occurred. A network element passes time and
date in any of the following scenarios:

◦ A connected CMM2 passes time and date (GPS time and date, if received).
◦ A connected CMMmicro passes the time and date (GPS time and date, if
received), but only if the CMMmicro is operating on CMMmicro Release 2.1 or
later release. (These releases include an NTP server functionality.)
◦ A separate NTP server is addressable from the BHM.

If the BHM should derive time and date from either a CMMmicro or a separate NTP
server, enter the IP address of the CMMmicro or NTP server on this tab. To force the
BHM to derive time and date before the first (or next) 15-minute interval query of the NTP
server, click Get Time through NTP.

214 Issue 1, May 2010


If you enter a time and date, the format for entry is

Time : hh / mm / ss

Date : MM / dd / yyyy

where
hh represents the two-digit hour in the range 00 to 24
mm represents the two-digit minute
ss represents the two-digit second
MM represents the two-digit month
dd represents the two-digit day
yyyy represents the four-digit year


Procedure 14: Setting up the BHS for test
1. Enter the appropriate information in the format shown above.
2. Click the Set Time and Date button.
NOTE: The time displayed at the top of this page is static unless your browser is
set to automatically refresh.
3. In one hand, securely hold the top (larger shell) of the BH that you intend to
deploy as a timing slave. With the other hand, depress the lever in the back of
the base cover (smaller shell). Remove the base cover.
4. Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the BHS.
6. Roughly aim the BHS toward the BHM.

WARNING!
From this point until you remove power from the BHS, stay at least as far from
the BHS as the minimum separation distance specified in Table 42 on Page
173.

8. Back at the computing device, on the left side of the BHM Time tab, click the
Home button. When the Home page opens to the General Status tab, click the
Remote Subscribers tab.
RESULT: The BHM opens the Remote Subscribers tab. An example of this tab is
shown in Figure 70.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 215


Figure 70: Remote Subscribers tab of BHM, example

16.4.3 Beginning the Test of Point-to-Point Links
To begin the test of your BH link, in the Remote Subscribers tab of the BHM, click the link
to the BHS. The BHS GUI opens to the General Status tab of its Home page.

An example of the BHS General Status tab is displayed in Figure 71.

Figure 71: General Status tab of BHS, example

216 Issue 1, May 2010


The General Status tab provides information on the operation of this BHS. This is the tab
that opens by default when you access the GUI of the BHS. The General Status tab

Device Type
This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the
BHS, its module type, and its MAC address.

Software Version
This field indicates the system release, the time and date of the release, the modulation
rate, and whether communications involving the module are secured by DES or AES
encryption (see Encrypting Radio Transmissions on Page 379). If you request technical


Board Type
Page 377.

FPGA Version
module. When you request technical support, provide the value of this field.

FPGA Type

PLD Version

Uptime

System Time
This field provides the current time. When a BHS registers to a BHM, it inherits the
system time, which is displayed in this field as GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).

Ethernet Interface
This field indicates the speed and duplex state of the Ethernet interface to the BHS.

Issue 1, May 2010 217


Antenna
following:

◦ Horizontal
◦ Vertical

Session Status
This field displays the following information about the current session:

◦ Scanning indicates that this SM currently cycles through the RF frequencies that
are selected in the Radio tab of the Configuration page.
◦ Syncing indicates that this SM currently attempts to receive sync.
◦ Registering indicates that this SM has sent a registration request message to
the AP and has not yet received a response.
◦ Registered indicates that this SM is both
− registered to an AP.
− ready to transmit and receive data packets.
◦ Alignment indicates that this SM is in an aiming mode. See Table 46 on
Page 183.

Session Uptime
This field displays the duration of the current link. The syntax of the displayed time is
hh:mm:ss.

Registered Backhaul
This field displays the MAC address of the BHM to which this BHS is registered.

Power Level and Jitter
The General Status tab shows the received Power Level in dBm and Jitter. Proper
should favor lower jitter over higher dBm. For example, if coarse alignment gives the BHS


OFDM BHSs do not have this parameter. For historical relevance, the General Status tab
also shows the RSSI, the unitless measure of power. Use Power Level and ignore RSSI.
RSSI implies more accuracy and precision than is inherent in its measurement.

218 Issue 1, May 2010


NOTE:

Air Delay
This field displays the distance in feet between the BHS and the BHM. To derive the
distance in meters, multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048. Distances reported as
less than 200 feet (61 meters) are unreliable.

Data Slots Down
This field indicates the currently configured number of frame slots that are designated for
use by data traffic in the downlink (sent from the backhaul slave to the backhaul master).
See Max Range on Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

Data Slots Up
use by data traffic in the uplink (sent from the backhaul master to the backhaul slave).
See Max Range on Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

Control Slots
use by control (overhead) traffic. See Control Slots on Page 237.

Region Code
This field indicates the region in which the radio is currently set to operate. When the
appropriate region has been set, the radio automatically implements the applicable
required Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) standard. For further information on DFS,
see Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this field should always indicate the
value that corresponds to the local region.

Transmit Power Setting
This field displays the value of the Transmitter Output Power parameter in the module.
See Table 59: Transmitter output power settings, example cases on Page 333.

Site Name
name in the SNMP tab of the BHS Configuration page. This information is also set into
the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Site Contact
change this information in the SNMP tab of the BHS Configuration page. This information
management server.

Issue 1, May 2010 219


Site Location
this information in the SNMP tab of the BHS Configuration page.

16.4.4 Continuing the Test of Point-to-Point Links
To resume the test, perform the following steps.

Procedure 15: Verifying and recording information from the BHS
1. Verify that the Session Status field of the General Status tab in the BHS
indicates REGISTERED.
NOTE: This indication confirms that the BHS is properly functional.
2. While your browser is set to the General Status tab, note (or print) the values of
the following fields:
◦ Device type
◦ Board Type
◦ FPGA Version
the BHS.
4. Return your browser to the General Status tab of the BHM.
end of procedure

220 Issue 1, May 2010


16.4.5 General Status Tab of the BHM
An example of a BHM General Status tab is displayed in Figure 72.

Figure 72: General Status tab of BHM, example

The Status page provides information on the operation of the module. This is the default
web page for the module. The Status page provides the following fields.

Device Type
This field indicates the type of the module. Values include the frequency band of the
module, the module type, timing mode, and the MAC address of the module.

Software Version
This field indicates the software release that is operated on the module, the release date
and time of the software release, the modulation rate capability, and whether the module
is secured by DES or AES encryption (see Encrypting Radio Transmissions on Page
379). When you request technical support, provide the information from this field.


Issue 1, May 2010 221


Board Type
Page 377.

FPGA Version
module. If you request technical support, provide the value of this field.

FPGA Type

PLD Version

Uptime

System Time
This field provides the current time. If the BHM is connected to a CMM, then this field
provides GMT (Greenwich Mean Time). The BHS that registers to the BHM inherits the
system time.

Last NTP Time Update
If the Time & Date page of the module specifies that time should be received from an
NTP server, then this field indicates when the time was last updated by a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server.

Ethernet Interface
If an Ethernet link to the module exists, this field indicates the speed and duplex state of
the Ethernet interface to the module.

Regulatory
This field indicates whether the configured Region Code and radio frequency are
compliant with respect to their compatibility. For example, you may configure a 5.4-GHz
AP with a Region Code set to United States and configure a frequency that lies within
the weather notch. This is a compliant combination, the radio properly operates, and its
Regulatory field displays Passed. If later you change its Region Code to Canada, then
the combination becomes non-compliant (since frequencies within the weather notch are
disallowed in Canada. In this case, the radio ceases to transmit, and its Regulatory field
displays an error message.

For further information on Region Codes and DFS, see Radar Signature Detection and
Shutdown on Page 133.

222 Issue 1, May 2010


DFS
This field indicates the current behavior of the radio with respect to Dynamic Frequency
Selection. Possible messages in this field are

◦ Normal Transmit
◦ Radar Detected Stop Transmitting for n minutes, where n counts down
from 30 to 1.
◦ Checking Channel Availability Remaining time n seconds, where n counts
down from 60 to 1.

Antenna
following:

◦ Horizontal
◦ Vertical

Timing Slave Status
This field indicates whether this backhaul master is currently in link with a backhaul slave.

GPS Sync Pulse Status
This field indicates the status of synchronization as follows:

◦ Generating sync indicates that the module is set to generate the sync pulse.
◦ Receiving Sync indicates that the module is set to receive a sync pulse from an
outside source and is receiving the pulse.
◦ ERROR: No Sync Pulse indicates that the module is set to receive a sync pulse
from an outside source and is not receiving the pulse.

NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the BHM transmitter is turned off to
avoid self-interference within the system.

Data Slots Down
the downlink (sent from the backhaul slave to the backhaul master). See Max Range on
Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

Data Slots Up
the uplink (sent from the backhaul master to the backhaul slave). See Max Range on
Page 235 and Downlink Data on Page 236.

Issue 1, May 2010 223


Control Slots
This field indicates the number of frame slots that are designated for use by control
(overhead) traffic. See Control Slots on Page 237.

Site Name
name in the SNMP tab of the BHM Configuration page. This information is also set into
the sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an SNMP management server.

Site Contact
change this information in the SNMP tab of the BHM Configuration page. This information
management server.

Site Location
this information in the SNMP tab of the BHM Configuration page.

16.4.6 Concluding the Test of Point-to-Point Links
To conclude the test, perform the following steps.

Procedure 16: Verifying and recording information from the BHM
1. Confirm that the GPS Sync Pulse Status field indicates Generating Sync.
NOTE: This indication confirms that the BHM is properly functional.
2. While your browser is set to this BHM Status page, note (or print) the values of
the following fields:
◦ Device type
◦ Board Type
◦ FPGA Version
the BHM.
end of procedure

224 Issue 1, May 2010


17 PREPARING COMPONENTS FOR DEPLOYMENT
Your test of the modules not only verified that they are functional, but also yielded data
that you have stored about them. Most efficiently preparing modules for deployment
involves

◦ retrieving that data.
◦ systematically collecting the data into a single repository, while keeping a strong
(quick) association between the data and the module.
◦ immediately merging module access data into this previously stored data.

17.1 CORRELATING COMPONENT-SPECIFIC INFORMATION
You can use the data that you noted or printed from the Status pages of the modules to

◦ store modules for future deployment.
◦ know, at a glance, how well-stocked you are for upcoming network expansions.
◦ efficiently draw modules from stock for deployment.
◦ plan any software updates that you
− wish to perform to acquire features.
− need to perform to have the feature set be consistent among all modules in a
network expansion.

You can make these tasks even easier by collecting this data into a sortable database.

17.2 ENSURING CONTINUING ACCESS TO THE MODULES
As you proceed through the steps under Configuring for the Destination on Page 227,
you will set values for parameters that specify the sync source, data handling
characteristics, security measures, management authorities, and other variables for the
modules. While setting these, you will also tighten access to the module, specifically in

◦ the Color Code parameter of Configuration page
◦ the Display-Only Access and Full Access password parameters of the
Configuration page.
◦ the addressing parameters of the IP Configuration page.

Before you set these, consider whether and how you may want to set these by a self-
devised scheme. A password scheme can help you when you have forgotten or misfiled
a password. An IP addressing scheme may be essential to the operation of your network
and to future expansions of your network.

As you set these, note the color code and note or print the parameters you set on the
Configuration page tabs. Immediately associate them with the following previously stored
data about the modules:

◦ device type, frequency band, and MAC address
◦ software version and encryption type
◦ software boot version
◦ FPGA version

Issue 1, May 2010 225


18 CONFIGURING FOR THE DESTINATION

18.1 CONFIGURING AN AP FOR THE DESTINATION
If an ADMINISTRATOR-level password has been set in the AP, you must log into the
module before you can configure its parameters. See Managing Module Access by
Passwords on Page 381.

18.1.1 General Tab of the AP
An example of an AP General tab is displayed in Figure 73.

Figure 73: General tab of AP, example

Issue 1, May 2010 227


The General tab of the AP contains many of the configurable parameters that define how
the AP and the SMs in the sector operate. As shown in Figure 73, you may set the
Configuration page parameters as follows.

Device Setting
You can temporarily transform an AP into an SM and thereby use the spectrum analyzer
functionality. See Using the AP as a Spectrum Analyzer on Page 375. Otherwise, the
selection for this parameter is AP.

Link Speeds
From the drop-down list of options, select the type of link speed for the Ethernet
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected: Auto
100F/100H/10F/10H. In this setting, the two ends of the link automatically negotiate with
each other whether the speed that they will use is 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps and whether the
Ethernet traffic will be full duplex or half duplex. However, Ethernet links work best when
either

◦ both ends are set to the same forced selection
◦ both ends are set to auto-negotiate and both have capability in least one
common speed and traffic type combination.

Configuration Source
See Setting the Configuration Source on Page 292.

CAUTION!
Do not set this parameter to BAM where both
◦ a BAM release earlier than 2.1 is implemented.
◦ the All Local SM Management parameter (in the VLAN Configuration
page of the AP) is set to Enable.

This combination causes the SMs to become unmanageable, until you gain
direct access with an Override Plug and remove this combination from the AP
configuration.

Sync Input
Specify the type of synchronization for this AP to use:

◦ Select Sync to Received Signal (Power Port) to set this AP to receive sync
from a connected CMMmicro or CMM4.
◦ Select Sync to Received Signal (Timing Port) to set this AP to receive sync
from a connected CMM2, an AP in the cluster, an SM, or a BH timing slave.
◦ Select Generate Sync Signal where the AP does not receive sync, and no other
AP or BHM is active within the link range.

228 Issue 1, May 2010


Region Code
regions are


Page 133.


Webpage Auto Update
Enter the frequency (in seconds) for the web browser to automatically refresh the web-
based interface. The default setting is 0. The 0 setting causes the web-based interface to
never be automatically refreshed.

Bridge Entry Timeout
Specify the appropriate bridge timeout for correct network operation with the existing
network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout should be a longer period than the ARP
(Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

CAUTION!
An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting may lead to temporary loss
of communication with some end users.

Translation Bridging
If you want the Translation Bridging feature, select Enabled. This has numerous
implications. For a full description of them, see Uplink Frame on Page 85.

Send Untranslated ARP
If the Translation Bridging parameter is set to Enabled, then the Send Untranslated
ARP parameter can be

◦ disabled, so that the AP will overwrite the MAC address in Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) packets before forwarding them.
◦ enabled, so that the AP will forward ARP packets regardless of whether it has
overwritten the MAC address.
See Uplink Frame on Page 85 and Address Resolution Protocol on Page 166.

Issue 1, May 2010 229


If the Translation Bridging parameter is set to Disabled, then the Send Untranslated
ARP parameter has no effect.

SM Isolation
Prevent or allow SM-to-SM communication by selecting from the following drop-down
menu items:

◦ Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication
between SMs.
◦ Block SM Packets from being forwarded. This prevents both
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication.
◦ Block and Forward SM Packets to Backbone. This not only prevents
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the
packets, which otherwise would have been handled SM to SM, through the
Ethernet port of the AP.

Update Application Address
Enter the address of the server to access for software updates on this AP and registered
SMs.

2X Rate
This parameter is present in only PMP 100 Series APs. You should generally keep this
parameter set to Enabled to allow the module to automatically the operation rate. For
troubleshooting, you may lock the rate down (Disabled), but be aware that this locks
down the operation rate for all uplinks and downlinks across the sector. See 2X
Operation on Page 92.

Dynamic Rate Adapt
This parameter is present in only PMP 400 Series APs. You should generally keep this
parameter set to Enabled to allow the module to automatically the operation rate. For
troubleshooting, you may lock the rate down (Disabled), but be aware that this locks
down the operation rate for all uplinks and downlinks across the sector. See 2X
Operation on Page 92 and 3X Operation on Page 95.

Prioritize TCP ACK
To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives during
transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements. See AP-
SM Links on Page 101.

The General tab also provides the following buttons.

Multicast Destination Address
Using Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), a module exchanges multicast addresses
with the device to which it is wired on the Ethernet interface. Although some switches
(CMMmicro, for example) do not pass LLDP addresses upward in the network, a radio
can pass it as the value of the Multicast Destination Address parameter value in the
connected device that has it populated.

In this way, an SM can report to Prizm, for example, the multicast address of a connected
remote AP, and thus allow Prizm to discover that AP. To allow this, set the message
mode in the remote AP to LLDP Multicast. The SM will pass this address in broadcast
mode, and the CMMmicro will pass the address upward in the network, since it does not
discard addresses that it receives in broadcast mode.

230 Issue 1, May 2010


Where the AP is not behind another device, the Broadcast mode will allow discovery of
the AP.

Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made on the this tab are recorded in
flash memory. However, these changes do not apply until the next reboot of the module.

Reboot
When you click this button

1. the module reboots.
2. any changes that you saved by a click of the Save Changes button are
implemented.

18.1.2 IP Tab of the AP
An example of the IP tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 74.

Figure 74: IP tab of AP, example

You may set the IP tab parameters as follows.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, IP Address
Enter the non-routable IP address to associate with the Ethernet connection on this AP.
(The default IP address from the factory is 169.254.1.1.) If you set and then forget this
parameter, then you must both

1. physically access the module.
2. use an override plug to electronically access the module configuration
parameters at 169.254.1.1. See Overriding Forgotten IP Addresses or
Passwords on AP, SM, or BH on Page 383.

Issue 1, May 2010 231


RECOMMENDATION:
Note or print the IP settings from this page. Ensure that you can readily associate
these IP settings both with the module and with the other data that you store
about the module.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Subnet Mask
Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the AP to communicate on the network. The default
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. See Allocating Subnets on Page 166.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Gateway IP Address
Enter the appropriate gateway for the AP to communicate with the network. The default
gateway is 169.254.0.0.

The values of these four LAN1 network interface configuration parameters are displayed
read only along with the Ethernet speed and duplex state on the Network Interface tab of
the Home page in the AP.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, DHCP State
If you select Enabled, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration
(IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) and the values of those individual
parameters (above) are not used. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also
viewable, but not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.

LAN2 Network Interface Configuration (RF Private Interface), IP Address
You should not change this parameter from the default AP private IP address of
192.168.101.1. A /24 CIDR subnet is used to communicate with each of the SMs that are
registered. The AP uses a combination of the private IP and the LUID (logical unit ID) of
the SM.

For example, if an SM is the first to register in an AP, and another SM registers later,
then the AP whose Private IP address is 192.168.101.1 uses the following SM Private IP
addresses to communicate to each:

SM LUID Private IP
First SM registered 2 192.168.101.2
Second SM registered 3 192.168.101.3

NOTE:
Where space is limited for subnet allocation, be advised that an SM need not
have an operator-assigned IP address. The SM is directly accessible without an
LUID if either the SM Color Code parameter is set to 0 or the AP has a direct
Ethernet connection to the SM.

232 Issue 1, May 2010


The IP Configuration page also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made on this tab are recorded in flash
memory. However, these changes do not apply until the next reboot of the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.1.3 Radio Tab of the AP
Examples of the Radio tab of the AP are shown in Figure 75 and Figure 76.

Figure 75: Radio tab of AP (900 MHz), example

Issue 1, May 2010 233


Figure 76: Radio tab of AP (5.4 GHz), example

The Radio tab of the AP contains some of the configurable parameters that define how
the AP operates. As shown in Figure 75, you may set the Radio tab parameters as
follows.

Radio Frequency Carrier
Specify the frequency for the module to transmit. The default for this parameter is None.
(The selection labeled Factory requires a special software key file for implementation.)
For a list of channels in the band, see the drop-down list or Considering Frequency Band
Alternatives on Page 138.

Alternate Frequency Carrier 1
If your network operates in a region in which DFS shutdown capability is required, and
you do not see this parameter, perform the following steps:

1. Click the General tab.
2. Set the Region Code parameter from its drop-down list.

234 Issue 1, May 2010


From the drop-down list, select the frequency that the AP should switch to if it detects a
radar signature on the frequency configured in the Radio Frequency Carrier parameter.
See Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

From the drop-down list, select the frequency that the AP should switch to if it detects a
radar signature on the frequency configured in the Alternate Frequency Carrier 1
parameter. See Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

Color Code
Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the SM and the
AP must match. Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a
management feature, typically for assigning each sector a different color code.

Color code allows you to force an SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the
SM can communicate with multiple APs. The default setting for the color code value is 0.
This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

RECOMMENDATION:
Note the color code that you enter. Ensure that you can readily associate this
color code both with the module and with the other data that you store about the
module.

Power Save Mode
Select either

◦ Enabled (the default), to reduce module power consumption by approximately
10% without affecting the transmitter output power. This is the recommended
setting.
◦ Disabled, to continue normal power consumption, but do so only under guidance
from technical support.

Sector ID
Specify a number in the range 1 to 6 to associate with this AP. The Sector ID setting
does not affect the operation of the AP. On the AP Evaluation tab of the Tools page in
the SM, the Sector ID field identifies the AP that the SM sees. The following steps may
be useful:

◦ Assign a unique Sector ID to each sector in an AP cluster.
◦ Repeat the assignment pattern throughout the entire system.

Max Range
Enter a number of miles (or kilometers divided by 1.61, then rounded to an integer) for
the furthest distance from which an SM is allowed to register to this AP. Do not set the
distance to any greater number of miles. A greater distance

◦ does not increase the power of transmission from the AP.
◦ can reduce aggregate throughput. See Table 25 on Page 102.

Issue 1, May 2010 235


Regardless of this distance, the SM must meet the minimum requirements for an
acceptable link. If the AP is in cluster, then you must set this parameter on all other APs
in the cluster exactly the same, except as described in the NOTE admonition below.
The default value of this parameter is 2 miles (3.2 km).

For APs in the non 900-MHz frequency band ranges, although the typical maximum
range where an SM is deployed with a reflector is 15 miles (24 km), you can set this
parameter to as far as 30 miles (48 km). Without increasing the power or sensitivity of the
AP or SM, the greater value allows you to attempt greater distance where the RF
environment and Fresnel zone6 are especially clear.

For the PMP 400 Series AP, the typical maximum range achievable depends on the
operation mode as follows:

◦ 5 miles (8 km) in 1X operation
◦ 2.5 miles (4 km) in 2X operation
◦ 1.25 miles (2 km) in 3X operation

A value of 15 for this parameter decreases the number of available data slots by 1.
With a higher value, the number is further decreased as the AP compensates for the
expected additional air delay.

Downlink Data
Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames transmitted
from the AP to the subscriber). For example, if the aggregate (uplink and downlink total)
throughput on the AP is 6 Mb, then 75% specified for this parameter allocates 4.5 Mb for
the downlink and 1.5 Mb for the uplink. The default for this parameter is 75%.

CAUTION!
You must set this parameter exactly the same for all APs in a cluster.

Schedule Whitening
Select either

◦ Enable, to spread the transmitted signal power to avoid peaks that modules with
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) configured might interpret as radar. This is
the recommended setting.
◦ Disable, to allow peaks in transmitted signal power.

PMP 400 Series OFDM APs do not have this parameter.

6
See Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone on Page 132.

236 Issue 1, May 2010


External Gain


Using Table 48 as a guide, type in the dB value by which to reduce Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS) sensitivity to radar signals.

Table 48: Recommended External Gain values for AP

Recommended
Module Type
Setting
FSK with only integrated patch antenna 0
FSK with 9 dB Canopy LENS 9
FSK with standard 18 dB reflector 18
FSK connectorized with 15.5 dBi
15
antenna and 0.5 dB cable loss
OFDM with only integrated antenna 17
OFDM connectorized with antenna
17
that was purchased with it
antenna gain
OFDM connectorized with separately minus
purchased antenna coax + connector
loss

The value of this parameter does not affect transmitter output power. This parameter is
present in only radios that support DFS and hence is not present in 900-MHz radios.

Control Slots
Field results have indicated that, in general, systems perform better with a slightly higher
number of control slots than previously recommended. If you are experiencing latency or
SM-servicing issues, increasing the number of control slots may increase system
performance, depending on traffic mix over time.

Use care when changing the control slot configuration of only some APs, because
changes affect the uplink/downlink ratio and can cause collocation issues. For APs in a
cluster of mismatched control slots settings, or where OFDM and FSK AP of the same
frequency band are collocated, use the frame calculator. See Using the Frame Calculator
Tool (All) for Collocation on Page 446.

Issue 1, May 2010 237


CAUTION!
Change control slot configuration in an operating, stable system cautiously and
with a back-out plan. After changing a control slot configuration, monitor the
system closely for problems as well as improvements in system performance.

The recommended number of control slots is as stated in Table 49 or Table 50.

Table 49: Control slot settings for all FSK APs in cluster

Number of SMs that Number of Control
Register to the AP Slots Recommended
1 to 10 1
11 to 50 2
51 to 150 4
151 to 200 6

Table 50: Control slot settings for all OFDM APs in cluster

Number of SMs that Number of Control
Register to the AP Slots Recommended
1 to 10 2
11 to 50 4
51 to 150 6
151 to 200 8

This field indicates the number of (reserved) control slots configured by the operator.
Control slots are half the size of data slots. The SM uses reserved control slots and
unused data slots for bandwidth requests.

If too few reserved control slots are specified, then latency increases in high traffic
periods. If too many are specified, then the maximum capacity is unnecessarily reduced.

In a typical cluster, each AP should be set to the same number of control slots to assure
proper timing in the send and receive cycles. However, where high incidence of small
packets exists, as in a sector that serves several VoIP streams, additional control slots
may provide better results. For APs in a cluster of mismatched control slots settings, or
where OFDM and FSK APs of the same frequency band are collocated, use the frame
calculator. See Using the Frame Calculator Tool (All) for Collocation on Page 446.

Broadcast Repeat Count
The default is 2 repeats (in addition to the original broadcast packet, for a total of 3
packets sent for every one needed), and is settable to 1 or 0 repeats (2 or 1 packets for
every broadcast).

238 Issue 1, May 2010


ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) is not present in downlink broadcast packets, since it
would cause unnecessary uplink traffic from every SM for each broadcast packet. For
successful transport without ARQ, the AP repeats downlink broadcast packets. The SMs
filter out all repeated broadcast packets and, thus, do not transport further.

The default of 2 repeats is optimum for typical uses of the network as an internet access
system. In applications with heavy download broadcast such as video distribution, overall
throughput is significantly improved by setting the repeat count to 1 or 0. This avoids
flooding the downlink with repeat broadcast packets.

External Filters Delay
This parameter is present in only 900-MHz modules and can have effect in only those
that have interference mitigation filter(s). Leave this value set to 0, regardless of whether
the AP has an interference mitigation filter.

Transmit Frame Spreading
As Figure 75 on Page 233 displays, the GUI of the 900-MHz AP includes this parameter.
However, this feature has been ineffective in 900-MHz APs. Thus, the following
description applies to APs only in the other frequency band ranges.

Where multiple AP clusters operate in the same frequency band range and same
geographical area, select Enable. Then SMs between two APs can register in the
assigned AP (do not register in another AP).

Where multiple AP clusters do not operate in the same frequency band range and same
geographical area, select Disable, but observe the following caveat.

IMPORTANT!
SM throughput is 10% greater with this feature disabled. However, if you disable
Transmit Frame Spreading where this feature was previously enabled, monitor
the zone for interference over a period of days to ensure that this action has not
made any SMs sensitive to the wrong beacon.

With this selection enabled, the AP does not transmit a beacon in each frame, but rather
transmits a beacon in only pseudo-random frames in which the SM expects the beacon.
This allows multiple APs to send beacons to multiple SMs in the same range without
interference.

Transmitter Output Power
Nations and regions may regulate transmitter output power. For example

◦ Both 900-MHz and 5.7-GHz modules are available as connectorized radios,
which require the operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance.
◦ Legal maximum allowable transmitter output power and EIRP (Equivalent
Isotropic Radiated Power) in the 2.4-GHz frequency band varies by country and
region. The output power of Series P9 2.4-GHz modules can be adjusted to meet
these national or regional regulatory requirements.

Issue 1, May 2010 239


◦ Countries and regions that permit the use of the 5.4-GHz frequency band (CEPT
member states, for example), generally require equipment using the band to
have adjustable power. In the 5.4-GHz PMP 400 Series OFDM AP, transmitter
output power is settable in the range of −30 to 15 dBm. However, with only the
integrated antenna, where regulation7 requires that EIRP is not greater than
27 dBm, compliance requires that the transmitter output power is set to 10 dBm
or less. With a 12 dBi external antenna on the connectorized version of this AP,
the full range (up to 15 dBm) is acceptable.

The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to

◦ maintain awareness of applicable regulations.
◦ calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module.
◦ confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or regional
regulations.
◦ confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the module to
factory defaults.

For information on how to calculate the permissible transmitter output power to enter in
this parameter, see Adjusting Transmitter Output Power on Page 330.

The Radio tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

7
This is the case in most regions, including the U.S.A., Europe, and Canada.

240 Issue 1, May 2010


18.1.4 SNMP Tab of the AP
An example of the SNMP tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 77.

Figure 77: SNMP tab of AP, example

Issue 1, May 2010 241


You may set the SNMP tab parameters as follows.

SNMP Community String 1
Specify a control string that can allow an Network Management Station (NMS) to access
SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. The default string is Canopy.

SNMP Community String 1 Permissions
You can designate the SNMP Community String 1 to be the password for Prizm, for
example, to have read/write access to the module via SNMP, or for all SNMP access to
the module to be read only.

SNMP Community String 2 (Read Only)
Specify an additional control string that can allow an Network Management Station
(NMS) to read SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. The default string
is Canopy2. This password will never authenticate a user or an NMS to read/write
access.

The Community String value is clear text and is readable by a packet monitor.
Additional security derives from the configuration of the Accessing Subnet, Trap
Address, and Permission parameters.

Accessing IP / Subnet Mask 1 to 10
Specify the addresses that are allowed to send SNMP requests to this AP. The NMS has
an address that is among these addresses (this subnet). You must enter both

◦ The network IP address in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
◦ The CIDR (Classless Interdomain Routing) prefix length in the form /xx
For example

◦ the /16 in 198.32.0.0/16 specifies a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 (the first 16 bits
in the address range are identical among all members of the subnet).
◦ 192.168.102.0 specifies that any device whose IP address is in the range
192.168.102.0 to 192.168.102.254 can send SNMP requests to the AP,
presuming that the device supplies the correct Community String value.

The default treatment is to allow all networks access. For more information on CIDR,
execute an Internet search on “Classless Interdomain Routing.” You are allowed to
specify as many as 10 different accessing IP address, subnet mask combinations.

Trap Address 1 to 10
Specify ten or fewer IP addresses (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) to which SNMP traps should be sent.
Traps inform Prizm or an NMS that something has occurred. For example, trap
information is sent

◦ after a reboot of the module.
◦ when an NMS attempts to access agent information but either
− supplied an inappropriate community string or SNMP version number.
− is associated with a subnet to which access is disallowed.

Trap Enable, Sync Status
If you want sync status traps (sync lost and sync regained) sent to Prizm or an NMS,
select Enabled. If you want these traps suppressed, select Disabled.

242 Issue 1, May 2010


Trap Enable, Session Status
If you want session status traps sent to Prizm or an NMS, select Enabled. For the names
and descriptions of session status traps, see Traps Provided in the Canopy Enterprise
MIB on Page 410. If you want these traps suppressed, select Disabled.

Site Name
Specify a string to associate with the physical module. This parameter is written into the
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by PrizmEMS or an NMS. The buffer
size for this field is 128 characters.

Site Contact
Enter contact information for the module administrator. This parameter is written into the
sysContact SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by PrizmEMS or an NMS. The buffer

Site Location
Enter information about the physical location of the module. This parameter is written into
the sysLocation SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by PrizmEMS or an NMS. The
buffer size for this field is 128 characters.

The SNMP tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 243


18.1.5 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the AP
An example of the Quality of Service (QoS) tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 78.

Figure 78: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of AP, example

In the Quality of Service (QoS) tab, you may set AP bandwidth parameters as follows.

Specify the rate that each SM registered to this AP is replenished with credits for
transmission. This default imposes no restriction on the uplink. See


Specify the maximum amount of data to allow each SM to transmit before being
recharged at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transmit more. See


Specify the rate at which the AP should be replenished with credits (tokens) for
transmission to each of the SMs in its sector. This default imposes no restriction on the
uplink. See


244 Issue 1, May 2010


Specify the maximum amount of data to allow the AP to transmit to any registered SM
before the AP is replenished with transmission credits at the Sustained Downlink Data
Rate. See


Broadcast Downlink CIR
Broadcast Downlink CIR (Committed Information Rate, a minimum) supports some
system designs where downlink broadcast is desired to have higher priority than other
traffic. For many other system designs, especially typical internet access networks, leave
the Broadcast Downlink CIR at the default.

Broadcast Downlink CIR is closely related to the Broadcast Repeat Count parameter,
which is settable in the Radio tab of the Configuration page in the AP: when the
Broadcast Repeat Count is changed, the total of available bandwidth is also changed,
since packets are being sent one, two, or three times, according to the setting in the
Broadcast Repeat Count parameter. (See Broadcast Repeat Count on
Page 238.)This relationship is shown in Table 51.

Table 51: Broadcast Downlink CIR achievable per Broadcast Repeat Count

Broadcast Highest Achievable
Number of times
Repeat Value for Broadcast
each packet is sent
Count Downlink CIR
0 1 7000 kbps
1 2 3500 kbps
2 3 2333 kbps

The Quality of Server (QoS) tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 245


18.1.6 Security Tab of the AP
An example of the Security tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 79.

Figure 79: Security tab of AP, example

246 Issue 1, May 2010


In the Security tab of the AP, you may set the following parameters.

Authentication Mode
If the AP has authentication capability, then you can use this field to select from among
the following authentication modes:

◦ Authentication Disabled—the AP requires no SMs to authenticate.
◦ Authentication Required—the AP requires any SM that attempts registration to
be authenticated in BAM or Prizm before registration.

If the AP does not have authentication capability, then this parameter displays
Authentication Not Available.

Authentication Server 1 to 3
If either BAM or the BAM subsystem in Prizm is implemented and the AP has
authentication capability, enter the IP address of one or more BAM servers that perform
authentication for SMs registered to this AP. Enter these in order of primary, secondary,
then tertiary.

Encryption
Specify the type of air link security to apply to this AP:

◦ Encryption Disabled provides no encryption on the air link. This is the default
mode.
◦ Encryption Enabled provides encryption, using a factory-programmed secret
key that is unique for each module.

Encrypt Downlink Broadcast
When Encryption Enabled is selected in the Airlink Security parameter (described
above) and Enable is selected in the Encrypt Downlink Broadcast parameter, the AP
encrypts downlink broadcast packets as

◦ DES where the AP is DES capable.
◦ AES where the AP is AES capable.

For more information about the Encrypt Downlink Broadcast feature, see Encrypting
Downlink Broadcasts on Page 387.

SM Display of AP Evaluation Data
You can use this field to suppress the display of data about this AP on the AP Evaluation
tab of the Tools page in all SMs that register.

Web, Telnet, FTP Session Timeout
Enter the expiry in seconds for remote management sessions via HTTP, telnet, or ftp
access to the AP.

IP Access Control
You can permit access to the AP from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled) or
limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP Access
Filtering Enabled). If you select IP Access Filtering Enabled, then you must populate
at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no access permitted
from any IP address, including access and management by Prizm.

Issue 1, May 2010 247


Allowed Source IP 1 to 3
If you selected IP Access Filtering Enabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
you must populate at least one of the three Allowed Source IP parameters or have no
access permitted to the AP from any IP address. You may populate as many as all three.

If you selected IP Access Filtering Disabled for the IP Access Control parameter, then
no entries in this parameter are read, and access from all IP addresses is permitted.

The Security tab of the AP also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

248 Issue 1, May 2010


18.1.7 VLAN Tab of the AP
An example of the AP VLAN tab is displayed in Figure 80.

Figure 80: VLAN tab of AP, example

In the VLAN tab of the AP, you may set the following parameters.

VLAN
Specify whether VLAN functionality for the AP and all linked SMs should (Enabled) or
should not (Disabled) be allowed. The default value is Disabled.

Always use Local VLAN Config
Enable this option before you reboot this AP as an SM to use it to perform spectrum
analysis. After the spectrum analysis is completed and before you reboot this module as
an AP, disable this option.

Dynamic Learning
Specify whether the AP should (Enabled) or should not (Disabled) add the VLAN IDs
(VIDs) of upstream frames to the VID table. (The AP passes frames with VIDs that are
stored in the table both upstream and downstream.) The default value is Enabled.

Issue 1, May 2010 249


Allow Frame Types
Select the type of arriving frames that the AP should tag, using the VID that is stored in
the Untagged Ingress VID parameter. The default value is All Frames.

VLAN Aging Timeout
Specify how long the AP should keep dynamically learned VIDs. The range of values is 5
to 1440 (minutes). The default value is 25 (minutes).

NOTE:
VIDs that you enter for the Management VID and VLAN Membership
parameters do not time out.

Management VID
Enter the VID that the operator wishes to use to communicate with the module manager.
The range of values is 1 to 4095. The default value is 1.

SM Management VID Pass-through
Specify whether to allow the SM (Enable) or the AP (Disable) to control the VLAN
settings of the SM. The default value is Enable.

CAUTION!
Do not set this parameter to Enable where both
◦ a BAM release earlier than 2.1 is implemented.
◦ the Configuration Source parameter in the AP is set to BAM.
This combination causes the SMs to become unmanageable, until you gain
direct access with an override plug and remove this combination from the AP
configuration.

When VLAN is enabled in the AP, the Active Configuration block provides the following
details as read-only information in this tab. In the Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP
network, each device of any type is automatically a permanent member of VID 1. This
facilitates deployment of devices that have VLAN enabled with those that do not.

Active Configuration Untagged Ingress VID
Some switches refer to this parameter as the Port VLAN ID. This is the VID that the AP
will use for tagging frames of the type specified by Allow Frame Types.

Next, the following fields simply summarize how the VLAN features are currently
configured:

Management VID
This is the value of the parameter of the same name, configured above.

250 Issue 1, May 2010


SM Management VID Pass-Through

Dynamic Ageing Timeout
This is the value of the VLAN Aging Timeout parameter configured above.

Allow Learning
Yes is displayed if the value of the Dynamic Learning parameter above is Enabled.
No is displayed if the value of Dynamic Learning is Disabled.

Allow Frame Type
This displays the selection that was made from the drop-down list at the
Allow Frame Types parameter above.

Current VID Member Set, VID Number
This column lists the ID numbers of the VLANs in which this module is a member,
whether through assignment or through dynamic learning.

Current VID Member Set, Type
For each VID number in the first column, the entry in this column correlates the way in
which the module became and continues to be a member:

◦ Permanent—This indicates that the module was assigned the VID number
through direct configuration by the operator.
◦ Dynamic—This indicates that the module adopted the VID number through
enabled dynamic learning, when a tagged packet from an SM behind it in the
network, or from a customer equipment that is behind the SM in this case, was
read.

Current VID Member Set, Age
For each VID number in the first column of the table, the entry in this column reflects
whether or when the VID number will time out:

◦ for Permanent type—the number will never time out, and this is indicated by the
digit 0.
◦ for Dynamic type—the Age reflects what is configured in the VLAN Aging
Timeout parameter in the Configuration => VLAN tab of the AP or reflects a
fewer number of minutes that represents the difference between what was
configured and what has elapsed since the VID was learned. Each minute, the
Age decreases by one until, at zero, the AP deletes the learned VID, but can it
again from packets sent by elements that are beneath it in the network.

Issue 1, May 2010 251


IMPORTANT!
Values in this Active Configuration block can differ from attempted values in
configurations:
◦ A VLAN profile administered by the BAM subsystem in Prizm is
capable of overriding any configured VLAN value, if the
Configuration Source parameter in the AP is set to
Authentication Server.
◦ The AP itself can override the value that the SM has configured
for SM Management VID Pass-Through.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

18.1.8 VLAN Membership Tab of the AP
An example of the VLAN Membership tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 81.

Figure 81: VLAN Membership tab of AP, example

You may set the VLAN Membership tab parameter as follows.

VLAN Membership Table Configuration
For each VLAN in which you want the AP to be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then
click the Add Member button. Similarly, for any VLAN in which you want the AP to no
longer be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then click the Remove Member button.

252 Issue 1, May 2010


18.1.9 DiffServe Tab of the AP
An example of the DiffServe tab of the AP is displayed in Figure 82.

Figure 82: DiffServe tab of AP, example

Issue 1, May 2010 253


You may set the following DiffServe tab parameters.

The default priority value for each settable CodePoint is shown in
Figure 115. Priorities of 0 through 3 map to the low-priority channel;
CodePoint 1 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The mappings are the same
through as 802.1p VLAN priorities.
CodePoint 47
Consistent with RFC 2474

◦ CodePoint 0 is predefined to a fixed priority value of 0
(low-priority channel).
CodePoint 49
through ◦ CodePoint 48 is predefined to a fixed priority value of 6
CodePoint 55 (high-priority channel).
(high-priority channel).

CodePoint 57 You cannot change any of these three fixed priority values. Among
through the settable parameters, the priority values (and therefore the
CodePoint 63 handling of packets in the high- or low-priority channel) are set in
the AP for all downlinks within the sector and in the SM for each
uplink. See DSCP Field on Page 90.

The DiffServe tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made on all tabs are recorded in flash

Reboot

implemented.

254 Issue 1, May 2010


18.1.10 Unit Settings Tab of the AP
An example of the Unit Settings tab of the AP is shown in Figure 83.

Figure 83: Unit Settings tab of AP, example

The Unit Settings tab of the AP contains an option for how the AP should react when it
detects a connected override plug. You may set this option as follows.

Set to Factory Defaults Upon Default Plug Detection
If Enabled is checked, then an override/default plug functions as a default plug. When
the module is rebooted with the plug inserted, it can be accessed at the IP address
169.254.1.1 and no password, and all parameter values are reset to defaults.
A subscriber, technician, or other person who gains physical access to the module and
uses an override/default plug cannot see or learn the settings that were previously
configured in it. When the module is later rebooted with no plug inserted, the module
uses the new values for any parameters that were changed and the default values for
any that were not.

If Disabled is checked, then an override/default plug functions as an override plug. When
169.254.1.1 and no password, and all previously configured parameter values remain
and are displayed. A subscriber, technician, or other person who gains physical access
to the module and uses an override/default plug can see and learn the settings. When the
module is later rebooted with no plug inserted, the module uses the new values for any
parameters that were changed and the previous values for any that were not.

See Overriding Forgotten IP Addresses or Passwords on AP, SM, or BH on Page 383.

The Unit Settings tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

Issue 1, May 2010 255


Reboot

implemented.

Undo Unit-Wide Saved Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made in any tab but did not commit by
a reboot of the module are undone.

Set to Factory Defaults
When you click this button, all configurable parameters on all tabs are reset to the factory
settings.

18.2 CONFIGURING AN SM FOR THE DESTINATION
If an ADMINISTRATOR-level password has been set in the SM, you must log into the

18.2.1 General Tab of the SM
An example of a General tab in the SM is displayed in Figure 84.

Figure 84: General tab of SM, example

256 Issue 1, May 2010


In the General tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Link Speeds
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected. The
recommended setting is a single speed selection for all APs, BHs, and SMs in the
operator network.

Ethernet Link Enable/Disable
Specify whether to enable or disable Ethernet/802.3 connectivity on the wired port of
the SM. This parameter has no effect on the wireless link. When you select Enable, this
feature allows traffic on the Ethernet/802.3 port. This is the factory default state of the
port. When you select Disable, this feature prevents traffic on the port. Typical cases
of when you may want to select Disable include:

◦ The subscriber is delinquent with payment(s).
◦ You suspect that the subscriber is sending or flooding undesired broadcast
packets into the network, such as when
− a virus is present in the subscriber's computing device.
− the subscriber's home router is improperly configured.

Region Code
This parameter allows you to set the region in which the radio will operate. When the
appropriate region has been set, the radio automatically implements the applicable
required Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) standard. For further information on DFS,
see Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), this parameter should always be set to
the value that corresponds to the local region.

Webpage Auto Update

network infrastructure. Timeout occurs when the AP encounters no activity with the SM
(whose MAC address is the bridge entry) within the interval that this parameter specifies.
The Bridge Entry Timeout should be a longer period than the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

This parameter governs the timeout interval, even if a router in the system has a longer
timeout interval. The default value of this field is 25 minutes.

Issue 1, May 2010 257


CAUTION!
An inappropriately low Bridge Entry Timeout setting may lead to temporary
loss of communication with some end users.

SM Power Up Mode With No 802.3 Link
This parameter is present in only PMP 100 Series SMs. Specify the default mode in
which this SM will power up when the SM senses no Ethernet link. Select either

◦ Power Up in Aim Mode—the SM boots in an aiming mode. When the SM
senses an Ethernet link, this parameter is automatically reset to Power Up in
Operational Mode. When the module senses no Ethernet link within 15 minutes
after power up, the SM carrier shuts off.
◦ Power Up in Operational Mode—the SM boots in Operational mode. The
module attempts registration. This is the default selection.

2X Rate
This parameter is present in only PMP 100 Series (FSK) SMs. Whatever value that you
set in this parameter is overridden by a lock-down to 1X operation, if that is configured in
the AP. In some cases, disabling this parameter facilitates aiming. Be aware that a lock-
down to 1X in the AP locks down the uplink and downlink between the AP and all SMs in
its sector, and thus would affect traffic and performance across the entire sector. Hence,
a temporary lock-down for aiming is better done in the individual SM. See 2X Operation
on Page 92.

Dynamic Rate Adapt
This parameter is present in only PMP 400 Series (OFDM) SMs. Whatever value that you
set in this parameter is overridden by a lock-down to 1X or 2X operation, if that is
configured in the AP. As with the 2X Rate parameter in a PMP 100 Series SM, a
temporary lock-down to facilitate aiming may be helpful. Be aware that a lock-down to 1X
or 2X in the AP locks down the uplink and downlink between the AP and all SMs in its
sector, and thus would affect traffic and performance across the entire sector. Hence, a
temporary lock-down for aiming is better done in the individual SM. See 2X Operation on
Page 92 and 3X Operation on Page 95.

Frame Timing Pulse Gated
If this SM extends the sync pulse to a BH master or an AP, select either

◦ Enable—If this SM loses sync from the AP, then do not propagate a sync pulse
to the BH timing master or other AP. This setting prevents interference in the
event that the SM loses sync.
◦ Disable—If this SM loses sync from the AP, then propagate the sync pulse to the
BH timing master or other AP.

See Wiring to Extend Network Sync on Page 378.

The General tab also contains the following buttons.

258 Issue 1, May 2010



mode in the remote AP to LLDP Multicast. Set this parameter in the SM to Broadcast.
The SM will pass this address in broadcast mode, and the CMMmicro will pass the
address upward in the network, since it does not discard addresses that it receives in
broadcast mode.

the AP.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 259


18.2.2 NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT Disabled
An example of the NAT tab in an SM with NAT disabled is displayed in Figure 85.

Figure 85: NAT tab of SM with NAT disabled, example

260 Issue 1, May 2010


This implementation is illustrated in Figure 45 on Page 161. In the NAT tab of an SM with
NAT disabled, you may set the following parameters.

NAT Enable/Disable
This parameter enables or disabled the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature for
the SM. NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of an SM from being
seen directly from the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP
address for transport traffic separate from its address for management, terminates
transport traffic, and allows you to assign a range of IP addresses to devices that are
connected to the Ethernet/wired side of the SM. For further information, see Network
Address Translation (NAT) on Page 160 and NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT
Enabled on Page 265.

When NAT is enabled, VLANs are not supported on the wired side of that SM. You can
enable NAT in SMs within a sector where VLAN is enabled in the AP, but this may
constrain network design.

WAN Interface, Connection Type
This parameter is not configurable when NAT is disabled.

WAN Interface, IP Address
This field displays the IP address for the SM. DHCP Server will not automatically assign
this address when NAT is disabled.

WAN Interface, Subnet Mask
This field displays the subnet mask for the SM. DHCP Server will not automatically
assign this address when NAT is disabled.

WAN Interface, Gateway IP Address
This field displays the gateway IP address for the SM. DHCP Server will not automatically
assign this address when NAT is disabled.

WAN Interface, Reply to Ping on WAN Interface

LAN Interface, IP Address

LAN Interface, Subnet Mask

LAN Interface, DMZ Enable

LAN Interface, DMZ IP Address

LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Server Enable/Disable

LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Server Lease Timeout

Issue 1, May 2010 261


LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Start IP

LAN DHCP Server, Number of IPs to Lease

LAN DHCP Server, DNS IP Address

LAN DHCP Server, Preferred DNS IP Address

LAN DHCP Server, Alternate DNS IP Address

Remote Configuration Interface, Interface Enable/Disable

Remote Configuration Interface, Connection Type

Remote Configuration Interface, IP Address

Remote Configuration Interface, Subnet Mask

Remote Configuration Interface, Gateway IP Address

NAT Protocol Parameters, ARP Cache Timeout
If a router upstream has an ARP cache of longer duration (as some use 30 minutes),
enter a value of longer duration than the router ARP cache. The default value of this field
is 20 minutes.

NAT Protocol Parameters, TCP Session Garbage Timeout
Where a large network exists behind the SM, you can set this parameter to lower than
the default value of 1440 minutes (24 hours). This action makes additional resources
available for greater traffic than the default value accommodates.

NAT Protocol Parameters, UDP Session Garbage Timeout
You may adjust this parameter in the range of 1 to 1440 minutes, based on network
performance. The default value of this parameter is 4 minutes.

The NAT tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

262 Issue 1, May 2010


Reboot

implemented.

An example of the IP tab in an SM with NAT disabled is displayed in Figure 86.

Figure 86: IP tab of SM with NAT disabled, example

This implementation is illustrated in Figure 45 on Page 161. In the IP tab of an SM with
NAT disabled, you may set the following parameters.

Enter the non-routable IP address to associate with the Ethernet connection on this SM.


RECOMMENDATION:
about the module.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility
Specify whether the IP address of the SM should be visible to only a device connected to
the SM by Ethernet (Local) or should be visible to the AP as well (Public).

Issue 1, May 2010 263


Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the SM to communicate on the network. The
default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0. See Allocating Subnets on Page 166.

Enter the appropriate gateway for the SM to communicate with the network. The default
gateway is 169.254.0.0.

LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, DHCP state

In this tab, DHCP State is settable only if the Network Accessibility parameter in the IP
tab is set to Public. This parameter is also settable in the NAT tab of the Configuration
web page, but only when NAT is enabled.

If the DHCP state parameter is set to Enabled in the Configuration => IP tab of the SM,
do not check the BootpClient option for Packet Filter Types in its Protocol Filtering tab,
because doing so would block the DHCP request. (Filters apply to all packets that leave
the SM via its RF interface, including those that the SM itself generates.) If you want to
keep DHCP enabled and avoid the blocking scenario, select the Bootp Server option
instead. This will result in responses being appropriately filtered and discarded.

The IP tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

264 Issue 1, May 2010


18.2.3 NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT Enabled
An example of the NAT tab in an SM with NAT enabled is displayed in Figure 87.

Figure 87: NAT tab of SM with NAT enabled, example

Issue 1, May 2010 265


In the NAT tab of an SM with NAT enabled, you may set the following parameters.

NAT Enable/Disable
This parameter enables or disabled the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature for
the SM. NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of an SM from being
seen directly from the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP
address for transport traffic separate from its address for management, terminates
transport traffic, and allows you to assign a range of IP addresses to devices that are
connected to the Ethernet/wired side of the SM. For further information, see Network
Address Translation (NAT) on Page 160 and NAT and IP Tabs of the SM with NAT
Enabled on Page 265.

When NAT is enabled, VLANs are not supported on the wired side of that SM. You can
enable NAT in SMs within a sector where VLAN is enabled in the AP, but this may
constrain network design.

WAN Interface
The WAN interface is the RF-side address for transport traffic.

WAN Interface, Connection Type
This parameter may be set to

◦ Static IP—when this is the selection, the following three parameters
(IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address) must all be properly
populated.
◦ DHCP—when this is the selection, the information from the DHCP server
configures the interface.
◦ PPPoE—when this is the selection, the information from the PPPoE server

WAN Interface, IP Address
If Static IP is set as the Connection Type of the WAN interface, then this parameter
configures the IP address of the SM for RF transport traffic.

WAN Interface, Subnet Mask
configures the subnet mask of the SM for RF transport traffic.

WAN Interface, Gateway IP Address
configures the gateway IP address for the SM for RF transport traffic.

WAN Interface, Reply to Ping on WAN Interface
By default, the radio interface does not respond to pings. If you use a management
system (such as Prizm or WM) that will occasionally ping the SM, set this parameter to
Enabled.

LAN Interface
The LAN interface is both the management access through the Ethernet port and the
Ethernet-side address for transport traffic. When NAT is enabled, this interface is
redundantly shown as the NAT Network Interface Configuration on the IP tab of the
Configuration web page in the SM.

266 Issue 1, May 2010


LAN Interface, IP Address
Assign an IP address for SM management through Ethernet access to the SM. This
address becomes the base for the range of DHCP-assigned addresses.

LAN Interface, Subnet Mask
Assign a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 or a more restrictive subnet mask. Set only the
last byte of this subnet mask. Each of the first three bytes is permanently set to 255.

LAN Interface, DMZ Enable
Either enable or disable DMZ for this SM. See DMZ on Page 160.

LAN Interface, DMZ IP Address
If you enable DMZ in the parameter above, set the last byte of the DMZ host IP address
to use for this SM when DMZ is enabled. Only one such address is allowed. The first
three bytes are identical to those of the NAT private IP address. Ensure that the device
that should receive network traffic behind this SM is assigned this address. The system
provides a warning if you enter an address within the range that DHCP can assign.

LAN DHCP Server
This is the server (in the SM) that provides an IP address to the device connected to the
Ethernet port of the SM.

LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Server Enable/Disable
Select either

◦ Enabled to
− allow this SM to assign IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway IP
addresses to attached devices.
− assign a start address for DHCP.
− designate how many IP addresses may be temporarily used (leased).
◦ Disabled to disallow the SM to assign addresses to attached devices.

The implementation of NAT with DHCP server is illustrated in Figure 48 on Page 50.
The implementation of NAT with DHCP client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type
of the WAN interface) and DHCP server is illustrated in Figure 46 on Page 162.
The implementation of NAT without DHCP is illustrated in Figure 49 on Page 165.

LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Server Lease Timeout
Based on network performance, enter the number of days between when the DHCP
server assigns an IP address and when that address expires. The range of values for this
parameter is 1 to 30 days. The default value is 30 days.

LAN DHCP Server, DHCP Start IP
If you will be enabling DHCP Server below, set the last byte of the starting IP address
that the DHCP server will assign. The first three bytes are identical to those of the NAT
private IP address.

LAN DHCP Server, Number of IPs to Lease
Enter how many IP addresses the DHCP server is allowed to assign. The default value is
50 addresses.

Issue 1, May 2010 267


LAN DHCP Server, DNS IP Address
Select either

◦ Obtain Automatically to allow the system to set the IP address of the DNS
server.
◦ Set Manually to enable yourself to set both a preferred and an alternate DNS IP
address.

LAN DHCP Server, Preferred DNS IP Address
Enter the preferred DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is set
to Set Manually.

LAN DHCP Server, Alternate DNS IP Address
Enter the DNS IP address to use when the DNS IP Address parameter is set to Set
Manually and no response is received from the preferred DNS IP address.

If you want over-the-air management capability for the SM, select Enabled. If you want to
limit management of the SM to its Ethernet interface, select Disabled.

Remote Configuration Interface
The Remote Configuration interface is the RF-side address for management by an EMS
or NMS (Prizm or WM, for example).

When this interface is Disabled, the SM is not directly accessible by IP address, and
management access is only through either

◦ the LAN (Ethernet) interface
◦ a link from an AP web page into the WAN (RF-side) interface.
When this interface is Enabled, you can configure management access through either

◦ a Static IP address
◦ an IP address that DHCP provides for the WAN interface.

Remote Configuration Interface, Connection Type
This parameter may be set to

◦ Static IP—when this is the selection, the following three parameters
(IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP Address) must all be properly
populated.
◦ DHCP—when this is the selection, the information from the DHCP server

Remote Configuration Interface, IP Address
configures the IP address of the SM for RF management traffic.

268 Issue 1, May 2010


Remote Configuration Interface, Subnet Mask
configures the subnet mask of the SM for RF management traffic.

Remote Configuration Interface, Gateway IP Address
configures the gateway IP address for the SM for RF management traffic.

RECOMMENDATION:
about the module.

NAT Protocol Parameters, ARP Cache Timeout
If a router upstream has an ARP cache of longer duration (as some use 30 minutes),
enter a value of longer duration than the router ARP cache. The default value of this field
is 20 minutes.

NAT Protocol Parameters, TCP Session Garbage Timeout
Where a large network exists behind the SM, you can set this parameter to lower than
the default value of 1440 minutes (24 hours). This action makes additional resources
available for greater traffic than the default value accommodates. The default value of
this parameter is 120 minutes.

NAT Protocol Parameters, UDP Session Garbage Timeout
You may adjust this parameter in the range of 1 to 1440 minutes, based on network
performance. The default value of this parameter is 4 minutes.

The NAT tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

An example of the IP tab in an SM with NAT enabled is displayed in Figure 88.

Issue 1, May 2010 269


Figure 88: IP tab of SM with NAT enabled, example

In the IP tab of an SM with NAT enabled, you may set the following parameters.

NAT Network Interface Configuration, IP Address
Assign an IP address for SM management through Ethernet access to the SM. Set only
the first three bytes. The last byte is permanently set to 1. This address becomes the
base for the range of DHCP-assigned addresses.

NAT Network Interface Configuration, Subnet Mask
Assign a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 or a more restrictive subnet mask. Set only the
last byte of this subnet mask. Each of the first three bytes is permanently set to 255.

The IP tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

An example of the IP tab in an SM with NAT enabled is displayed in Figure 88.

270 Issue 1, May 2010


18.2.4 Radio Tab of the SM
An example of the Radio tab in the SM is displayed in Figure 89.

Figure 89: Radio tab of SM, example

In the Radio tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List
Check any frequency that you want the SM to scan for AP transmissions. The frequency
band of the SM affects what channels you should select.

IMPORTANT!
In the 2.4-GHz frequency band, the SM can register to an AP that transmits on a
frequency 2.5 MHz higher than the frequency that the SM receiver locks when
the scan terminates as successful. This establishes a poor-quality link. To
prevent this, select frequencies that are at least 5 MHz apart.

In a 2.4-GHz SM, this parameter displays all available channels, but has only three
recommended channels selected by default. See 2.4-GHz AP Cluster Recommended
Channels on Page 139.

Issue 1, May 2010 271


In a 5.2- or 5.4-GHz SM, this parameter displays only ISM frequencies. In a 5.7-GHz SM,
this parameter displays both ISM and U-NII frequencies. If you select all frequencies that
are listed in this field (default selections), then the SM scans for a signal on any channel.
If you select only one, then the SM limits the scan to that channel. Since the frequencies
that this parameter offers for each of these two bands are 5 MHz apart, a scan of all
channels does not risk establishment of a poor-quality link as in the 2.4-GHz band.

A list of channels in the band is provided in Considering Frequency Band Alternatives on
Page 138.


Color Code
Color code allows you to force the SM to register to only a specific AP, even where the
SM can communicate with multiple APs. For registration to occur, the color code of the
SM and the AP must match. Specify a value from 0 to 254.

Color code is not a security feature. Instead, color code is a management feature,
typically for assigning each sector a different color code. The default setting for the color
code value is 0. This value matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

RECOMMENDATION:
module.

Power Save Mode
This mode significantly economizes on power consumption, and Enabled is the default
setting. Disable this feature only under guidance from technical support.

External Filters Delay
This parameter is present in only 900-MHz modules and can have effect in only those
that have interference mitigation filter(s). If this value is present, leave it set to 0,
regardless of whether the SM has an interference mitigation filter.


have adjustable power.

272 Issue 1, May 2010



regulations.
factory defaults.


In 5.4-GHz OFDM links, the operator sets the Transmitter Output Power parameter in
the AP, and the AP then manages the transmitter output power of the SM appropriately.

The Radio tab also contains the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 273


18.2.5 SNMP Tab of the SM
An example of the SNMP tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 90.

Figure 90: SNMP tab of SM, example

In the SNMP tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.


274 Issue 1, May 2010



access.


Specify the addresses that are allowed to send SNMP requests to this SM. Prizm or
the NMS has an address that is among these addresses (this subnet). You must enter
both


For example

192.168.102.0 to 192.168.102.254 can send SNMP requests to the SM,

The default treatment is to allow all networks access (set to 0). For more information on
CIDR, execute an Internet search on “Classless Interdomain Routing.” You are allowed to

RECOMMENDATION:
The subscriber can access the SM by changing the subscriber device to the
accessing subnet. This hazard exists because the Community String and
Accessing Subnet are both visible parameters. To avoid this hazard, configure
the SM to filter (block) SNMP requests. See Filtering Protocols and Ports on
Page 385.

Issue 1, May 2010 275


Specify ten or fewer IP addresses (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) to which trap information should be
sent. Trap information informs Prizm or an NMS that something has occurred. For
example, trap information is sent

◦ when Prizm or an NMS attempts to access agent information but either

Read Permissions
Select Read Only if you wish to disallow Prizm or NMS SNMP access to configurable
parameters and read-only fields of the SM.

Site Name
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer size for
this field is 128 characters.

Site Contact
sysContact SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer size
for this field is 128 characters.

Site Location
the sysLocation SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer


Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made on the Configuration page are
recorded in flash memory. However, these changes do not apply until the next reboot of
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

276 Issue 1, May 2010


18.2.6 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the SM
An example of the Quality of Service (QoS) tab in the SM is displayed in Figure 91.

Figure 91: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of SM, example

In the Quality of Service (QoS) tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Specify the rate that this SM is replenished with credits for transmission. This default
imposes no restriction on the uplink. See


Specify the rate at which the AP should be replenished with credits (tokens) for
transmission to this SM. This default imposes no restriction on the uplink. See


Issue 1, May 2010 277


Specify the maximum amount of data to allow this SM to transmit before being recharged
at the Sustained Uplink Data Rate with credits to transmit more. See


Specify the maximum amount of data to allow the AP to transmit to this SM before the AP
is replenished at the Sustained Downlink Data Rate with transmission credits. See


See


See


Hi Priority Channel
See

◦ High-priority Bandwidth on Page 89

Hi Priority Uplink CIR
See


278 Issue 1, May 2010


Hi Priority Downlink CIR
See


The Quality of Service (QoS) tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made in this tab are recorded in flash

Reboot

implemented.

18.2.7 Security Tab of the SM
An example of the Security tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 92.

Figure 92: Security tab of SM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 279


In the Security tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Authentication Key
Only if the AP to which this SM will register requires authentication, specify the key that
the SM should use when authenticating. For alpha characters in this hex key, use only
upper case.

Select Key
The Use Default Key selection specifies the predetermined key for authentication in
BAM or Prizm. See Authentication Manager Capability on Page 391.

The Use Key above selection specifies the 32-digit hexadecimal key that is permanently
stored on both the SM and the BAM or Prizm database.

NOTE:
The SM and BAM or Prizm pad the key of any length by the addition of leading
zeroes, and if the entered keys match, authentication attempts succeed.
However, Motorola recommends that you enter 32 characters to achieve the
maximal security from this feature.

access to the SM.

Ethernet Access Control
If you want to prevent any device that is connected to the Ethernet port of the SM from
accessing the management interface of the SM, select Ethernet Access Disabled. This
selection disables access through this port to via http (the GUI), SNMP, telnet, ftp, and
tftp. With this selection, management access is available through only the RF interface
via either an IP address (if Network Accessibility is set to Public on the SM) or the
Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab of the AP.

NOTE:
This setting does not prevent a device connected to the Ethernet port from
accessing the management interface of other SMs in the network. To prevent
this, use the IP Access Filtering Enabled selection in the IP Access Control
parameter of the SMs in the network. See IP Access Control below.

If you want to allow management access through the Ethernet port, select
Ethernet Access Enabled. This is the factory default setting for this parameter.

280 Issue 1, May 2010


IP Access Control
You can permit access to the SM from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled) or
limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP Access

access permitted to the SM from any IP address. You may populate as many as all three.


The Security tab of the SM also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 281


18.2.8 VLAN Tab of the SM
An example of the VLAN tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 93.

Figure 93: VLAN tab of SM, example

In the VLAN tab of an SM, you may set the following parameters.

Dynamic Learning
Specify whether the SM should (Enable) or should not (Disable) add the VIDs of
upstream frames (that enter the SM through the wired Ethernet interface) to the VID
table. The default value is Enable.

Allow Frame Types
Select the type of arriving frames that the SM should tag, using the VID that is stored in
the Untagged Ingress VID parameter. The default value is All Frames.

VLAN Aging Timeout
Specify how long the SM should keep dynamically learned VIDs. The range of values is 5
to 1440 (minutes). The default value is 25 (minutes).

282 Issue 1, May 2010


NOTE:
VIDs that you enter for the Untagged Ingress VID and Management VID
parameters do not time out.

Untagged Ingress VID
Enter the VID that the SM(s) should use to tag frames that arrive at the SM(s) untagged.
The range of values is 1 to 4095. The default value is 1.

Management VID
Enter the VID that the SM should share with the AP. The range of values is 1 to 4095.
The default value is 1.

SM Management VID Pass-through
Specify whether to allow the SM (Enable) or the AP (Disable) to control the VLAN
settings of this SM. The default value is Enable.

When VLAN is enabled in the AP to whom this SM is registered, the Active Configuration
block provides the following details as read-only information in this tab. In the Motorola
fixed wireless broadband IP network, each device of any type is automatically a
permanent member of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of devices that have VLAN
enabled with those that do not.

Some switches refer to this parameter as the Port VLAN ID. This is the VID that the SM
will use for tagging frames that it receives as untagged.

Next, the following fields simply summarize how the VLAN features are currently
configured:

Management VID

SM Management VID Pass-Through

Dynamic Ageing Timeout
This is the value of the VLAN Aging Timeout parameter configured above.

Allow Learning
Yes is displayed if the value of the Dynamic Learning parameter above is Enabled.
No is displayed if the value of Dynamic Learning is Disabled.

Allow Frame Type
This displays the selection that was made from the drop-down list at the
Allow Frame Types parameter above.

Issue 1, May 2010 283


Current VID Member Set, VID Number
This column lists the ID numbers of the VLANs in which this module is a member,
whether through assignment or through dynamic learning.

Current VID Member Set, Type
For each VID number in the first column, the entry in this column correlates the way in
which the module became and continues to be a member:

◦ Permanent—This indicates that the module was assigned the VID number
through direct configuration by the operator.
◦ Dynamic—This indicates that the module adopted the VID number through
enabled dynamic learning, when a tagged packet from an SM behind it in the
network, or from a customer equipment that is behind the SM in this case, was
read.

Current VID Member Set, Age
For each VID number in the first column of the table, the entry in this column reflects
whether or when the VID number will time out:

◦ for Permanent type—the number will never time out, and this is indicated by the
digit 0.
◦ for Dynamic type—the Age reflects what is configured in the VLAN Aging
Timeout parameter in the Configuration => VLAN tab of the AP or reflects a
fewer number of minutes that represents the difference between what was
configured and what has elapsed since the VID was learned. Each minute, the
Age decreases by one until, at zero, the AP deletes the learned VID, but can it
again from packets sent by elements that are beneath it in the network.

IMPORTANT!
Values in this Active Configuration block can differ from attempted values in
configurations:
◦ A VLAN profile administered by the BAM subsystem in Prizm is
capable of overriding any configured VLAN value, if the
Configuration Source parameter in the AP is set to BAM.
◦ The AP can override the value that the SM has configured for
SM Management VID Pass-Through.

The VLAN tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

284 Issue 1, May 2010


18.2.9 VLAN Membership Tab of the SM
An example of the VLAN Membership tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 94.

Figure 94: VLAN Membership tab of SM, example

In the VLAN Membership tab, you may set the following parameter.

VLAN Membership Table Configuration
For each VLAN in which you want the AP to be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then
click the Add Member button. Similarly, for any VLAN in which you want the AP to no
longer be a member, enter the VLAN ID and then click the Remove Member button.

Issue 1, May 2010 285


18.2.10 DiffServe Tab of the SM
An example of the DiffServe tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 95.

Figure 95: DiffServe tab of SM, example

In the DiffServe tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

CodePoint 1 Figure 115. Priorities of 0 through 3 map to the low-priority channel;
through 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The mappings are the same
CodePoint 47 as 802.1p VLAN priorities.


CodePoint 49 (low-priority channel).
through
CodePoint 55
CodePoint 57
You cannot change any of these three fixed priority values. Among
through
the settable parameters, the priority values (and therefore the
CodePoint 63
handling of packets in the high- or low-priority channel) are set in

286 Issue 1, May 2010


The DiffServe tab of the SM also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 287


18.2.11 Protocol Filtering Tab of the SM
An example of the Protocol Filtering tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 96.

Figure 96: Protocol Filtering tab of SM, example

In the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Packet Filter Types
For any box selected, the Protocol and Port Filtering feature blocks the associated
protocol type. Examples are provided in Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled on
Page 385.

288 Issue 1, May 2010


To filter packets in any of the user-defined ports, you must do all of the following:

◦ Check the box for User Defined Port n (See Below) in the Packet Filter Types
section of this tab.
◦ In the User Defined Port Filtering Configuration section of this tab, both
− provide a port number at Port #n.
− check TCP, UDP, or both.

If the DHCP state parameter is set to Enabled in the Configuration => IP tab of the SM,
do not check the Bootp Client option for Packet Filter Types in its Protocol Filtering tab,
because doing so would block the DHCP request. (Filters apply to all packets that leave
the SM via its RF interface, including those that the SM itself generates.) If you want to
keep DHCP enabled and avoid the blocking scenario, select the Bootp Server option
instead. This will result in responses being appropriately filtered and discarded.

User Defined Port Filtering Configuration
You can specify ports for which to block subscriber access, regardless of whether NAT is
enabled. For more information, see Filtering Protocols and Ports on Page 385.

18.2.12 PPPoE Tab of the SM
An example of the PPPoE tab of the SM is displayed in Figure 97.

Figure 97: PPPoE tab of SM, example

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) is a protocol that encapsulates PPP
frames inside Ethernet frames (at Ethernet speeds). Benefits to the network operator may
include

◦ Access control
◦ Service monitoring

Issue 1, May 2010 289


◦ Generation of statistics about activities of the customer (see Accessing PPPoE
Statistics About Customer Activities (SM) on Page 435)
◦ Re-use of infrastructure and operational practices by operators who already use
PPP for other networks

18.2.13 NAT Port Mapping Tab of the SM
An example of the NAT Port Mapping tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 98.

Figure 98: NAT Port Mapping tab of SM, example

In the NAT Port Mapping tab of the SM, you may set the following parameters.

Port Map 1 to 10
Separate parameters allow you to distinguish NAT ports from each other by assigning a
unique combination of port number, protocol for traffic through the port, and IP address
for access to the port.

290 Issue 1, May 2010


18.2.14 Unit Settings Tab of the SM
An example of the Unit Settings tab in an SM is displayed in Figure 99.

Figure 99: Unit Settings tab of SM, example

The Unit Settings tab of the SM contains an option for how the SM should react when it

any that were not.



LED Panel Mode
Optionally select Revised Mode for simpler use of the LEDs during alignment of the SM.
See Diagnostic LEDs on Page 183.

Issue 1, May 2010 291



Save Changes


settings.

Reboot

implemented.

18.3 SETTING THE CONFIGURATION SOURCE
The AP includes a Configuration Source parameter, which sets where SMs that register
to the AP are controlled for MIR, VLAN, the high-priority channel, and CIR as follows.
The Configuration Source parameter affects the source of

◦ all MIR settings: ◦ the Hi Priority Channel setting
− Sustained Uplink Data Rate ◦ all CIR settings
− Uplink Burst Allocation − Low Priority Uplink CIR
− Sustained Downlink Data Rate − Low Priority Downlink CIR
− Downlink Burst Allocation − Hi Priority Uplink CIR
◦ all SM VLAN settings: − Hi Priority Downlink CIR
− Dynamic Learning
− Allow Only Tagged Frames
− VLAN Ageing Timeout
− Untagged Ingress VID
− Management VID
− VLAN Membership

Most operators whose plans are typical should consult Table 52.

292 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 52: Recommended combined settings for typical operations

Most operators who should set this in this web
use… parameter… page/tab… in the AP to…
Authentication Configuration/ Authentication
Mode Security Disabled
no BAM server
Configuration Configuration/
SM
Source General
Authentication Configuration/ Authentication
Mode Security Required
Prizm with BAM server
Configuration Configuration/ Authentication
Source General Server

Operators whose plans are atypical should consider the results that are described in
Table 53 and Table 54. For any SM whose Authentication Mode parameter is set to
Authentication Required, the listed settings are derived as shown in Table 53.

Table 53: Where feature values are obtained for an SM with authentication required

Configuration Values are obtained from
Source Setting High Priority Channel
in the AP MIR Values VLAN Values CIR Values
State
Authentication BAM BAM BAM BAM
Server
SM SM SM SM SM
Authentication BAM BAM, then SM BAM, then SM BAM, then SM
Server+SM

NOTES:
HPC represents the Hi Priority Channel (enable or disable).
Where BAM, then SM is the indication, parameters for which BAM does not send values
are obtained from the SM. This is the case where the BAM server is operating on a BAM
release that did not support the feature. This is also the case where the feature enable/disable
flag in BAM is set to disabled. The values are those previously set or, if none ever were, then
the default values.
Where BAM is the indication, values in the SM are disregarded.
Where SM is the indication, values that BAM sends for the SM are disregarded.
The high-priority channel is unavailable to Series P7 and P8 SMs.

For any SM whose Authentication Mode parameter is not set to Authentication
Required, the listed settings are derived as shown in Table 54.

Issue 1, May 2010 293


Table 54: Where feature values are obtained for an SM with authentication disabled

Configuration Values are obtained from
Source Setting High Priority Channel
in the AP MIR Values VLAN Values CIR Values
State
Authentication AP AP AP AP
Server
SM SM SM SM SM
Authentication SM SM SM SM
Server+SM

BAM Release 2.0 sends only MIR values. BAM Release 2.1 and Prizm Release 2.0
and 2.1 send VLAN and high-priority channel values as well.

For the case where the Configuration Source parameter in the AP is set to
Authentication Server, the SM stores a value for the Dynamic Learning VLAN parameter
that differs from its factory default. When Prizm does not send VLAN values (because
VLAN Enable is set to No in Prizm), the SM

◦ uses this stored Disable value for Dynamic Learning.
◦ shows the following in the VLAN Configuration web page:
− either Enable or Disable as the value of the Dynamic Learning parameter.
− Allow Learning : No under Active Configuration.

For the case where the Configuration Source parameter in the AP is set to
Authentication Server+SM, and Prizm does not send VLAN values, the SM

◦ uses the configured value in the SM for Dynamic Learning. If the SM is set to
factory defaults, then this value is Enable.
◦ shows under Active Configuration the result of the configured value in the SM.
For example, if the SM is set to factory defaults, then the VLAN Configuration
page shows Allow Learning : Yes.

This selection (Authentication Server+SM) is not recommended where Prizm manages
the VLAN feature in SMs.

18.4 CONFIGURING A BH TIMING MASTER FOR THE DESTINATION

NOTE:
The PTP 400 and PTP 600 series bridges (previously known as 30/60 Mbps and
150/300 Mbps Backhauls) are described in their own dedicated user guides. See
Products Not Covered by This User Guide on Page 34.

If an ADMINISTRATOR-level password has been set in the BHM, you must log into the

294 Issue 1, May 2010


18.4.1 General Tab of the BHM
An example of the General tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 100.

Figure 100: General tab of BHM, example

In the General tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

Timing Mode
Select Timing Master. This BH will provide sync for the link. Whenever you toggle this
parameter to Timing Master from Timing Slave, you should also do the following:

1. Make no other changes in this or any other interface page.
2. Save this change of timing mode.
3. Reboot the BH.
RESULT: The set of interface web pages that is unique to a BHM is made available.

Issue 1, May 2010 295


Link Speed
connection. The default for this parameter is that all speeds are selected. The
recommended setting is a single speed selection for all APs, BHs, and SMs in
the operator network.

Sync Input
Specify the type of synchronization for this BH timing master to use.

◦ Select Sync to Received Signal (Power Port) to set this BHM to receive sync
from a connected CMMmicro or CMM4.
◦ Select Sync to Received Signal (Timing Port) to set this BHM to receive sync
from a connected CMM2, an AP in the cluster, an SM, or a BH timing slave.
◦ Select Generate Sync Signal where the BHM does not receive sync, and no AP
or other BHM is active within the link range.

Region Code
regions are


Page 133.


Webpage Auto Update

network infrastructure. The Bridge Entry Timeout should be a longer period than the ARP
(Address Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

CAUTION!

296 Issue 1, May 2010


Bridging Functionality
Select whether you want bridge table filtering active (Enable) or not (Disable) on this
BHM. Selecting Disable allows you to use redundant BHs without causing network
addressing problems. Through a spanning tree protocol, this reduces the convergence
time from 25 minutes to mere seconds. However, you should disable bridge table filtering
as only a deliberate part of your overall network design. Otherwise, disabling it allows
unwanted traffic across the wireless interface.

Update Application Address
For capabilities in future software releases, you can enter the address of the server to
access for software updates on this BHM.

2X Rate
See 2X Operation on Page 92.

Prioritize TCP ACK
To reduce the likelihood of TCP acknowledgement packets being dropped, set this
parameter to Enabled. This can improve throughput that the end user perceives during
transient periods of congestion on the link that is carrying acknowledgements. See AP-
SM Links on Page 101.

The General tab of the BHM also provides the following buttons.


mode in the remote AP to LLDP Multicast. Set this parameter in the BHM to Broadcast.
broadcast mode.

the AP.

Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 297


18.4.2 IP Tab of the BHM
An example of an IP tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 101.

Figure 101: IP tab of BHM, example

You may set the following IP Configuration page parameters.

Enter the non-routable IP address to be associated with the Ethernet connection on this
module. (The default IP address from the factory is 169.254.1.1.) If you set and then
forget this parameter, then you must both


RECOMMENDATION:
about the module.

Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the BHM to communicate on the network. The

Enter the appropriate gateway for the BHM to communicate with the network. The default
gateway is 169.254.0.0.

298 Issue 1, May 2010



LAN2 Network Interface Configuration (RF Private Interface), IP Address
Enter the IP address to be associated with this BHM for over-the-air access.

The IP tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
When you click this button, any changes that you made on the IP Configuration page are
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.4.3 Radio Tab of the BHM
An example of the Radio tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 102.

Figure 102: Radio tab of BHM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 299


In the Radio tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

Radio Frequency Carrier
Specify the frequency for the BHM to transmit. The default for this parameter is None.
In a 5.7-GHz BHM, this parameter displays both ISM and U-NII frequencies. In a 5.2-GHz
BHM, this parameter displays only ISM frequencies. For a list of channels in the band,
see Considering Frequency Band Alternatives on Page 138.



From the drop-down list, select the frequency that the BHM should switch to if it detects a
radar signature on the frequency configured in the Radio Frequency Carrier parameter.
See Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

From the drop-down list, select the frequency that the BHM should switch to if it detects a
radar signature on the frequency configured in the Alternate Frequency Carrier 1
parameter. See Radar Signature Detection and Shutdown on Page 133.

Color Code
Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the BHM and
the BHS must match. The default setting for the color code value is 0. This value
matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

RECOMMENDATION:
module.

Power Save Mode
Select either

◦ Enabled (the default), to reduce module power consumption by approximately
10% without affecting the transmitter output power. This is the recommended
setting.
◦ Disabled, to continue normal power consumption, but only under guidance from
technical support.

Sector ID
You can optionally enter an identifier to distinguish this link.

300 Issue 1, May 2010


Downlink Data
The operator specifies the percentage of the aggregate (uplink and downlink total)
throughput that is needed for the downlink. The default for this parameter is 50%.

Schedule Whitening
Select either

◦ Enable, to spread the transmitted signal power to avoid peaks that modules with
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) configured might interpret as radar. This is
the recommended setting.
◦ Disable, to allow peaks in transmitted signal power.

PTP 200 Series (OFDM) BHMs do not have this parameter.

External Antenna Gain



Table 55: Recommended External Antenna Gain values for BHM

Recommended
Module Type
Setting
PTP 100 with 9 dB Canopy LENS 9
PTP 100 with standard 18 dB reflector 18
PTP 100 connectorized with 15.5 dBi antenna
15
and 0.5 dB cable loss

present in only radios that support DFS.

Transmit Frame Spreading
If you select Enable, then a BHS between two BHMs can register in the assigned BHM
(not the other BHM). Motorola strongly recommends that you select this option. With this
selection, the BHM does not transmit a beacon in each frame, but rather transmits a
beacon in only pseudo-random frames in which the BHS expects the beacon. This allows
multiple BHMs to send beacons to multiple BHSs in the same range without interference.

Issue 1, May 2010 301



◦ 5.7-GHz modules are available as connectorized radios, which require the
operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance.
have adjustable power. In the PTP54200 OFDM BHM, transmitter output power
is settable in the range of −30 to 15 dBm. However, with only the integrated
antenna, where regulation8 requires that EIRP is not greater than 27 dBm,
compliance requires that the transmitter output power is set to 10 dBm or less.
With a 12 dBi external antenna on the connectorized version of this BHM, the full
range (up to 15 dBm) is acceptable.


regulations.
factory defaults.



Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

8
This is the case in most regions, including the U.S.A., Europe, and Canada.

302 Issue 1, May 2010


18.4.4 SNMP Tab of the BHM
An example of the SNMP tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 103.

Figure 103: SNMP tab of BHM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 303


In the SNMP tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.



access.


Specify the addresses that are allowed to send SNMP requests to this BHM. Prizm or
both


For example

192.168.102.0 to 192.168.102.254 can send SNMP requests to the BHM,

NOTE:
For more information on CIDR, execute an Internet search on “Classless
Interdomain Routing.”

The default treatment is to allow all networks access. You are allowed to specify as many
as 10 different accessing IP address, subnet mask combinations.

304 Issue 1, May 2010




Trap Enable
Select either Sync Status or Session Status to enable SNMP traps. If you select
neither, then traps are disabled.

Read Permissions
Select Read Only if you wish to disallow any parameter changes by Prizm or an NMS.

Site Name
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an NMS. The buffer size for this field
is 128 characters.

Site Contact
sysContact SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an NMS. The buffer size for this
field is 128 characters.

Site Location
the sysLocation SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by an NMS. The buffer size for


Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 305


18.4.5 Security Tab of the BHM
An example of the Security tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 104.

Figure 104: Security tab of BHM, example

In the Security tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

Authentication Mode
Specify whether the BHM should require the BHS to authenticate.

306 Issue 1, May 2010


Authentication Key
Only if you set the BHM in the previous parameter to require authentication, specify the
key that the BHS should use when authenticating.

Encryption
Specify the type of air link security to apply to this BHM:

◦ Encryption Disabled provides no encryption on the air link. This is the default
mode.
◦ Encryption Enabled provides encryption, using a factory-programmed secret
key that is unique for each module.

NOTE:
In any BH link where encryption is enabled, the BHS briefly drops registration
and re-registers in the BHM every 24 hours to change the encryption key.

24 Hour Encryption Refresh
A BHM that has encryption enabled forces its BHS to re-register once every 24 hours,
during which the BHM refreshes the encryption key. This provides a level of security, but
results in a brief but daily downtime. Since the refresh occurs in 24 hour increments that
begin when the link is established, the only way to set a favorable the time of day
(for example, 2:00 AM) for the key refresh is to reboot either the BHM or BHS at the
favorable time.

When this feature is disabled, the key is refreshed upon only other re-registration events,
such as a reboot. The default status of this feature is Enable.

The algorithm used in Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption-capable radios is
certified by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) to meet
government Federal Information Processing Standard-197 (FIPS-197) for ensuring
secure data communication. Refreshing the key at 24-hour intervals is not needed for
AES radios to meet FIPS 197, but provides an level of security above the algorithm itself.

BHS Display of BHM Evaluation Data
You can use this field to suppress the display of data (Disable Display) about this BHM
on the BHM Evaluation tab of the Tools page in the BHS.

access to the BHM.

IP Access Control
You can permit access to the BHM from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP Access

Issue 1, May 2010 307


access permitted to the BHM from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
three.


The Security tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.4.6 VLAN tab of the BHM
An example of the VLAN tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 105.

Figure 105: VLAN tab of BHM, example

308 Issue 1, May 2010


In the VLAN tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

VLAN
Set the VLAN feature to Enabled or Disabled. When the feature is disabled, the text box
for the following parameter is inactive. When the Management VID is enabled by this
parameter, the module is manageable through only packets that are tagged with the VID
configured in that parameter. These parameters have no bearing on tagging in non-
management traffic.

By default, VLAN is Enabled in backhaul modules. With this feature enabled, the
backhaul becomes a permanent member of any VLAN VID that it reads in packets that it
receives. When the backhaul reboots, it loses these memberships, but begins again to
freely adopt memberships in the VIDs that will be permanent until the next reboot.

Management VID
The range of values is 1 to 4094. The default value is 1. This text box is inactive if VLAN
is set to Disabled. In the Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP network, each device of
any type is automatically a permanent member of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of
devices that have VLAN enabled with those that do not.

The Active Configuration block provides the following details as read-only information in
this tab.

In a backhaul module, this value will always be 1. This facilitates deployment of devices
that have VLAN enabled with those that do not.

VID Number

Type
In a backhaul module, this value will always be Permanent, reflective of the fact that the
backhaul is not capable of deleting any VID membership, regardless of whether it was
learned or set.

Age
In a backhaul module, this value will always be 0, reflective of the fact that the backhaul
is not capable of deleting any VID membership, regardless of whether it was learned or
set.


Save Changes
the module.

Issue 1, May 2010 309


Reboot

implemented.

18.4.7 DiffServe Tab of the BHM
An example of the DiffServe tab in a BHM is displayed in Figure 106.

Figure 106: DiffServe tab of BHM, example

310 Issue 1, May 2010


In the DiffServe tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

CodePoint 47

CodePoint 49


The DiffServe tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.4.8 Unit Settings Tab of the BHM
An example of the Unit Settings tab of the BHM is displayed in Figure 107.

Figure 107: Unit Settings tab of BHM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 311


The Unit Settings tab of the BHM contains an option for how the BHM should react when
it detects a connected override plug. You may set this option as follows.

any that were not.




Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.5 CONFIGURING A BH TIMING SLAVE FOR THE DESTINATION
If an ADMINISTRATOR-level password has been set in the BHS, you must log into the

18.5.1 General Tab of the BHS
An example of the General tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 108.

312 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 108: General tab of BHS, example

In the General tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.

Timing Mode
Select Timing Slave. This BH will receive sync from another source. Whenever you
toggle this parameter to Timing Slave from Timing Master, you should also do the
following:

1. Make no other changes in this or any other interface page.
2. Save this change of timing mode.
3. Reboot the BH.
RESULT: The set of interface web pages that is unique to a BHS is made available.

NOTE:
In a BHS that cannot be converted to a BHM, this parameter is not present.

Issue 1, May 2010 313


Link Speeds
Specify the type of link speed for the Ethernet connection. The default for this parameter
is that all speeds are selected. The recommended setting is a single speed selection for
all APs, BHs, and SMs in the operator network.

Region Code
regions are


Page 133.

configure some other region-sensitive feature(s), you should always set the value that
corresponds to the local region.

Webpage Auto Update

network infrastructure. Timeout occurs when the BHM encounters no activity with the
BHS (whose MAC address is the bridge entry) within the interval that this parameter
specifies. The Bridge Entry Timeout should be a longer period than the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

This parameter governs the timeout interval, even if a router in the system has a longer
timeout interval. The default value of this field is 25 minutes.

CAUTION!

314 Issue 1, May 2010


Bridging Functionality
Select whether you want bridge table filtering active (Enable) or not (Disable) on this
BHS. Selecting Disable allows you to use redundant BHs without causing network
addressing problems. Through a spanning tree protocol, this reduces the convergence
time from 25 minutes to mere seconds. However, you should disable bridge table filtering
as only a deliberate part of your overall network design. Otherwise, disabling it allows
unwanted traffic across the wireless interface.

Power Up Mode With No 802.3 Link
Specify the default mode in which this BHS will power up when it senses no Ethernet link.
Select either

◦ Power Up in Aim Mode—the BHS boots in an aiming mode. When the BHS
senses an Ethernet link, this parameter is automatically reset to Power Up in
Operational Mode. When the BHS senses no Ethernet link within 15 minutes
after power up, the BHS carrier shuts off.
◦ Power Up in Operational Mode—the BHS boots in Operational mode and
attempts registration. This is the default selection.

2X Rate
See 2X Operation on Page 92.

Frame Timing Pulse Gated
If this BHS extends the sync pulse to a BHM or an AP behind it, select either

◦ Enable—If this BHS loses sync, then do not propagate a sync pulse to the BHM
or AP. This setting prevents interference in the event that the BHS loses sync.
◦ Disable—If this BHS loses sync, then propagate the sync pulse anyway to the
BHM or AP.

See Wiring to Extend Network Sync on Page 378.

The General tab also provides the following buttons.


mode in the remote AP to LLDP Multicast. Set this parameter in the BHS to Broadcast.
broadcast mode.

the AP.

Issue 1, May 2010 315


Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.5.2 IP Tab of the BHS
An example of the IP tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 109.

Figure 109: IP tab of BHS, example

In the IP tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.

Enter the non-routable IP address to associate with the Ethernet connection on this BHS.


316 Issue 1, May 2010


RECOMMENDATION:
about the module.

Enter an appropriate subnet mask for the BHS to communicate on the network. The

Enter the appropriate gateway for the BHS to communicate with the network. The default
gateway is 169.254.0.0.


The IP tab also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 317


18.5.3 Radio Tab of the BHS
An example of the Radio tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 110.

Figure 110: Radio tab of BHS, example

In the Radio tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.

Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List
Specify the frequency that the BHS should scan to find the BHM. The frequency band of
the BHs affects what channels you select.

IMPORTANT!
In the 2.4-GHz frequency band, the BHS can register to a BHM that transmits on
a frequency 2.5 MHz higher than the frequency that the BHS receiver locks when
the scan terminates as successful. This establishes a poor-quality link. To
prevent this, select frequencies that are at least 5 MHz apart.

In a 2.4-GHz BHS, this parameter displays all available channels, but has only three
recommended channels selected by default. See 2.4-GHz AP Cluster Recommended
Channels on Page 139.

In a 5.2- or 5.4-GHz BHS, this parameter displays only ISM frequencies. In a 5.7-GHz
BHS, this parameter displays both ISM and U-NII frequencies. If you select all
frequencies that are listed (default selections), then the module scans for a signal on any
channel. If you select only one, then the module limits the scan to that channel. Since the
frequencies that this parameter offers for each of these two bands are 5 MHz apart, a
scan of all channels does not risk establishment of a poor-quality link as in the 2.4-GHz
band. Nevertheless, this can risk establishment of a link to the wrong BHM.

A list of channels in the band is provided in Considering Frequency Band Alternatives on
Page 138.


318 Issue 1, May 2010


Color Code
Specify a value from 0 to 254. For registration to occur, the color code of the BHM and
the BHS must match. The default setting for the color code value is 0. This value
matches only the color code of 0 (not all 255 color codes).

RECOMMENDATION:
module.

External Antenna Gain

Table 56: Recommended External Antenna Gain values for BHS

Recommended
Module Type
Setting
PTP 100 with 9 dB Canopy LENS 9
PTP 100 with standard 18 dB reflector 18
PTP 100 connectorized with 15.5 dBi antenna
15
and 0.5 dB cable loss

present in only radios that support DFS.


have adjustable power.



Issue 1, May 2010 319


regulations.
factory defaults.



Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

320 Issue 1, May 2010


18.5.4 SNMP Tab of the BHS
An example of the SNMP tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 111.

Figure 111: SNMP tab of BHS, example

In the SNMP tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.


Issue 1, May 2010 321



access.


Specify the addresses that are allowed to send SNMP requests to this BHS. Prizm or
both


For example

192.168.102.0 to 192.168.102.254 can send SNMP requests to the BHS,

The default treatment is to allow all networks access (set to 0). For more information on
CIDR, execute an Internet search on “Classless Interdomain Routing.” You are allowed to



Read Permissions
Select Read Only if you wish to disallow Prizm or NMS SNMP access to configurable
parameters and read-only fields of the SM.

322 Issue 1, May 2010


Site Name
sysName SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer size for

Site Contact
sysContact SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer size
for this field is 128 characters.

Site Location
the sysLocation SNMP MIB-II object and can be polled by Prizm or an NMS. The buffer


Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

18.5.5 Quality of Service (QoS) Tab of the BHS
An example of the Quality of Service tab of the BHS is displayed in Figure 112.

Figure 112: Quality of Service (QoS) tab of BHS, example

Issue 1, May 2010 323


In the Quality of Service (QoS) tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.

See


See


18.5.6 Security Tab of the BHS
An example of the Security tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 113.

Figure 113: Security tab of BHS, example

324 Issue 1, May 2010


In the Security tab of the BHS, you may set the following parameters.

Authentication Key
Only if the BHM to which this BHS will register requires authentication, specify the key
that the BHS should use when authenticating. For alpha characters in this hex key, use
only upper case.

NOTE:
Motorola recommends that you enter 32 characters to achieve the maximal
security from this feature.

Select Key
The Use Default Key selection specifies that the link should continue to use the
automatically generated authentication key. See Authentication Manager Capability on
Page 391.

The Use Key above selection specifies the 32-digit hexadecimal key that is permanently
stored on both the BHS and the BHM.

access to the BHS.

IP Access Control
You can permit access to the BHS from any IP address (IP Access Filtering Disabled)
or limit it to access from only one, two, or three IP addresses that you specify (IP Access

access permitted to the BHS from any IP address. You may populate as many as all
three.


The Security tab of the BHS also provides the following buttons.

Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 325


18.5.7 VLAN Tab of the BHS
An example of the VLAN tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 114.

Figure 114: VLAN tab of BHS, example

In the VLAN tab of the BHM, you may set the following parameters.

VLAN
Set the VLAN feature to Enabled or Disabled. When the feature is disabled, the text box
for the following parameter is inactive. When the Management VID is enabled by this
parameter, the module is manageable through only packets that are tagged with the VID
configured in that parameter. These parameters have no bearing on tagging in non-
management traffic.

By default, VLAN is Enabled in backhaul modules. With this feature enabled, the
backhaul becomes a permanent member of any VLAN VID that it reads in packets that it
receives. When the backhaul reboots, it loses these memberships, but begins again to
freely adopt memberships in the VIDs that will be permanent until the next reboot.

Management VID
The range of values is 1 to 4094. The default value is 1. This text box is inactive if VLAN
is set to Disabled. In the Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP network, each device of
any type is automatically a permanent member of VID 1. This facilitates deployment of
devices that have VLAN enabled with those that do not.

The Active Configuration block provides the following details as read-only information in
this tab.

326 Issue 1, May 2010



VID Number

Type
In a backhaul module, this value will always be Permanent, reflective of the fact that the
backhaul is not capable of deleting any VID membership, regardless of whether it was
learned or set.

Age

In a backhaul module, this value will always be 0, reflective of the fact that the backhaul
is not capable of deleting any VID membership, regardless of whether it was learned or
set.


Save Changes
the module.

Reboot

implemented.

Issue 1, May 2010 327


18.5.8 DiffServe Tab of the BHS
An example of the DiffServe tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 115.

Figure 115: DiffServe tab of BHS, example

328 Issue 1, May 2010


You may set the following Differentiated Services Configuration page parameters.

CodePoint 47

CodePoint 49

the BHM for the downlink and in the BHS for the uplink. See DSCP
Field on Page 90.

18.5.9 Unit Settings Tab of the BHS
An example of the Unit Settings tab in a BHS is displayed in Figure 116.

Figure 116: Unit Settings tab of BHS, example

The Unit Settings tab of the BHS contains an option for how the BHS should react when it

Issue 1, May 2010 329


any that were not.




Save Changes

Reboot

implemented.


settings.

18.6 ADJUSTING TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER
Authorities may require transmitter output power to be adjustable and/or lower than the
highest that a module produces. Adjustable power modules include a Radio tab
parameter to reduce power on an infinite scale to achieve compliance. If you set this
parameter to lower than the supported range extends, the value is automatically reset to
the lowest supported value. The high end of the supported range does not vary from
radio to radio.

Although transmitter output power is settable in the PMP Series 400 OFDM AP, this AP
automatically sets the transmitter output power in its SMs through a feature named Auto-
TPC. The conceptual reason for this feature is OFDM reception in the AP is more

330 Issue 1, May 2010


sensitive to large differences in power levels received from its SMs than is its standard
Canopy single-carrier AP counterpart. The OFDM AP sets the SM to the lesser of the
following two levels:

◦ 10 dBm. This is the maximum allowed, because the SM operates with its
integrated antenna, and regulation permits EIRP of not greater than 27 dBm.
◦ power level such that the power that the AP receives from the SM is not greater
than 60 dBm.

See also Procedure 3: Reducing transmitter output power on Page 156.


◦ confirm that the initial power setting is compliant.
factory defaults.

The total gain per antenna in 900-MHz and 5.7-GHz radios is stated in Table 57.

Table 57: Total gain per antenna

Module Type Antenna Gain Cable Loss1 Net Gain
900-MHz Integrated 12.5 dBi 0.2 dB 12 dBi
2
900-MHz Connectorized 10 to 10.5 dBi 0.3 dB 10 dBi
0.3 dB + from
5.7-GHz Connectorized settable any additional See Note 3
cable

NOTES:
1. Received signal measurements take this loss into account, but the
transmitter output power setting cannot. Set the transmitter output
power higher by this amount.
2. With Mars, MTI, or Maxrad antenna.
3. Antenna gain minus cable loss.

Integrated patch antenna and reflector gains are provided in Table 58.

Table 58: Patch antenna and reflector gain

Gain
Frequency Patch
Band Range Antenna Reflector
2.4 GHz 8 dBi 11dBi
5.2, 5.4, or
7 dBi 18dBi
5.7 GHz

Issue 1, May 2010 331


The calculation of transmitter output power is as follows:

from applicable from the preceding
regulations table

Transmitter Patch
Output = EIRP Antenna Reflector
− −
Gain
Power Gain

solve, then set from the preceding
in parameter table

Transmitter output power is settable as dBm on the Radio tab of the module. Example
cases of transmitter output power settings are shown in Table 59.

332 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 59: Transmitter output power settings, example cases

Transmitter Output
Power Setting
Frequency Band Range Maximum EIRP
Region AP, SM, or BH
and Antenna Scheme in Region SM or BH with
with
Reflector
No Reflector
U.S.A.
900-MHz Integrated 36 dBm (4 W) 24 dBm
Canada
U.S.A.
36 dBm (4 W) 26 dBm1
Canada
900-MHz Connectorized
Depends on
Australia 30 dBm (1 W)
antenna
U.S.A. Depends on
25 dBm 25 dBm
Canada antenna gain
2.4-GHz Integrated
CEPT
20 dBm (100 mW) 12 dBm 1 dBm
states
U.S.A.
5.2-GHz Integrated 30 dBm (1 W) 23 dBm
Canada
CEPT
5.4-GHz FSK Integrated 30 dBm (1 W) 23 dBm 5 dBm
states
U.S.A.
5.4-GHz OFDM Integrated Canada 27 dBm (600 mW) −30 to 10 dBm2
Europe
U.S.A.
5.4-GHz OFDM
Canada 27 dBm (600 mW) −30 to 15 dBm2
Connectorized
Europe
Depends on Depends on
5.7-GHz Connectorized UK 33 dBm (2 W)
antenna antenna

NOTES:
1. With Mars, MTI, or Maxrad antenna. This is the default setting, and 28 dBm is the highest settable
value. The lower default correlates to 36 dBm EIRP where 10-dBi antennas are used. The default
setting for this parameter is applied whenever Set to Factory Defaults is selected.
2. In a typical case, set the Transmitter Output Power parameter in the AP to the maximum allowed.
This provides the greatest range for both overall operation and 3X operation. Where full power is not
necessary, or where the OFDM network is likely to interfere with a nearby network,
incrementally reduce the setting and monitor RF performance.

Issue 1, May 2010 333


19 INSTALLING COMPONENTS

RECOMMENDATION:
Use shielded cable for all infrastructure connections associated with BHs, APs,
and CMMs. The environment that these modules operate in often has significant
unknown or varying RF energy. Operator experience consistently indicates that
the additional cost of shielded cables is more than compensated by predictable
operation and reduced costs for troubleshooting and support.

19.1 PDA ACCESS TO MODULES
For RF spectrum analysis or module aiming on a roof or tower, a personal digital
assistant (PDA) is easier to carry than, and as convenient to use as, a notebook
computer. The PDA is convenient to use because no scrolling is required to view

◦ spectrum analysis results.
◦ RSSI and jitter.
◦ master module evaluation data.
◦ information that identifies the module, software, and firmware.

To access this data in a format the fits a 320 x 240 pixel PDA screen, the PDA must have
all of the following:

◦ a Compact Flash card slot.
◦ any of several Compact Flash wired Ethernet cards.
◦ a wired Ethernet connection to the module.
◦ a browser directed to http://ModuleIPAddress/pda.html.

The initial PDA tab reports link status, as shown in Figure 117.

Figure 117: PDA Quick Status tab, example

Issue 1, May 2010 335


An example of the Spectrum Analyzer tab for PDAs is displayed in Figure 118. For
additional information about the Spectrum Analyzer feature, see Monitoring the RF
Environment on Page 373.

Figure 118: PDA Spectrum Analyzer tab of BHS, example

Examples of the Spectrum Results and Information tabs for PDAs are shown in
Figure 119 and Figure 120.

Figure 119: PDA Spectrum Results tab of SM, example

336 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 120: PDA Information tab of SM, example

Examples of the BHM Evaluation and Aim tabs for PDAs are shown in Figure 121 and
Figure 122.

Figure 121: PDA AP Evaluation tab of BHM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 337


Figure 122: PDA Aim tab of SM, example

19.2 INSTALLING AN AP

19.2.1 Installing a PMP 100 Series AP
To install a PMP 100 Series (FSK) AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 17: Installing the FSK AP
1. Begin with the AP in the powered-down state.
2. Choose the best mounting location for your particular application. Modules need
not be mounted next to each other. They can be distributed throughout a given
site. However, the 60° offset must be maintained. Mounting can be done with
stainless steel hose clamps or another equivalent fastener.
3. Align the AP as follows:
a. Move the module to where the link will be unobstructed by the radio horizon
and no objects penetrate the Fresnel zone. (The Canopy System Calculator
page AntennaElevationCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the minimum
antenna elevation that is required to extend the radio horizon to the other end
of the link. The Canopy System Calculator page FresnelZoneCalcPage.xls
automatically calculates the Fresnel zone clearance that is required between
the visual line of sight and the top of a high-elevation object.)
b. Use a local map, compass, and/or GPS device as needed to determine the
direction that one or more APs require to each cover the intended 60° sector.
c. Apply the appropriate degree of downward tilt. (The Canopy System
Calculator page DowntiltCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the angle of
antenna downward tilt that is required.)
d. Ensure that the nearest and furthest SMs that must register to this AP are
within the beam coverage area. (The Canopy System Calculator page
BeamwidthRadiiCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the radii of the beam
coverage area for PMP 100 Series APs.)
4. Using stainless steel hose clamps or equivalent fasteners, lock the AP in the
proper direction and downward tilt.
5. Remove the base cover of the AP. (See Figure 51 on Page 182.)
6. Attach the cables to the AP.
(See Procedure 5 on Page 186.)

338 Issue 1, May 2010


NOTE: When power is applied to a module or the unit is reset on the web-based
interface, the module requires approximately 25 seconds to boot. During this interval,
self-tests and other diagnostics are being performed. See Table 45 on Page 183.

end of procedure

19.2.2 Installing a PMP 400 Series AP
To install a PMP 400 Series (OFDM) AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 18: Installing the OFDM AP
1. Inventory the parts to ensure that you have them all before you begin.
NOTE: The full set of parts is shown in Figure 123.

Figure 123: Parts inventory for OFDM AP installation

2. Assemble the upper bracket as shown in Figure 124.

Issue 1, May 2010 339


Figure 124: Assembled upper bracket for OFDM AP

3. Connect the AP to its antenna as shown in Figure 125.

Figure 125: OFDM AP connected to its antenna

4. Attach the AP to its antenna as shown in Figure 126.

Figure 126: OFDM AP mounted to its antenna

5. Attach the lower bracket to the antenna as shown in Figure 126 above.
6. Use a local map, compass, and/or GPS device as needed to determine the
direction that one or more APs require to each cover the 90° sector.

340 Issue 1, May 2010


7. Ensure that the nearest and furthest SMs that must register to this AP are within
the 3-dB beam pattern of 60° azimuth by 5° elevation with near-in null fill
coverage.
8. Choose the best mounting location for your particular application.
NOTE: Use the embedded spectrum analyzer or a commercial analyzer to
evaluate the frequencies present in various locations. OFDM APs need not be
mounted next to each other. They can be distributed throughout a given site.
However, the 90° offset must be maintained. If you want to collocate these APs
with PMP 100 Series APs of the 5.4-GHz frequency band range, plan to allow at
least 25 MHz of separation between their center channels.
9. Attach the upper bracket to the pole or tower as shown in Figure 127.

Figure 127: OFDM AP ready for tower mount

10. Hang the AP/antenna assembly onto the upper bracket as shown in Figure 128.

Issue 1, May 2010 341


Figure 128: Hanging OFDM AP assembly onto upper bracket of pole mount

11. Attach the lower bracket to the pole or tower as shown in Figure 129 and
Figure 130.

Figure 129: OFDM AP attached Figure 130: OFDM antenna lower bracket with quick-connect
to pole or tower

12. Remove the cover of the 600SS Surge Suppressor.
13. With the cable openings facing downward, mount the 600SS as close as possible
to the point where the Ethernet cable will penetrate the residence or building.

342 Issue 1, May 2010


14. Using diagonal cutters or long nose pliers, remove the knockouts that cover the
cable openings to the 600SS.
15. Connect an Ethernet cable from the power adapter to either RJ-45 port of the
600SS.
16. Remove the bottom cover of the AP.
17. Secure a ground strap to the ground lug (circled in Figure 131) on the bottom of
the AP.
18. Secure the ground strap to the pole, tower, or other trusted ground.

Figure 131: Ground lug and coax cable of OFDM AP

19. Connect the Ethernet cable from the AP to the other RJ-45 port of the 600SS.
20. Wrap an AWG 10 (or 6mm2) copper wire around the Ground post of the 600SS.
21. Tighten the Ground post locking nut in the 600SS onto the copper wire.
22. Securely connect the copper wire to the grounding system (Protective Earth)
according to applicable regulations.
23. Replace the cover of the 600SS surge suppressor.
24. Replace the bottom cover of the AP.
25. Adjust the initial down tilt of the AP/antenna assembly to 5°, −3 dB beam
elevation, with near-in null fill.
NOTE: The down tilt bracket is shown in Figure 132.

Issue 1, May 2010 343


Figure 132: Down tilt adjustment bracket of OFDM AP

26. Connect the coax cable to the antenna.
27. Weather-seal the connector on the coax cable (identified by arrow in Figure 131
above).
end of procedure

19.3 INSTALLING A CONNECTORIZED FLAT PANEL ANTENNA
To install a connectorized flat panel antenna to a mast or structure, follow instructions
that the manufacturer provides. Install the antenna safely and securely, consistent with
industry practices.

The Universal Mounting Bracket available from Motorola (Part Number SMMB-1 and
consisting of a mounting bracket and L-shaped aluminum tube) holds one module, but
cannot hold both the module and a connectorized antenna. The SMMB-2 is a heavy duty
bracket that can hold both a 900-MHz or 5.7-GHz connectorized module and its
connectorized antenna. See Module Support Brackets on Page 63.

IMPORTANT!
Connectorized antennas require professional installation.

The professional installer is responsible for

◦ selection of an antenna that the regulatory agency has approved for use with the
CAP 9130 AP and CAP 9130 SM.
◦ setting of the gain consistent with regulatory limitations and antenna
specifications.
◦ ensuring that the polarity—horizontal or vertical—is identical on both ends of the
link. (This may be less obvious where an integrated antenna is used on one end
and a connectorized on the other.)
◦ use of moisture sealing tape or wrap to provide long-term integrity for the
connection.

344 Issue 1, May 2010


Although a vertically polarized signal propagates better than a horizontally polarized
signal (because of the magnetic field of the earth), vertical polarization is typically better
for long distance only where noise above the thermal noise floor is negligible. In some
applications, cross polarization may improve signal separation, but typically to only 9 dB
of separation at 900 MHz and 15 to 20 dB in the 5.n-GHz frequency band ranges.

19.4 INSTALLING A GPS ANTENNA
For instructions on GPS antenna installation, see the user guide that is dedicated to the
CMM product.

19.5 INSTALLING A CLUSTER MANAGEMENT MODULE
For instructions on CMM2 (Cluster Management Module 2), CMM3 (CMMmicro), or
CMM4 installation, including the outdoor temperature range in which it is acceptable to
install the unit, tools required, mounting and cabling instructions, and connectivity
verification, see the user guide that is dedicated to that particular product.

19.6 INSTALLING AN SM

19.6.1 Configuring the Laptop for Connection to SMs

Windows Laptop
To configure a Windows laptop for connection to SMs for installation, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 19: Configuring a Windows laptop
1. Select Start Control Panel.
2. Select Network and Internet Connections (or the similarly labeled category).
3. Select
◦ Network Connections, if your platform is XP.
◦ Manage Network Connections, if your platform is Vista.
4. Right click on a LAN whose status is shown as Connected and select Properties
from the drop-down list.
5. Click to highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
NOTE An example is shown in Figure 133.

Issue 1, May 2010 345


Figure 133: Example Local Area Connection Properties window

6. Click the Properties button.
7. In the General tab, select Use the following IP address.
NOTE: An example is shown in Figure 134.

Figure 134: Example Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window

8. For IP address, type in 169.254.1.63.
9. For Subnet mask, type in 255.255.0.0.
10. In the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, click the OK button.
11. Click the Close button to dismiss the Local Area Connections window.
12. Close the Network Connections window.
RESULT: The laptop is now configured to reach the interfaces of SMs whose
IP addresses are default from the factory. However, the current setting inhibits
normal access to the Internet.

346 Issue 1, May 2010


13. Whenever you want to access the Internet, reset the General tab to
Obtain an IP address automatically, but leave the special configuration for the
169 net intact.
14. Whenever you want to use the laptop for SM installations, reset the General tab
to Use the following IP address and the 169 net.
end of procedure

Linux Laptop
To configure a Linux laptop for connection to SMs for installation, perform the following
steps.

Procedure 20: Configuring a Linux laptop
1. On your Linux console, log in as root.
2. Enter ip addr show.
3. Write down the string that is in the final position of the system response
(for example, eth0) to use as the NIC in the next step.
4. Enter ip addr add 169.254.1.63/16 dev NIC.
RESULT: The laptop is now configured to reach the interfaces of SMs whose
IP addresses are default from the factory. However, the current setting inhibits
normal access to the Internet.
5. Enter ip addr show.
RESULT: The system response confirms the configuration.
6. Whenever you want to access the Internet, perform the following steps:
a. Log in as root.
b. Enter netconfig.
c. When prompted on whether to set up networking, select Yes.
d. Tab to highlight the Use Dynamic IP Configuration option.
e. Press the spacebar.
RESULT: The laptop will automatically obtain an IP address and will be able
to access the Internet.
7. Whenever you want to use the laptop for SM installations, perform Steps 1
through 5 of this procedure.
end of procedure

19.6.2 Installing a PMP 100 Series SM
Installing a PMP 100 Series SM consists of two procedures:

◦ Physically installing the SM on a residence or other location and performing a
course alignment using the alignment tone (Procedure 21).
◦ Verifying the AP to SM link and finalizing alignment using review of power level
and jitter, link tests, and review of registration and session counts (Procedure 23
on Page 355).

Issue 1, May 2010 347


Procedure 21: Installing the FSK SM
1. Choose the best mounting location for the SM.
2. Select the type of mounting hardware appropriate for this location.
NOTE: For mounting 2.4, 5.2, 5.4, and 5.7 GHz SMs, Motorola offers the SMMB-
1 mounting bracket. For mounting 900 MHz SMs, Motorola offers the SMMB-2
mounting bracket.
3. Attach the mounting bracket to the structure.
4. Remove the base cover of the SM. (See Figure 51 on Page 182.)
5. Terminate the UV outside grade Category 5 Ethernet cable with an RJ-45
connector, and connect the cable to the SM. (See Procedure 8 on Page 195.)
6. Wrap a drip loop in the cable.
7. Optionally, attach the SM to the arm of the Passive Reflector dish assembly as
shown in Figure 135 or snap a LENS onto the SM.

RECOMMENDATION:
A reflector in this instance reduces the beamwidth to reduce
interference. The arm is molded to receive and properly aim the
module relative to the aim of the dish. Use stainless steel hose
clamps for the attachment.

Stainless steel
hose clamps

Reflector dish arm

Figure 135: SM attachment to reflector arm

8. Use stainless steel hose clamps or equivalent fasteners to lock the SM into
position.
NOTE: The SM grounding method is shown in Figure 136.

348 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 136: SM grounding per NEC specifications

9. Refer to Grounding SMs on Page 176.
NOTE: The inside of the surge suppressor is shown in Figure 137.

Issue 1, May 2010 349


KEY TO CALLOUTS

1 Holes—for mounting the Surge Suppressor to a flat surface (such as
an outside wall). The distance between centers is 4.25 inches (108
mm).
2 RJ-45 connectors—One side (neither side is better than the other for
this purpose) connects to the product (AP, SM, BHM, BHS, or cluster
management module). The other connects to the AC adaptor’s
Ethernet connector.
3 Ground post—use heavy gauge (10 AWG or 6 mm2) copper wire for
connection. Refer to local electrical codes for exact specifications.
4 Ground Cable Opening—route the 10 AWG (6 mm2) ground cable
through this opening.
5 CAT-5 Cable Knockouts—route the two CAT-5 cables through these
openings, or alternatively through the Conduit Knockouts.
6 Conduit Knockouts—on the back of the case, near the bottom.
Available for installations where cable is routed through building
conduit.

Figure 137: Internal view of Canopy 600SS Surge Suppressor

11. With the cable openings facing downward, mount the 600SS to the outside of the
subscriber premises, as close to the point where the Ethernet cable penetrates
the residence or building as possible, and as close to the grounding system
(Protective Earth) as possible.
16. Pack both of the surge suppressor Ethernet jacks with dielectric grease.
17. Wrap a splice loop in the loose end of the Ethernet cable from the SM.
18. Connect that cable to one of the Ethernet jacks.

350 Issue 1, May 2010


19. Connect an Ethernet cable to the other Ethernet jack of the 600SS and to the
power adapter.
20. Replace the cover of the 600SS.
21. Connect the power supply to a power source.
22. Connect the Ethernet output from the power supply to the Ethernet port of
your laptop.
23. Climb your ladder to the SM.
24. Launch your web browser.
25. In the URL address bar, enter 169.254.1.1.
26. If the browser in your laptop fails to access the interface of the SM, perform the
following steps:
a. Insert your override plug into the RJ11 GPS utility port of the SM.
NOTE: An override plug is shown in Figure 138.

Figure 138: Override plug

b. Remove and reinsert the RJ45 Ethernet cable connector at the SM.
NOTE: This triggers a power cycle, which causes the SM to reboot.
c. Wait for the reboot to conclude (about 30 seconds).
d. When the reboot is finished, remove the override plug.
e. In the left-side menu of the SM interface, click Login.
f. Consistent with local operator policy, reset both the admin and the root
user passwords.
g. In the left-side menu, click Configuration.
h. Click the IP tab.
i. Consistent with local operator practices, set an
◦ IP Address
◦ Subnet Mask
◦ Gateway IP Address
j. Click the Save Changes button.
k. Click the Reboot button.
27. As described under Adding a User for Access to a Module on Page 381, log in as
either admin or root on the SM.
28. Configure a password for the admin account and a password for the root
account.
29. Log off of the SM.
30. Log back into the SM as admin or root, using the password that you
configured.

Issue 1, May 2010 351


31. For coarse alignment of the SM, use the Audible Alignment Tone feature as
follows:
a. In the left-side menu of the SM interface, click Configuration.
b. Click the General tab.
c. Set the 2X Rate parameter in the SM to Disabled.
d. Connect the RJ-11 6-pin connector of the Alignment Tool Headset to the RJ-
11 utility port of the SM.
Alternatively, instead of using the Alignment Tool Headset, use an earpiece
or small battery-powered speaker connected to Pin 5 (alignment tone output)
and Pin 6 (ground) of an RJ-11 connector.

e. Listen to the alignment tone for
◦ pitch, which indicates greater signal power (RSSI/dBm) by higher pitch.
◦ volume, which indicates better signal quality (lower jitter) by higher
volume.

Figure 139: Audible Alignment Tone kit, including headset and connecting
cable

f. Adjust the module slightly until you hear the highest pitch and highest
volume.
g. In the General tab of the Configuration web page of the SM, set the 2X Rate
parameter back to Enable.
32. When you have achieved the best signal (highest pitch, loudest volume), lock the
SM in place with the mounting hardware.
34. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from your laptop.
35. Replace the base cover of the SM.
36. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer that the subscriber will be using.
end of procedure

352 Issue 1, May 2010


19.6.3 Installing a PMP 400 Series SM
Installing a PMP 400 Series SM consists of two procedures:

◦ Physically installing the SM on a residence or other location and performing a
course alignment using the alignment tone.
◦ Verifying the AP to SM link and finalizing alignment using review of power level,
link tests, and review of registration and session counts (Procedure 23 on
Page 355).

To install a PMP 400 Series (OFDM) SM, perform the following steps.

Procedure 22: Installing the OFDM SM
1. When gathering parts for the installation, select
◦ a 29.5-V DC power supply and 328 feet (100 meters) or less of cable for the
power supply.
◦ an SMMB-2A mounting bracket
◦ a 600SS surge suppressor
2. At the site, choose the best mounting location.
3. Mount the SMMB-2A bracket to thee structure.
4. Remove the base cover of the SM.
connector, and connect the cable to the SM.
6. Wrap a drip loop in the cable.
7. Use stainless steel hose clamps or equivalent fasteners to lock the SM into
position.
10. With the cable openings facing downward, mount the 600SS to the outside of the
subscriber premises, as close as possible to the point where the Ethernet cable
will penetrate the residence or building.
12. Pack both of the surge suppressor Ethernet jacks with dielectric grease.
600SS.
14. Remove the bottom cover of the SM.
15. Secure a ground strap to the ground lug (circled in Figure 131 on Page 343) on
the bottom of the SM.
16. Secure the ground strap to the power service panel of the structure.
17. Weather-seal the connector on the coax cable (identified by arrow in Figure 131
on Page 343).
18. Wrap a splice loop in the loose end of the Ethernet cable from the SM.
19. Connect that cable to the other RJ-45 port of the 600SS.

Issue 1, May 2010 353


25. Connect the Ethernet output from the power supply to the Ethernet port of
your laptop.
26. Climb your ladder to the SM.
27. Launch your web browser.
28. In the URL address bar, enter 169.254.1.1.
29. As described under Adding a User for Access to a Module on Page 381, log in as
either admin or root on the SM.
30. Configure a password for the admin account and a password for the root
account.
32. Log back into the SM as admin or root, using the password that you
configured.
33. For coarse alignment of the SM, use the Audible Alignment Tone feature as
follows:
a. In the left-side menu of the SM interface, click Configuration.
b. Click the General tab.
c. Set the operation rate parameter in the SM to Disabled.
d. Connect the RJ-11 6-pin connector of the Alignment Tool Headset to the RJ-
11 utility port of the SM.

e. Listen to the alignment tone for pitch, which indicates greater signal power
(RSSI/dBm) by higher pitch.
IMPORTANT: If you have experience in aligning FSK SMs, keep in mind
that, unlike FSK SMs whose beam width is 60°, OFDM SMs have an 18
beam width. This alignment requires significantly greater precision.
Since the OFDM SM does not measure jitter, no difference in volume is
heard in the headset as you move the SM.

f. Adjust the module slightly until you hear the highest pitch and highest
volume.
g. In the General tab of the Configuration web page of the SM, set the operation
rate parameter back to the desired operation speed (1X, 2X, or 3X).
SM in place with the mounting hardware.
36. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from your laptop.
37. Replace the base cover of the SM.
38. Connect the Ethernet cable to the computer that the subscriber will be using.
end of procedure

354 Issue 1, May 2010


19.7 CONFIGURING AN AP-SM LINK
To configure the AP-SM over-the-air link after the SM has been installed, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 23: Configuring the AP-SM link
1. Using a computer (laptop, desktop, PDA) connected to the SM, open a browser
and access the SM using the default IP address of http://169.254.1.1 (or the IP
address configured in the SM, if one has been configured.)
2. In the left-side menu, select Configuration.
4. Set the 2X Rate parameter to Disabled.
5. In the left-side menu, select Tools.
6. Click the AP Evaluation tab.
7. Among the listed APs (each shown with a unique Index number), find the AP
whose Jitter value is lowest and whose Power Level value is highest (or find the
ESN of the AP to which you were instructed to establish a link).
IMPORTANT: The received Power Level is shown in dBm and should be
maximized. Jitter should be minimized. However, better/lower jitter should be
favored over better/higher dBm. For example, if coarse alignment gives an SM
the alignment drops the power level to −78 dBm and the jitter to 2 or 3, the latter
would be better, with the following caveats:
◦ When the receiving link is operating at 1X, the Jitter scale is 0 to 15 with
desired jitter between 0 and 4.

An example of the AP Evaluation tab is shown in Figure 140.

Figure 140: Example data from AP Evaluation tab

PMP 400 Series SMs do not have the Jitter parameter.

NOTE:
For historical reasons, RSSI is also shown and is the unitless
measure of power. The best practice is to use Power Level and
ignore RSSI, which implies more accuracy and precision than is
inherent in the measurement.

8. Write down the Frequency and Color Code values of the AP in the link.
NOTE: See Figure 140 on Page 355.

Issue 1, May 2010 355


9. In the left-side menu of the SM interface, select Configuration.
11. At the Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter, uncheck all
frequencies except the one on which the AP in the link is broadcasting.
12. At the Color Code parameter, enter the code number that was shown for that AP
in the AP Evaluation tab.
15. Fine-adjust the SM mounting, if needed, to improve Jitter (if reported) or
Power Level according to your company standards.
NOTE: For example, while maintaining or improving on the Jitter that you saw in
the AP Evaluation data, and achieving ≥3 dB of Power Level separation from
any other AP, fine-tune the SM mounting position for the highest Power Level
achievable.
16. Retighten the hardware that secures the mounting.
17. In the left-side menu, select Tools.
18. Click the Link Capacity Test tab.
NOTE: Use of this tool is described under Using the Link Capacity Test Tool (All)
on Page 438.
a. Perform several link tests of 10-second duration as follows:
b. Type into the Duration field how long (in seconds) the RF link should be
tested.
c. Leave the Packet Length field (when present) set to the default of 1522
bytes or type into that field the packet length at which you want the test
conducted.
d. Leave the Number of Packets field set to 0 (to flood the link).
e. Click the Start Test button.
f. View the results of the test.
19. If these link tests fail to consistently show 90% or greater efficiency in 1X
operation or 50 to 60% efficiency in 2X, troubleshoot the link, using the data as
follows:
◦ If the downlink is consistently 90% efficient, but the uplink is only 40%, this
indicates trouble for the SM transmitting to the AP. Have link tests performed
for nearby SMs. If their results are similar, investigate a possible source of
interference local at the AP.
◦ If the uplink is consistently 90% efficient, but the downlink is only 40%, this
indicates trouble for the AP transmitting to the SM. Investigate a possible
source of interference near the SM.
If these link tests consistently show 90% or greater efficiency in 1X operation, or
50 to 60% efficiency in 2X operation, in both uplink and downlink, continue this
procedure.

20. In the left-side menu, select Configuration.
21. In the General tab, set the 2X Rate parameter to Enabled.

356 Issue 1, May 2010


23. If Prizm or another element management system will be used to manage the SM
via SNMP, perform the following steps:
a. Click the SNMP tab.
b. At the Read Permissions parameter, select Read/Write.
c. Under Site Information, type complete data into the three parameters:
Site Name, Site Contact, Site Location.
d. Click the Save Changes button.
NOTE: At 2X operation, received Jitter can be as great as 9 in a high-quality
downlink, but should be as low as your further aiming efforts can yield. If you
need to re-aim, set the SM back to 1X operation first.
end of procedure

19.8 MONITORING AN AP-SM LINK
After the SM installer has configured the link, either an operator in the network office
or the SM installer in the field (if read access to the AP is available to the installer) should
perform the following procedure. Who is authorized and able to do this may depend on
local operator password policy, management VLAN setup, and operational practices.

Procedure 24: Monitoring the AP-SM link for performance
1. Access the interface of the AP.
2. In the left-side menu of the AP interface, select Home.
3. Click the Session Status tab.
NOTE: An example of this tab is shown in Figure 141.

Issue 1, May 2010 357


Figure 141: AP/SM link status indications in the AP Session Status tab

4. Find the Session Count line under the MAC address of the SM.
5. Check and note the values for Session Count, Reg Count, and Re-Reg Count.
6. Briefly monitor these values, occasionally refreshing this page by clicking another
tab and then the Session Status tab again.

358 Issue 1, May 2010


7. If these values are low (for example, 1, 1, and 0, respectively, meaning that
the SM registered and started a stable session once) and are not changing
a. consider the installation successful.
b. monitor these values from the network office over the next several hours and
days.
If these values are greater than 1, 1, and 0, or they increase while you are
monitoring them, troubleshoot the link. (For example, recheck jitter as described
in Procedure 21: Installing the FSK SM or recheck link efficiency as described in
this procedure, then look for sources of RF interference or obstructions.)

end of procedure

19.9 INSTALLING A REFLECTOR DISH
The internal patch antenna of the module illuminates the Passive Reflector Dish from an
offset position. The module support tube provides the proper angle for this offset.

19.9.1 Both Modules Mounted at Same Elevation
For cases where the other module in the link is mounted at the same elevation, fasten the
mounting hardware leg of the support tube vertical for each module. When the hardware
leg is in this position

◦ the reflector dish has an obvious downward tilt.
◦ the module leg of the support tube is not vertical.

For a mount to a non-vertical structure such as a tapered tower, use a plumb line to
ensure that the hardware leg is vertical when fastened. Proper dish, tube, and module
positions for a link in this case are illustrated in Figure 142. The dish is tipped forward,
not vertical, but the focus of the signal is horizontal.

--------------------------------------------EARTH--------------------------------------------
Figure 142: Correct mount with reflector dish

Issue 1, May 2010 359


Improper dish, tube, and module positions for this case are illustrated in Figure 143.

--------------------------------------------EARTH--------------------------------------------
Figure 143: Incorrect mount with reflector dish

19.9.2 Modules Mounted at Different Elevations
For cases where the other module in the link is mounted at a different elevation, the
assembly hardware allows tilt adjustment. The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a
factor of both the difference in elevation and the distance that the link spans. Even in this
case, a plumb line and a protractor can be helpful to ensure the proper tilt. This tilt is
typically minimal.

The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support
tube is equal to the angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module (b in
the example provided in Figure 39 on Page 149).

19.9.3 Mounting Assembly
Both the hardware that Mounting Assembly 27RD provides for adjustment and the
relationship between the offset angle of the module and the direction of the beam are
illustrated in Figure 144.

360 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 144: Mounting assembly, exploded view

19.10 INSTALLING A BH TIMING MASTER

19.10.1 Installing a PTP 100 Series BHM
To install a PTP 100 Series (FSK) BHM, perform the following steps.

Procedure 25: Installing the FSK BHM
1. Access the General tab of the Configuration page in the BHM.
2. If this is a 20-Mbps BH, set the 2X Rate parameter to Disabled (temporarily for
easier course aiming).
5. After the reboot is completed, remove power from the BHM.
6. Choose the best mounting location for your particular application.
7. Attach the BHM to the arm of the Passive Reflector dish assembly as shown in
Figure 145 or snap a LENS into place on the BHM.

RECOMMENDATION:
The arm is molded to receive and properly aim the module relative to the aim of
the dish. ( See Figure 142 on Page 359.) Stainless steel hose clamps should be
used for the attachment.

Issue 1, May 2010 361


Stainless steel
hose clamps

Reflector dish arm

Figure 145: BH attachment to reflector arm

8. Align the BHM as follows:
a. Move the module to where the link will be unobstructed by the radio horizon
and no objects penetrate the Fresnel zone. (The Canopy System Calculator
page AntennaElevationCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the minimum
antenna elevation that is required to extend the radio horizon to the other end
of the link. The Canopy System Calculator page FresnelZoneCalcPage.xls
automatically calculates the Fresnel zone clearance that is required between
the visual line of sight and the top of a high-elevation object.)
b. Use a local map, compass, and/or GPS device as needed to determine the
direction to the BHS.
c. Apply the appropriate degree of downward or upward tilt. (The Canopy
System Calculator page DowntiltCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the
angle of antenna downward tilt that is required.)
d. Ensure that the BHS is within the beam coverage area. (The Canopy System
Calculator page BeamwidthRadiiCalcPage.xls automatically calculates the
radii of the beam coverage area.)
9. Using stainless steel hose clamps or equivalent fasteners, lock the BHM into
position.
10. Remove the base cover of the BHM. (See Figure 51 on Page 182.)
11. If this BHM will not be connected to a CMM, optionally connect a utility cable to a
GPS timing source and then to the RJ-11 port of the BHM.
12. Either connect the BHM to the CMM or connect the DC power converter to the
BHM and then to an AC power source.
RESULT: When power is applied to a module or the unit is reset on the web-
based interface, the module requires approximately 25 seconds to boot. During
this interval, self-tests and other diagnostics are being performed.
13. Access the General tab of the Configuration page of this BHM.
14. If a CMMmicro or CMM4 is connected, set the Sync Input parameter to the
Sync to Received Signal (Power Port) selection.
If a CMM2 is connected, set the Sync Input parameter to the Sync to Received
Signal (Timing Port) selection.

end of procedure

362 Issue 1, May 2010


19.10.2 Installing a PTP 200 Series BHM
To install a PTP 200 Series (OFDM) BHM, use the procedure provided under Installing a
PMP 400 Series AP on Page 339, with the following additional treatment for a setting that
is unique to PTP 200 Series wireless Ethernet bridges.

OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is
repeated at the beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multipathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/4 cyclic prefix means that for every 4 bits of throughput
data transmitted, an additional bit is used, A 1/8 cyclic prefix means that for every 8 bits
of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

PTP 200 Series modules (OFDM BHs) are settable for either 1/8 or 1/4 cyclic prefix.
The use of 1/8 cyclic prefix provides about 11% higher maximum throughput and is
recommended for most cases.

The Cyclic Prefix is set on the Configuration => Radio page of the BHM. The default on
a new unit or after the unit has been reset to factory defaults is 1/4 Cyclic Prefix. In most
deployments, 1/8 Cyclic Prefix will provide a high quality, higher throughput link. In cases
with severe multipathing or obstructions, 1/4 Cyclic Prefix may yield better overall results.

Procedure 26: Setting the Cyclic Prefix in a PTP 200 Series wireless Ethernet bridge
1. Before deployment, set the Cyclic Prefix on the Configuration => Radio page of
both the BHM and the BHS to 1/8.
IMPORTANT: The Cyclic Prefix setting must be identical in both the BHM and
the BHS. If the settings do not match, then the BHS will not register in the BHM.
2. During installation, use Link Tests to confirm link quality per standard installation
and alignment procedures.
3. If a Link Test shows low throughput or efficiency, consider changing the
Cyclic Prefix setting to 1/4 on both the BHM and the BHS along with other
standard installation troubleshooting procedures such as re-aiming, off-axis
aiming, changing location, raising or lowering the height of the radio, and
adjusting the Transmitter Output Power setting.

19.11 INSTALLING A BH TIMING SLAVE

19.11.1 Installing a PTP 100 Series BHS
Installing a PTP 100 Series (FSK) BHS consists of two procedures:

◦ Physically installing the BHS and performing a course alignment using the
alignment tone (Procedure 27).
◦ Verifying the BH link and finalizing alignment using review of power level and
jitter, link tests, and review of registration and session counts (Procedure 28 on
Page 365).
Procedure 27: Installing the FSK BHS
1. Choose the best mounting location for the BHS.
2. Remove the base cover of the BHS. (See Figure 51 on Page 182.)
connector, and connect the cable to the BHS. (See Procedure 8 on Page 195.)
4. Attach the BHS to the arm of the Passive Reflector dish assembly as shown in
Figure 135 on Page 348 or snap a LENS onto the BHS.

Issue 1, May 2010 363


RECOMMENDATION:
The arm is molded to receive and properly aim the BH relative to the
aim of the dish. Use stainless steel hose clamps for the attachment.

5. Use stainless steel hose clamps or equivalent fasteners to lock the BHS into
position.
7. With the cable openings facing downward, mount the 600SS as close to the
grounding system (Protective Earth) as possible.
600SS.
10. Connect another Ethernet cable from the other RJ-45 port of the 600SS to the
Ethernet port of the BHS.
15. Connect a ground wire to the 600SS.
17. For coarse alignment of the BHS, use the Audible Alignment Tone feature as
follows:
18. If the Configuration web page of the BHS contains a 2X Rate parameter, set it to
Disable.
a. At the BHS, connect the RJ-11 6-pin connector of the Alignment Tool
Headset (shown in Figure 139 on Page 352) to the RJ-11 utility port of the
SM.

b. Listen to the alignment tone for
◦ pitch, which indicates greater signal power (RSSI/dBm) by higher
pitch.
◦ volume, which indicates better signal quality (lower jitter) by higher
volume.
c. Adjust the module slightly until you hear the highest pitch and highest
volume.
d. If the Configuration web page of the BHS contains a 2X Rate parameter, set
it back to Enable.

364 Issue 1, May 2010


BHS in place with the mounting hardware.
end of procedure

19.11.2 Installing a PTP 200 Series BHS
To install a PTP 200 Series (OFDM) BHM, use the procedure provided under Installing a
PMP 400 Series SM on Page 353, with the following additional treatment for a setting
that is unique to PTP 200 Series wireless Ethernet bridges.

OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is
repeated at the beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multipathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/4 cyclic prefix means that for every 4 bits of throughput
data transmitted, an additional bit is used, A 1/8 cyclic prefix means that for every 8 bits
of throughput data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

PTP 200 Series modules (OFDM BHs) are settable for either 1/8 or 1/4 cyclic prefix.
The use of 1/8 cyclic prefix provides about 11% higher maximum throughput and is
recommended for most cases.

The Cyclic Prefix is set on the Configuration => Radio page of the BHM. The default on
a new unit or after the unit has been reset to factory defaults is 1/4 Cyclic Prefix. In most
deployments, 1/8 Cyclic Prefix will provide a high quality, higher throughput link. In cases
with severe multipathing or obstructions, 1/4 Cyclic Prefix may yield better overall results.

To perform and possibly adjust the setting, use Procedure 26: Setting the Cyclic Prefix in
a PTP 200 Series wireless Ethernet bridge on Page 363.

19.12 UPGRADING A BH LINK TO BH20
To replace a pair of 10-Mbps BHs with 20-Mbps BHs, you can minimize downtime by
temporarily using the 10-Mbps capability in the faster modules. However, both
interference and differences in receiver sensitivity can make alignment and link
maintenance more difficult than in the previous 10-Mbps link. The effects of these factors
are greater at greater link distances, particularly at 5 miles or more.

In shorter spans, these factors may not be prohibitive. For these cases, set the first
replacement module to 1X Rate and establish the link to the 10-Mbps BH on the far end.
Similarly, set the second replacement module to 1X Rate and re-establish the link. With
both of the faster modules in place and with an operational link having been achieved,
reset their modulation to 2X Rate (20 Mbps).

19.13 VERIFYING A BH LINK
To verify the backhaul link after the BHS has been installed, perform the following steps.

Procedure 28: Verifying performance for a BH link
1. Using a computer (laptop, desktop, PDA) connected to the BHS, open a browser
and access the BHS using the default IP address of http://169.254.1.1 (or the IP
address configured in the BHS, if one has been configured.)
2. On the General Status tab of the Home page in the BHS (shown in Figure 71 on
Page 216), look for Power Level and Jitter.
IMPORTANT: The received Power Level is shown in dBm and should be
maximized. Jitter should be minimized. However, better/lower jitter should be

Issue 1, May 2010 365


favored over better/higher dBm. For example, if coarse alignment gives a BHS
the alignment drops the power level to −78 dBm and the jitter to 2 or 3, the latter
would be better, with the following caveats:

PTP 200 Series BHSs do not have this parameter.

NOTE:
For historical reasons, RSSI is also shown and is the unitless
measure of power. The best practice is to use Power Level and
ignore RSSI, which implies more accuracy and precision than is

3. Fine-adjust the BHS mounting, if needed, to improve Jitter or Power Level.
4. Click the Link Capacity Test tab of the Tools web page in the BHS.
NOTE: Use of this tool is described under Using the Link Capacity Test Tool (All)
on Page 438.
5. Perform several link tests of 10-second duration as follows:
a. Type into the Duration field how long (in seconds) the RF link should be
tested.
b. Leave the Packet Length field (when present) set to the default of 1522
bytes or type into that field the packet length at which you want the test
conducted.
c. Leave the Number of Packets field set to 0 (to flood the link).
d. Click the Start Test button.
e. View the results of the test.
6. If these link tests fail to consistently show 90% or greater efficiency in 1X
operation or 50 to 60% efficiency in 2X, troubleshoot the link, using the data as
follows:
◦ If the downlink is consistently 90% efficient, but the uplink is only 40%, this
indicates trouble for the BHS transmitting to the BHM. Investigate a possible
source of interference near the BHM.
◦ If the uplink is consistently 90% efficient, but the downlink is only 40%, this
indicates trouble for the BHM transmitting to the BHS. Investigate a possible
source of interference near the BHS.
If these link tests consistently show 90% or greater efficiency in 1X operation, or
50 to 60% efficiency in 2X operation, in both uplink and downlink, continue this
procedure.

7. Open the Session Status tab in the Home page of the BHM.
NOTE: An example of this page is shown in Figure 146.

366 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 146: Session Status tab of BHM

8. Find the Session Count line under the MAC address of the BHS.
9. Check and note the values for Session Count, Reg Count, and Re-Reg Count.
10. Briefly monitor these values, occasionally refreshing this page by clicking another
tab and then the Session Status tab again.
11. If these values are low (for example, 1, 1, and 0, respectively, meaning that
the BHS registered and started a stable session once) and not changing
a. consider the installation successful.
b. monitor these values from the network office over the next several hours and
days.
If these values are greater than 1, 1, and 0, or they increase while you are
monitoring them, troubleshoot the link. (For example, recheck jitter as described
in Procedure 21: Installing the FSK SM or recheck link efficiency as described in
this procedure, then look for sources of RF interference or obstructions.)

end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 367


20 VERIFYING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
To verify system functionality after the APs and or BHs have been installed, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 29: Verifying system functionality
1. For each installed AP, use a computer or PDA connected to an SM set to a
compatible configuration (frequency and color code, for example) and verify link
functionality.
2. For each BH installed, use a notebook computer connected to a BH (BHM or
BHS, as appropriate) set to a compatible configuration and verify link
functionality.
3. If a network data feed is present and operational, use an SM or BHS to verify
network functionality.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 369

PMP Solutions User Guide Operations Guide

21 GROWING YOUR NETWORK
Keys to successfully growing your network include

◦ monitoring the RF environment.
◦ considering software release compatibility.
◦ redeploying modules appropriately and quickly.

21.1 MONITORING THE RF ENVIRONMENT
Regardless of whether you are maintaining or growing your network, you may encounter
new RF traffic that can interfere with your current or planned equipment. Regularly
measuring over a period of time and logging the RF environment, as you did before you
installed your first equipment in an area, enables you to recognize and react to changes.

21.1.1 Spectrum Analyzer
In both an FSK and an OFDM module, the spectrum analyzer measures and displays the
detected peak power level. This is consistent with the received Power Level that various
tabs in the FSK modules report. However, it is inconsistent with received Power Level
indications in OFDM modules, which use this parameter to report the detected average
power level. For this reason, you will observe a difference in how the spectrum analyzer
and the Power Level field separately report on the same OFDM signal at the same time.

The integrated spectrum analyzer can be very useful as a tool for troubleshooting and
RF planning, but is not intended to replicate the accuracy and programmability of a
high-end spectrum analyzer, which you may sometime need for other purposes.

IMPORTANT!
When you enable the Spectrum Analyzer on a module, it enters a scan mode
and drops any RF connection it may have had. Scanning mode ends when either
you click Disable on the Spectrum Analyzer page, or it times out after 15
minutes and returns to operational mode.
For this reason
◦ do not enable the spectrum analyzer on a module you are connected to
via RF. The connection will drop for 15 minutes, and when the
connection is re-established no readings will be displayed.
◦ be advised that, if you enable the spectrum analyzer by Ethernet
connection, the RF connection to that module drops.

You can use any module to see the frequency and power level of any detectable signal
that is within, just above, or just below the frequency band range of the module.

RECOMMENDATION:
Vary the days and times when you analyze the spectrum in an area.
The RF environment can change throughout the day or throughout the week.

Issue 1, May 2010 373

Operations Guide PMP Solutions User Guide

Temporarily deploy an SM or BHS for each frequency band range that you need to
monitor and access the Spectrum Analyzer tab in the Tools web page of the module.
(For access from a PDA, see PDA Access to Modules on Page 335.) To enter the scan
mode and view readings, click Enable.

After clicking the Enable button on the Spectrum Analyzer page, the first “painting” may
not display bars for all frequencies, especially on frequency bands with a large number of
center channels, like the 5.4 GHz band. Clicking Enable again will display the entire
spectrum bar graph. Alternatively, you can set the “Auto Refresh” time on the
Configuration => General page to a few seconds to have the Spectrum Analyzer
automatically fully displayed and refreshed. (Setting the “Auto Refresh” time back to 0 will
disable refresh.)

21.1.2 Graphical Spectrum Analyzer Display
An SM/BHS displays the graphical spectrum analyzer. An example of the Spectrum
Analyzer tab is shown in Figure 147.

Figure 147: Spectrum Analyzer tab of SM, example

Colors in the display have the following meanings:

◦ Green bars show the most recent measurements.
◦ Yellow ticks show the maximum measurements from the current spectrum
analysis session.
◦ Red ticks show measurements of −40 dBm or stronger.

374 Issue 1, May 2010


To keep the displayed data current, either set “Auto Refresh” on the module’s
Configuration => General page to a few seconds, or repeatedly click the Enable button.
When you are finished analyzing the spectrum, click the Disable button to return the
module to normal operation.

21.1.3 Using the AP as a Spectrum Analyzer
You can temporarily change an AP into an SM and thereby use the spectrum analyzer
functionality. This is the only purpose supported for the transformation.

CAUTION!
When you change an AP into an SM, any connections to SMs off that AP are
lost. Therefore, you should ensure you are connected to the AP through its
Ethernet side (not RF side) before changing it into an SM.
For example, if you are connected to an AP through one of its SMs and
mistakenly change the AP into an SM, you will lose connectivity and will need to
gain access to the Ethernet side of the AP through another part of your network
to change it back into an AP.

To transform a VLAN-disabled AP into an SM for spectrum analysis and then return the
device to an AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 30: Using the Spectrum Analyzer in AP feature, VLAN disabled
1. Connect to the wired Ethernet interface of the AP.
2. Access the General tab of the Configuration page in the AP.
3. Set the Device Setting parameter to SM.
6. When the module has rebooted as an SM, click the Tools navigation link on the
left side of the Home page.
7. Click the Spectrum Analyzer tab.
NOTE: If you simply click the Enable button on the Spectrum Analyzer tab, the
display may include fewer than all frequencies that are detectable, especially in a
band, such as 5.4 GHz, where the number of available center channels is great.
If you then click the Enable button a second time or set the
Webpage Auto Update parameter in the Configuration => General tab to a few
seconds, the display includes the entire spectrum. You can later reset
Webpage Auto Update to 0, to disable refresh.
8. Either set the Webpage Auto Update parameter in the Configuration => General
tab to a few seconds or repeatedly click the Enable button.
RESULT: The module enters the scan mode.
9. When you are finished analyzing the spectrum, click the Disable button.
10. In the left-side navigation links, click Configuration.
12. Set the Device Setting parameter to AP.

Issue 1, May 2010 375


RESULT: The AP boots with its previous frequency setting.
end of procedure

If you reboot an AP that has a configured Management VID parameter and Device Type
parameter set to SM, you are automatically removing the AP from the Management
VLAN. The following procedure enables you to successfully analyze the spectrum and
return to management via the VLAN feature. In many cases, it is advisable to use this
procedure to

1. transform all APs in a cluster into SMs.
2. perform spectrum analysis without Management VLAN, one sector at a time.
3. return all APs in the cluster to their Management VLAN for access.

To transform a VLAN-enabled AP into an SM for spectrum analysis and then return the
device to an AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 31: Using the Spectrum Analyzer in AP feature, VLAN enabled
1. Access the VLAN-enabled AP through its Management VLAN.
NOTE: How you do this depends on your local configuration.
2. Access the General tab of the Configuration page in the AP.
3. Set the Device Setting parameter to SM.
RESULT: Connectivity to the module is lost.
6. Access the module without using the Management VLAN.
NOTE: How you do this depends on your local configuration. You may need to
connect to a different, non-tagging port of the VLAN switch in your NOC.
7. Click the Tools navigation link on the left side of the Home page.
8. Click the Spectrum Analyzer tab.
NOTE: If you simply click the Enable button on the Spectrum Analyzer tab, the
display may include fewer than all frequencies that are detectable, especially in a
band, such as 5.4 GHz, where the number of available center channels is great.
If you then click the Enable button a second time or set the
Webpage Auto Update parameter in the Configuration => General tab to a few
seconds, then the display will include the entire spectrum.
9. Either set the Webpage Auto Update parameter in the Configuration => General
tab to a few seconds or repeatedly click the Enable button.
RESULT: The module enters the scan mode.
10. When you are finished analyzing the spectrum, click the Disable button.
11. In the left-side navigation links, click Configuration.
13. Set the Device Setting parameter to AP.
RESULT: Connectivity to the module is lost.

376 Issue 1, May 2010


16. Access the AP through its Management VLAN.
NOTE: How you do this depends on your local configuration. You may need to
connect to the appropriate tagging port of the VLAN switch in your NOC.
end of procedure

21.2 CONSIDERING SOFTWARE RELEASE COMPATIBILITY
Within the same network, modules can operate on multiple software releases. However,
the features that can be enabled are limited to those that the earliest software supports.

21.2.1 Designations for Hardware in Radios
Documentation refers to hardware series (for example, Series P9). Releases 8 and later
requires APs, BHs, and AES SMs to be Series P9 or later hardware. The correlation
between hardware series and the MAC addresses of the radio modules is provided in
Table 60.

Table 60: Hardware series by MAC address

Hardware Series
Radio
Frequency P7 or P8 P9 or Later
Band in These MAC in These MAC
Range Addresses Addresses
900 None All
2.4 ≤ 0A003E20672B ≥ 0A003E20672C
5.2 ≤ 0A003E00F4E3 ≥ 0A003E00F4E4
5.4 None All
5.7 ≤ 0A003EF12AFE ≥ 0A003EF12AFF

Differences in capabilities among these hardware series are summarized in Table 61.

Table 61: Hardware series differences

Availability per
Capability Hardware Series
P7 P8 P9, P10, or P11
Auto-sense Ethernet cable scheme no yes yes
Support CMMmicro no yes yes
Support CMM4 no yes yes
Support hardware scheduling in APs no no yes
Support 2X operation in APs and SMs no no yes

NOTES:
An SM of P7 or P8 series requires an FPGA load through CNUT for
access to hardware scheduling, and then only at 1X operation. An AP
of P7 or P8 series cannot perform hardware scheduling.

Issue 1, May 2010 377


CAP 130 P9 APs provide higher throughput and lower latency than earlier series APs
and support configuring the high-priority channel per SM. CAP 120 APs do not provide
the higher throughput and lower latency, but they do support configuring the high-priority
channel per SM.

21.2.2 MIB File Set Compatibility
Although MIB files are text files (not software), they define objects associated with
configurable parameters and indicators for the module and its links. In each release,
some of these parameters and indicators are not carried forward from the previous
release, and some parameters and indicators are introduced or changed.

For this reason, use the MIB files from your download to replace previous MIB files in
conjunction with your software upgrades, even if the file names are identical to those of
your previous files. Date stamps on the MIB files distinguish the later set.

21.3 REDEPLOYING MODULES
Successfully redeploying a module may involve

◦ maintaining full and accurate records of modules being redeployed from
warehouse stock.
◦ exercising caution about
− software compatibility. For example, whether desired features can be
enabled with the redeployed module in the network.
− procedural handling of the module. For example
◦ whether to align the SM or BHS by power level and jitter or by only jitter.
◦ whether the module auto-senses the Ethernet cable connector scheme.
− hardware compatibility; for example, where a CMMmicro is deployed.
− the value of each configurable parameter. Whether all are compatible in the
new destination.
◦ remembering to use auto discovery to add the redeployed SM to the network
in Prizm.

21.3.1 Wiring to Extend Network Sync
The following procedure can be used to extend network sync by one additional hop, as
described under Passing Sync in an Additional Hop on Page 99. Where a collocated
module receives sync over the air, the collocated modules can be wired to pass the sync
as follows:

Procedure 32: Extending network sync
1. Connect the GPS Utility ports of the collocated modules using a sync cable with
RJ-11 connectors.
2. Set the Sync Input parameter on the Configuration page of the collocated AP or
BH timing master to Sync to Received Signal (Timing Port).
3. Set the Frame Timing Pulse Gated parameter on the Configuration page of the
collocated SM or BH timing slave to Enable.
NOTE: This setting prevents interference in the event that the SM or BH timing
slave loses sync.
end of procedure

378 Issue 1, May 2010


22 SECURING YOUR NETWORK

22.1 ISOLATING APS FROM THE INTERNET
Ensure that the IP addresses of the APs in your network

◦ are not routable over the Internet.
◦ do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user.

RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three
blocks of IP addresses that are not routable over the Internet:

◦ /8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255.
◦ /16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255.
◦ /24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255.

22.2 ENCRYPTING RADIO TRANSMISSIONS
Motorola fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following forms of encryption
for security of the wireless link:

◦ BRAID–a security scheme that the cellular industry uses to authenticate wireless
devices.
◦ DES–Data Encryption Standard, an over-the-air link option that uses secret
56-bit keys and 8 parity bits.
◦ AES–Advanced Encryption Standard, an extra-cost over-the-air link option that
provides extremely secure wireless connections. AES uses 128-bit secret keys
as directed by the government of the U.S.A. AES is not exportable and requires
a special AP to process the large keys.

BRAID is a stream cipher that the TIA (Telecommunications Industry Association) has
standardized. Standard APs and SMs use BRAID encryption to
◦ calculate the per-session encryption key (independently) on each end of a link.
◦ provide the digital signature for authentication challenges.

22.2.1 DES Encryption
Standard modules provide DES encryption. DES performs a series of bit permutations,
substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. DES Encryption does not
affect the performance or throughput of the system.

22.2.2 AES Encryption
Motorola also offers fixed wireless broadband IP network products that provide AES
encryption. AES uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level
of security than DES. Because of this higher level of security, the government of the
U.S.A. controls the export of communications products that use AES (among which the
AES feature activation key is one) to ensure that these products are available in only
certain regions and by special permit.

Issue 1, May 2010 379


The distributor or reseller can advise service providers about current regional availability.
AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS) in the U.S.A. The National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST) in the U.S.A. has specified AES for significantly greater security than that which
DES provides. NIST selected the AES algorithm for providing the best combination of
security, performance, efficiency, implementation, and flexibility. NIST collaborates with
industry to develop and apply technology, measurements, and standards.

22.2.3 AES-DES Operability Comparisons
This section describes the similarities and differences between DES and AES products,
and the extent to which they may interoperate.

The DES AP and the DES BHM modules are factory-programmed to enable or disable
DES encryption. Similarly, the AES AP and the AES BHM modules are factory-
programmed to enable or disable AES encryption. In either case, the authentication key
entered in the Configuration page establishes the encryption key. For this reason,
the authentication key must be the same on each end of the link. See Authentication Key
on Page 280.

Feature Availability
AES products run the same software as DES products. Thus feature availability and
functionality are and will continue to be the same, regardless of whether AES encryption
is enabled. All interface screens are identical. However, when encryption is enabled on
the Configuration screen

◦ the AES product provides AES encryption.
◦ the DES product provides DES encryption.

AES and DES products use different FPGA (field-programmable gate array) loads.
However, the AES FPGA will be upgraded as needed to provide new features or services
similar to those available for DES products.

Canopy DES products cannot be upgraded to AES. To have the option of AES
encryption, the operator must purchase AES products.

Interoperability
AES and DES products do not interoperate when enabled for encryption. For example,
An AES AP with encryption enabled cannot communicate with DES SMs. Similarly, an
AES Backhaul timing master module with encryption enabled cannot communicate with a
DES Backhaul timing slave module.

However, if encryption is disabled, AES modules can communicate with DES modules.

380 Issue 1, May 2010


22.3 MANAGING MODULE ACCESS BY PASSWORDS

22.3.1 Adding a User for Access to a Module
From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the
name root, which initially requires no associated password. This is the same root
account that you may have used for access to the module by telnet or ftp. When you
upgrade a module

◦ an account is created in the name admin.
◦ both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used for access
to the module:
− the Full Access password, if one was set.
− the Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access
password was set.

IMPORTANT!
If you use Prizm, do not delete the root account from any module. If you use an
NMS that communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root
account from any module unless you first can confirm that the NMS does not rely
on the root account for access to the modules.

Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The
available levels are

◦ ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of
the root and admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one
of them creates.
◦ INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR
except that the installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of
any other user.
◦ GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status
tab, as shown in Figure 148, and can log in as a user.

From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin
account at the ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account => Change Users
Password tab. (If you configure only one of these, then the other will still require no
password for access into it and thus remain a security risk.) If you are intent on
configuring only one of them, delete the admin account. The root account is the only
account that CNUT uses to update and Prizm uses to manage the module.

Issue 1, May 2010 381


Figure 148: General Status tab view for GUEST-level account

An example of the Add User tab is displayed in Figure 149.

Figure 149: Add User tab of SM, example

After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to
the module GUI opens the view of GUEST level (Figure 148).

382 Issue 1, May 2010


22.3.2 Deleting a User from Access to a Module
The Account => Delete User tab provides a drop-down list of configured users from which
to select the user you want to delete.

Figure 150: Delete User tab of SM, example

Accounts that cannot be deleted are

◦ the current user's own account.
◦ the last remaining account of ADMINISTRATOR level.

22.3.3 Overriding Forgotten IP Addresses or Passwords on AP, SM, or BH
A small adjunctive product allows you to temporarily override some AP/SM/BH settings
and thereby regain control of the module. This override plug is needed for access to the
module in any of the following cases:

◦ You have forgotten either
− the IP address assigned to the module.
− the password that provides access to the module.
◦ The module has been locked by the No Remote Access feature. (See Denying
All Remote Access on Page 467 and Reinstating Remote Access Capability on
Page 467.)
◦ You want local access to a module that has had the 802.3 link disabled in the
Configuration page.

You can configure the module such that, when it senses the override plug, it responds by
either

◦ resetting the LAN1 IP address to 169.254.1.1, allowing access through the
default configuration without changing the configuration, whereupon you will be
able to view and reset any non-default values as you wish.
◦ resetting all configurable parameters to their factory default values.

Acquiring the Override Plug
You can either purchase or fabricate an override plug as follows. To purchase an
override plug for a nominal fee, order the plug at
http://www.best-tronics.com/motorola.htm. To fabricate an override plug, perform the
following steps.

Issue 1, May 2010 383


Procedure 33: Fabricating an override plug
1. Install an RJ-11 6-pin connector onto a 6-inch length of CAT 5 cable.
2. Pin out all 6-pins.
3. Short (solder together) Pins 4 and 6 on the other end. Do not connect any other
wires to anything. The result should be as shown in Figure 151.
end of procedure

Pin 1 → white / orange ← Pin 1
Pin 2 → white / green ← Pin 2
Pin 3 → white / blue ← Pin 3
Pin 4 → green ← Pin 6
Pin 5 → blue ← Pin 5
Pin 6 → orange ← Pin 4

Figure 151: RJ-11 pinout for the override plug

Using the Override Plug

IMPORTANT!
While the override plug is connected to a module, the module can neither
register nor allow registration of another module.

To regain access to the module, perform the following steps.

Procedure 34: Regaining access to a module
1. Insert the override plug into the RJ-11 GPS utility port of the module.
2. Power cycle by removing, then re-inserting, the Ethernet cable.
RESULT: The module boots with the default IP address of 169.254.1.1, password
fields blank, and all other configuration values as previously set.
3. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the boot to complete.
4. Remove the override plug.
5. Set passwords and IP address as desired.
6. Change configuration values if desired.
end of procedure

384 Issue 1, May 2010


22.4 REQUIRING SM AUTHENTICATION
Through the use of Prizm Release 2.0 or later, or BAM Release 2.1, you can enhance
network security by requiring SMs to authenticate when they register. Three keys and a
random number are involved in authentication as follows:

◦ factory-set key in each SM. Neither the subscriber nor the network operator can
view or change this key.
◦ authentication key, also known as authorization key and skey. This key matches
in the SM and AP as the Authentication Key parameter, and in the Prizm
database.
◦ random number, generated by Prizm or BAM and used in each attempt by an SM
to register and authenticate. The network operator can view this number.
◦ session key, calculated separately by the SM and Prizm or BAM, based on both
the authentication key (or, by default, the factory-set key) and the random
number. Prizm or BAM sends the session key to the AP. The network operator
cannot view this key.

None of the above keys is ever sent in an over-the-air link during an SM registration
attempt. However, with the assumed security risk, the operator can create and configure
the Authentication Key parameter. See Authentication Key on Page 280.

22.5 FILTERING PROTOCOLS AND PORTS
You can filter (block) specified protocols and ports from leaving the SM and entering the
network. This protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading or
probing by network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network, this
feature also provides a level of protection to users from each other.

Protocol and port filtering is set per SM. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering occurs
as packets leave the SM. If an SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets are
blocked from entering the SM and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of the
protocol stack on the SM.

22.5.1 Port Filtering with NAT Enabled
Where NAT is enabled, you can filter only the three user-defined ports. The following are
example situations in which you can configure port filtering where NAT is enabled.

◦ To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP
ports) for both the TCP and UDP protocols.
◦ To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162
(the SNMP ports) for both the TCP and UDP protocols.
NOTE: In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with
the protocol stack.

22.5.2 Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled
Where NAT is disabled, you can filter both protocols and the three user-defined ports.
Using the check boxes on the interface, you can either

◦ allow all protocols except those that you wish to block.
◦ block all protocols except those that you wish to allow.

Issue 1, May 2010 385


You can allow or block any of the following protocols:

◦ PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)
◦ Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
− SMB (Network Neighborhood)
− SNMP
− Up to 3 user-defined ports
− All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 152)
◦ Uplink Broadcast
◦ ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
◦ All others (see Figure 152)

BootP BootP
Client Server

IPv4
SNMP
Multicast

All Other IPv4

User User
Defined Defined
Port 1 Port 3

User
Defined SMB
Port 2

PPPoE ARP

All Others

Figure 152: Categorical protocol filtering

The following are example situations in which you can configure protocol filtering where
NAT is disabled:

◦ If you block a subscriber from only PPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains
access to all other protocols and all ports.
◦ If you block PPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast, and you also check the
All others selection, then only Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered.

The ports that are filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of
the SM are listed in Table 62. Further information is provided under Protocol Filtering Tab
of the SM on Page 288.

386 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 62: Ports filtered per protocol selections

Protocol
Port Filtered (Blocked)
Selected
Destination Ports 137 TCP and UDP,
SMB
138 UDP, 139 TCP, 445 TCP
Destination Ports 161 TCP and UDP,
SNMP
162 TCP and UDP
Bootp Client Source Port 68 UDP
Bootp Server Source Port 67 UDP

22.6 ENCRYPTING DOWNLINK BROADCASTS
An AP can be enabled to encrypt downlink broadcast packets such as the following:

◦ ARP
◦ NetBIOS
◦ broadcast packets containing video data on UDP.

The encryption used is DES for a DES module, and AES for an AES module. Before the
Encrypt Downlink Broadcast feature is enabled on the AP, air link security should be
enabled on the AP.

22.7 ISOLATING SMs
In an AP, you can prevent SMs in the sector from directly communicating with each other.
In CMMmicro Release 2.2 or later and the CMM4, you can prevent connected APs from
directly communicating with each other, which prevents SMs that are in different sectors
of a cluster from communicating with each other.

In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration
web page. In the drop-down menu for that parameter, you can configure the SM Isolation
feature by any of the following selections:

◦ Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication
between SMs.
◦ Block SM Packets from being forwarded. This prevents both
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication.
◦ Block and Forward SM Packets to Backbone. This not only prevents
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the
packets, which otherwise would have been handled SM to SM, through the
Ethernet port of the AP.

In the CMMmicro and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how you choose
to manage the port-based VLAN feature of the embedded switch, where you can switch
all traffic from any AP or BH to an uplink port that you specify. However, this is not packet
level switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs. See the VLAN Port Configuration
parameter in the dedicated user guide that supports the CMM product that you are
deploying.

Issue 1, May 2010 387


22.8 FILTERING MANAGEMENT THROUGH ETHERNET
You can configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port
from accessing the IP address of the SM. If you set the Ethernet Access Control
parameter to Enabled, then

◦ no attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, telnet, ftp,
or tftp) through Ethernet can succeed.
◦ any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address,
presuming that LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility
is set to Public, or by link from the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab in
the AP) is unaffected.

22.9 ALLOWING MANAGEMENT FROM ONLY SPECIFIED IP
ADDRESSES
The Security tab of the Configuration web page in the AP, SM, and BH includes the IP
Access Control parameter. You can specify one, two, or three IP addresses that should
be allowed to access the management interface (by http, SNMP, telnet, ftp, or tftp).

If you select

◦ IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP
address, even if the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated.
◦ IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed
Source IP 1 to 3 parameter, then management access is limited to the specified
address(es). If you intend to use Prizm to manage the element, then you must
ensure that the IP address of the Prizm server is listed here.

22.10 CONFIGURING MANAGEMENT IP BY DHCP
The IP tab in the Configuration web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network
Interface Configuration, DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP
configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) to be obtained through
DHCP instead of the values of those individual parameters. The setting of this DHCP
state parameter is also viewable, but is not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the
Home page.

In the SM, this parameter is settable

◦ in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled.
◦ in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the
Network Accessibility parameter in the IP tab is set to Public.

388 Issue 1, May 2010


23 MANAGING BANDWIDTH AND
AUTHENTICATION
This section provides a high-level description of bandwidth and authentication
management in a network. For more specific information, see the Motorola Canopy Prizm
Release 3.2 User Guide.

23.1 MANAGING BANDWIDTH WITHOUT BAM
Unless Prizm or BAM is deployed and is configured in the AP, bandwidth management is
limited to applying a single sustained data rate value (for uplink and for downlink) and a
single burst allocation value (for uplink and for downlink) to every SM that registers in
the AP.

23.2 BANDWIDTH AND AUTHENTICATION MANAGER (BAM)
SERVICES AND FEATURES
Prizm or BAM enables you to perform the following management operations on SMs:

◦ Change the key that the SMs need for authenticating.
◦ Temporarily suspend or reinstate a subscriber.
◦ Set burst size and data transfer rate caps for an SM or group of SMs.
◦ Use licensing to uncap an SM or group of SMs.
◦ List all ESNs that are associated with a specified VLAN ID.
◦ Associate or dissociate an SM or group of SMs with a specified VLAN ID.
◦ Set VLAN parameters.
◦ Toggle whether to send those VLAN parameters to the SMs.
◦ Set CIR parameters for low-priority and high-priority channel rates.
◦ Toggle whether to send those CIR parameters to the SMs.
◦ Toggle whether to enable the high-priority channel in the SMs.

23.2.1 Bandwidth Manager Capability
Prizm or BAM allows you to set bandwidth per SM for sustained rates and burst rates.
With this capability, the system allows both

◦ burst rates beyond those of many other broadband access solutions.
◦ control of average bandwidth allocation to prevent excessive bandwidth usage by
a subscriber.

All packet throttling occurs in the SMs and APs based on Quality of Service (QoS) data
that the Prizm or BAM server provides. No server processing power or network
messages are needed for packet throttling.

QoS management also supports marketing of broadband connections at various data
rates, for operator-defined groups of subscribers, and at various price points. This allows
you to meet customer needs at a price that the customer deems reasonable and
affordable.

Issue 1, May 2010 389


When Authentication Required is selected in the Security tab of the AP Configuration
web page and one or more Authentication Server is specified by IP address, bandwidth
management is expanded to apply uniquely specified sustained data rate and burst
allocation values to each SM registered in the AP. So, you can define differently priced
tiers of subscriber service.

Designing Tiered Subscriber Service Levels
Examples of levels of service that vary by bandwidth capability are provided in Table 63
and Table 64.

NOTE:
The speeds that these tables correlate to service levels are comparative
examples. Actual download times may be greater due to use of the bandwidth by
other SMs, congestion on the local network, congestion on the Internet, capacity
of the serving computer, or other network limitations.

Table 63: Example times to download for typical tiers of service with CAP 120

AP CAP 120
Equipment

SM CSM 120
Operation 1X
Max burst speed 4.4 Mbps
Service Type Premium Regular Basic
Example Settings

Sustained Downlink
5250 Kbps 1000 Kbps 256 Kbps
Data Rate
Sustained Uplink
1750 Kbps 500 Kbps 128 Kbps
Data Rate
Downlink and Uplink
500000 Kb 80000 Kb 40000 Kb
Burst Allocations
Web page <1 <1 <1
Download (sec)

5 MB 9 9 9
20 MB 36 80 470
50 MB 91 320 1400
300 MB 545 2320 9220

390 Issue 1, May 2010


Table 64: Example times to download for typical tiers of service with CAP 130

AP CAP 130
Equipment

SM CSM 130
Operation 1X 2X 2X
Max burst speed 5 Mbps 10 Mbps 10 Mbps
Service Type Premium Regular Basic Premium Regular Basic Premium
Sustained
5250 1000 256 5250 1000 256 2000
Example Settings

Downlink
Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps
Data Rate
Sustained Uplink 1750 500 128 1750 500 128 20000
Data Rate Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps Kbps
Downlink and
Uplink 500000 80000 40000 500000 80000 40000 500000
Burst Kb Kb Kb Kb Kb Kb Kb
Allocations
Web page <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1
Download (sec)

5 MB 8 8 8 4 4 4 4
20 MB 32 80 470 16 80 470 16
50 MB 80 320 1400 40 320 1400 40
300 MB 480 2320 9220 362 2320 9220 240

23.2.2 Authentication Manager Capability
Prizm or BAM allows you to set per AP a requirement that each SM registering to the AP
must authenticate. When Authentication Required is selected in the Security tab of the
AP Configuration web page and one or more Authentication Server is specified by IP
address, any SM that attempts to register to the AP is denied service if authentication
fails, such as (but not limited to) when no Prizm or BAM server is operating or when the
SM is not listed in the database.

If a Prizm or BAM server drops out of service where no redundant server exists

◦ an SM that attempts to register is denied service.
◦ an SM that is already in session remains in session

In a typical network, some SMs re-register daily (when subscribers power down the SMs,
for example), and others do not re-register in a period of several weeks. Whenever an
authentication attempt fails, the SM locks out of any other attempt to register itself to the
same AP for the next 15 minutes.

Issue 1, May 2010 391


24 MANAGING THE NETWORK FROM A
MANAGEMENT STATION (NMS)
SNMPv2 (Simple Network Management Protocol Version 2) can be used to manage and
monitor the modules under SMI (Structure of Management Information) specifications.
SMI specifies management information definitions in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation
One) language. SNMPv2 supports both 32-bit and 64-bit counters. The SMI for SNMPv2
is defined in RFC 1902 at http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1902.html.

24.1 ROLES OF HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE ELEMENTS

24.1.1 Role of the Agent
In SNMP, software on each managed device acts as the agent. The agent collects and
stores management information in ASN.1 format, in a structure that a MIB (management
information base) defines. The agent responds to commands to

◦ send information about the managed device.
◦ modify specific data on the managed device.

24.1.2 Role of the Managed Device
In SNMP, the managed device is the network element that operates on the agent
software. In the fixed wireless broadband IP network, this managed device is the module
(AP, SM, or BH). With the agent software, the managed device has the role of server in
the context of network management.

24.1.3 Role of the NMS
In SNMP, the NMS (network management station) has the role of client. An application
(manager software) operates on the NMS to manage and monitor the modules in the
network through interface with the agents.

24.1.4 Dual Roles for the NMS
The NMS can simultaneously act as an agent. In such an implementation, the NMS acts
as

◦ client to the agents in the modules, when polling for the agents for information
and sending modification data to the agents.
◦ server to another NMS, when being polled for information gathered from the
agents and receiving modification data to send to the agents.

24.1.5 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Commands
To manage a module, SNMPv2 supports the set command, which instructs the agent to
change the data that manages the module.

To monitor a network element, SNMPv2 supports

◦ the get command, which instructs the agent to send information about the
module to the manager in the NMS.
◦ traversal operations, which the manager uses to identify supported objects and to
format information about those objects into relational tables.

Issue 1, May 2010 393


In a typical network, the manager issues these commands to the agents of more than
one module (to all SMs in the operator network, for example).

24.1.6 Traps from the Agent
When a specified event occurs in the module, the agent initiates a trap, for which the
agent sends an unsolicited asynchronous message to the manager.

24.1.7 AP SNMP Proxy to SMs
When the AP receives from Prizm or an NMS an SNMP request for an SM, it is capable
of sending that request via proxy to the SM. In this case, the SM responds directly to
Prizm or the NMS. (The AP performs no processing on the response.)

24.2 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE (MIB)
The MIB, the SNMP-defined data structure, is a tree of standard branches that lead to
optional,
non-standard positions in the data hierarchy. The MIB contains both

◦ objects that SNMP is allowed to control (bandwidth allocation or access, for
example)
◦ objects that SNMP is allowed to monitor (packet transfer, bit rate, and error data,
for example).

The path to each object in the MIB is unique to the object. The endpoint of the path is the
object identifier.

24.2.1 Cascading Path to the MIB
The standard MIB hierarchy includes the following cascading branch structures:

◦ the top (standard body) level:
− ccitt (0)
− iso (1)
− iso-ccitt (2)
◦ under iso (1) above:
− standard (0)
− registration-authority (1)
− member-body (2)
− identified-organization (3)
◦ under identified-organization (3) above:
− dod (6)
− other branches
◦ under dod (6) above:
− internet (1)
− other branches

394 Issue 1, May 2010


◦ under internet (1) above:
− mgmt (2)
− private (4)
− other branches
◦ under mgmt (2) above: mib-2 (1) and other branches. (See MIB-II below.)

under private (4) above: enterprise (1) and other branches. (See Canopy
Enterprise MIB below.)

Beneath this level are non-standard branches that the enterprise may define.

Thus, the path to an object that is managed under MIB-II begins with the decimal string
1.3.6.1.2.1 and ends with the object identifier and instance(s), and the path to an object
that is managed under the Canopy Enterprise MIB begins with 1.3.6.1.4.1, and ends with
the object identifier and instance(s).

24.2.2 Object Instances
An object in the MIB can have either only a single instance or multiple instances, as
follows:

◦ a scalar object has only a single instance. A reference to this instance is
designated by .0, following the object identifier.
◦ a tabular object has multiple instances that are related to each other. Tables in
the MIB associate these instances. References to these instances typically are
designated by .1, .2, and so forth, following the object identifier.

24.2.3 Management Information Base Systems and Interface (MIB-II)
The standard MIB-II (Management Information Base systems and interface) objects are
programmed into the modules. To read this MIB, see Management Information Base for
Network Management of TCP/IP-based Internets: MIB II, RFC 1213 at
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1213.html.

The MIB-II standard categorizes each object as one of the types defined in Table 65.

Table 65: Categories of MIB-II objects

Objects in
category… Control or identify the status of…
system system operations in the module.
interfaces the network interfaces for which the module is configured.
ip Internet Protocol information in the module.
Internet Control Message Protocol information in the module.
icmp
(These messages flag IP problems and allow IP links to be tested.)
Transport Control Protocol information in the module (to control
tcp
and ensure the flow of data on the Internet).
User Datagram Protocol information in the module (for checksum
udp
and address).

Issue 1, May 2010 395


24.2.4 Canopy Enterprise MIB
The Canopy Enterprise MIB provides additional reporting and control, extending the
objects for any NMS that uses SNMP interaction. This MIB comprises five text files that
are formatted in standard ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One) language.

The installation tool for Prizm places this MIB into the
C:...PrizmInstallationDirectorymodulesmibs directory. The Prizm
server software expects to find its contents there.

To use this MIB with an NMS, perform the following steps.

Procedure 35: Installing the Canopy Enterprise MIB files
1. On the NMS, immediately beneath the root directory, create directory
mibviewer.
2. Immediately beneath the mibviewer directory, create directory canopymibs.
3. Download the following three standard MIB files from the Internet Engineering
Task Force at http://www.simpleweb.org/ietf/mibs into the
mibviewer/canopymibs directory on the NMS:
◦ SNMPv2-SMI.txt, which defines the Structure of Management Information
specifications.
◦ SNMPv2-CONF.txt, which allows macros to be defined for object group,
notification group, module compliance, and agent capabilities.
◦ SNMPv2-TC.txt, which defines general textual conventions.
4. Move the following files or the subset of these files from your software release
package directory into the mibviewer/canopymibs directory on the NMS (if
necessary, first download the software package from
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support by selecting the
Software Updates link on that web page:

396 Issue 1, May 2010


IMPORTANT!
Do not edit these MIB files in ASN.1. These files are intended for manipulation by
only the NMS. However, you can view these files through a commercially
available MIB viewer. Such viewers are listed under MIB Viewers on Page 410.

5. Download a selected MIB viewer into directory mibviewer.
6. As instructed by the user documentation that supports your NMS, import the
eight MIB files that are listed above.
end of procedure

24.3 CONFIGURING MODULES FOR SNMP ACCESS
Canopy modules provide the following Configuration web page parameters in the SNMP
tab. These govern SNMP access from the manager to the agent:

◦ Community String, which specifies the password for security between
managers and the agent.
◦ Accessing Subnet, which specifies the subnet mask that allows managers to
poll the agents.

Issue 1, May 2010 397


Canopy modules can also be configured to send traps to specified IP addresses, which
can be those of Prizm or NMS servers, for example. The parameter for this address is
named Trap Address.

24.4 OBJECTS DEFINED IN THE CANOPY ENTERPRISE MIB
The Canopy Enterprise MIB defines separate sets of objects for

◦ all radio modules
◦ APs and BH timing masters
◦ SMs and BH timing slaves
◦ CMMmicros
◦ CMM4s

NOTE:
The PTP 300, 400, 500, and 600 series wireless Ethernet bridges do not support
these objects.

24.4.1 AP, SM, and BH Objects
The objects that the Canopy Enterprise MIB defines for all APs, SMs, and BHs are listed
in Table 66.

Table 66: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for APs, SMs, and BHs

AP, SM, BH Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
addFreqList Integer manage
addVlanMember Integer manage
agingTimeout Integer manage
allowColocation Integer manage
allowVIDAccess Integer manage
antennaGain1 Integer manage
bhModulation Integer manage
bhTimingMode Integer manage
bHvlanEnable Integer manage
bridgeEnable Integer manage
bridgeEntryTimeout Integer manage
changeUsrPwd DisplayString manage
clearEventLog Integer manage
2
codePointn Integer manage

398 Issue 1, May 2010


Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
colorCode Integer manage
commStringROnly DisplayString manage
commStringRWrite DisplayString manage
deleteUser DisplayString manage
dfsEnable3 Integer manage
displayOnlyAccess DisplayString manage
dynamicLearning Integer manage
3
eirp Integer manage
extFilterDelay Integer manage
fecEnable Integer manage
frameType Integer manage
fullAccess DisplayString manage
gpsInput Integer manage
hiPriority Integer manage
3
hwsCompatibility Integer manage
ism Integer manage
lanDhcpState Integer manage
linkNegoSpeed DisplayString manage
lLDPBroadcastEnable Integer manage
managementVID Integer manage
5
mngtIPn IpAddress manage
powerControl Integer manage
reboot Integer manage
rebootIfRequired Integer manage
regionCode Integer manage
removeFreqList Integer manage
removeVlanMember Integer manage
russiaRegion Integer manage
saveFlash Integer manage
scheduling Integer manage
sessionTimeout Integer manage
setDefaultPlug Integer manage
snmpMibPerm Integer manage
5
subnetMaskn Integer manage

Issue 1, May 2010 399


Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
taggedFrame4 Integer manage
transmitterOP Integer manage
trapIPn5 IpAddress manage
twoXRate Integer manage
userAccessLevel Integer manage
userName DisplayString manage
userPassword DisplayString manage
vlanMemberSource Integer manage
webAutoUpdate Integer manage
accessLevel Integer monitor
antPolarization DisplayString monitor
boxDeviceType DisplayString monitor
boxDeviceTypeID DisplayString monitor
boxEncryption DisplayString monitor
boxFrequency DisplayString monitor
boxTemperature6 DisplayString monitor
dhcpLanIP IpAddress monitor
dhcpLanGateway IpAddress monitor
dhcpLanSubnetMask IpAddress monitor
dhcpRfPublicIP IpAddress monitor
dhcpRfPublicGateway IpAddress monitor
dhcpRfPublicSubnetMask IpAddress monitor
entryIndex Integer monitor
entryL2Index Integer monitor
etherLinkStatus DisplayString monitor
inSyncCount Integer monitor
lanDhcpStatus DisplayString monitor
neighborIndex Integer monitor
neighborIP DisplayString monitor
neighborMAC DisplayString monitor
neighborSiteName DisplayString monitor
outSyncCount Integer monitor
packetOverloadCounter DisplayString monitor
pass1Status DisplayString monitor

400 Issue 1, May 2010


Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
pass2Status DisplayString monitor
platformInfo DisplayString monitor
platformType Integer monitor
platformVer Integer monitor
pldVersion DisplayString monitor
pllOutLockCount Integer monitor
rfPublicDhcpStatus DisplayString monitor
swVersion DisplayString monitor
txCalFailure Integer monitor
userLoginName DisplayString monitor
userPswd DisplayString monitor
whispBoxBoot DisplayString monitor
whispBoxEsn WhispMACAddress monitor
whispBoxEvntLog EventString monitor
whispBoxFPGAVer DisplayString monitor
whispBoxSoftwareVer DisplayString monitor
whispBridgeAge Integer monitor
whispBridgeDesLuid WhispLUID monitor
3
whispBridgeCAM Integer monitor
whispBridgeExt Integer monitor
whispBridgeHash Integer monitor
whispBridgeMacAddr MacAddress monitor
whispBridgeTbErr Integer monitor
whispBridgeTbFree Integer monitor
whispBridgeTbUsed Integer monitor
whispVAge Integer monitor

Issue 1, May 2010 401


Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
whispVID Integer monitor
whispVType DisplayString monitor

NOTES:
1. For only DFS-capable radios.
2. Where n is any number, 0 through 63. codePoint0,
codePoint48, and codePoint56 can be only monitored.
3. Deprecated.
4. Replaced by frameType.
5. Where n is any number, 1 through 10.
6. The value of this object does not accurately reflect the
temperature inside the module for comparison with the
operating range. However, it can be helpful as one of many
troubleshooting indicators. Although modules no longer
report the Temperature field in the GUI, the agent in the
modules continues to support this object.

24.4.2 AP and BH Timing Master Objects
The objects that the Canopy Enterprise MIB defines for each AP and BH Timing Master
are listed in Table 67. The traps provided in this set of objects are listed under Traps
Provided in the Canopy Enterprise MIB on Page 410.

Table 67: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for APs and BH timing masters

AP, BHM Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
allowedIPAccess1 IpAddress manage
apBeaconInfo Integer manage
apTwoXRate Integer manage
asIP1 IpAddress manage
authKey DisplayString manage
authMode Integer manage
configSource Integer manage
dAcksReservHigh Integer manage
defaultGw IpAddress manage
1
dfsConfig Integer manage
dwnLnkData Integer manage

402 Issue 1, May 2010


AP, BHM Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
dwnLnkDataRate Integer manage
dwnLnkLimit Integer manage
encryptDwBroadcast Integer manage
encryptionMode Integer manage
gpsInput Integer manage
gpsTrap Integer manage
highPriorityUpLnkPct Integer manage
ipAccessFilterEnable Integer manage
lanIp IpAddress manage
lanMask IpAddress manage
limitFreqBand900 Integer manage
linkTestAction2 Integer manage
linkTestDuration Integer manage
linkTestLUID Integer manage
maxRange Integer manage
ntpServerIP IpAddress manage
numCtlSlots Integer manage
numCtlSlotsHW Integer manage
numCtlSlotsReserveHigh Integer manage
numDAckSlots Integer manage
numUAckSlots Integer manage
privateIp IpAddress manage
regTrap Integer manage
rfFreqCarrier Integer manage
rfFreqCaralt1 Integer manage
rfFreqCaralt2 Integer manage
scheduleWhitening Integer manage
sectorID Integer manage
sesHiDownCIR Integer manage
sesHiUpCIR Integer manage
sesLoDownCIR Integer manage
sesHiDownCIR Integer manage
smIsolation Integer manage
tslBridging Integer manage

Issue 1, May 2010 403


AP, BHM Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
txSpreading Integer manage
uAcksReservHigh Integer manage
untranslatedArp Integer manage
updateAppAddress IpAddress manage
upLnkDataRate Integer manage
upLnkLimit Integer manage
vlanEnable Integer manage
actDwnFragCount Gauge32 monitor
actDwnLinkIndex Integer monitor
actUpFragCount Gauge32 monitor
actUpLinkIndex Integer monitor
adaptRate DisplayString monitor
avgPowerLevel DisplayString monitor
dataSlotDwn Integer monitor
dataSlotUp Integer monitor
dataSlotUpHi Integer monitor
dfsStatus DisplayString monitor
dfsStatusPrimary DisplayString monitor
dfsStatusAlt1 DisplayString monitor
dfsStatusAlt2 DisplayString monitor
downLinkEff Integer monitor
downLinkRate Integer monitor
dwnLnkAckSlot Integer monitor
dwnLnkAckSlotHi Integer monitor
expDwnFragCount Gauge32 monitor
expUpFragCount Gauge32 monitor
fpgaVersion DisplayString monitor
gpsStatus DisplayString monitor
lastPowerLevel DisplayString monitor
linkAirDelay Integer monitor
linkAveJitter Integer monitor
linkDescr DisplayString monitor
linkESN PhysAddress monitor
linkInDiscards Counter32 monitor

404 Issue 1, May 2010


AP, BHM Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
linkInError Counter32 monitor
linkInNUcastPkts Counter32 monitor
linkInOctets Counter32 monitor
linkInUcastPkts Counter32 monitor
linkInUnknownProtos Counter32 monitor
linkLastJitter Integer monitor
linkLastRSSI Integer monitor
linkLUID Integer monitor
linkMtu Integer monitor
linkOutDiscards Counter32 monitor
linkOutError Counter32 monitor
linkOutNUcastPkts Counter32 monitor
linkOutOctets Counter32 monitor
linkOutQLen Gauge32 monitor
linkOutUcastPkts Counter32 monitor
linkRegCount Integer monitor
linkReRegCount Integer monitor
linkRSSI Integer monitor
linkSessState Integer monitor
linkSiteName DisplayString monitor
linkSpeed Gauge32 monitor
linkTestError DisplayString monitor
linkTestStatus DisplayString monitor
linkTimeOut Integer monitor
maxDwnLinkIndex Integer monitor
maxUpLinkIndex Integer monitor
numCtrSlot Integer monitor
numCtrSlotHi Integer monitor
PhysAddress PhysAddress monitor
1
radioSlicingAp Integer monitor
radioTxGain Integer monitor
regCount Integer monitor
sesDownlinkLimit Integer monitor
sesDownlinkRate Integer monitor

Issue 1, May 2010 405


AP, BHM Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
sesUplinkLimit Integer monitor
sesUplinkRate Integer monitor
sessionCount Integer monitor
softwareBootVersion DisplayString monitor
softwareVersion DisplayString monitor
testDuration Integer monitor
testLUID Integer monitor
upLinkEff Integer monitor
upLinkRate Integer monitor
upLnkAckSlot Integer monitor
upLnkAckSlotHi Integer monitor
whispGPSStats Integer monitor

NOTES:
1. Deprecated in Release 8.2 and later.
2. You can set to 1 to initiate a link test, but not 0 to stop.
The value 0 is only an indication of the idle link test state.

24.4.3 SM and BH Timing Slave Objects
The objects that the Canopy Enterprise MIB defines for each SM and BH Timing Slave
are listed in Table 68.

Table 68: Canopy Enterprise MIB objects for SMs and BH timing slaves

SM, BHS Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
allOtherIPFilter Integer manage
allOthersFilter Integer manage
alternateDNSIP IpAddress manage
arpCacheTimeout Integer manage
arpFilter Integer manage
authKey DisplayString manage
authKeyOption Integer manage
bCastMIR Integer manage
bootpcFilter Integer manage

406 Issue 1, May 2010


SM, BHS Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
bootpsFilter Integer manage
defaultGw IpAddress manage
dfsConfig1 Integer manage
dhcpClientEnable Integer manage
dhcpIPStart IpAddress manage
dhcpNumIPsToLease Integer manage
dhcpServerEnable Integer manage
dhcpServerLeaseTime Integer manage
dmzEnable Integer manage
dmzIP IpAddress manage
dnsAutomatic Integer manage
enable8023link Integer manage
ethAccessFilterEnable Integer manage
hiPriorityChannel Integer manage
hiPriorityDownlinkCIR Integer manage
hiPriorityUplinkCIR Integer manage
ingressVID Integer manage
ip4MultFilter Integer manage
ipAccessFilterEnable Integer manage
lanIp IpAddress manage
lanMask IpAddress manage
localIP IpAddress manage
lowPriorityDownlinkCIR Integer manage
lowPriorityUplinkCIR Integer manage
naptEnable Integer manage
naptPrivateIP IpAddress manage
naptPrivateSubnetMask IpAddress manage
naptPublicGatewayIP IpAddress manage
naptPublicIP IpAddress manage
naptPublicSubnetMask IpAddress manage
naptRFPublicGateway IpAddress manage
naptRFPublicIP IpAddress manage
naptRFPublicSubnetMask IpAddress manage
networkAccess Integer manage

Issue 1, May 2010 407


SM, BHS Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
port Integer manage
port1TCPFilter Integer manage
port1UDPFilter Integer manage
powerUpMode Integer manage
pppoeFilter Integer manage
prefferedDNSIP IpAddress manage
protocol Integer manage
radioDbmInt Integer manage
rfDhcpState Integer manage
rfScanList DisplayString manage
smbFilter Integer manage
snmpFilter Integer manage
tcpGarbageCollectTmout Integer manage
timingPulseGated Integer manage
twoXRate Integer manage
udpGarbageCollectTmout Integer manage
uplinkBCastFilter Integer manage
userDefinedPort1 Integer manage
userP1Filter Integer manage
activeRegion DisplayString monitor
adaptRate DisplayString monitor
airDelay Integer monitor
calibrationStatus DisplayString monitor
dhcpcdns1 IpAddress monitor

408 Issue 1, May 2010


SM, BHS Operation
Value Syntax
Object Name Allowed
dhcpCip IpAddress monitor
dhcpClientLease TimeTicks monitor
dhcpCSMask IpAddress monitor
dhcpDfltRterIP IpAddress monitor
dhcpDomName DisplayString monitor
dhcpServerTable DhcpServerEntry monitor
dhcpSip IpAddress monitor
hostIp IpAddress monitor
hostLease TimeTicks monitor
hostMacAddress PhysAddress monitor
jitter Integer monitor
radioDbm DisplayString monitor
1
radioSlicingSm Integer monitor
radioTxGain Integer monitor
radioTxPwr DisplayString monitor
registeredToAp DisplayString monitor
rssi Integer monitor
sessionStatus DisplayString monitor

NOTES:
1. Deprecated in Release 8.2 and later.

24.5 INTERFACE DESIGNATIONS IN SNMP
SNMP identifies the ports of the module as follows:

◦ Interface 1 represents the Ethernet interface of the module. To monitor the status
of Interface 1 is to monitor the traffic on the Ethernet interface.
◦ Interface 2 represents the RF interface of the module. To monitor the status of
Interface 2 is to monitor the traffic on the RF interface.

These interfaces can be viewed on the NMS through definitions that are provided in the
standard MIB files.

Issue 1, May 2010 409


24.6 TRAPS PROVIDED IN THE CANOPY ENTERPRISE MIB
Canopy modules provide the following SNMP traps for automatic notifications to the
NMS:

◦ coldStart, which signals that the SNMPv2 element is reinitializing itself and that
its configuration may have been altered.
◦ warmStart, which signals that the SNMPv2 element is reinitializing such that its
configuration is unaltered.
◦ authenticationFailure, which signals that the SNMPv2 element has received a
protocol message that is not properly authenticated (contingent on the
snmpEnableAuthenTraps object setting).
◦ linkDown, as defined in RFC 1573
◦ linkUp, as defined in RFC 1573
◦ egpNeighborLoss, as defined in RFC 1213
◦ whispGPSInSync, which signals a transition from not synchronized to
synchronized.
◦ whispGPSOutSync, which signals a transition from synchronized to not
synchronized.
◦ whispRegComplete, which signals registration completed.
◦ whispRegLost, which signals registration lost.
◦ whispRadarDetected, which signals that the one-minute scan has been
completed, radar has been detected, and the radio will shutdown.
◦ whispRadarEnd, which signals that the one-minute scan has been completed,
radar has not been detected, and the radio will resume normal operation.

NOTE:
The PTP 300, 400, 500 600 series wireless Ethernet bridges do not support the
traps listed above.

24.7 MIB VIEWERS
Any of several commercially available MIB viewers can facilitate management of these
objects through SNMP. Some are available as open source software. Motorola does not
endorse, support, or discourage the use of any these viewers.

To assist end users in this area, Motorola offers a starter guide for one of these
viewers—MRTG (Multi Router Traffic Grapher). This starter guide is titled
Canopy Network Management with MRTG: Application Note, and is available in the
Document Library section under Support at
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support. MRTG software is available at
http://mrtg.hdl.com.

410 Issue 1, May 2010


Other MIB viewers are available and/or described at the following web sites:

http://ns3.ndgsoftware.com/Products/NetBoy30/mibbrowser.html
http://www.adventnet.com/products/snmputilities/
http://www.dart.com/samples/mib.asp
http://www.edge-technologies.com/webFiles/products/nvision/index.cfm
http://www.ipswitch.com/products/whatsup/monitoring.html
http://www.koshna.com/products/KMB/index.asp
http://www.mg-soft.si/mgMibBrowserPE.html
http://www.mibexplorer.com
http://www.netmechanica.com/mibbrowser.html
http://www.networkview.com
http://www.newfreeware.com/search.php3?q=MIB+browser
http://www.nudesignteam.com/walker.html
http://www.oidview.com/oidview.html
http://www.solarwinds.net/Tools
http://www.stargus.com/solutions/xray.html
http://www.totilities.com/Products/MibSurfer/MibSurfer.htm

Issue 1, May 2010 411


25 USING THE CANOPY NETWORK UPDATER TOOL
(CNUT)
The Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) manages and automates the software and
firmware upgrade process for a Canopy radio, CMMmicro, or CMM4 (but not its 14-port
switch) across the network. This eliminates the need for an administrator to visit each
radio in the network (or each AP while using the Autoupdate feature) to upgrade the
modules.

25.1 CNUT FUNCTIONS
The Canopy Network Updater Tool

◦ automatically discovers all network elements
◦ executes a UDP command that initiates and terminates the Autoupdate mode
within APs. This command is both secure and convenient:
− For security, the AP accepts this command from only the IP address that you
specify in the Configuration page of the AP.
− For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration
parameter in the APs to the IP address of the Network Updater server when
the server performs any of the update commands.
◦ allows you to choose among updating
− your entire network.
− only elements that you select.
− only network branches that you select.
◦ provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script that
− you define.
− Motorola supplies.

25.2 NETWORK ELEMENT GROUPS
With the Canopy Network Updater Tool, you can identify element groups composed of
network elements that you select. Identifying these element groups

◦ organizes the display of elements (for example, by region or by AP cluster).
◦ allows you to
− perform an operation on all elements in the group simultaneously.
− set group-level defaults for telnet or ftp password access and SNMP
Community String (defaults that can be overridden in an individual element
when necessary).

If you have both FSK and OFDM modules in your network, then you must either ensure
that they all run Release 9.4.2 or that you select these two types of modules into
separate element groups because they are not running on the same software.

Issue 1, May 2010 413


25.3 NETWORK LAYERS
A typical network contains multiple layers of elements, each layer lying farther from the
Point of Presence. For example, SMs are behind an AP and thus, in this context, at a
lower layer than the AP. Correctly portraying these layers in Network Updater is essential
so that Network Updater can perform radio and AP cluster upgrades in an appropriate
order.

IMPORTANT!
Correct layer information ensures that Network Updater does not command an
AP that is behind another AP/SM pair (such as in a remote AP installation) to
perform an upgrade at the same time as the SM that is feeding the AP. If this
occurs, then the remote AP loses network connection during the upgrade (when
the SM in front of the AP completes its upgrade and reboots).

25.4 SCRIPT ENGINE
Script Engine is the capability in Network Updater that executes any user-defined script
against any network element or element group. This capability is useful for network
management, especially for scripts that you repetitively execute across your network.

The Autodiscovery capability in Network Updater finds all of your network elements.
This comprehensive discovery

◦ ensures that, when you intend to execute a script against all elements, the script
is indeed executed against all elements.
◦ maintains master lists of elements (element groups) against which you
selectively execute scripts.

The following scripts are included with CNUT:

◦ AP Data Import from BAM
◦ AP Data Export to BAM
◦ Set Autoupdate Address on APs
◦ Set SNMP Accessibility
◦ Reset Unit

25.5 SOFTWARE DEPENDENCIES FOR CNUT
CNUT functionality requires

◦ one of the following operating systems
− Windows® 2000
− Windows Server 2003
− Windows XP
− Red Hat Enterprise Linux Version 4
◦ Java™ Runtime Version 2.0 or later (installed by the CNUT installation tool)

414 Issue 1, May 2010


25.6 CNUT DOWNLOAD
CNUT can be downloaded together with each system release that supports CNUT.
Software for these system releases is available from
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/ as either

◦ a .zip file for use without the CNUT application.
◦ a .pkg file that the CNUT application can open.

Issue 1, May 2010 415


26 USING INFORMATIONAL TABS IN THE GUI

26.1 VIEWING GENERAL STATUS (ALL)
See

◦ General Status Tab of the AP on Page 206.
◦ General Status Tab of the SM on Page 202.
◦ General Status Tab of the BHM on Page 221.
◦ Beginning the Test of Point-to-Point Links on Page 216.

26.2 VIEWING SESSION STATUS (AP, BHM)
The Session Status tab in the Home page provides information about each SM that has
registered to the AP. This information is useful for managing and troubleshooting a
system. This tab also includes the current active values on each SM for MIR, CIR, and
VLAN, as well as the source of these values, representing the SM itself, BAM, or the AP
and cap.

An example of the Session Status tab is displayed in Figure 153.

Figure 153: Session Status tab data, example

An additional example and explanations of the fields on this tab are provided in Session
Status Tab of the AP on Page 196.

Issue 1, May 2010 417


26.3 VIEWING REMOTE SUBSCRIBERS (AP, BHM)
See

◦ Remote Subscribers Tab of the AP on Page 201.
◦ Continuing the Test of Point-to-Point Links on Page 220.

26.4 INTERPRETING MESSAGES IN THE EVENT LOG (ALL)
Each line in the Event Log of a module Home page begins with a time and date stamp.
However, some of these lines wrap as a combined result of window width, browser
preferences, and line length. You may find this tab easiest to use if you widen the window
until all lines are shown as beginning with the time and date stamp.

26.4.1 Time and Date Stamp
The time and date stamp reflect either

◦ GPS time and date directly or indirectly received from the CMM.
◦ the running time and date that you have set in the Time & Date web page.

NOTE:
In the Time & Date web page, if you have left any time field or date field unset
and clicked the Set Time and Date button, then the time and date default to
00:00:00 UT : 01/01/00.
A reboot causes the preset time to pause or, in some cases, to run in reverse.
Additionally, a power cycle resets the running time and date to the default
00:00:00 UT : 01/01/00. Thus, whenever either a reboot or a power cycle has
occurred, you should reset the time and date in the Time & Date web page of
any module that is not set to receive sync.

26.4.2 Event Log Data Collection
The collection of event data continues through reboots and power cycles. When the
buffer allowance for event log data is reached, the system adds new data into the log and
discards an identical amount of the oldest data.

Each line that contains the expression WatchDog flags an event that was both

◦ considered by the system software to have been an exception
◦ recorded in the preceding line.

Conversely, a Fatal Error() message flags an event that is recorded in the next line. Some
exceptions and fatal errors may be significant and require either operator action or
technical support.

An example portion of Event Log data is displayed in Figure 154. In this figure (unlike in
the Event Log web page)

◦ lines are alternately highlighted to show the varying length of wrapped lines.
◦ the types of event messages (which follow the time and date stamps and the file
and line references) are underscored as quoted in Table 69 and Table 70.

418 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 154: Event Log tab data, example

Issue 1, May 2010 419


26.4.3 Messages that Flag Abnormal Events
The messages listed in Table 69 flag abnormal events and, case by case, may signal the
need for corrective action or technical support. See Troubleshooting on Page 479.

Table 69: Event Log messages for abnormal events

Event Message Meaning
Expected LUID = 6 Actual Something is interfering with the control messaging of the
LUID = 7 module. Also ensure that you are using shielded cables to
minimize interference. Consider trying different frequency
options to eliminate or reduce interference.
FatalError() The event recorded on the line immediately beneath this
message triggered the Fatal Error().
Loss of GPS Sync Pulse Module has lost GPS sync signal.
Machine Check Exception This is a symptom of a possible hardware failure. If this is
a recurring message, begin the RMA process for the
module.
RcvFrmNum = 0x00066d Something is interfering with the control messaging of the
ExpFrmNum = 0x000799 module. Also ensure that you are using shielded cables to
minimize interference. Consider trying different frequency
options to eliminate or reduce interference.
System Reset Exception -- External
The unit lost power or was power cycled.
Hard Reset
System Reset Exception -- External The event recorded on the preceding line triggered this
Hard Reset WatchDog WatchDog message.

26.4.4 Messages that Flag Normal Events
The messages listed in Table 70 record normal events and typically do not signal a need
for any corrective action or technical support.

Table 70: Event Log messages for normal events

Event Message Meaning
Acquired GPS Sync Pulse. Module has acquired GPS sync signal.
FPGA Features Type of encryption.
FPGA Version FPGA (JBC) version in the module.
GPS Date/Time Set Module is now on GPS time.
PowerOn reset from Telnet
Reset command was issued from a telnet session.
command line
Reboot from Webpage Module was rebooted from management interface.
Software Boot Version Boot version in the module.
Software Version The software release and authentication method for the unit.
System Log Cleared Event log was manually cleared.

420 Issue 1, May 2010


26.5 VIEWING THE NETWORK INTERFACE TAB (ALL)

Figure 155: Network Interface tab of AP, example

Figure 156: Network Interface tab of SM, example

In any module, the LAN1 Network Interface section of this tab displays the defined
Internet Protocol scheme for the Ethernet interface to the module. In slave devices, this
tab also provides an RF Public Network Interface section, which displays the Internet
Protocol scheme defined for network access through the master device (AP or BHM).

Issue 1, May 2010 421


26.6 VIEWING THE LAYER 2 NEIGHBORS TAB (ALL)
An example of the Layer 2 Neighbors tab is shown in Figure 157.

Figure 157: Layer 2 Neighbors tab, example

In the Layer 2 Neighbors tab, a module reports any device from which it has received a
message in Link Layer Discovery Protocol within the previous two minutes. Given the
frequency of LLDP messaging, this means that the connected device will appear in this
tab 30 seconds after it is booted and remain until two minutes after its shutdown. This tab
in the SM provides an efficient view of whether a connected remote AP is still
discoverable by Prizm (still reporting its multicast address to the SM). See also Multicast
Destination Address on Page 259.

422 Issue 1, May 2010


26.7 INTERPRETING RADIO STATISTICS IN THE SCHEDULER TAB
(ALL)
Statistics for the Scheduler are displayed as shown in Figure 158.

Figure 158: Scheduler tab of BHM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 423


26.8 VIEWING THE LIST OF REGISTRATION FAILURES (AP, BHM)
An example of the SM Registration Failures tab is displayed in Figure 159.

Figure 159: SM Registration Failures tab of AP, example

The SM/BHS Registration Failures tab identifies SMs (or BHSs) that have recently
attempted and failed to register to this AP (or BHM). With its time stamps, these
instances may suggest that a new or transient source of interference exists.

424 Issue 1, May 2010


26.9 INTERPRETING DATA IN THE BRIDGING TABLE (ALL)
An example of the Bridging Table tab is displayed in Figure 160.

Figure 160: Bridging Table tab of AP, example

If NAT (network address translation) is not active on the SM, then the Bridging Table tab
provides the MAC address of all devices that are attached to registered SMs (identified
by LUIDs). The bridging table allows data to be sent to the correct module as follows:

◦ For the AP, the uplink is from RF to Ethernet. Thus, when a packet arrives in the
RF interface to the AP, the AP reads the MAC address from the inbound packet
and creates a bridging table entry of the source MAC address on the other end of
the RF interface.
◦ For the SM, BHM, and BHS, the uplink is from Ethernet to RF. Thus, when a
packet arrives in the Ethernet interface to one of these modules, the module
reads the MAC address from the inbound packet and creates a bridging table
entry of the source MAC address on the other end of the Ethernet interface.

26.10 TRANSLATION TABLE (SM)
When Translation Bridging is enabled in the AP, each SM keeps a table mapping MAC
addresses of devices attached to the AP to IP addresses, as otherwise the mapping of
end-user MAC addresses to IP addresses is lost. (When Translation Bridging is enabled,
an AP modifies all uplink traffic originating from registered SMs such that the source MAC
address of every packet will be changed to that of the SM which bridged the packet in the
uplink direction.)

Issue 1, May 2010 425


An example of the Translation Table is displayed in Figure 161.

Figure 161: Translation Table tab of SM, example

26.11 INTERPRETING DATA IN THE ETHERNET TAB (ALL)
The Ethernet tab of the Statistics web page reports TCP throughput and error information
for the Ethernet connection of the module.

Figure 162: Ethernet tab of BHM, example

The Ethernet tab displays the following fields.

inoctets Count
This field displays how many octets were received on the interface, including those that
deliver framing information.

inucastpkts Count
This field displays how many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered to a
higher-layer protocol.

426 Issue 1, May 2010


Innucastpkts Count
This field displays how many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-
multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

indiscards Count
This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded without errors that would
have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol. (Some of these packets may
have been discarded to increase buffer space.)

inerrors Count
This field displays how many inbound packets contained errors that prevented their
delivery to a higher-layer protocol.

inunknownprotos Count
This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.

outoctets Count
This field displays how many octets were transmitted out of the interface, including those
that deliver framing information.

outucastpkts Count
This field displays how many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested
transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number includes those that were
discarded or not sent.

outnucastpkts Count
transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address.
The number includes those that were discarded or not sent.

outdiscards Count
This field displays how many outbound packets were discarded without errors that would
have prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets may have been discarded to
increase buffer space.)

outerrrors Count
This field displays how many outbound packets contained errors that prevented their
transmission.

RxBabErr
This field displays how many receiver babble errors occurred.

EthBusErr
This field displays how many Ethernet bus errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

CRCError
This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

RxOverrun
This field displays how many receiver overrun errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

Issue 1, May 2010 427


Late Collision
This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the Ethernet controller. A normal
collision occurs during the first 512 bits of the frame transmission. A collision that occurs
after the first 512 bits is considered a late collision.

IMPORTANT!
A late collision is a serious network problem because the frame being transmitted
is discarded. A late collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch between
duplex configurations at the ends of a link segment.

RetransLimitExp
This field displays how many times the retransmit limit has expired.

TxUnderrun
This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.

CarSenseLost
This field displays how many carrier sense lost errors occurred on the Ethernet controller.

26.12 INTERPRETING RF CONTROL BLOCK STATISTICS IN THE RADIO
TAB (ALL)

Figure 163: Radio tab of Statistics page in SM, example

The Radio tab of the Statistics page displays the following fields.

inoctets Count

428 Issue 1, May 2010


inucastpkts Count

Innucastpkts Count

indiscards Count

inerrors Count

inunknownprotos Count
This field displays how many inbound packets were discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.

outoctets Count

outucastpkts Count

outnucastpkts Count

outdiscards Count

outerrrors Count
transmission.

Issue 1, May 2010 429


26.13 INTERPRETING DATA IN THE VLAN TAB (ALL)
The VLAN tab in the Statistics web page provides a list of the most recent packets that
were filtered because of VLAN membership violations. An example of the VLAN tab is
shown in Figure 164.

Figure 164: VLAN tab of AP, example

Interpret entries under Most Recent Filtered Frames as follows:

◦ Unknown—This should not occur. Contact Technical Support.
◦ Only Tagged—The packet was filtered because the configuration is set to
accept only packets that have an 802.1Q header, and this packet did not.
◦ Ingress—When the packet entered through the wired Ethernet interface,
the packet was filtered because it indicated an incorrect VLAN membership.
◦ Local Ingress—When the packet was received from the local TCP/IP stack,
This should not occur. Contact Technical Support.
◦ Egress—When the packet attempted to leave through the wired Ethernet
interface, the packet was filtered because it indicated an incorrect VLAN
membership.
◦ Local Egress—When the packet attempted to reach the local TCP/IP stack,

430 Issue 1, May 2010


26.14 DATA VC (ALL)
An example of a Data VC tab is displayed in Figure 165.

Figure 165: Data VC tab of BHM, example

The Data VC tab page displays the following fields.

VC
This field displays the virtual channel number. Low priority channels start at VC18 and
count up. High priority channels start at VC255 and count down. If one VC is displayed,
the high-priority channel is disabled. If two are displayed, the high-priority channel is
enabled.

CoS
This field displays the Class of Service for the virtual channel. The low priority channel is
a CoS of 00, and the high priority channel is a CoS of 01. CoS of 02 through 07 are not
currently used.

inoctets

inucastpkts

innucastpkts

indiscards

inerrors

Issue 1, May 2010 431


outoctets

outucastpkts

outnucastpkts

outdiscards

outerrrors
transmission.

Queue Overflo
This is a count of packets that were discarded because the queue for the VC was already
full.

26.15 VIEWING SUMMARY INFORMATION IN THE OVERLOAD TAB
(ALL)
The Overload tab displays statistics on packet overload and resultant packet discards.
An example of the Overload tab is shown in Figure 166.

Figure 166: Overload tab of BHM, example

Unlike the other fields, the Total Packets Overload Count is expressed in only this tab.
It is not a count of how many packets have been lost, but rather of how many discard
events (packet loss bursts) have been detected.

432 Issue 1, May 2010


26.16 FILTER (SM, BHS)
The Filter tab displays statistics on packets that have been filtered (dropped) due to the
filters set on the Protocol Filtering tab. An example of the Filter tab is shown in
Figure 167.

Figure 167: Filter tab of SM, example

26.17 ARP (SM, BHS)
The ARP tab in a slave module correlated the IP address of the Ethernet-connected
device to its MAC address and provides data about the connection. An example of an
ARP tab is shown in Figure 168.

Figure 168: ARP tab of BHS, example

26.18 NAT STATS (SM)
When NAT is enabled on an SM, statistics are kept on the Public and Private (WAN and
LAN) sides of the NAT, and displayed on the NAT Stats tab. An example of the NAT
Stats tab is shown in Figure 169.

Issue 1, May 2010 433


Figure 169: Nat Stats tab of SM, example

26.18.1 NAT DHCP Statistics (SM)
When NAT is enabled on an SM with DHCP client (DHCP selected as the
Connection Type of the WAN interface) and/or DHCP Server, statistics are kept for
packets transmitted, received, and tossed, as well as a table of lease information for the
DHCP server (Assigned IP Address, Hardware Address, and Lease Remained/State).
An example of the NAT DHCP Statistics tab is shown in Figure 170.

Figure 170: NAT DHCP Statistics tab of SM, example

26.18.2 Interpreting Data in the GPS Status Page (AP, BHM)
The GPS Status tab is only displayed when the Sync Input is set to Sync to Received
Signal (Timing Port), which is the configuration desired when connecting an AP or BHM
to a CMM2. See Sync Input on Page 228.

The page displays information similar to that available on the web pages of a CMM,
including Pulse Status, GPS Time and Date, Satellites Tracked, Available Satellites,
Height, Latitude, and Longitude. This page also displays the state of the antenna in the
Antenna Connection field as

◦ Unknown—Shown for early CMM2s.
◦ OK—Shown for later CMM2s where no problem is detected in the signal.
◦ Overcurrent—Indicates a coax cable or connector problem.
◦ Undercurrent—Indicates a coax cable or connector problem.

434 Issue 1, May 2010


IMPORTANT!
If Unknown is displayed where a later CMM2 is deployed, then the connection is
not working but the reason is unknown.

This information may be helpful in a decision of whether to climb a tower to diagnose a
perceived antenna problem.

26.19 ACCESSING PPPOE STATISTICS ABOUT CUSTOMER ACTIVITIES
(SM)
When the PPPoE feature has been enabled in the SM (see PPPoE Tab of the SM on
Page 289), the PPPoE statistics provide data about the activities of the customer. An
example of the PPPoE tab in the SM is displayed in Figure 171.

Figure 171: PPPoE tab of SM, example

Issue 1, May 2010 435


27 USING TOOLS IN THE GUI

27.1 USING THE SPECTRUM ANALYZER TOOL (SM, BHS)
See Monitoring the RF Environment on Page 373.

27.2 USING THE ALIGNMENT TOOL (SM, BHS)
An example of the Alignment Tool tab in an SM or BHS is displayed in Figure 172.

Figure 172: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for a good link

Figure 173: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for an acceptable link

Figure 174: Alignment Tool tab of SM, example for an unacceptable link

Issue 1, May 2010 437


Proper alignment must achieve all of the following indications for an acceptable link
between the modules:

◦ power level of not less than -75dBm
◦ jitter value between 0 and 4
◦ uplink and downlink efficiency greater than 90%, except as described under
Comparing Efficiency in 1X Operation to Efficiency in 2X Operation on Page 136.

IMPORTANT!
If any of these values is not achieved, a link can be established but will manifest
occasional problems.

The relationship between Air Delay and link quality is described under AP-SM Links on
Page 101.

27.3 USING THE LINK CAPACITY TEST TOOL (ALL)
Examples of Link Capacity Test tabs are displayed in Figure 175 and Figure 176.

Figure 175: Link Capacity Test tab of BHM, example

438 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 176: Link Capacity Test tab with 1522-byte packet length, example

The Link Capacity Test page allows you to measure the throughput and efficiency of the
RF link between two modules. Many factors, including packet length, affect throughput.
The Link Capacity Test tab contains the settable parameter Packet Length with a range
of 64 to 1522 bytes. This allows you to compare throughput levels that result from various
packet sizes.

For example, the same link was measured in the same time frame at a packet length of
64 bytes. The results are shown in Figure 177.

Issue 1, May 2010 439


Figure 177: Link Capacity Test tab with 64-byte packet length, example

To test a link, perform the following steps.

Procedure 36: Performing a Link Capacity Test
1. Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools web page of the module.
2. If you are running this test from an AP
a. and you want to see Maximum Information Rate (MIR) data for the SM
whose link you will be testing, then perform the following steps:
(1) For Link Test with MIR, select Enabled.
(2) Click the Save Changes button.
(3) Click the Reboot button.
(4) Similarly, set the Link Test with MIR parameter in the SM to Enabled.
NOTE: If this parameter is enabled on one end of the link and disabled
on the other, the results are misleading.
b. use the drop-down list to select the SM whose link you want to test.
3. Type into the Duration field how long (in seconds) the RF link should be tested.
4. Type into the Packet Length field the packet length at which you want the test
conducted.

440 Issue 1, May 2010


5. Type into the Number of Packets field either
◦ the number of packets (1 to 64) for the test.
◦ 0 to flood the link for as long as the test is in progress.
6. Click the Start Test button.
7. In the Current Results Status block of this tab, view the results of the test.
8. Optionally
a. change the packet length.
b. repeat Steps 5 and 6.
c. compare the results to those of other tests.
9. If you are finished with the link tests, and if you had Link Test with MIR enabled
on both ends, disable it on both ends.
NOTE: This safeguards against leaving it enabled on one and not the other.
end of procedure

The key fields in the test results are

◦ Downlink RATE and Uplink RATE, expressed in bits per second
◦ Downlink Efficiency and Uplink Efficiency, expressed as a percentage

A link is acceptable only if the efficiencies of the link test are greater than 90% in both the
uplink and downlink direction, except during 2X or 3X operation. See Using Link
Efficiency to Check FSK Received Signal Quality on Page 136. Whenever you install a
new link, execute a link test to ensure that the efficiencies are within recommended
guidelines.

The AP downlink data percentage, slot settings, other traffic in the sector, and the quality
of the RF environment all affect throughput. However, a Maximum Information Rate
(MIR) throttle or cap on the SM does not affect throughput.

27.4 USING THE AP EVALUATION OR BHM EVALUATION TOOL
(SM, BHS)
The AP Evaluation tab in the Tools web page of the SM provides information about the
AP that the SM sees. Similarly, the BHM Evaluation tab of the BHS provides information
about the BHM. An example of the AP Evaluation tab is shown in Figure 178.

NOTE:
The data for this page can be suppressed by the SM Display of AP Evaluation
Data selection in the Security tab of the Configuration page in the AP.

Issue 1, May 2010 441


Figure 178: AP Evaluation tab of SM, example

The AP Evaluation tab provides the following fields that can be useful to manage and
troubleshoot a system:

Index
This field displays the index value that the system assigns (for only this page) to the AP
where this SM is registered (or to the BHM to which this BHS is registered).

Frequency
This field displays the frequency that the AP or BHM transmits.

ESN
This field displays the MAC address (electronic serial number) of the AP or BHM.
For operator convenience during SM or BHS aiming, this tab retains each detected ESN
for up to 15 minutes. If the broadcast frequency of a detected AP or BHM changes during
a 15-minute interval in the aiming operation, then a multiple instance of the same ESN is
possible in the list. Eventually, the earlier instance expires and disappears, and the later
instance remains to the end of its interval, but you can ignore the early instance(s)
whenever two or more are present.

442 Issue 1, May 2010


Region
Where the DFS feature is enabled, the following information follows the ESN:

◦ Region Code name
◦ Region Code numeric value
◦ corresponding Country Code numeric value

These are shown in the following line:

Jitter, RSSI, and Power Level
The AP Evaluation tab shows the received Power Level in dBm and Jitter. Proper
should favor lower jitter over higher dBm. For example, if coarse alignment gives an SM


OFDM modules do not have this parameter. For historical relevance, the AP Evaluation
tab also shows the RSSI, the unitless measure of power. Use Power Level and ignore
RSSI. RSSI implies more accuracy and precision than is inherent in its measurement.

NOTE:

Beacon Count
A count of the beacons seen in a given time period.

FEC
This field contains the SNMP value from the AP that indicates whether the Forward Error
Correction feature is enabled. PMP 400 Series OFDM APs do not have this field.

Type
Multipoint indicates an AP, not a BHM.

Age
This is a counter for the number of minutes that the AP has been inactive. At 15 minutes
of inactivity for the AP, this field is removed from the AP Eval tab in the SM.

Issue 1, May 2010 443


Lockout
This field displays how many times the SM or BHS has been temporarily locked out of
making registration attempts.

RegFail
This field displays how many registration attempts by this SM or BHS failed.

Range
This field displays the distance in feet for this link. To derive the distance in meters,
multiply the value of this parameter by 0.3048.

TxBER
A 1 in this field indicates the AP or BHM is sending Radio BER.

EBcast
A 1 in this field indicates the AP or BHM is encrypting broadcast packets. A 0 indicates it
is not.

Session Count
This field displays how many sessions the SM (or BHS) has had with the AP (or BHM).
Typically, this is the sum of Reg Count and Re-Reg Count. However, the result of internal
calculation may display here as a value that slightly differs from the sum.

In the case of a multipoint link, if the number of sessions is significantly greater than the
number for other SMs, then this may indicate a link problem or an interference problem.

NoLUIDs
This field indicates how many times the AP has needed to reject a registration request
from an SM because its capacity to make LUID assignments is full. This then locks the
SM out of making any valid attempt for the next 15 minutes. It is extremely unlikely that a
non-zero number would be displayed here.

OutOfRange
This field indicates how many times the AP has rejected a registration request from an
SM because the SM is a further distance away than the range that is currently configured
in the AP. This then locks the SM out of making any valid attempt for the next 15 minutes.

AuthFail
This field displays how many times authentication attempts from this SM have failed in
the AP.

EncryptFail
This field displays how many times an encryption mismatch has occurred between
the SM and the AP.

Rescan Req
This field displays how many times a re-range request has occurred for the BHM that is
being evaluated in the AP Eval page of a BHS.

444 Issue 1, May 2010


FrameNumber
This field displays the number from the tag applied by the FPGA to the last previous
beacon frame. After the SM registers and is put into session with the AP, the value of this
field is no longer kept up to date.

Sector ID
This field displays the value of the Sector ID field that is provisioned for the AP or BHM.

Color Code
This field displays the value of the Color Code field that is provisioned for the AP or
BHM.

BeaconVersion
This field indicates whether the beacon is OFDM (value of 0) or FSK (value of 1).

Sector User Count
This field displays how many SMs are registered on the AP.

Frequency
This field displays the frequency of the received signal, expressed in MHz.

NumULHalfSlots
This is the number of uplink half slots in the frame for this AP or BHM. To find the number
of slots, divide by 2.

NumDLHalfSlots
This is the number of downlink half slots in the frame for this AP or BHM. To find the
number of slots, divide by 2.

NumULContSlots
This field displays how many control slots are being used in the uplink portion of the
frame.

The AP Evaluation tab also provides the following buttons.

WhiteSched
This field numerically indicates whether the Schedule Whitening feature is enabled.
See Schedule Whitening on Page 236. OFDM modules do not have this field.

PtoP VLAN
This field indicates whether VLAN is supported in the backhaul module.

Rescan APs or BHM
You can click this button to force the SM or BHS to rescan the frequencies that are
selected in the Radio tab of the Configuration page. (See Custom Radio Frequency Scan
Selection List on Page 271.) This module will then register to the AP or BHM that
provides the best results for power level, jitter, and—in an SM—the number of registered
SMs.

Update Display
You can click this button to gather updated data without causing the SM or BHS to
rescan and re-register.

Issue 1, May 2010 445


27.5 USING THE FRAME CALCULATOR TOOL (ALL) FOR
COLLOCATION
The first step to avoid interference is to set all APs to receive timing from CMMs. This
ensuring they are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame.

The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all APs of the same
frequency band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all
stop transmitting each frame before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one
AP attempting to receive the signal from a distant SM while a nearby AP transmits, which
could overpower that signal.

The following parameters on the AP determine the transmit/receive ratio:

◦ Max Range
◦ Downlink Data percentage
◦ (reserved) Control Slots

If all the APs of a given frequency band are FSK APs or all are OFDM APs, the simplest
way to avoid interference is to set these three parameters with identical values on all APs
in proximity. If OFDM and FSK APs of the same frequency band are in proximity, or if you
want APs set to different parameters (differing in their Max Range values, for example),
then you should use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings.

The frame calculator is available on the Frame Calculator tab of the Tools web page.
To use the Frame Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter
values for each proximal AP, and then record the resulting Uplink Rcv SQ Start value.
Next vary the Downlink Data percentage in each calculation and iterate until the
calculated Uplink Rcv SQ Start for all collocated APs are within 300 bit times;
if possible, within 150 bit times.

OFDM modules provide an OFDM Frame Calculator and FSK modules provide an FSK
Frame Calculator. To perform frame calculations for collocated OFDM and FSK modules,
you must use an OFDM module for the OFDM calculations and an FSK module for the
FSK calculations.

The calculator does not use values in the module or populate its parameters. It is merely
a convenience application that runs on a module. For this reason, you can use any FSK
module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform FSK frame calculations for setting the
parameters on an FSK AP and any OFDM module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform
OFDM frame calculations for setting the parameters on an OFDM AP.

IMPORTANT!
APs that have slightly mismatched transmit-to-receive ratios and low levels of
data traffic may see little effect on throughput. A system that was not tuned for
collocation may work fine at low traffic levels, but encounter problems at higher
traffic levels. The conservative practice is to tune for collocation before traffic
ultimately increases. This prevents problems that occur as sectors are built.

An example of the Frame Calculator tab is shown in Figure 179.

446 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 179: Frame Calculator tab, example

In the Frame Calculator tab, you may set the following parameters.

Software Version Transmitter
From the drop-down menu, select the software release that runs on the AP(s).

Software Version Receiver
From the drop-down menu, select the software release that runs on the SM(s).

Transmit Sync Input
If the APs in the cluster

◦ receive sync from a CMMmicro or CMM4, select Sync to Received Signal
(Power Port).
◦ receive sync from a CMM2, select Sync to Received Signal (Timing Port).
◦ are self timed, select Generate Sync Signal.

Link Mode
For AP to SM frame calculations, select Multipoint Link.

AES, 2X Rate, Encryption Enabled
This value is not settable by the operator.

Issue 1, May 2010 447


Max Range
Set to the same value as the Max Range parameter is set in the AP(s).

Air Delay
Leave this parameter set to the default value of 0 bits.

Scheduling
Select Hardware.

Mobility
Leave the default value of Off selected.

Wireless/Wired
Leave the default value of Wireless Link selected.

Platform Type Transmitter
Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the AP.

Platform Type Receiver
Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series (board type) of the SM.

Frequency Band
Use the drop-down list to select the radio frequency band of the AP and SM.

External Bus Frequency Transmitter
Leave this parameter set to the default value of 40.

External Bus Frequency Receiver
Leave this parameter set to the default value of 40.

Downlink Data
Initially set this parameter to the same value that the AP has for its Downlink Data
parameter (percentage). Then, as you use the Frame Calculator tool in Procedure 37,
you will vary the value in this parameter to find the proper value to write into the
Downlink Data parameter of all APs in the cluster.

PMP 100 Series APs offer a range of 1% to 99%, and default to 75%. PMP 400 Series
APs offer a range of 1% to 90%, and default to 75%. The value that you set in this
parameter has the following interaction with the value of the Max Range parameter
(above):

◦ The default Max Range value is 5 miles and, at that distance, the maximum
Downlink Data value (90% in OFDM) is functional.
◦ Where Max Range is set to 6 to 10 miles, Downlink Data should be set to not
greater than 85%. This lesser maximum avoids registration problems for nearby
SMs. The user interface of the OFDM AP automatically imposes the lesser
maximum.

448 Issue 1, May 2010


Control Half Slots
Set this parameter to the value of the Control Slot parameter is set in the APs. Since
control slots are half the size of data slots, they are sometimes called half slots.
Control Slots in the Configuration > Radio tab or Home > General Status tab of the AP
are the same as Control Half Slots in the Tools > Frame Calculator tab.

The Calculated Frame Results display several items of interest.

Data Slots (Down/UpLow/UpHigh)
A result within the typical range is 57/19/0, meaning 59 half slots down and 19 half slots
up (the 0 is an artifact from software scheduling). The same configuration would be
shown on the Home > General Status tab Frame Configuration Information field as
28+ data slots down and 9+ data slots up. (The + indicates there are additional bit times
that can be used for control (half) slots, but not enough bit times for a full data slot.)

Air Delay
This is the roundtrip air delay in bit times for the Max Range value set in the calculator.

Uplink Rcv SQ Start
In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP is ready to receive transmissions
from the SM.

To use the Frame Calculator, perform the following steps.

Procedure 37: Using the Frame Calculator
1. Use a module of the technology type (FSK or OFDM) of the first AP.
2. Populate the FSK or OFDM Frame Calculator parameters with appropriate
values as described above.
3. Click the Apply Settings button.
4. Click the Calculate button.
5. Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section.
NOTE: An example of the Calculated Frame Results section is displayed in
Figure 180.

Issue 1, May 2010 449


Figure 180: Calculated Frame Results section of Frame Calculator tab, example

6. Record the value of the Uplink Rcv SQ Start field.
7. Enter a parameter set from another AP or use a different module (OFDM or FSK)
to calculate results for that technology type.
8. Click the Apply Settings button.
9. Click the Calculate button.
10. Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section. If “Invalid
Configuration” is displayed, check and change values and settings, with special
attention to the Platform Type parameters (P7, P8, and so on).
11. Record the value of the Uplink Rcv SQ Start field.
12. If the recorded values of the Uplink Rcv SQ Start field are within 150 time bits of
each other, skip the next step.
13. Repeat this procedure, changing the value of the Downlink Data parameter until
the values that this tool calculates for the Uplink Rcv SQ Start field are within
300 time bits of each other; if possible, within 150 time bits.
14. Access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of each AP in the cluster
and change its Downlink Data parameter (percentage) to the last value that you
used in the Frame Calculator.
See Figure 75: Radio tab of AP (900 MHz), example on Page 233.
end of procedure

450 Issue 1, May 2010


27.6 VIEWING THE DFS STATUS TAB (ALL)
Examples of the DFS Status tab in the Tools page are shown in Figure 181 and
Figure 182.

Figure 181: DFS Status tab of AP, example

Figure 182: DFS Status tab of SM, example

This tab provides an instant view of the current frequency in use and thus whether the
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) feature has shut down operation on the primary
frequency to avoid competition with radar that is protected by regulation.

DFS Event History
This log is useful for seeing when DFS events happened, including the response of any
Alternate RF Carriers that were assigned.

In the example shown in Figure 181, the AP

1. performed a 60-second Channel Availability Check (CAC).
2. started transmitting at 1:03 (mm:ss) on 5580 MHz, the Primary RF Carrier
Frequency.
3. experienced a DFS hit at 6:58:58 (hh:mm:ss).
4. switched to the Alternate RF Carrier Frequency 1 (5590 MHz).
5. performed a 60-second Channel Availability Check (CAC).
6. started transmitting on 5590 MHz.

Issue 1, May 2010 451


27.7 USING THE SM CONFIGURATION TOOL (AP, BHM)
The SM Configuration tab in the Tools page of the AP or BHM displays

◦ the current values whose control may be subject to the setting in the
Configuration Source parameter.
◦ an indicator of the source for each value.

An example of the SM Configuration tab is displayed in Figure 183.

Figure 183: SM Configuration tab of AP, example

Indicators for configuration source are explained under Session Status Tab of the AP on
Page 196.

452 Issue 1, May 2010


27.8 REVIEWING THE LINK STATUS TOOL RESULTS (AP)
An example of the Link Status tool results is shown in Figure 184.

Figure 184: Link Status tab of AP, example

The Link Status tool results include values for the following fields.

Power Level
Jitter
These are reported near-instantaneously, if web refresh rate is set to 1 or 2 seconds.
These values are the same as those that are displayed on the Session Status tab of the
Home page in the AP and the General Status tab of the Home page in the SM.

Last Link Test Efficiency Percentage
This field displays the results of the last link test initiated from the SM. Link tests initiated
from the AP are not shown. A link test exercises both uplink and downlink, and
efficiencies for both are reported.

BER Results
This field displays the over-the-air Bit Error Rates for each downlink. (The ARQ
[Automatic Resend reQuest] ensures that the transport BER [the BER seen end-to-end
through a network] is essentially zero.) The level of acceptable over-the-air BER varies,
based on operating requirements, but a reasonable value for a good link is a BER of 1e-4
(1 x 10-4) or better, approximately a packet resend rate of 5%.

BER is generated using unused bits in the downlink. During periods of peak load, BER
data is not updated as often, because the system puts priority on transport rather than on
BER calculation.

Issue 1, May 2010 453


Registration Requests
Re-registration Requests
These request counts are shown for each SM since the time of the last AP reboot. A
Registration Requests count is the number of times the SM registered after the AP
determined that the link had been down. A Re-registration Requests count is the
number of times the AP received an SM registration request while the AP considered the
link to be still up (and therefore did not expect registration requests).

27.9 USING THE REMOTE SPECTRUM ANALYZER TOOL (AP)
The Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool in the AP provides additional flexibility in the use of
the spectrum analyzer in the SM. You can set a duration of 10 to 1000 seconds and
select an SM from the drop-down list, then click the Start Remote Spectrum Analysis
button to launch the analysis from that SM. An example of this tool in the AP is shown
in Figure 185.

454 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 185: Remote Spectrum Analyzer tab of AP, example

Issue 1, May 2010 455


This feature proceeds in the following sequence:

1. The AP de-registers the target SM.
2. The SM scans (for the duration set in the AP tool) to collect data for the
bar graph.
3. The SM re-registers to the AP.
4. The AP displays the bar graph.

The bar graph is an HTML file, but can be changed to an XML file, which is then easy to
analyze through the use of scripts that you may write for parsing the data. To transform
the file to XML, click the SpectrumAnalysis.xml link. Although the resulting display
appears mostly unchanged, the bar graph is now coded in XML. You can now right-click
on the bar graph for a Save Target As option to save the Spectrum Analysis.xml
file.

27.10 USING THE BER RESULTS TOOL (SM, BHS)
Radio BER data represents bit errors at the RF link level. Due to CRC checks on
fragments and packets and ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest), the BER of customer data
is essentially zero. Radio BER gives one indication of link quality. Other important
indications to consider include the received power level, jitter, and link tests. Radio BER
is supported on FSK and OFDM radios.

BER is only instrumented on the downlink and is displayed on the BER Results tab of the
Tools page in any SM. Each time the tab is clicked, the current results are read, and
counters are reset to zero. An example of the BER Results tab is displayed in Figure 186.

Figure 186: BER Results tab of FSK SM, example

456 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 187: BER Results tab of OFDM SM, example

The BER Results tab can be helpful in troubleshooting poor link performance. The value
in the Measured Total Bit Error Rate field represents the bit error rate (BER) in the RF
link since the last time the BER Results tab was clicked. If the AP is enabled for 2X
operation, then this tab displays both Primary (1X) and Secondary (2X) Bit Error Rate
fields. If the link sometimes operates in 2X, then the Measured Secondary Bit Error
Rate field is populated by a measurement.

The link is acceptable if the value of this field is less than 10−4. If the BER is greater than
10−4, re-evaluate the installation of both modules in the link.

The BER test signal is broadcast by the AP (and compared to the expected test signal by
the SM) only when capacity in the sector allows it. This signal is the lowest priority for AP
transmissions.

Issue 1, May 2010 457


28 MAINTAINING YOUR SOFTWARE
Motorola provides release compatibility information and caveats about each release. For
the latest information and caveats about each software release, see the release notes
available for download from http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/software/.

28.1 HISTORY OF SYSTEM SOFTWARE UPGRADES

28.1.1 Release 8 Features
Release 8 introduced the following features:

◦ Scheduling Limited to Hardware Scheduler
◦ Tiered Permissions and User Accounts
◦ GUI Customizable via CSS
◦ Links to SM GUI via Session Status and Remote Subscribers Tabs of AP
◦ Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) v1.2.3 in All 5.4- and 5.7-GHz Modules
◦ Bit Error Rate (BER) Display with Hardware Scheduler
◦ AP SNMP Proxy to SMs
◦ Translation Bridging (MAC Address Mapping)
◦ SM Isolation
◦ Management Access Filtering for SM
◦ Source IP Management Access for AP and SM
◦ Optional DHCP Configuration of Management Interface
◦ High-priority Channel on P7 and P8 SMs on Hardware Scheduling
◦ Power Save Mode on P10 Radios
◦ Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) ETSI v1.3.1 Update (5.4- and 5.7-GHz in
Europe, 5.4-GHz in Brazil, and other ETSI-regulated regions)
◦ Automatic Configuration for DFS through Settable Region Code
◦ Two Settable Alternate Frequencies for Radar Competition Avoidance
◦ Whitening for Self-interference Avoidance
◦ One-fourth Increase in Maximum Packet Processing Rate
◦ New MIR Settings to Limit Broadcast Packets from SMs
◦ VLAN ID Added to PTP Modules for Management Traffic
◦ Overload Indicators for Ethernet and RF Interfaces
◦ Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Support
◦ Ten Accessing Subnets for Management via SNMP
◦ Weather Notch-out for 5.4-GHz Radios in Europe
◦ 5.9-GHz Radios Supporting Center-channel Frequencies of 5960 to 6050
◦ DFS Feature Removed from 5.4-GHz SM/BHS When Set to Brazil

Issue 1, May 2010 459


28.1.2 Release 8 Fixes
Release 8 included the following fixes:

◦ Management Web (http) Access Lockup Fix
◦ Enforcement of Ethernet Link Speed Setting
◦ MIBs Support Only Applicable Objects
◦ Configured CIR Applied in 2X Operation

28.1.3 Release 9 Features
Release 9 introduces the following features:

◦ Support for PMP 400 Series APs and SMs in the 4.9- and 5.4-GHz Frequency
Band Range
◦ Support for 2- and 4-Mbps PTP 100 Series Wireless Ethernet Bridges in
the 5.7-GHz Frequency Band Range
◦ Support for PTP 200 Series Wireless Ethernet Bridges in the 4.9- and 5.4-GHz
◦ Support for P11 Firmware
◦ Support for Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) ETSI v1.4.1
◦ Per-SM Query Instead of Link Status Table

28.1.4 Release 9 Fixes
Release 9 includes the following fixes:

◦ Ethernet Speed Selection No Longer Trouble-prone
◦ Capability to Reset the BER to Zero
◦ Capability to Obtain a NAT Public IP Address via DHCP when Two DHCP
Servers Exist in the Subnet
◦ Telnet Session Continues Through Upgrade from Release 8.2.7 to Release 9
◦ All SM Upgrades from Release 8.2.7 to Release 9 Succeed
◦ Erroneous Frequency Indication of Factory Not Displayed Following Upgrade
from Release 8.2.7 to Release 9
◦ Scan Selection List Includes All Available Frequencies Following Upgrade from
Release 8.2.7 to Release 9
◦ Accurate BER Count
◦ Accurate Count of Layer 2 Neighbors Reported via SNMP
◦ Null Community String Disallowed
◦ PC Connected to NAT-enabled SM Limited to DHCP Server Pool for IP Address
◦ Transmit Power Setting Displayed Correctly in P7 and P8 Firmware Platform
◦ SNMP OID Added for RXOverRun Count
◦ SM Management VLAN ID Pass-through Filtering in Both Uplink and Downlink
◦ Connecting Mode Replaces Persistent LCP Negotiating Mode for PPPoE
Session Setup Problems in SM
◦ TFTP Server Option Functional for Upgrades
◦ Config Source and VLAN Allow Frame Types Configurable in PMP 100 Series
APs and SMs

460 Issue 1, May 2010


◦ Correct [Received] Power Level Display in P9 Firmware Platform for CAP 09130
and CSM 09130
◦ Default Read/Write and Read Only Community String Values in CAP 54400,
CSM 54400, and PTP 54200 Radios Consistent with Defaults in Other
Frequency Band Ranges

28.2 HISTORY OF CMMmicro SOFTWARE UPGRADES
Canopy currently supports CMMmicro Releases up through Release 3.0.

28.3 TYPICAL CONTENTS OF RELEASE NOTES
Motorola supports each release with software release notes, which include

◦ description of features that are introduced in the new release.
◦ issues that the new release resolves.
◦ known issues and special notes for the new release.
◦ installation procedures for the new release.

28.4 TYPICAL UPGRADE PROCESS
In a typical upgrade process, proceed as follows:

1. Visit http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/.
2. Click the Software Updates link.
3. Read the compatibility information and any caveats that Motorola associates with
the release.
4. Read the software release notes from the web site.
5. On the basis of these, decide whether the release is appropriate for your
network.
6. Download the software release and associated files.
7. Use CNUT to manage the upgrade across your network.

NOTE:
After the initial 12-month standard warranty, an annual Software Maintenance
Contract must be obtained to continue receiving software updates and
technical support. The contract includes minor software enhancements as they
become available and 24/7 telephone support. Contracts are available through
Motorola’s authorized reseller partners or directly from the Technical Support
Center with a credit card.
Major software feature enhancements may require the purchase of a license
key and/or new hardware.

Issue 1, May 2010 461


28.4.1 Downloading Software and Release Notes
All supported software releases, the associated software release notes document, and
updated MIB files are available for download at any time from
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/software. This web site also
typically provides a summary of the backward compatibility and any advantages or
disadvantages of implementing the release.

When you click on the release that you wish to download, you are prompted for
information that identifies yourself and your organization (such as name, address, and
e-mail address). When you complete and submit the form that prompts for this
information, the download is made available to you.

462 Issue 1, May 2010


29 REBRANDING MODULE INTERFACE SCREENS

Distinctive fonts indicate
literal user input.
variable user input.
literal system responses.
variable system responses.

The interface screens on each module display the Canopy or Canopy Advantage logo.
These logos can be replaced with other logos using Procedure 38.

The logo is a hyperlink, and clicking on it takes the user to the Canopy web site.
A different site (perhaps the operator’s support site) can be made the destination using
Procedure 39.

To return a module to regular logos and hyperlinks, use Procedure 40.

The logo at the top of each page is a key indicator to the user whether a module is
Canopy or Canopy Advantage. If you choose to replace the logos, use two noticeably
different logos so that users can continue to easily distinguish between a Canopy module
and a Canopy Advantage module.

To replace logos and hyperlinks efficiently throughout your network, read the following
two procedures, write a script, and execute your script through the Canopy Network
Updater Tool (CNUT).9 To replace them individually, use one of the following two
procedures.

Procedure 38: Replacing the Canopy logo on the GUI with another logo
1. If the current logo is the Canopy logo, name your custom logo file on your
computer canopy.jpg and put it in your home directory.
If the current logo is the Canopy Advantage logo, name your custom logo file on
your computer advantaged.jpg and put it in your home directory.

2. Use an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) session to transfer this file to the module, as
in the example session shown in Figure 188.

9
See Using the Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) on Page 413.

Issue 1, May 2010 463


> ftp ModuleIPAddress
Connected to ModuleIPAddress
220 FTP server ready
Name (ModuleIPAddress:none): root
331 Guest login ok
Password: <password-if-configured>
230 Guest login ok, access restrictions apply.

ftp> binary
200 Type set to I
ftp> put canopy.jpg
OR
put advantaged.jpg
OR
put top.html
ftp> quit
221 Goodbye

Figure 188: Example ftp session to transfer custom logo file

3. Use a telnet session and the addwebfile command to add the new file to the
file system, as in the example session shown in Figure 189.

NOTE:
Supported telnet commands execute the following results:
◦ addwebfile adds a custom logo file to the file system.
◦ clearwebfile clears the logo file from the file system.
◦ lsweb lists the custom logo file and display the storage
space available on the file system.

464 Issue 1, May 2010


>telnet ModuleIPAddress
/---------
C A N O P Y

Motorola Broadband Wireless Technology Center
(Copyright 2001, 2002 Motorola Inc.)

Login: root

Telnet +> addwebfile canopy.jpg
OR
addwebfile advantaged.jpg
OR
addwebfile top.html

Telnet +> lsweb

Flash Web files
/canopy.jpg 7867
free directory entries: 31
free file space: 55331

Telnet +> exit

Figure 189: Example telnet session to activate custom logo file

end of procedure

Procedure 39: Changing the URL of the logo hyperlink
1. In the editor of your choice, create a file named top.html, consisting of one
line:
<a href="myurl">
where myurl is the desired URL, for example, http://www.canopywireless.com.
2. Save and close the file as top.html.
3. Use an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) session to transfer this file to the module, as
in the example session shown in Figure 188 on Page 464.
4. Use a telnet session and the addwebfile command to add the new file (top.html)
to the file system, as in the example session shown in Figure 189.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 465


If you ever want to restore the original logo and hyperlink in a module, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 40: Returning a module to its original logo and hyperlink
1. Use a telnet session and the clearwebfile command to clear all custom files from
the file system of the module, as in the example session shown in Figure 190
below.

>telnet ModuleIPAddress
/---------
C A N O P Y

Motorola Broadband Wireless Technology
Center
(Copyright 2001, 2002 Motorola Inc.)

Login: root

Telnet +> lsweb
Flash Web files
canopy.jpg 7867
free file space: 56468

Telnet +> clearwebfile
Telnet +> lsweb

Flash Web files
free file space 64336 bytes

Telnet +> exit

Figure 190: Example telnet session to clear custom files

end of procedure

466 Issue 1, May 2010


30 TOGGLING REMOTE ACCESS CAPABILITY
Based on your priorities for additional security and ease of network administration, you
can deny or permit remote access individually to any AP, SM, or BH.

30.1 DENYING ALL REMOTE ACCESS
Wherever the No Remote Access feature is enabled by the following procedure, physical
access to the module is required for

◦ any change in the configuration of the module.
◦ any software upgrade in the module.

Where additional security is more important that ease of network administration, you can
disable all remote access to a module as follows.

Procedure 41: Denying all remote access
2. Power up or power cycle the module.
3. Access the web page http://169.254.1.1/lockconfig.html.
4. Click the check box.
5. Save the changes.
6. Reboot the module.
RESULT: No access to this module is possible through HTTP, SNMP, FTP,
telnet, or over an RF link.
end of procedure

30.2 REINSTATING REMOTE ACCESS CAPABILITY
Where ease of network administration is more important than the additional security that
the No Remote Access feature provides, this feature can be disabled as follows:

Procedure 42: Reinstating remote access capability
2. Power up or power cycle the module.
3. Access the web page http://169.254.1.1/lockconfig.html.
4. Click the check box to uncheck the field.
5. Save the changes.
6. Reboot the module.
RESULT: Access to this module is possible through HTTP, SNMP, FTP, telnet, or
over an RF link.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 467


31 SETTING UP A PROTOCOL ANALYZER ON YOUR
NETWORK
Selection of protocol analyzer software and location for a protocol analyzer depend on
both the network topology and the type of traffic to capture. However, the examples in
this section are based on free-of-charge Ethereal software, which is available at
http://ethereal.com/.

The equipment required to set up a protocol analyzer includes:

◦ 1 hub
◦ 1 laptop computer with protocol analyzer software installed
◦ 2 straight-through Ethernet cables
◦ 1 power converter

31.1 ANALYZING TRAFFIC AT AN SM
The IP address of the protocol analyzer laptop computer must match the IP addressing
scheme of the SM. If the SM has DHCP enabled, then configure the laptop computer to
automatically obtain an address. If DHCP is not enabled, then ensure that the laptop
computer is configured with a static IP address in the same subnet as the SM.

The configuration for analyzing traffic at an SM is shown in Figure 191.

SM Power Subscriber
To Radio Cable Supply To Computer Cable PC

HUB

Sniffer
Laptop

Figure 191: Protocol analysis at SM

Issue 1, May 2010 469


31.2 ANALYZING TRAFFIC AT AN AP OR BH WITH NO CMM
scheme of the AP/BH. If the router is configured to be a DHCP server, then configure the
laptop computer to automatically obtain an address. If DHCP is not enabled, then ensure
that the laptop computer is configured with a static IP address in the same subnet as the
AP/BH.

The configuration for analyzing traffic at an AP or BH that is not connected to a CMM is
shown in Figure 192.

AP or BH Power Router
To Radio Cable Supply To Computer Cable

HUB

Sniffer
Laptop

Figure 192: Protocol analysis at AP or BH not connected to a CMM

31.3 ANALYZING TRAFFIC AT AN AP OR BH WITH A CMM
scheme of the AP/BH. If the router is configured to be a DHCP server, then configure the
laptop computer to automatically obtain an address. If DHCP is not enabled, ensure that
the laptop computer is configured with a static IP address in the same subnet as the
AP/BH.

Connect the hub to the J2 Ethernet to Switch of the port that is associated with the
AP/BH. This example is of capturing traffic from AP/BH 111, which is connected to
Port 1. The configuration for analyzing traffic at an AP or BH that is connected to a CMM
is shown in Figure 193.

470 Issue 1, May 2010


CMM

8 J1 to Radio J2 Ethernet to 8
Switch
7 7 Ethernet Switch
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
AP/BH 1 1
111

Sniffer HUB Router
Laptop

Figure 193: Protocol analysis at AP or BH connected to a CMM

31.4 EXAMPLE OF A PROTOCOL ANALYZER SETUP FOR AN SM
The following is an example of a network protocol analyzer setup using Ethereal®
software to capture traffic at the SM level. The Ethereal network protocol analyzer has
changed its name to Wireshark™, but functionality and use remains much the same. This
example is based on the following assumptions:

◦ All required physical cabling has been completed.
◦ The hub, protocol analyzer laptop computer, and subscriber PC are successfully
connected.
◦ The SM is connected
− as shown in Figure 192 on Page 470.
− to the subscriber PC and the AP.
◦ Ethereal software is operational on the laptop computer.

Although these procedures involve the SM, the only difference in the procedure for
analyzing traffic on an AP or BH is the hub insertion point.

The IP Configuration screen of the example SM is shown in Figure 194.

Issue 1, May 2010 471


Figure 194: IP tab of SM with NAT disabled and local accessibility

Procedure 43: Setting up a protocol analyzer
1. Note the IP configuration of the SM.
2. Browse to Start My Network Places Network and Dialup Connections.
3. For Local Area Connection, select Properties.
RESULT: The Local Area Connections Properties window opens, as shown in
Figure 195.

472 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 195: Local Area Connection Properties window

4. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
5. Click the Properties button.
RESULT: The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens, as shown in
Figure 196.

Issue 1, May 2010 473


Figure 196: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window

6. Unless you have a static IP address configured on the SM, select
Obtain an IP address automatically for the protocol analyzer laptop computer,
as shown in Figure 196.
7. If you have configured a static IP address on the SM, then
a. select Use the following IP address.
b. enter an IP address that is in the same subnet as the SM.
8. Click OK.
9. Open your web browser.
10. Enter the IP address of the SM.
RESULT: The General Status tab of the SM opens, as shown in Figure 65 on
Page 202.
11. If the General Status tab did not open, reconfigure how the laptop computer
obtains an IP address.
12. Verify that you have connectivity from the laptop computer to the SM with the hub
inserted.
13. Launch the protocol analyzer software on the laptop computer.
14. In the Capture menu, select Start.
RESULT: The Ethereal Capture Options window opens, as shown in Figure 197.

474 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 197: Ethereal Capture Options window

15. Ensure that the Interface field reflects the network interface card (NIC) that is
used on the protocol analyzer laptop computer.
NOTE: Although you can select filters based on specific types of traffic, all values
are defaults in this example.
16. If you wish to select filters, select them now.
17. Click OK.
RESULT: The Ethereal Capture window opens, as shown in Figure 198.

Issue 1, May 2010 475


Figure 198: Ethereal Capture window

NOTE: This window graphically displays the types of packets (by percentage)
that are being captured.

18. If all packet types are displayed with 0%, either
◦ launch your Web browser on the subscriber PC for the IP address of the SM
◦ ping the SM from the home PC.
19. If still all packet types are displayed with 0% (meaning that no traffic is being
captured), reconfigure IP addressing until you can successfully see traffic
captured on the laptop computer.
20. Whenever the desired number of packets have been captured, click Stop.
RESULT: When you stop the packet capture, the <capture> - Ethereal window
opens, as shown in Figure 199.
end of procedure

476 Issue 1, May 2010


Figure 199: <capture> - Ethereal window, Packet 1 selected

This window has three panes:

◦ The top pane provides a sequenced summary of the packets captured and
includes SRC/DEST address and type of protocol. What you select in this pane
determines the additional information that is displayed in the lower two panes.
◦ The lower two panes facilitate drill-down into the packet that you selected in the
top pane.

In this example, Packet 1 (a broadcast ARP request) was selected in the top pane. The
lower two panes provide further details about Packet 1.

Another example is shown in Figure 200.

Issue 1, May 2010 477


Figure 200: <capture> - Ethereal window, Packet 14 selected

In this second example, Packet 14 (protocol type HTTP) is selected in the top pane.
The two lower panes provide further details about Packet 14.

478 Issue 1, May 2010


32 TROUBLESHOOTING

32.1 GENERAL PLANNING FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Effective troubleshooting depends in part on measures that you take before you
experience trouble in your network. Motorola recommends the following measures for
each site:

1. Identify troubleshooting tools that are available at your site (such as a protocol
analyzer).
2. Identify commands and other sources that can capture baseline data for the site.
These may include
◦ ping
◦ tracert or traceroute
◦ Link Capacity Test results
◦ throughput data
◦ Configuration tab captures
◦ Status tab captures
◦ session logs
3. Start a log for the site.
4. Include the following information in the log:
◦ operating procedures
◦ site-specific configuration records
◦ network topology
◦ software releases, boot versions, and FPGA firmware versions
◦ types of hardware deployed
◦ site-specific troubleshooting processes
◦ escalation procedures
5. Capture baseline data into the log from the sources listed in Step 2.

32.2 GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION PROCESS
Effective troubleshooting also requires an effective fault isolation methodology that
includes

◦ attempting to isolate the problem to the level of a system, subsystem, or link,
such as
− AP to SM
− AP to CMM
− AP to GPS
− CMM to GPS
− BHM to BHS
− BHM to CMM
− power

Issue 1, May 2010 479


◦ researching Event Logs of the involved equipment. (See Interpreting Messages
in the Event Log on Page 418.)
◦ answering the questions listed in the following section.
◦ reversing the last previous corrective attempt before proceeding to the next.
◦ performing only one corrective attempt at a time.

32.3 QUESTIONS TO HELP ISOLATE THE PROBLEM
When a problem occurs, attempt to answer the following questions:

1. What is the history of the problem?
◦ Have we changed something recently?
◦ Have we seen other symptoms before this?
2. How wide-spread is the symptom?
◦ Is the problem on only a single SM? (If so, focus on that SM.)
◦ Is the problem on multiple SMs? If so
− is the problem on one AP in the cluster? (If so, focus on that AP)
− is the problem on multiple, but not all, APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on
those APs)
− is the problem on all APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on the CMM and the
GPS signal.)
3. Based on data in the Event Log (described in Interpreting Messages in the Event
Log on Page 418)
◦ does the problem correlate to External Hard Resets with no WatchDog timers?
(If so, this indicates a loss of power. Correct your power problem.)
◦ is intermittent connectivity indicated? (If so, verify your configuration, power
level, jitter, cables and connections, and the speed duplex of both ends of the
link).
◦ does the problem correlate to loss-of-sync events?
4. Are connections made via shielded cables?
5. Does the GPS antenna have an unobstructed view of the entire horizon?

32.4 SECONDARY STEPS
After preliminary fault isolation through the above steps

1. check the Canopy knowledge base
(http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/knowledge/) to find
whether other network operators have encountered a similar problem.
2. proceed to any appropriate set of diagnostic steps. These are organized as
follows:
◦ Module Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity
◦ NAT/DHCP-configured SM Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity on
Page 482
◦ SM Does Not Register to an AP on Page 484
◦ BHS Does Not Register to the BHM on Page 485
◦ Module Has Lost or Does Not Gain Sync on Page 486

480 Issue 1, May 2010


◦ Module Does Not Establish Ethernet Connectivity on Page 487
◦ Module Does Not Power Up on Page 487
◦ Power Supply Does Not Produce Power on Page 488
◦ CMM Does Not Pass Proper GPS Sync to Connected Modules on
Page 489

32.5 PROCEDURES FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

32.5.1 Module Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity
To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity, perform the following steps.

Procedure 44: Troubleshooting loss of connectivity
1. Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as
routers, switches, and firewalls.
2. Set up the minimal amount of equipment.
3. On each end of the link
a. check the cables and connections.
b. verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is
correct.
c. verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.
d. access the General Status tab in the Home page of the module.
e. verify that the SM is registered.
f. verify that RSSI is 700 or higher.
g. verify that jitter is reported as 9 or lower.
h. access the IP tab in the Configuration page of the module.
i. verify that IP addresses match and are in the same subnet.
4. On the SM end of the link
a. verify that the PC that is connected to the SM is correctly configured to obtain
an IP address through DHCP.
b. execute ipconfig.
c. verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.
a. access the General tab in the Configuration page of each module.
b. verify that the setting for Link Speeds (or negotiation) matches that of the
other module.
c. access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of each module.
d. verify that the Radio Frequency Carrier setting is checked in the Custom
Radio Frequency Scan Selection List.
e. verify that the Color Code setting matches that of the other module.
f. access the browser LAN settings (for example, at
Tools Internet Options Connections LAN Settings in Internet
Explorer).
g. verify that none of the settings are selected.
h. access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools page of the module.

Issue 1, May 2010 481


i. perform a link test. (See Procedure 36: Performing a Link Capacity Test on
Page 440.)
j. verify that the link test results show efficiency greater than 90% in both the
uplink and downlink (except as described under Comparing Efficiency in 1X
Operation to Efficiency in 2X Operation on Page 136).
k. execute ping.
NOTE: A ping size larger than 1494 Bytes to a module times out and fails.
However, a ping of this size or larger to a system that is behind a Canopy
module typically succeeds. It is generally advisable to ping such a system,
since Canopy handles that ping with the same priority as is given all other
transport traffic. The results are unaffected by ping size and by the load on
the Canopy module that brokers this traffic.
l. verify that no packet loss was experienced.
m. verify that response times are not significantly greater than
◦ 2.5 ms from BH to BH
◦ 4 ms from AP to SM
◦ 15 ms from SM to AP
n. replace any cables that you suspect may be causing the problem.
6. After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and
variables that you removed in Step 1.
end of procedure

32.5.2 NAT/DHCP-configured SM Has Lost or Does Not Establish Connectivity
Before troubleshooting this problem, identify the NAT/DHCP configuration from the
following list:

interface) and DHCP Server
interface)
◦ NAT with DHCP Server
◦ NAT without DHCP
To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity for an SM configured for NAT/DHCP, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 45: Troubleshooting loss of connectivity for NAT/DHCP-configured SM
1. Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as
routers, switches, and firewalls.
2. Set up the minimal amount of equipment.
a. check the cables and connections.
b. verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is
correct.
c. verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.

482 Issue 1, May 2010


4. At the SM
a. access the NAT Table tab in the Logs web page.

Figure 201: NAT Table tab of SM, example

b. verify that the correct NAT translations are listed.
RESULT: NAT is eliminated as a possible cause if these translations are
correct.
5. If this SM is configured for NAT with DHCP, then at the SM
a. execute ipconfig.
b. verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.
c. if the PC does not have an assigned IP address, then
◦ enter ipconfig /release “Adapter Name”.
◦ enter ipconfig /renew “Adapter Name”.
◦ reboot the PC.
◦ retreat to Step 5a.
if the PC has an assigned IP address, then

◦ access the NAT DHCP Statistics tab in the Statistics web page of
the SM.

Issue 1, May 2010 483


Figure 202: NAT DHCP Statistics tab of SM, example

◦ verify that DHCP is operating as configured.
6. After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and
variables that you removed in Step 1.
end of procedure

32.5.3 SM Does Not Register to an AP
To troubleshoot an SM failing to register to an AP, perform the following steps.

Procedure 46: Troubleshooting SM failing to register to an AP
1. Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the SM.
2. Note the Color Code of the SM.
3. Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the AP.
4. Verify that the Color Code of the AP matches that of the SM.
5. Note the Radio Frequency Carrier of the AP.
6. Verify that the value of the RF Frequency Carrier of the AP is selected in the
Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter in the SM.
7. In the AP, verify that the Max Range parameter is set to a distance slightly
greater than the distance between the AP and the furthest SM that must register
to this AP.
8. Verify that a clear line of sight exists between the AP and the SM, and that no
obstruction significantly penetrates the Fresnel zone of the attempted link.
If these conditions are not established, then verify that the AP and SM are
900-MHz modules in close proximity to each other.
9. Access the General Status tab in the Home page of each module.

484 Issue 1, May 2010


10. In the Software Version field, verify that both the AP and SM are of the same
encryption scheme (AES or DES).
11. Remove the bottom cover of the SM to expose the LEDs.
12. Power cycle the SM.
RESULT: Approximately 25 seconds after the power cycle, the green LED
labeled LNK should light to indicate that the link has been established. If the
orange LED labeled SYN is lit instead, then the SM is in Alignment mode
because the SM failed to establish the link.
13. In this latter case, and if the SM has encountered no customer-inflicted damage,
then request an RMA for the SM.
end of procedure

32.5.4 BHS Does Not Register to the BHM
To troubleshoot an BHS failing to register to the BHM, perform the following steps.

Procedure 47: Troubleshooting BHS failing to register to a BHM
1. Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the BHS.
2. Note the Color Code of the BHS.
3. Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the BHM.
4. Verify that the Color Code of the BHM matches that of the BHS.
5. Note the Radio Frequency Carrier of the BHM.
6. Verify that the value of the RF Frequency Carrier of the BHM is selected in the
Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter on the Configuration
page of the BHS.
7. Verify that a clear line of sight exists between the BHM and BHS, and that no
obstruction significantly penetrates the Fresnel zone of the attempted link.
8. Access the General Status tab in the Home page of each module.
9. In the Software Version field, verify that both the BHM and BHS are of the same
encryption scheme (AES or DES).
10. Also in the Software Version field, verify that both the BHM and BHS are of the
same modulation rate from the factory (BH20 or BH10).
11. Remove the bottom cover of the BHS to expose the LEDs.
12. Power cycle the BHS.
orange LED labeled SYN is lit instead, then the BHS is in Alignment mode
because the BHS failed to establish the link. In this latter case, and if the BHS
has encountered no customer-inflicted damage, then request an RMA for
the BHS.
end of procedure

Issue 1, May 2010 485


32.5.5 Module Has Lost or Does Not Gain Sync
To troubleshoot a loss of sync, perform the following steps.

Procedure 48: Troubleshooting loss of sync
1. Access the Event Log tab in the Home page of the SM.

Figure 203: Event Log tab of SM, example

2. Check for messages with the following format:
RcvFrmNum =
ExpFrmNum =
(See Table 69: Event Log messages for abnormal events on Page 420.)
3. If these messages are present, check the Event Log tab of another SM that is
registered to the same AP for messages of the same type.
4. If the Event Log of this second SM does not contain these messages, then the
fault is isolated to the first SM.
If the Event Log page of this second SM contains these messages, access the
GPS Status page of the AP.

5. If the Satellites Tracked field in the GPS Status page of the AP indicates fewer
than 4 or the Pulse Status field does not indicate Generating Sync, check the
GPS Status page of another AP in the same AP cluster for these indicators.
6. If these indicators are present in the second AP
a. verify that the GPS antenna still has an unobstructed view of the entire
horizon.
b. visually inspect the cable and connections between the GPS antenna and
the CMM.
c. if this cable is not shielded, replace the cable with shielded cable.

486 Issue 1, May 2010


7. If these indicators are not present in the second AP
a. visually inspect the cable and connections between the CMM and the AP
antenna.
b. if this cable is not shielded, replace the cable with shielded cable.
end of procedure

32.5.6 Module Does Not Establish Ethernet Connectivity
To troubleshoot a loss of Ethernet connectivity, perform the following steps.

Procedure 49: Troubleshooting loss of Ethernet connectivity
1. Verify that the connector crimps on the Ethernet cable are not loose.
2. Verify that the Ethernet cable is not damaged.
3. If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a network interface card (NIC),
verify that the cable is pinned out as a straight-through cable.
4. If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a hub, switch, or router, verify that
the cable is pinned out as a crossover cable.
5. Verify that the Ethernet port to which the cable connects the module is set to
auto-negotiate speed.
6. Power cycle the module.
orange LED labeled SYN is lit instead, then the module is in Alignment mode
because the module failed to establish the link.
7. In this latter case, and if the module has encountered no customer-inflicted
damage, then request an RMA for the module.
end of procedure

32.5.7 Module Does Not Power Up
To troubleshoot the failure of a module to power up, perform the following steps.

Procedure 50: Troubleshooting failure to power up
3. Verify that the cable is wired and pinned out according to the specifications
provided under Wiring Connectors on Page 185.
4. Remove the cover of the module to expose the components on the printed wiring
board.
5. Find the Ethernet transformer, which is labeled with either the name Halo or the
name Pulse.

Issue 1, May 2010 487


6. Verify that the Ethernet transformer does not show damage that would have
been caused by improper cabling. (You can recognize damage as the top of the
transformer being no longer smooth. The transformer in the following picture is
damaged and is ineligible for an RMA.)

7. Connect the power supply to a known good module via a known good Ethernet
cable.
8. Attempt to power up the known good module and
◦ if the known good module fails to power up, request an RMA for the power
supply.
◦ if the known good module powers up, return to the module that does not power
up.
9. Reconnect the power supply to the failing module.
11. Verify that the red LED labeled PWR lights.
12. If this LED does not light, and the module has not been powered up since the last
previous FPGA firmware upgrade was performed on the module, then request an
RMA for the module.
end of procedure

32.5.8 Power Supply Does Not Produce Power
To troubleshoot the failure of a power supply to produce power, perform the following
steps.

Procedure 51: Troubleshooting failure of power supply to produce power
3. Verify that the cable is wired and pinned out according to the specifications
provided under Wiring Connectors on Page 185.
4. Connect the power supply to a known good module via a known good Ethernet
cable.
5. Attempt to power up the known good module.
6. If the known good module fails to power up, request an RMA for the power
supply.
end of procedure

488 Issue 1, May 2010


32.5.9 CMM Does Not Pass Proper GPS Sync to Connected Modules
If the Event Log tabs in all connected modules contain Loss of GPS Sync Pulse
messages, perform the following steps.

Procedure 52: Troubleshooting CMM not passing sync
1. Verify that the GPS antenna has an unobstructed view of the entire horizon.
2. Verify that the GPS coaxial cable meets specifications.
3. Verify that the GPS sync cable meets specifications for wiring and length.
4. If the web pages of connected modules indicate any of the following, then find
and eliminate the source of noise that is being coupled into the GPS sync cable:
◦ In the GPS Status page
− anomalous number of Satellites Tracked (greater than 12, for example)
− incorrect reported Latitude and/or Longitude of the antenna
◦ In the Event Log page
− garbled GPS messages
− large number of Acquired GPS Sync Pulse messages
5. If these efforts fail to resolve the problem, then request an RMA for the CMM.
end of procedure

32.5.10 Module Software Cannot be Upgraded
If your attempt to upgrade the software of a module fails, perform the following steps.

Procedure 53: Troubleshooting an unsuccessful software upgrade
1. Download the latest issue of the target release and the associated release notes.
2. Compare the files used in the failed attempt to the newly downloaded software.
3. Compare the procedure used in the failed attempt to the procedure in the newly
downloaded release notes.
4. If these comparisons reveal a difference, retry the upgrade, this time with the
newer file or newer procedure.
5. If, during attempts to upgrade the FPGA firmware, the following message is
repeatable, then request an RMA for the module:

Error code 6, unrecognized device
end of procedure

32.5.11 Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible
If a module continues to pass traffic, and the telnet and SNMP interfaces to the module
continue to function, but the web interface to the module does not display, perform the
following steps.

Procedure 54: Restoring the web interface to a module
1. Enter telnet DottedIPAddress.
RESULT: A telnet session to the module is invoked.
2. At the Login prompt, enter root.

Issue 1, May 2010 489


3. At the Password prompt, enter PasswordIfConfigured.
4. At the Telnet +> prompt, enter reset.
RESULT: The web interface is accessible again, and this telnet connection is
closed.
end of procedure

490 Issue 1, May 2010


33 OBTAINING TECHNICAL SUPPORT

NOTE:
Do not clear the Event Log after you encounter issues. The information in it may
be useful to support the investigation of the problem.

Here is the escalation path for resolution of a problem:

1. Check documentation:

◦ This document.
◦ Recent Software Release Notes, available at
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/software/
2. Consider checking the Community Forum at
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/community/

3. Consider checking the Knowledge Base at
http://motorola.wirelessbroadbandsupport.com/support/knowledge/

4. Escalate the problem to your Motorola supplier or reseller.

5. Escalate the problem to Technical Support or other designated Tier 3 technical
support:

Country or Region Phone Email

USA
NA

+1 866-961-9288 EMS-EICC-RM@motorola.com
Canada

Denmark 043682114

France 0157323434

Germany 06950070204

Italy 0291483230

Lithuania 880 030 828

Netherlands 0202061404

Norway 24159815
EMEA

EMS-EICC-RM@motorola.com
Portugal 0217616160

Spain 0912754787

Russia 810 800 228 41044

Saudi Arabia 800 844 5345

South Africa 0800981900

United Kingdom 0203 0277499

All other EMEA +420 533 336 946

Issue 1, May 2010 491


Country or Region Phone Email

Argentina 0800-666-2789

Brazil 0800-891-4360

Columbia 01-800-912-0557
LACA

Pmp ptp solutions_userguideissue1

More Related Content

What's hot (19)

Viewers also liked (8)

Similar to Pmp ptp solutions_userguideissue1 (20)

More from Advantec Distribution (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Pmp ptp solutions_userguideissue1